THE
LITEEATUEE
OF
AMERICAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES.
BY
Ji
HEllMANN E. LUDEWIG
WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
BY PROFESSOR WM. W. TURNER.
EDITED BY NICOLAS TRUBNER
LONDON:
TRUBNER AND CO., 60, PATERNOSTEH ROW
MDCCCLVIII.
L
597595
5 . 1.9. . 54
FLEET STREET.
PREFACE.
A NEW edition of Vater's " Linguarum totius orbis index,"
after Professor Julg's revision of 1847, requires no apology.
The science of Philology has made great progress within the
last few years. Exotic languages are no longer considered as
mere matters of curiosity, but are looked upon as interesting
parts of the natural history of man, and as such receive their
share of the brilliant light which modern critical studies have
shed upon the natural sciences in general.
Ethnologists now understand how to appreciate the high
importance of language as one of the most interesting links of
the great chain of national affinities ; and the reciprocity exist-
ing between man, the soil he lives upon, and the language he
speaks, will become better understood the more our knowledge
of these interesting topics is extended.
Comparative philology has begun to be established upon solid
scientific foundations ; and the recent endeavours to establish
finally a uniform system of linguistic orthography will, when
generally received, give a new and important impetus to that
study, which must lead to most interesting results. In such a
state of progress, new literary guides are constantly required ;
and one of them, embracing the aboriginal languages of our
great western continent, is hereby offered to those who take an
interest in American linguistics.
VI PREFACE.
From the discovery of our continent, the languages of the
American Indians have always been, as they are still, an object
of high interest to missionary labour; and wherever the atten-
tion of the scientific world has been drawn to them, it was by
the results of the exertions of these men, who, inspired by
religious ardour, went out to teach the heathens, and, in their
zeal for Christianity, soon learned to master the diversity of
tongues.
It was, however, and is still, difficult to obtain access to these
results; the greater part of Indian grammars and vocabularies
existing either in manuscript only, or, when printed, having
been confined to the use of a particular nation, country, or
religious society. Thus it happened that the Jesuit, Lorenzo
Hervas, who zealously collected such grammars and vocabu-
laries for the linguistic part of his " Idea del universo,"
could give notice of fifty-five American languages which were
before unknown to learned philologists, or at least unnoticed
by them.
After Hervas and Gilii, whose discoveries were diligently
revised and republished in Adelung's and Vater's Mithridates,
Dr. Benjamin Smith Barton, of Philadelphia, drew the attention
of the scientific world to the languages of our Indians. The
historical societies of Massachusetts and Rhode Island, and the
American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, published, or
republished, the scarce works of Eliot, Cotton, Roger Williams,
Edwards, and Zeisberger; and the last-named Society com-
mitted to Stephen Duponceau the task of subjecting the Ameri-
can Indian languages to critical inquiries and studies. John
Pickering, Henry R. Schoolcraft, and, above all, the venerable
Albert Gallatin, continued these researches ; and to Gallatin we
are indebted for a better classification and a comparative view
of the languages of the northern half of our continent and of
Mexico.
By the exertions of these gentlemen the science of Indian
philology has been actively promoted ; and many officers of our
PREFACE. Vll
army and navy have paid attention to the languages of the
aborigines visited by them in their official explorations.
In this way the materials for a more exact knowledge of the
American Indian languages have been greatly increased ; and a
new inventory of our riches is undoubtedly wanted. This want
is the more felt, because nearly all the Indian grammars and
vocabularies are exceedingly scarce ; and the greater part of
these materials is dispersed in books of voyages and travels,
historical and geographical collections, documents, and reports,
which are generally found only in public libraries.
How far it was possible to supply the want in this country,
where bibliographical researches are much more troublesome
and difficult than anywhere else, the following pages will show.
The interest felt in this country in collecting and publishing
notices concerning the languages of the aborigines of our con-
tinent is naturally greater than elsewhere; and the earlier,
therefore, these notices are published, the sooner we may expect
that those who are better acquainted with the subject will
submit them to critical examination, and supply the deficiencies
which they undoubtedly contain.
This made the offer for the publication of the following
bibliographical repertory, by their active and enterprising pub-
lisher, a welcome one. More welcome and, for the friends of
science, really gratifying must be the care bestowed by Mr.
Triibner upon this publication. With true love for the subject,
and with a scientific zeal not to be surpassed, he has revised
the manuscript, and supplied it with whatever his own know-
ledge furnished, aided by the ample means which London, and
Europe in general, offer to bibliographical researches, and made
many valuable additions which could not have been collected on
this side of the Atlantic. He has been a true co-operator in
the work now offered to the public.
Business, in our great commercial emporium of the new
world, leaves to the professional man but very little time for
minute literary researches ; and our larger libraries being open
Vlll PREFACE.
to the public only during business hours, but one of them could
be consulted while correcting the notices collected in the course
of several years.
The friendly aid which the officers of the Astor Library and
of the American Bible Society lent for this purpose is thank-
fully acknowledged.
HERMANN E. LUDEWIG.
NEW YORK, December, 1855.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE v
THE EDITOE'S ADVEETISEMENT . ix
BIOGEAPHICAL MEMOIE . xiii
INTEODUCTOEY BIBLIOGEAPHICAL NOTICES . xv
THE LITEEATUEE OF AMEEICAN ABOEIGINAL
LANGUAGES . . 1
ADDENDA . . 210
INDEX . 247
LIST OF EEEATA 257
THE EDITOR'S ADVERTISEMENT,
DR. LUDEWIG has himself so fully detailed the plan and purport
of this work, that little more remains for me to add beyond the
mere statement of the origin of my connection with the publi-
cation, and the mention of such additions for which I alone am
responsible, and which, during its progress through the press,
have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole.
This is but an act of justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig ;
because, at the time of his death, in December, 1856, no more
than 172 pages were printed off, and these constitute the only
portion of the work which had the benefit of his valuable per-
sonal and final revision.
Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York in
1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he men-
tioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical
memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the
history of spoken language. As a first section of a more ex-
tended work on the Literary History of Language generally,
he had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of the
aboriginal languages of America. The manuscript had been
deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological Society at
New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it
at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in
Europe, under my personal superintendence.
Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out
the trust thus confided to me, intending then to confine myself
simply to producing a correct copy of my friend's manuscript.
But it soon became obvious that the transcript had been hastily
made, and but for the valuable assistance of literary friends,
I
both in this country and in America, the work would probably
have been abandoned. My thanks are more particularly due to
Mr. E. G. Squier, arid to Professor Wm. W. Turner, of Wash-
ington, by whose considerate and valuable co-operation many
difficulties were cleared away, and my editorial labours greatly
lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labour
nor expense in the attempt to render the work as perfect as
possible. With what success must be left to the judgment of
those who can fairly appreciate the labours of a pioneer in any
new field of literary research.
De Souza's great and valuable bibliographical work, of which
there is no copy in the library of the British Museum, has been
carefully and sedulously consulted by Mr. Squier, who culled
from it for my use all that bears upon the subject of American-
Indian languages.
Mr. Turner's additions will be found in the second portion of the
volume ; for so valuable did his corrections and suggestions appear
to me, that I determined to throw them, with some remarks of
my own, into a second alphabetical arrangement, similar to that
of the first. His additions are easily distinguished from those
the responsibility of which rests with myself, by being enclosed
within brackets, with the initials W. W. T. It would here be
out of place to do more than notice the value of the contribu-
tions of so eminent a philologist, who is pre-eminently distin-
guished at Washington as the highest authority in all matters
appertaining to the knowledge of the languages of the aborigines
of America. To this double alphabet a very full Index has been
added, and this was the more necessary, because, as in the in-
fancy of all science there will be difficulties, in this there is no
little confusion of names, which could only be reconciled by
proper references in the Index. In opening a field hitherto
almost untrodden, I may reasonably claim the reader's in-
dulgence for such defects as must ever attend a first attempt of
similar character. In all such cases facts have to be brought
together, and seeming contradictions to be reconciled. Then,
as in all branches of human knowledge, with such data to build
XI
upon, in the hands of master-minds, a key may be discovered to
the maze which, however imperfectly, is here placed before
the reader, and for which the merit of careful and pains-
taking industry may fairly be claimed. The defects alluded
to arise in a great measure from the diversity of spelling
adopted by the different nations of Europe to represent the
same sounds ; for the reader must bear in mind that the
aborigines of America had no written alphabetical language,
and that it was by Europeans that the spoken words of the
various Indian tribes were first represented by distinct cha-
racters. This renders what I may perhaps be pardoned for
calling a linguistic geography of America almost necessary, in
which, as the same tribe is not unfrequently called by different
names, the localities in which each of the many Red Indian
tribes formerly dwelt should be noted with the utmost precision.
A map constructed on this principle would enable the reader
at one view to reconcile many apparent discrepancies, and to
ascertain the affinity between each language, many of which are
evidently mere dialects of one original tongue. As far as it was
possible, the Index has been rendered complete, so that the
reader will have little trouble in tracing any language he may
be in search of. Should he find references to more than he is
in quest of, he must consider it an error on the safe side, and
attribute it entirely to similarity of sound and the difficulty of
obtaining better materials.
As " Old Mortality" cleaned the inscriptions on the Cove-
nanters' tombs, so did Dr. Ludewig endeavour to rub off the
rust of ages from the scattered remains of the aborigines
of America. Had it not been a labour of love like his,
it would not have been attempted, Unimportant as such
labours may seem to men engaged in the more bustling occupa-
tions of life, all must at least acknowledge that these records of
the past, like the stern-lights of a departing ship, are the last
glimmers of savage life, as it becomes absorbed, or recedes be-
fore the tide of civilization.
I may here be permitted to give the titles of a few other
XI I
books appertaining to the subject, which did not come to hand
till the whole of the sheets of the manual had been worked off:
Histoire des Nations Civilisees du Mexique et de PAmerique
Septeatrionale, par FAbbe BRASSEUR DE BOURBOTJRG. Vol. I.
Paris, 1857, 8vo. Which, at pp. 44 73, contains a memoir
on Mexican writing, the materials of which were, for the
most part, supplied by M. Aubin. In the third chapter, at
page 62, are also some observations on the languages of Central
America.
Vocabulaire Francais-Creole, et des Conversations Fra^aises-
Creoles. London, 1818, 8vo, pp. 113. Which is simply a re-
print of Ducceur-Joly's Vocabulary.
In Schoolcraft's History, Condition, and Prospects of the
Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V., p. 689, Appendix
No. 1 7, is a letter on the affinities of dialects in New Mexico,
by Governor WILLIAM CARR LANE.
By the kindness of Mr. Thomas Wright, I have been favoured
with a sight of a manuscript grammar and vocabulary of the
Kariff, or Charrib language, as spoken in the Bay of Honduras.
It is written by Mr. Alexander Henderson, of Belize, Hon-
duras, and will probably soon be given to the public under the
auspices of the London Ethnological Society. Dr. Thomas
Rainy, of New York, is preparing a Dictionary of the Geral
Tongue of Para, in the Brazils, accompanied by a memoir; and
Dr. Franca, a Brazilian, has a dictionary of the Tupi language
in the press at Leipzig. Mr. E. G. Squier will shortly publish
a monograph on the aboriginal languages of Central America.
In conclusion, following the good and honest example of
Aldus Manutius, and the printers of old, I would respectfully
suggest to the reader the propriety of correcting with a pen the
errata, pointed out in the subjoined list, prior to his consulting
the work itself.
NICOLAS TRUBNER.
LONDON, 5tk October, 1857.
. BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.
HERMANN ED. LUDEWIG, though but little known in this
country, was held in considerable esteem as a jurist, both in
Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden
in 1809, with but little exception he continued to reside in his
native city until 1844, when he emigrated to America; but
though in both countries he practised law as a profession, his
bent was the study of literary history, which was evidenced by
his " Livre des Ana, Essai de Catalogue Manuel," published at
his own cost in 1837, and by his " Bibliothekonomie," which
appeared a few years later.
But even whilst thus engaged, he delighted in investigating
the rise and progress of the land of his subsequent adoption,
and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of
the peopling of America, gained him the highest consider-
ation, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man of original
and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann's
" Serapseum;" and amongst the chief of his contributions to that
journal may be mentioned those on <( American Libraries," on
the " Aids to American Bibliography/' and on the " Book-trade
of the United States of America." In 1846 appeared his
"Literature of American Local- History," a work of much im-
portance, and which required no small amount of labour and
perseverance, owing to the necessity of consulting the many and
widely-scattered materials, which had to be sought out from
apparently the most unlikely channels.
These studies formed a natural induction to the present work
XIV BIOGRAPHICAL MEMOIR.
on " The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages," which
occupied his leisure concurrently with the others,, and the print-
ing of which was commenced in August, 1856, but which he
did not live to see launched upon the world; for at the date
of his death, on the 12th of December following, only 172
pages were in type. It had been a labour of love with him
for years ; and if ever author were mindful . of the nonum
prematur in annum, he was when he deposited his manuscript
in the Library of the American Ethnological Society, diffident
himself as to its merits and value on a subject of such paramount
interest. He had satisfied himself that in due time the reward
of his patient industry might be the production of some more
extended national work on the subject : and with this he was
contented ; for it was a distinguishing feature in his character,
notwithstanding his great and varied knowledge and brilliant
acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to
drudgery if needful, if he could in any way assist in the pro-
mulgation of literature and science.
Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of many of the
most distinguished European and American literary societies ;
and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars
both in America and Germany, as will readily be acknowledged
should his voluminous correspondence ever see the light. In
private life he was distinguished for the best qualities which
endear a man's memory to those who survive him he was a
kind and affectionate husband and a sincere friend. Always
accessible, and ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied
to him for advice upon matters appertaining to literature, his
loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends ; and
in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her
learned men in America a genuine type of a class in which,
with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined
a painstaking and plodding perseverance, but seldom met with
beyond the confines of " the Fatherland."
N.T.
INTRODUCTOEY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES,
Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, i Occidental, Nautica i Geogra-
fica .... por el Licenciado ANTONIO DE LEON, Relator del
Supremo i Eeal Consejo de las India s. Madrid, Juan Gonzalez,
1629, 4to, pp. 80, 188, xii.
The well-known Spanish historian, Don Andres Gonzales Barcia, enlarged
this small volume to a folio of about 1172 pages, which he published under
the following title :
Epitome de la Biblioteca Oriental, y Occidental, ISTautica y Geogra-
fica, de Don ANTONIO DE LEON PINELO, del Consejo de S. M. : en
la Casa de Contratacion de Sevilla y Coronista mayor de las Indias.
Anadido y enmendado nuevaniente. Madrid, - Francisco Martinez
Abad, 173738. Three parts in 1 vol. fol.
Notwithstanding the confusion and prolixity of this work, the notices it
contains are very interesting, and their critical revision would be a useful and
meritorious undertaking.
The 18th chapter of the Biblioteca Occidental, " Autores que han escrito
en Lenguas de las Indias" (pp. 104110 of the first, col. 719738, and
fol. 918 920 of the second edition), contains the bibliographical and literary
notices concerning American aboriginal languages, and mentions many works
on that subject, which undoubtedly exist still in manuscript, but have never
'been collected.
NICOLAI ANTONIO, Bibliotheca Hispana Vetus, complectens Scrip-
tores qui ab Octaviani Augusti Imperio, usque ad annum M,
floruerunt, studio et curis Josephi Saenz, Cardinalis de Aguirre.
Moma, 1696, 2 vols. in fol.
The title contains a gross misprint. The work comprising the authors
until the year 1500, it ought to read, " usque ad annum MD" (1500), instead
of M (1000). Antonio died without the means for printing this work. They
were defrayed by the Cardinal de Aguirre, who entrusted the editorship to
Emmanuel Mars, a learned Valentian. The authors are arranged in chrono-
logical order; tables are added to facilitate the use of the work. The
XVI INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
" Bibliotheca Nova," although published first, is but a sequel of the " Biblio-
tlieca Yetus," of which a reprint likewise has appeared at Madrid, in 1788,
under this title :
Bibliotheca Hispana Vetus, sive Hispani Scriptores qui ab
Octaviani August! Aevo ad annum Christi MD floruerunt. Auctore
D. NICOLAO ANTONIO Hispalensi I.C., Ordinis S. Jacob! equite,
patria3 ecclesise canonico, regiorum negotiorum in urbe et roniana
curia procuratore general!, consiliario regio. Curante Francisco
Perezio Bayerio, Valentino, Sereniss. Hisp. Infantum Carol! III.
Regis filiorum institutore primario> Regiae Bibliothecse Palatino-
Matritensis Pra3fecto, qui et prologum, et auctoria vitae epitomen,
et notulas adjecit. Tom! II, folio. Matriti, Ibarra, 1788.
Ejusdem NICOLAI ANTONIO, Bibliotheca Hispana Nova, seu His-
panorum qui sive Latina, aut populari, sive alia quavis lingua scripto
aliquid consignaverunt. Roma, 1672, 2 vols. in fol. Typis Nicolai
Tinassii.
Nicolas Antonio was born in 1617, at Sevilla, studied at Salamanca, and
returned to Sevilla, composed his Bibliotheca Hispana in the convent of the
Benedictines, where the abbot, Benedict de La Serra, had accumulated a
splendid library. When it was sufficiently advanced he took it to Rome,
where he completed and printed it. He died at Madrid, in 1784. Antonio,
agreeable to the custom prevalent at that time, arranged the names of the
authors according to the alphabetical order of their Christian names. This is
a great inconvenience, which is only partially removed by the addition of a
number of tables. A new edition was published at Madrid, by Franc.
Perez Bayer, a learned Valentian ; the title of which is,
Bibliotheca Hispana Nova sive Hispaiiorum Scriptorum qui ab
anno MD ad MDCLXXXIV floruere notitia. Auctore D. NICOLAO
ANTONIO Hispalensi I.C. Ordinis S. Jacobi equite, patriae ecclesisB
canonico, regiorum negotiorum in urbe et romana curia pro-
curatore general!, consiliario regio. Nunc primum prodit recognita
emendata aucta a'b ipso Auctore. Tomi II. Matriti, Ibarra, 1783.
The two works together have long and favourably been known as the
" Bibliotheca Hispana." It has always been regarded as one of the best
works of the kind, and continues to enjoy a great reputation among savants.
HELANDI, HADRIANI, Dissertationum Miscellanearum Partes
Tres. Ultrajecti, 1706-7-8.
These Dissertations are thirteen in number, one of them treating " De Linguis
Americanis."
De la Langue Americaine. (Pp. 458490 of Vol. II, of P.
LAFITEAU, Meurs des Sauvages Americains. Paris, Saugrain aine,
et Ch. Hocherau, 1724, 2 vols. 4to.)
INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
Eev. Dr. MALCOLME, Letters, Essays, and other Tracts, illus-
trating the Antiquities of Great Britain and Ireland ; together with
many curious discoveries of the affinities between the language of
the Americans and the ancient Britons in the Greek and Latin, etc.
Also, specimens of the Celtic, Welsh, Irish, Saxon, and American
languages. Edinburgh, 1738, 8vo. Some copies, London, 1744, 8vo.
Essai sur les Rapports des Mots, entre les Langues du Nouveau
Monde et celles de 1'Ancien (pp. 489560 of Yol. VIII of Monde
Primitif analise et compare avec le Monde Moderne, considere dans
divers objets concernant 1'Histoire, le Blason, les Monnoies, les Jeux,
les Voyages des Pheniciens autour du monde, les Langues Aineri-
caines, etc., ou Dissertations Melees remplies de Decouvertes in-
teressantes ; avec une carte, des planches, et un Monument de 1' Ame-
rique. Par M. COURT DE GEBELIN. Paris, 1773 1782, 9 vols. 4to.
On the Connection of the Indian Languages with the Hebrew.
(Arguments V. and VI. pp. 37 80 of: JAMES ADAIH, The History
of the American Indians, particularly those nations adjoining to the
Mississippi, East and West Florida, Georgia, South and North
Carolina and Virginia, etc. etc. London, Edward and Charles Dilly,
1775, 4to.)
D. LORENZO HERVAS, Idea del Universo. Cesena, Gregorio
Biasini, 17781781, XXI vols. 4to. Vol. XXII, Fuligno, 1792, 4to.
The principal interest of this work consists in the linguistic notices given,
in the same. They are contained in the following volumes :
Vol. XVII (1784), Catalogo delle Lingue conosciuti e notizia
della loro affinita e diversita.
Of this volume, the following enlarged Spanish edition was published by
the author : Catalogo de las Lenguas de las naciones conocidas y numeracion,
division y clases de estas segun la diversidad de sus idiomas y dialectos.
Madrid, Imprenta de la Administracion del real Arbitrio de Beneficencia, 1800
1805, 6 vols. 4to.
Vol. XVIII (1785), Origine, Formazione, Mecanismo ed Armonia
degli Idiorni.
Vol. XIX (1786), Aritmetica delle Nazioni.
Vol. XX (1787), Vocabulario Poliglotto con Prolegomeni sopra
piu di CL Lingue.
Vol. XXI (1787), Saggio pratico delle Lingue con Prolegomeni
ed una raccolta di orazioni dominicali in piu di trecento liugue e
dialetti.
c
XV111 INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
Storia Antica del Messico cavata da' migliori storici Spagnuoli, e
da' manoscritti, e dalle pitture antiche degl' Indian! : divisa in dieci
libri, e corredata di carte geograficlie, e di varie figure : e dissertazioni
sulla terra, sugli animali, e sugli abitatori del Messico. Opera dell'
Abate D. FRANCISCO SAYERIO CLAVIGERO. 4to, 4 vols., plates.
Cesena, 1780.
Clavigero was born about the year 1720, at Vera Cruz, in Mexico, and at
the age of seventeen entered into the order of the Jesuits. When the order
was suppressed, in 1767, he retired to Cesena, like most of the other Jesuits of
Spanish America, to whom the Pope had given an asylum, where he under-
took this important work, which was received by the learned of Europe with
great applause. It contains in the last volume a list of the authors of gram-
mars and dictionaries in the languages of Anahuac. The work was trans-
lated into the following languages :
Into English under the following title
CLAVIGERO. The History of Mexico, collected from Spanish
and Mexican Historians, from Manuscripts and Ancient Paintings
of the Indians, illustrated by Charts and other Copperplates ; to
which are added Critical Dissertations on the Land, the Animals,
and Inhabitants of Mexico. By Abbe D. FRAKCISCO SAVERIO
CLAVIGERO. Translated from the original Italian by Charles Cullen,
Esq., in two volumes, pp. xl and 940, 4to. London, 1789.
Into German, from the English translation of Cullen
Greschichte von Mexico, aus Spanischen und Mexicanischen
Geschichtschreibern, Handschriften und Q-emalden der Indianer
zusammengetragen und durch Karten und Kupferstiche erlautert,
nebst einigen kritischen Abhandlungen iiber die Beschaffenheit des
Landes, der Thiere und Einwohner von Mexico. Aus dem Italian-
ischen durch den Eitter Karl Cullen ins Englische und aus diesem
ins Deuische iibersetzt, 2 Bde. mit Kupfern und Karten. Leipzig,
178990, Schwickert, 8vo.
Into Spanish
CLAVIGERO. Historia Antigua de Megico : sacacla de los mejores
historiadores Espanoles y de los manuscritos y de las pinturas
Antiguas de los Indios ; dividida en diez libros ; Adornada con Mapas
y Estampas, E illustrada con Dissertaciones sobre la tierra, los
Animales y los Habitantes de Megico escrita por D. FRANCISCO
SAVERIO CLAVIGERO ; y traducida del Italiano por Jose Joaquin de
Mora. Two vols., pp. xxxvi and 882, 8vo. London, 1826.
Saggio di Storia Americana o sia storia naturale, civile e sacra
de' regni, e delle provincie spagnuole di terra firma nelF America
INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XIX
meridionale, descritta dell' Abate FILIPPO SALYADORE GILII. Roma,
Perego, erede Salvioni, 1780 1784, 4 vols. 8vo.
Gilii was one of the Jesuits banished, like all the other members of his
order, from America. The third volume of his work, bearing the title, " Delia
Reh'gione e delle Lingue degli Orinochesi e di altri Americani," published in
1782, contains interesting details and notices concerning American Indian
languages.
THEODOR JAN KIE WITCH DE MIRIEWO, Sravnitel niy Slovar, etc.
(Comparative vocabulary of all the languages and dialects.) St.
Petersburg, 17901791, 4 vols. 4to, in Russian.
Pallas having published, in 1786 and 1789, the first part of the Yocabu-
larium Catharinseum (a comparative vocabulary of 286 words in the languages
of Europe and Asia), the material contained therein was published hi the
above edition in another form, and words of American languages added. The
book did not come up to the expectations of the Government, and was there-
fore not published, so that but few copies of it can be found.
WILLIAM MARSDEN, A Catalogue of Dictionaries, Grammars, and
Alphabets, in two parts. I. Alphabetical Catalogue of Authors.
II. Chronological Catalogue of Works in each Class of Language.
London, 1796, 4to, pp. vi. 156.
Privately printed, and very scarce ; contains but little about American
languages. See also the Bibliotheca Marsdeniana. London, Printed by J. L.
Cox, 1827, 4to.
B. SMITH BARTON, New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and
Nations of America. Philadelphia, 1797, 8vo.
Reprinted (second edition, corrected and enlarged), ibid. Pi'inted for the
author by John Bjoren, 1798, 8vo. Pp. cix (preliminary discourse) ; 133
(comparative vocabularies of 70 words) ; 32 (appendix, containing notes and
iUustrations).
Mithridates, oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde mit dem Vater-
Unser als Sprachprobe in beinahe 500 Sprachen urid Mundarten,
von JOHAKN CHRISTOPH ADELUNG. Vol. I. Berlin, Voss, 1806, 8vo.
Continued (from Adelung's papers) by Dr. JOHANN SEVERIN VATER.
Vols. II, III, and IV. Ibid, 18091817, 8vo.
The secondhand third parts of the third volume (1813 and 1816) contain
the languages of America.
A. J. VON KRUSENSTERN, Woertersammlungeri aus den Sprachen
einiger Voelker des oest lichen Asiens und der Nordwestkueste von
Amerika. St. Petersburg, Academic der Wissenschaften, 1813, 4to,
pp. xi. 68.
XX INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
Jo. SEYEBIN VATER, Lingual-urn totius orbis Index AlphabeticuB,
quarurn Grammatics, Lexica, Collectiones Yocabularum recensentur,
patria sigiiiticatur Historia adumbratur. Berlin, Nicolai, 1815,
8vo, pp. x. 259.
Text in German and Latin. Embraces all the known languages of the
world, and gives the bibliographical notices contained in the first two volumes,
and the first part of volume III of the Mithridates.
A new and enlarged edition, in German only, was published under the
following title:
Literatur der Grammatiken, Lexica und Woertersammlungen
aller Sprachen der Erde, von JOHANN SEYERIN VATER. Zweite vollig
umgearbeitete Ausgabe von B. Jiilg. Berlin, Nicolai, 1847, 8vo, pp.
xxii. 592.
An Enquiry into the Language of the American Indians. (Chap.
Ill, pp. 89 107 of: ELIAS BOUDINOT, A Star in the "West, or an
humble attempt to discover the long lost ten tribes of Israel. Tren-
ton, ]N". J. Fanton, Hutcheson, and Dunham, 1816, 8vo, pp. 312.)
Biblioteca Hispano-Americana Septentrional. Catalogo y Noticia
de los literatos, que o nacidos, o educados, o florecientes en la
America Septentrional Espanola, han dado a luz algun escrito, o lo
han dexado preparado para la prensa. La escribia El Doctor D. JOSE
MARIANO BERISTAIN DE SOUZA, del claustro de las universidades de
Valencia y Yalladolid, Caballero de la orden Espanola de Carlos III,
y Commendador de la Heal Americana de Isabel la Catolica, y Dean
de la Metropolitana de Megico. Megico, 1816 19, 3 vols. folio.
Be Souza's is by far the most important work for the literature of New
Spain that has ever been composed. It comprises 3687 biographies, and
although, like most Spanish works of the kind, singularly uncritical, yet it is a
perfect treasure as regards the cultivation of science and literature in Mexico and
the adjacent countries. The work is extremely scarce, and appears to be
altogether unknown in Europe.
P. E. DTI PONCEAU, Eeport made to the Historical and Literary
Committee of the American Philosophical Society ~by their Corres-
ponding Secretary on Languages of the American Indians. PJiila-
tia, 1819, 8vo.
Reprinted as Chap. XY, "Language of the Indians," in JAMES BUCHANAN'S
Sketches of the History, Manners, and Customs of the North American
Indians. New York, Will. Boradaile, 1824, 2. vols. 12mo. Yol. II, pp.
4377 ; pp. 7982, ibid : Catalogue of manuscript works on the Indians
and their languages, presented to the American Philosophical Society, or
deposited in their library.
INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. xxi
JOHN PICKERING, Essay on a Missionary Orthography for the
Indian Languages of North America. Cambridge, 1820, 4to.
Archseologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of the
American Antiquarian Society. Published by direction of the
Society. Vol. I (pp. 436J, Worcester, Massachusetts, 1820 ; Vol. II
(pp. xxx, 573, map), Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1836.
SAT, T., Vocabularies of Indian Languages (pp. Ixx Ixxxviii of
Astronomical and Meteorological Eecords and Vocabularies of
Indian Languages taken on the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the command of Major
S. H. Long, 8vo. Philadelphia, 1822.)
ADRIEN BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique du Globe, ou classification
des peuples anciens et modernes d'apres leurs langues ; precede
d'un discours sur 1'utilite et 1'importance de r etude des langues,
etc. Paris, Eey and Gravier, 1826, fol.
Table XXV contains the " Division ethnographique de 1'Ame'rique et tableau
general des langues Americaines ;" and Table XLI, " Tableau polyglotte
des langues Americaines," gives a vocabulary of 26 words in about 120
American languages and dialects.
" Of the Language of the Indians," Chapter VI (pp. 105 to 114)
of: A View of the American Indians, their general Character,
Customs, Language, Public Festivals, Eeligious Eites, and Tradi-
tions : showing them to be the descendants of the Ten Tribes of
Israel ; the language of prophecy concerning them, and the course
by which they travelled from Media into America. By ISRAEL.
WORSLEY. London, 1828, 12mo, pp. xii and 186.
On the Languages of the American Indians. (Chap. II, pp. 33
631 of: J. H. M'CuLLOH, jun., Eesearches, Philosophical and
Antiquarian, concerning the Aboriginal History of America. Fielding
Lucas, jun., 1820, Svo.)
JOHN PICKERING, Indian Languages of America. Appendix
(pp. 581600) to Vol. VI of the ''Encyclopaedia Americana,"
Philadelphia, 1836, Svo. Also, with separate title, " Eemarks
on the Indian Languages of North America," s. 1. Philadelphia,
1836, Svo.
German translation (by Mrs. Prof. Eobinson), Ueber die Indianischen
Sprachen Araerikas. Aus dem Englischen des Nord-Amerikaners Herrn
JOHN PICKERING, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von Talvj.
Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, Svo, pp. viii, 79, 1.
XX11 INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
A LBEBT GrALLATitf, A Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the
United States, East of the Rocky Mountains, and in the British and
Russian possessions in North America. Pp. 1 422, of Vol. II of
the Archaeologia Americana. Transactions and Collections of the
American Antiquarian Society. (Cambridge, printed for the Society
at the University Press, 1836, 8vo.)
Sect. VI, Indian languages, pp. 1 208. Appendix of grammatical notices,
and specimen of transitions and conjugations, pp. 211 302.
Vocabularies, pp. 305406. Select sentences, pp. 408 421.
P. E. DTJ PONCEAU, Memoire sur le Systeme grammatical des
Langues de quelques nations Indiennes de 1'Amerique du Nord.
Paris, 1838, 8vo.
ALCIDE i>'0 HEIGHT, 1'Homme Americain (de 1'Amerique meri-
dionale) considere sous ses rapports physiologiques et moraux.
Paris, Pitois-Levrault & Co., 1839, 2 vols. 8vo, and Atlas.
Reise des Prinzeu MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Collenz, 1839,
1841, 2 vols. 8vo. Yol. II, pp. 645 G53, particularly on the lan-
guage of signs.
On this same subject see
Indian Language of Signs, Appendix B, pp. 27 1288 of the first volume
of: Account of an Expedition from Pittsburgh to the Rocky Mountains, per-
formed in the years 1819, 1820, .... under the command of Major
Long, M. T. Say, and others, by EDWIN JAMES, Botanist and Geologist to
the Expedition. London, Longman, Hurst, etc., 1823, 3 vols. 8vo. And
WILLIAM DUNBAR, On the Language of Signs among certain North
American Indians. Letter to Th. Jefferson, dated Natchez, June 30, 1800.
Pp. 1 8 of: Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, Vol. VI,
Part I. (Philadelphia, J. Aitken, 1804, 4to.)
EUGENE A. VAIL, Notice sur les Indiens de rAmerique du Nord.
Paris, Bertrand, 1840, 8vo, plates, pp. 244. (Des Langues Iiidienues,
pp. 40- 58.)
Particularities of the Indian Languages. (Pp. 92 97, and com-
parative view of the Indian and Asiatic Languages, pp. 100 103 of:
JOHN M'lNTOSii, The Origin of the North American Indians, etc.
New York, Napis and Cornish, 1843, 12mo, pp. 311.)
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, 8vo, Vol. I
(pp. viii and 492), 1845 ; Vol II (pp. clxxxviii, 298, two maps), 1848 ;
Vol. Ill, Part I (pp. 202), 1853. New York.
A. G-ALLATIN, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico,
Yucatan, and Central America. Pp. f 352 of Vol. I of the
INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. XXUl
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. (New York,
Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo. )
Sect. I. Languages, pp. 148. Appendix.. Grammatical notices, pp. 215
304.
Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Ex-
pedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. Under
the command of Charles Wilkes, United States Navy, By HOEATIO
HALE, philologist of the expedition, 4to (pp. xii, 666, map). Phila-
delphia, 1846. (The Languages of North- Western America, on pp.
533 to 656.)
A. G-ALLATIN, Hale's Indians of North- West America, and
Vocabularies of North America, with an Introduction. Pp. xxv
clxxxviii, 1 130 of Vol. II of the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society. (New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1848, 8vo.)
Introduction III, Philology; Vocabularies, Grammar, pp. cviii cxliv.
Hale's Indians of North- West America. Philology, pp. 2570 ; Vocabu-
laries, 71 130.
H. B. SCHOOLCRAFT, A Bibliographical Catalogue of Books,
Translations of the Scriptures, and other publications in the Indian
Tongues of the United States ; with brief critical notices. Washing-
ton, C. Alexander, printer, 1849, 8vo, pp. 28.
Contains a catalogue raisonnS of the Indian works in the Indian bureau of
the department of the interior.
It is reprinted with a few Additions, pp. 523 551 of Yol. IV of the illus-
trated work on the Indian Tribes of the United States, published by order
of the Government of the United States.
Historical and Statistical Information respecting the History,
Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States.
Collected and prepared under the direction of the Bureau of Indian
Affairs, per Act of Congress of March 3, 1847, by HENRY E.
SCHOOLCRAFT, LL.D. Published by authority of Congress. Parts I
to V, 4to (with illustrations). Philadelphia, 1851 to 1855.
H. B. SCHOOLCRAFT, Indian Languages of the United States.
(Pp. 340 345 of History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. II.)
FRANCIS LIEBER, LL.D., Plan of Thought of the American
Languages (pp. 346349 of History, Condition, and Prospects of
the Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II).
H. R. SCHOOLCRAFT, Observations on the Manner of correspond-
ing Words in the Indian Tongue. (Pp. 371 385 of History, Con-
XXIV INTRODUCTORY BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.
dition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. IV.)
H. E. SciiooLCRArT, Indian Numerals. (P. 712 of History,
Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United States,
Yol. Y.)
Catalogue of Books in the Astor Library relating to the Lan-
guages and Literature of Asia, Africa, and the Oceanic Islands.
New York, Astor Library Autographic Press, 1854, 8vo, pp. 8, 424.
Contains, on pp. 179 187, also books on the languages of the American
Indians.
An Examination of American Languages, on pp. 53 to 72 of:
ArchaBology of the United States; or, Sketches, Historical and Biblio-
graphical, of the Progress of Information and Opinion respecting
Yestiges of Antiquity in the United States. By SAMUEL. F. HA YEN.
Pp. iv. and 168, 4to. Washington, 1856.
BIBLIOTHECA GLOTTICA.
ABENAKI, WAPANAOHKI.
Eastern Indians. This is the name given by Europeans to the
Indians of New England, Canada, and Nova Scotia. Tribes of
the Abenakis are the Micmacs, Souriquois, Ameriscoggins,
Etchemins, and Penobscots. The Abenakis proper lived on the
Kennebek river ; their principal place was Nanrantsouak (Nor-
ridgewock) .
WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 233,
PEOFESSOE T. SAT, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape,
etc.; note 15, pp. 135 145, to John Pickering's edition of: Dr. Edwards's
Observations on the Mohegan Language, in Vol. X (second series) of the : Collec-
tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Boston, Phelps and Farnham , 1823,
8vo ; reprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 815.
FATHEE SEBASTIAN KASLES, A Dictionary of the Abenaki Language in North
America, published from the original manuscript of the author, with an intro-
ductory memoir and notes by John Pickering. Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to ;
forms part (pp. 370574) of: Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences. New Series, Vol. I. Cambridge, Folsom, 1833, 4to. The original
MS. in the Harvard Library, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
No. IV, 14 of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367) to A. GALLATIN'S
Synopsis, etc., Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana; and (partly) under
O, IV, 5, p. 109 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the Ameri-
can Ethnological Society.
Langue des Abenaquis, p. 514 of Vol. VIII of: ANT. COTTBT DE GEBELIX,
Monde primitif. Paris, 1773, 4to. Keprinted in : J. B. Scherer's Recherches His-
toriques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo, pp.
327, 328.
WILLIAM WILLIS, The Language of the Abenaquis, or Eastern Indians (extracts
from Kasles, and list of Indian geographical names), Art. VI, pp. 93 117, and
B
X ABIPONES ACCAWAY.
E. E. POTTEE, appendix thereto, Art. VIII, pp. 185193, 195, of Vol. IV of
the : Collections of the Maine Historical Society. Portland, 1856, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. P. WZOKHILAIN, Wobanaki kinzowi awighihan. Boston, 1830, 8vo.
ABIPONES.
Formerly of the Province of Chaco, now of Paraguay, east of
the Parana river ; were divided into three tribes, the Naguegt-
gaguehee, the Rucahee, and the Jaconaiga.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEBVAS, Origine, Tab. L et seq.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 105, 106 ; and Toba Abipona, p. 105.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 450.
MAETIN DOBBIZHOFFEE, Presbyter et per XVIII annos Paraguarise mission-
arius, Historia de Abiponibus, equestri, bellicosaque Paraguariee natione, locupletata
copiosis barbarum gentium, urbium, fluminum, ferarum, amphibiorum, insectorum,
serpentium prsecipuorum, piscium, avium, arborum, plantarum, aliarumqueejusdem
provinciee proprietatum observationibus. Vienna, de Kurzbeck, 1784, 3 vols. 8vo.
Translated into
a. German :
M. DOBBIZHOFFEB, Greschichte der Abiponen (by Professor Kreil). Wien,
1784, 3 vols. 8vo.
b. English:
An Account of the Abipones, an Equestrian People of Paraguay. From
the Latin of MAETIN DOBEIZHOFFEE, eighteen years a missionary in that
country (by Miss Coleridge). London, Murray, 1822, 3 vols. 8vo.
The vocabulary and grammar to be found in Vol. II, p. 161 et seq. of the
Latin edition.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 497, 505, 506.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
M. DOBEIZHOFFEE, 1. c., Vol. II, p. 161 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 498501.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americahi, Vol. II, p. 117.
ACCAWAY.
Indian Tribe of Guyana, on the banks of the Demerara, belongs
to the Caribi-Tarnanakan stock.
ACH A.GUAS AGLEGMUTES.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 10) in the four Indian
Languages of British G-uyana, Accaway. By WILL. HILLHOTJSE, in the : Journal of
the Eoyal Geographical Society of London. London, 1832, Vol. II, pp. 247, 248.
Reprinted, pp. 155, 156, of Vol. V of : R. Montgomery Martin's British Colonial
Library (West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12mo.
Vocabulary of Five Indian Nations in Guyana, Ackoway, in appendix No. V,
pp. 164, 165 of : F. A. VAN HETTVEL, El Dorado. New York, J. Winchester,
1844, 8vo.
Sin ROBERT H. SCHOMBTTRGK, Vocabulary of Eighteen Words, compared with
Eighteen other Guyana Languages and the Lingoa geral, pp. 97, 98 of the : Swansea
Meeting Report of the British Association in 1848. London, Murray, 1849, 8vo.
Vocabulary of Eighteen Words (eight not in Schomburgk), compared with
Arawak, Caribisi, and Warau, pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. BRETT, the Indian Tribes of
Guyana. New York, Rob. Carter and Brothers, 1852, 12mo.
ACHAGUAS.
Wandering Tribe, on the banks of the Middle Orinoco and the
Casanare.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XII, LI et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 631.
ADAIZE.
On the Red River, near Natchitoches. Only forty men in 1805.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. XIII, 18 of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305
367 of the Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the United States, East of the
Rocky Mountains, etc., by ALBERT GALLATIN, in Vol. II of the : Archseologia
Americana. Cambridge University Press, 1836, 8vo ; and No. D, XIII, pp. 95
97, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnolo-
gical Society.
The Adaize words given after MS. notices of SIBLEY.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 278.
AGLEGMUTES, AGOLEGMUTES.
In Russian America, at the mouth of the rivers Nuschagak and
Naknek. They belong to the Esquimaux. (Tchouktchi Ameri-
cans of BALBI.)
4 ALEUTANS.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
CKROMTSCHENKO'S Voyage along the Coast of the Russian Possessions in Ame-
rica in the : Northern Archives for History, Statistics, and Travels. (In the Rus-
sian language.) St. Petersburg, 1824, Nos. 1118.
Translated into German in the : Hertha of 1825, Vol. II, pp. 218221.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 859. (Tchouktchi or Agle-
mutes propre, de 1'ile de Nurriwok et de 1'ile de St. Laurent.)
ALEUTANS.
In Russian America, on the islands between Alyaska and
Kamschatka. The inhabitants of these islands speak different
dialects.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. BILLINGS, Voyages (Russian edition). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, pp. 121129.
MARTIN SATTEE, An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to
the Northern Parts of Russia by Commodore Joseph Billings. London, T. Cadell
and W. Davies, 1802, 4to, pp. 9 14 of the appendix. (Appendix No. II, Vocabu-
lary of the Languages of Kamschatka, the Aleutan Islands, and of Kadiak.)
Vol. II, pp. 296 303, of the French translation by F. Castera. Paris, 1802,
2 vols. 8vo. Pp. 399 406 of the German translation. Berlin, 1802, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 340, 341 ; Vol. IV, pp. 251255.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 858.
Aleutian Abeeedarium, s. 1. e. a. St. Petersburg, 1839 or 1840. 8vo.
I. VENIAMINOV. Aleutian Vocabulary (Russian). St. Petersburg, 1848.
Aleutan Vocabulary (noted "not in America"), under X 2, p. 130 of the Voca-
bularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Some (18) Aleutian and Kamskadale words compared in SAMUEL G. DRAKE,
the Book of the Indians. 9th edition. Boston, Benjamin B. Mussey, 1845, 8vo,
Part I, p. 16.
Twenty-one Esquimaux words compared with Aleutian, pp. 110 113 of the
Esquimaux Vocabulary, published by the British Admiralty.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
I. VENIAMINOY, Opyt Grammatiki Aleutsko lisjevskago jasiku. St. Peters-
burg, 1846-8.
Ueber die Sprachen des Russischen Amerika's, nach Veniaminov. Pp. 126143
of Vol. VII of: A. ERMAN, Archiv fur wissenschaftiche Kuude von Russland.
Berlin, Reimer, 18 i9, 8vo.
ALGONQUIN.
ALGONQUIN (CHIPPEWAY).
The Algonquins, as a tribe of the great Algonquin stock, were
once powerful on the northern shores of the lakes and the St.
Lawrence river.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
New Voyages to North America To which is added a Dictionary of the
Algonkine Language, which is generally spoken in North America. ... By BABON
LAHONTAN, Lord-Lieutenant of the French colony at Placentia, in Newfoundland.
Done into English a great part of which never printed in the original. London^
1703, 2 vols. 8vo. Keprinted, London, 1735, 2 vols. 8vo.
Translated, under the inspection of the author, from the French original,
published in the same year under the title : Nouveaux Voyages de M. LE HABON
DE LAHONTAN dans 1'Amerique septentrionale. A. la Haye, 1703, 8vo ; second
edition, ibid., 1?05, 8vo. The second volume bears the title : Memoires de
1'Amerique septentrionale, oula suite des Voyages de M. LE BAEON DE LAHON-
TAN avec un petit dictionnaire de la langue du Pays. Tom. II. A
la Haye, 1704, 8vo ; second edition, ibid., 1705, 8vo. Both volumes under one
title : Nouveaux Voyages, etc. A la Haye. Freres Honore, 1709, 2 vols. 12mo.
The : Petit Dictionnaire de la Langue des Sauvages Algonkins, s. 1. e. a.,
8vo, in the : Bibliotheca Heberiana, Vol. VI, p. 72, No. 163, is apparently taken
from a copy of Lahontan's work. The vocabulary is reprinted on pp. 214
219, in : HADE. B.ELANDI, Dissertationes Miscellanese. Trajecti ad Rhenum,
3.706-7, 3 partes, 8vo.
The work of Lahontan has been translated also into German and into
Dutch. (Eeisen naar America, van Baron Lahontan. Haag, 1739, 8vo.)
HEEVAS, Vooabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 114.
HEEVAS, Origine, p. 37, Tabb. XL VIII, L, LI et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 233.
J. LONG, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader .... to
which is added .... a Table, showing the Analogy between the Algonkin and
Chippeway Languages. London, printed for the author, sold by Kobson, Debrett,
& Co., 1791, 4to. Algonkin Vocabulary, pp. 185211.
LONG'S Voyages have been translated into
a. German, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Hamburg, 1791, 8vo.
b. French, by Billecocq. Paris, an II (1793), 8vo.
Examples of the Knisteneaux and Algonquin Tongues, pp. cvii cxvi of: ALEX-
ANDEE MACKENZIE, Esq., Voyages from Montreal on the River St. Lawrence,
through the Continent of North America to the Frozen and Pacific Oceans, in the
years 1789 and 1793. London, T. Cadell, jun., and W. Daves, <tc., 1801, 4to.
Keprinted, New York, 1802, 8vo ; and Paris, Levrault, 1802, 2 vols. 8vo.
6 ALGONQUIN.
Translated into
a. German. Hamburg, 1802, 8vo.
b. French, by F. Castera. Paris, Dentu, 1802, 3 rols. 8vo.
The Vocabulary is also printed on pp. 261 274 of : Tableau Historique et
Politique du Commerce de Pelleteries dans le Canada avec un Vocabu-
laire par F. Castera. Paris, Dentu, 1807-8.
SMITH BAETON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343, 346, 416, 417 (from Lahontan, Smith
Barton, Long, and Mackenzie).
Vocabulary of the Algonquin Langue, pp. 579 602 of: Travels through the
Canadas, etc. By GEOBGE HEEIOT, Esq. London, R. Phillips, 1807, 1 vol. 4to,
pp. xi and 602.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 818.
J. EDWAEDS, Observations on the Language of the Muhhekanew Indians. A
new edition, by J. Pickering. Boston, 1823, 8vo.
Reprinted from : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society,
Vol. X of the second series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823,
8vo, pp. 81160.
Algonkin words in the Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the
Lenape stock, communicated by PEOFESSOE SAT, pp. 135 145.
, No. 10 and IV of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty -three Nations,
pp. 305367, and No. IV , p. 368, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Sixteen
Tribes, pp. 368 372 of A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, in Vol. II of the : Archseo-
logia Americana.
The " Old Algonquin," after Lahontan ; the " Modern Algonquin," after
Mackenzie. The former partly reprinted under No. IV (2), p. 106 of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.
Affinities of the Satsika or Blackfeet Language with those of the Algonkins,
pp. cxiii, cxiv ; and
Affinities of the Shyenne with Languages of the Algonkin Family, pp. cxiv., cxv
of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
Rev. M. HECKEWELDEE, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape and
Algonquin. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.
Rev. FEED. BABAGA, Dictionary, etc. (see Chippewa).
A MS. Vocabulary of the Algonquin, in French, written at Michimilimac, in 1740
to 1748, by a Jesuit Missionary (1 vol. folio, pp. 582), is in the possession of
Hugh Ramsay, Esq., of Montreal.
Comparison of the Language of the Ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with
the Algonquin Language (Chippewa, Natic), pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of: SCHOOL-
CEAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
ALLENTIAC ANDAQUIES.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 412, 413.
Note of D. FIOEILLO to two Algonquin Songs, given by John Dunne, in his
Notices relative to some of the Native Tribes of North America. Transactions of
the Eoyal Irish Academy. Tom. IX, p. 130.
P. E. DUPONCEAU, Memoire sur le Systeme Grammatical des Langues de
quelques Nations Indiennes de 1'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1838, 8vo.
H. E. SCHOOLCKAFT, An Essay on the Grammatical Structure of the Algon-
quin Language, pp. 351442 of Vol. II of the : Indian Tribes of the United States.
H. E. SCHOOLCBAFT, Observations on the Manner of Compounding Words in
the Indian (principally with Algonquin examples), pp. 371381 of Vol. IV of
the : Indian Tribes of the United States.
ALLENTIAC.
A Chilian language, spoken by the Guarpos Indians of the pro-
vince of Cuio.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
LUYS DE VALDIYIA, Arte G-rammatica, Vocabulario, Catecismo y Confes-
sionario en Lengua Chilena y en las dos Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, que son
las mas generales de la Provincia de Cuio en el reyno de Chili, y que hablan los
Indios Gruarpes y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo.
BBTTNET, IV, p. 547 who mentions the same author's : Arte de la Lengua de
Chile, published 1606 at Lima gives a similar title as the above after Antonio,
II, 67, but dated Lima, 1608, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
LUYS DE VALDIVIA, see under Vocabularies.
ANDAQUIES.
Indians of Nueva Granada, territory of Mocoa (formerly depart-
mento del Assuai), between the rivers Caqueta and Putumayo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Andaqui and Spanish Vocabulary, taken in 1854 by the Presbytero MANUEL
MAEIA ALBIS. Pp. 27 29 of: Los Indios del Andaqui. Memorias de un viajero
publicadas por Jose Maria Vergara i Vergara i Evaristo Delgado. Popayan,
imprenta de la Matricaria, 1855, 16mo, pp. 29.
8 ANTIS APINAGES.
ANTIS.
Brazilian Indians on the eastern slope of the Andes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Antis, du Eevers Oriental des Andes (Echoratos), Yocabulaire, No.
XVI, pp. 290, 291 of CASTELNAU, Yol. V, Appendice.
APACHES.
The great Apache nation roams over the triangular space
included between the puellos of New Mexico, the river Colarado,
and the Gila ; they extend, also, into the State of Chihuahua,
and even farther south. They are related to the- great Atna-
pascan family. The Navajos and Tinalenos belong to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary of the Copper Mine Apaches has been taken by JOHN B.
BABTLETT, the United States' Boundary Commissioner.
Vocabularies of the Apache and Micmac Languages. The Apache by Dr. CHABLES
C. HENEY. New Mexico, 1853. Pp. 578589 of Vol. V of: Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States.
PEOF. W. W. TUBNEB, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Apache (from Bartlett's MS. Vocabulary), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Dogrib,
Tacally, Umkwa, Hoopah, and Navajo, pp. 84, 85 of the Report upon the Indians,
added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel,
in Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington^ 1855, 4to.
APIACAS.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Arinas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Apiacas. Vocabulaire, No. VIII, pp. 276278 of CASTELNAU,
Vol. V, Appendice.
APINAGES.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Tocantins River. MARTIUS
(Catalogue of Indian Tribes, No. 80, b) calls them Apinages,
and mentions them as a tribe of the Ges or Gez nation, of which
he names nine tribes.
ARAL 1 LANs.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Apinages (Eio Tocantins). 1. Par tie donne"e par le Commandant
du Fort S. Joao das duas Barras, pp. 270, 271. 2. Partie recueillie dans les
Aldeas du Tocantins, pp. 271273. Yocabulaire, No. Y, pp. 270273 of
CASTELNATJ, Yol. Y, Appendice.
ARAUCANS.
The aborigines of Chili, who call themselves Auca, Moluches,
or Chilidugu. They are divided into Pikunche, or Puelche ;
Pehuenche, to which the Auca or Moluches proper belong, and
Huilliche. D'OiiuiGNY distinguishes the sedentary (Araucanian)
and roving (Auca) tribes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabula Linguae Chilise, in : CASP. BARLAEI, rerum per octennium in Brasilia et
alibi nuper gestarum sub prsefectura comitis J. Mauritii Nassovise Historia.
Amstelodami, Jean Blaev, 1647, folio. Edit, secunda. Clivis, 1660, 8vo.
(Yocabula Chilensia, pp. 479491.)
German Translation Barlaei Brasilianische Geschichte, etc. Cleve, 1659 ;
8vo.
A Yiew of the Chilesian Language (Yocabulary), pp. 635-639 of: JOHN
OGILBY, America, being the latest and most accurate Description of the New
World, &c. London, printed by the author, 1671, folio.
Yocabulary, after ELIAS HERKMANX, p. 629, in : Dr. O. D. (Dapper) Die un-
bekannte neue "Welt oder Beschreibung des Welttheils America. Amsterdam,
1673, folio. From this vocabulary the words given by : J. 11. FORSTER, in his
Observations made during a Yoyage Round the "World (London, Eobinson, 1778,
4to), are said to be taken.
De Chilensium lingua et Yocabularium dictionum Chilensium, in : Geo. Marc-
gravii Tractatus Brasilia .... quibus additi sunt illius et aliorum com-
mentarii dc Brasiliensium et Chilensium indole et lingua; pp. 288 290 of: His-
toria Naturalis Brasilia (Lugduni Batavorum et Amsteloclami, Fr. Hackius,
1648, folio), which contains the works of Guil. Piso and Geo. Marcgravius,
on the Natural and Medical History of Brazil, published by Johannes de Laet; and
pp. 32 34 of : Guil. Piso de Indise utriusque re Naturali et Medica. Lugduni
Batavorum, Elzevir, 1655, folio.
Langue du Chili, pp. 535, 536 of Yol. YIII of: COURT DE GEBELIN, Monde
Primitif. Paris, 1773, 4to.
HERYAS, Origine, pp. 37, 164, 165, and Tabb. LI, LII et seq. (Chilena, Tab.
XLIX.)
10 ARAUCANS.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 95.
HEEVAS, Vocabulario, p. 161 et seq., 220 (Araucana 6 Chilena).
SMITH BAETON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 402 (Comparison of the Araucaniau, Greek, and
Latin Languages), 422, 423.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 439.
WM. MAESDEN, Miscellaneous Works. London, 1834, 4to, p. 104.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words. Pp. 162164 of Vol. I of : A. D'OEBIGNY,
L'Homme Americain.
Vocabulary Araucano and Chileno, pp. 652, 653, of: HOEATIO HALE, Ethnogra-
phy and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and
Blan chard, 1846, 4to.
Diccionario Chileno y Hispano, compuesto por el E. P. Mis. ANDB. FEBBES,
&c. Enriquecido de voces i mejorado por el E. P. Fr. Hernandez F. Calzada.
Edicion hecha para el service de las misiones .... bajo la inspeccion del R. P.
Misionero Fr. Miguel Anjel Astraldi. Santiago, imprenta de los Tribunales,
1846, 8vo, pp. 92.
The Spanish part under the title Diccionario Hispano Chileno, compuesto por
el P. ANDEES FEBEES. Enriquecido por el P. Hernandez F. Calzada. Edicion
hecha bajo la inspeccion del P. Fr. Miguel A. Astraldi. Santiago, imprenta del
Progreso, 1846, 8vo, pp. 112.
Breve Diccionario de algunas palabras mas usuales (Spanish and Chileno).
Appendix of 29 pp. to : A. FEBEES, Gramatica de la Lengua Chilena, edition by
Calzada and Astraldi. Santiago, 1846, 8vo.
A vocabulary, or specimens of the language of the Pehuenche, may be found in :
Descripcion de la Naturaleza de los Terrenos que se comprenden en los Andes posei-
dos por los Peguenches .... por P. Luis DE LA CETJZ, Alcala Mayor Provincial del
ilustre Cabildo de la Concepcion de Chile. Primera edicion. Buenos Ayres, imprenta
del estado, 1835, folio. Forms part of the first volume of : Pedro de Angelis,
Coleccion de Obras .... relatives a la Historia de la provincia del Rio de la
Plata. JBuenos Ayres, 1835-7, 6 vols.
See also the works and grammars of FEBEES, VALDIYIA, FALKNEB, GILII,
MOLINA, HAVESTADT, VIDAUEE.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Luis DE VALDIVIA, Arte y Gramatica general de la Lengua que corre en todo el
Eeyno de Chile, con un Vocabulario en la Lengua de Chile. Lima, Fr. Canto,
1606, 8vo.
P. ANDEES FEBEES, e. S. J. Arte de la Lengua general del Eeyno de Chile", con un
Dialogo Chileno Hispano ; y un Vocabulario a que se ailada la Doctrina Christiana
y por fin un Vocabulario Hispano Chileno. Lima, 1765, 4to, pp. 682. Eeprinted :
Adicionada i correjida por el R. P. Fr.Ant. Hernandez Calzada de la Orden de
ARAUCANS.
11
Francisco. Edicion hecha para el servicio de las misiones por orden del Supremo
Gobierno i bajo la inspection del R. P. Fr. Miguel Anjel Astraldi. Santiago,
imprenta de los Tribunales, 1846, 8vo, pp. 330.
Extracts given by A. Gallatin, pp. 258264, 277, of Vol. II of the: Ar-
chseologia Americana.
THOMAS FALKNEE, A Description of Patagonia and the Adjoining Parts of South
America, containing .... an Account of the Language of the Moluches, with a
Grammar and short Vocabulary Hereford, 1774, 4to, maps, pp. 144. The
grammar and vocabulary, pp. 132144.
Translated (extracts only ?) into
a. German, by Schack Hermann Ewald. GotTta, Ettinger, 1775, 8vo.
(Grammar and Vocabularies, pp. 163 181.)
b. French, par M. B Geneve. Paris, Dufort, 1787, 2 vols. 24mo,
pp. 160, 135. Eeprinted at Paris, 1788.
c. Spanish. T. FALKNEE, Descripcion de la Patagonia. Primera edition
Espanola. Buenos Ayres, imprenta del estado, 1835, folio, pp. vii, 63. Forms
part of Vol. I of the: Collection de Obras y Documentos relatives k la
Historia antigua y moderna de las provincias del Kio de la Plata, por Pedro
de Angelis. Buenos Ayres, imprenta del estado, 1835-7, 6 vols.
The extract " of the Patagonians," made by Thos. Pennant, and printed
for him privately at George Allan's Darlington Press (1788, 4to) which is
also reprinted in the appendix of the : Literary Life of the late Thos. Pen-
nant, by himself, London, 1793, 4to seems not to contain the above gram-
mar and vocabulary.
(ABBE VIDATTEE ?) Compendio della Storia Geografica Naturale e Civile del
Keyno de Chile. Bologna, 1776, 8vo.
German translation Kurzgefaszte Geschichte des Konigreichs von Chile.
Von C. F. F. Hamburg, 1782, 8vo, pp. 115119.
BEENAEDI HAVESTADT, e. S. J. Chilidugu sive res Chilenses vel descriptio status
turn naturalis turn civilis turn moralis regni populique Chilensis, inserta suis locis
perfecta ad Chilensem linguam nianuductione. Monasterii Westphalice, 1777,
2 vols. 8vo, pp. 952, map, and two plates of music.
Divided into seven parts, of which the first is a very ample grammar of
the Chilian tongue, the fourth an ample vocabulary of the same language, with
which the fifth a Latin vocabulary corresponds. The author was for
twenty years a Jesuit missionary in Chili.
In Vol. Ill of : Saggio di Storia Americana 6 sia storia naturale civile e sacra
de' regni e delle provincie Spagnuole di terra firma nell' America meridionale.
Descritta dall' Abate FILIPPO SALVADOEE GILII (Roma, Perego, Erede Salvioni,
1780-84, 4 vols. 8vo), which, under the title of: Dalla Keligione e delle Lingue
degli Orinocchesi e di altri American!, 1782, contains the linguistic part of
the above work ; a grammar is given, pp. 261 et seq., and a short vocabulary,
p. 383.
GIOY. lew. MOLINA, Saggio sulla Storia naturale del Chili. Bologna, 1782, 8vo.
Grammar and Vocabulary, pp. 334 367. Molina has used two MS. grammars of
GABEIEL VEGA and PIETEO GAEEETA.
12 ARDA ARRAPAHOES.
The work of Molina, followed in 1787 by : Saggio della Storia civile del Chili
(Bologna, 8vo), was translated into
a. Spanish, by D. Domingo Jos. de Arquellada Mendoza. Madrid, 1788,
2 Tols. small 4to.
b. French, by M. Grraval, M.D. Paris, Nee de la Kochelle, 1787 (OP
1789), 8vo.
c. "English, with notes and appendix, by an American gentleman. Mid-
dletown, Connecticut, 1808, 2 vols. 8vo. (By Will. Shaler or Eich. Alsop ?).
Reprinted with notes and appendices, etc. London, Longman, 1809, 2 vols. 8vo.
The second edition of the original appeared under the title : Saggio della
Storia del Chili. Seconda edizione accresciuta. Bologna, 1810, 4to. Portrait
and maps.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, p. 397416.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, p. 399.
AKDA.
According to Aleedo, the Ardas are a tribe of Indians living
between the Rivers Napo and Maranon, in the province of
Quijos, not far from Quito.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Doctrina Christiana, y explicacion de sus misterios en nuestro Idioma Espanol y
en Lengua Arda. Madrid, 1658, 12mo, pp. 28.
The Lord's Prayer in the Arda Language :
Daygue, mito, etepi, evota, agai, sanetificado, soro, oii vgua, mito me, a.
lortome guanuque, oririque, numo, aysague, enumo, agai, oju, mito, vepa,
ve, toe, naueie, ayale, gui, matedo, numo, miu, ayale, a joti misi t erique,
mayaibo, nurebo, vreminoe, oig, vodutinau, vrrenui. Amen.
AERAPAHOES.
Indians on the Kanzas River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. E, YII, pp. 96, 98 of the Yocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Yol. II.
JOHN S. SMITH, Yocabulary, pp. 446 459 of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of
the United States, Yol. II.
Yocabulary, headed Ahnenin, in possession of Gallatin ; collated by Dr. Prichard
and Dr. E,. Gr. Latham. Notice of Arrapaho in Yol. II of: Transactions of -American
Ethnological Society, apparently made whilst this Yocabulary was out of the pos-
sessor's hand, as the language is there called Atsina.
ARRAWAKS.
13
AERAWAKS.
Indians of Guyana, on the banks of the Berbice and Surinam
Rivers. (See J. E. FABRIC Geographisches Magazin. Dessau and
Leipzig, 1785, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 3347.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Words compared with Yaio and Shebay, pp. 642, 643, of: JOAN. DE LAET,
Novus Orbis seu Descriptions Indies Occidentals, libri XYIII. Lugduni
Batavoriim, Elzevir, 1633, folio.
French translation, ibid., 1640, folio.
Deutsch Arawakisches Woerterbuch, zusaramengestellt durch THEOPHILUS
SCHUMANN (between 1748 and 1755). MS. in possession of the Moravian com-
munity at Paramaribo.
SMITH BAETON, New Yiews Comparative Yocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 697, 698.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLT, No. 585.
Journal of the Roval Geographical Society of London. London, 1832, 8vo.
Yol. II, pp. 247, 248 : Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (110) in
the four Indian Languages of British Guyana, Arawaak, etc., by WILLIAM HILL-
HOUSE, Esq., Surveyor. Keprinted in Vol. V of: R. Montgomery Martin's British
Colonial Library (West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12mo, pp. 155, 156.
Table comparing Twelve Words of the Arrowack, Atovay, Maypure, Moxos, and
Quichua. Appendix VI, p. 166, of : J. A. VAN HEUVEL'S El Dorado. New York,
J. Winchester, 1844, 8vo.
Arrawak Numerals, p. 30 of : BEENAN'S Missionary Labours in British Guyana.
London, 1847, 8vo.
A Dictionary, Arrowack and German Arrowakisch Deutsches Worterbuch.
Vermehrt, 1803, durch THEODOR SCHULTZ, in 1 vol. of 622 pp., 4to is de-
posited in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
SIE EOBEET H. SCHOMBUEGK, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Arawaak
Words, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the : Report of
the British Association. Swansea, 1848, 8ro.
Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Warau, Caribisi, and Accaway,
pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. BEETT'S Indian Tribes of Guyana. New York, 1852, 12mo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL ]S 7 OTICES.
C. QUANDT, Moravian Missionary among the Arrawacks, from 1769 to 1780,
Nachricht von Surinaine imd seiuen Eimvolmeru, sonderlich den Arawaken,
Warauen uud Karaiben und von der Sprache der Arawaken, von der
Gewaehsen und Thieren des Landes, und Geschaften der dortigen Missionaries
Goerlitz, s. a. (1807), 8vo. With map and two plates.
14
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 666674.
H. C. FOCKE, Jets over de Arrowakken en liunne taal, pp. 42 53 of: West-Indie j
Bijdragen tot de Bevordering van het Kennis der Nederlandsch West-Indische
Kolonien. Yol. I. Haarlem, 1855, 8vo.
Deutsche Arawakkische Sprachlehre, zusammengestellt durch THEOPHILUS
SCHUMANN, Missionair zu Klosterbergen (between 1748 and 1755). MS. in
possession of the Moravian community at Paramaribo.
G-rammatikalische Satze von der Arawakischen Sprache von THEODOE SCHULTZ.
MS. in 12mo, pp. 173.
Deposited by the author in the Library of the American Philosophical
Society at Philadelphia.
ATHAPASCA, ATHABASCA, TINNE, DTINNE.
This great family of nations, to which the Kenaize are nearly
related, occupies the whole of the northern limits of North
America, together with the Eskimos. The principal nations
belonging to the Athapasca family are the Chepewyans, Tahkals,
Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlatshanas, and Umpquas. The
Navajos and Ticorittas seem to belong to the same stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Phrases and Grammatical Forms (Chippewyan from Du PONCEAU'S collection),
pp. 215, 216, of Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana.
Vocabulary (Tacullies, Cheppeyans, Sussees), ibid., pp. 305367.
J. 0. E. BUSCHMANN, Uber die Verwandschaft der Kinai-idiome mit dem grossen
Athapaskischen Sprachstanime (mit Worttafel) , pp. 231 236 of the : Monatsbe-
richte der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1854.
J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm. Berlin, E. Diimmler,
1856, 4to, pp. 149 319. (From : Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-Historischen
Klasse der Konigliclien Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1855.) Contains: Wort-
verzeichiiiss der athapaskischen Sprachen, pp. 174 222 ; and : Grosses Wort-
verzeichiiiss des athapaskischen Sprachstammes oder der Kinai- athapaskischen
Sprachen (compared with Koloschian), pp. 223 320.
ATNA'S.
On the Atna, or Copper River^ in Russian America.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
. Some (] 1) Words compared with Ugalenze and Kolosch, p. 99 of Yol. I of : K E.
VON BAR, and GE. VON HELMEKSEN, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Kussischen Reichs
ATNAH ATTAKAPAS.
15
und der angraenzenden Laender Asiens.
1839, 8vo.
St. Petersburg, Press of the Academy,
ATNAH, OR KINN INDIANS.
Chin Indians ( Shoushwap, Flat-head). On the Caledonia River,
west of the Rocky Mountains.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Pp. 257, 258 of: ALEXANDER MACKENZIE'S Voyages from Montreal to the
Pacific Ocean, &c. London, 1801, 4to.
And p. 418 of the German translation of the same. Published at Hamburg,
1802, 8vo. Reprinted in A. Grallatin's Synopsis, Yol. II of the : Archseologia
Americana, p. 378, tinder XXIII (58). Also Yol. II of the : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Yocabularies I, XXIII, p. 118. And
partly in : Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 216.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 773.
Atnah and Noosdalum Words compared, p. 157 of E. G-. LATHAM'S Languages
of the Oregon Territory. Pp. 154166 of Yol. I of the : Journal of the Ethno-
logical Society of London. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
Atna, or Shoushwap Yocabulary in J. HOWSE'S Yocabularies of certain North
American Indian Languages Kutani, Flathead, Okanagan, Atna, pp. 199 206
of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Yol. IY. London, 1850.
Flathead (as dialect of Atnah) Yocabulary, ibid.
Okanagan (as dialect of Atiiah) Yocabulary, ibid.
Comparative Yocabulary f the Athapaskan and Kinai (among them the Atnah)
Languages, pp. 269 318 of: BUSCHMANN'S Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin,
1856, 4to.
ATTAKAPAS, OTAKAPA.
Indians of Louisiana.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. XY, 50 of: Comparative Yocabulary of Fifty -three Nations, pp. 305
367 of A. OALLATIN'S Synopsis in Yol. II of the : .Archseologia Americana ; and in
D, XY, pp. 95, 97 of Yol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.
J. S. YATEE, Analekten der Sprachenkuude. Leipzig, 1821, vo, No. 2, pp. 6372.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 758.
Yocabulary of the Atacapas, by MARTIN DURALDE. MS. in the Library of
the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
An Attakapa Yocabulary has been collected by JOHN E. BABTLETT, United
States Boundary Commissioner.
16 ATURE AYMARA.
ATUKE.
Indians of Venezuela, speaking the Saliva language; now
nearly extinguished.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. S. Grim, Saggio di Storia Americana. Roma, 17801784, Vol. Ill, 8vo.
AYMAUA.
Indians of Bolivia, the north-westerly provinces of the Argentine
Republic, and of Southern Peru. The Aymara language bears
a close resemblance to the Quichua ; many words are the same
in both languages, and their grammatical construction is likewise
very similar. Of the various dialects of the Aymara language
spoken by the Kanchis, Kasnas, Kollaguas, Karankas, Charcas,
Pacasas, and Lupakas, the two latter are the most cultivated.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. LTJDOVICO BERTONIO, Vocabulario en la Lengua Aymara. Impresso en la casa
de la Compania de Jesus en Juli Pueblo, en la Provincia de Chucuito, por
Francisco del Canto, 1612, 4to.
WOLFGANG BAYER, Oratio Aymara cum versione Latiua (et continuatione).
In : G-. Or. von Murr, Journal fur Kunst und Litteratur. Nurnberg (1775
1789, 17 vols. 8vo), Vol. I, pp. 112-121; Vol. II, pp. 277334; and
Vol. Ill, pp. 55 104. Wolfgang Bayer was a Jesuit missionary among the
Aymaras of southern Peru.
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 37, 177, and Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.
HERVAS, Aritrnetica, pp. 101, 102.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 89, 90.
HERVAS, Vocabulario, pp. 161 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 537, 538, 547.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnograpliique. Tab. XLI, No. 460.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I of : A. D'ORBIGNT,
L'Homme Americain.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. LTTDOVICO BERTONIO, Arte y G-rammatica copiosa de la Lengua Aymara.
Roma, Zannetti, 1608, 8vo. New edition, enlarged (by D. de Gualdo ?).
LUD. BERTONIO, Arte de la Lengua Aymara, con una sylva de phrases
de la misma lengua, y su declaracion en romance. Impressa en la casa de la
BANIWA 13ATEM-DA-KAI-EE.
17
Compania de Jesus en Juli Pueblo, en la Provincia de Chueuyio, por Fran-
cisco del Canto, 1612, 4to, pp. X, 1618.
BEUNET, Vol. I, p. 305, mentions : Libro de la vida y milagros de nuestro
Seiior Jesu Cbristo, en la Lengua Aymara y romance. Itnpressa en la casa
de la Compania de Jesus, etc., 1612, 4to.
P. LUDOYICO BEETONIO, Arte Breve de la Lengua Aymara, para introduction
del arte grande de la misma lengua. Roma, 1603, 8vo.
P. DIEGO DE TOEEES EUBIO, Arte de la Lengua Aymara. Lima, 1616, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 535546.
A. D'C-BBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 320323.
BANIWA.
Indians on the Amazon and the Rio Negro. Wallace names
Baniwas, of the Rio Isauna, of Tomo-Maroa, and of Javita :
of whom the first two speak kindred languages ; the third,
however, a language totally different from the others. MARTIUS
(VII, 233) calls them Manilas, Banibas, and Manivas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of ninety-eight "words), pp. 521 541 of: ALFEED E. WALLACE, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Keeve & Co.,
1853, 8vo.
BAHKE.
Indians on the Amazon. They speak a language similar to that
of the Baniwas of Isanno and Tomo-Maroa, and also of the
Uainambuas and Tariana.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of ninety-eight words), pp. 521541 of: ALFEED E. WALLACE, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Eeeve & Co.,
1853, 8vo.
BATEM-DA-KAI-EE.
Indians of the north-western part of California, on the head of
Eel River. The name above given is that of the valley in
which this and other bands reside.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary, by GTEOEGE GIBBS, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp.
434440.
D
18 BAYANO BETOI.
BAYANO.
Indians of the Isthmus of Panama, about the River Chepo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BERTHOLD SEEMANN, Vocabulary in his article on the Aborigines of the Isthmus
of Panama. Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1,
pp. 179181.
BEAVER INDIANS.
In the Hudson's Bay territory.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary, pp. 323328 of Vol. II of: JOHN M'LEAN'S Notes of Twenty-five
Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, Bentley, 1849. 2 vols. 12mo.
Duplicate Vocabulary in J. HOWSE'S Vocabularies of certain North American
Indian Languages Beaver, I and II ; Chipewyan, I and II ; Sikanni dialect of
New Caledonia, pp. 192 198 of Proceedings of : Philological Society, Vol. IV.
London, 1850.
BETHUCK.
Language of an extinct tribe of Indians of the Algonkin stock.
Dr. R. G. Latham had a vocabulary lent to him by Dr. King,
Secretary of the Ethnological Society, but without an account
of its origin. From internal evidence he satisfied himself that
it was Bethuck, i. e., aboriginal not Eskimo, nor yet Micmac,
but a branch of the Algonkin, per se. See Report of British
Association for the Advancement of Science Southampton
meeting.
BETOI.
On the River Cassanare, in New Granada, of the same stock as
the Ele and Yaruro Indians. The Situga and Airiko speak
dialects of the Betoi.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEBVAS, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 109.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tab. XLIX.
BLACKFEET. 19
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 106.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 645, 650.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI. No. 647.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. JOSEPH GUMILLA gave his grammatical notes on the Betoya language to his
successor, P. Jos. Padilla. Hervas prevailed upon Padilla, when retired from his
missionary labours, to write down what he knew of the grammatical structure
of this language. Adelung has used the letter of Padilla to Hervas.
Mithridates, Yol. III., part 2, pp. 640647.
BLACKFEET, SATSIKAA.
Pieds noirs ; Blood or Paegan Indians of the Algonkin stock ;
the most powerful tribe of the north-western prairies on the
sources of the Missouri and the Rocky Mountains. They are
divided into 1. Satsikaa, or Blackfeet proper. 2. Kahna, or
Blood Indians, " Indiens du Sang." 3. Piekans, Paegans, Pica-
neux. 4. Small Robes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
EDW. UMFEEVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay. Containing .... a
specimen of five Indian languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8vo. Table to p. 202.
German translation Mit Erauterungen, von E. A. W. Zimmermann.
Helmstedt, Fleckeisen, 1791, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254 (from UMFEEVILLE).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 770. Paegan ; Pied noir.
No. XXI, 56 (p. 373) of the Vocabulary to A. G-ALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc., in
Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana (from UMFEEVILLE) .
Eeise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblentz, 18391841, 2 vols.
4to. Vol. I, pp. 584 et seq. ; Vol. II, pp. 480486.
Blackfeet Vocabulary, Appendix, pp. 262265 to Vol f II of: QEO. CATLIN,
Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North American
Indians. London, 1841, 2 vols. 8vo.
Blackfeet Vocabulary (and Lord's Prayer), on the last two pages of the last two
leaves of: Oregon Missions and Travels over the Rocky Mountains, 1845-6,
by FATHEB P. J. DE SMET, e. S, J. New York, Edw. Duuigan, 1847, 12mo.
pp. 408, 4to.
Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America, No. 13, Z. Satsikaa
(Blackfeet), pp. 569629 of: HOEATIO HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United
States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, and
20 BODEGA BRAZILIANS.
C. IV, pp. 88, 90, 92, 94, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.
Affinities of the Satsika or Blackfeet Language with those of the Algonldns,
pp. CXIII, CXIV of Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Satsika, or Blackfeet Vocabulary (Upper Missouri), by J. B. MONCEOVIE, on
pp. 494505 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United States.
Miscellaneous vocabularies.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North -American Indian Languages Black-
foot I and II Nipissing, Shawnee, Brunswick. Pp. 102 113 of: Proceedings of
the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London^ 1850. Duplicate Vocabulary of
Blackfoot. The words of forms of speech were collected partly by Howse himself,
and partly by such missionary and commercial agents as were known to have
the requisite opportunities ; the same list of names and phrases being transmitted
to all.
BODEGA.
Indians of California, who call themselves Olamentke.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
KOSTBOMITONOV, Woerter aus zwei Sprachen Keucaliforniens (Bodega and Sever-
novzi),pp. 234 254 of Vol. I of: K. v. BAR und GB. v. HELMEESEN, Beitrage
Zur Kenntniss des russischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens. St.
Petersburg, 1839, 8vo. (Russian, German, and Bodega. Printed in Russian type.)
BRAZILIANS,
Or rather, Tupis. The different tribes of the Tupis are named,
and a map of the wanderings and extension of this once
numerous and mighty people given, in : DR. C. F. PH. VON
MARTIUS, Abhandlung von dem Rechtszustaiide unter den Ur-
einwohnern Brasiliens. Miinchen, F. Fleischer, 1832, 4to, map,
pp. 86, 20. (The Appendix gives, on 20 pp., a view of the
different Indian peoples, tribes, and hordes of Brazil.) Their
language was called " lingoa geraP (general language) by the
Portuguese, and eight different dialects of this language are
enumerated by VATER, viz., the dialects of the 1. Tappen, in
the province of Rio Grande do Sul. 2. Petiguaren (anthropo-
phagi), in the provinces of Paraiba and Ceara. 3. Tupinaba,
on the shores of the Rio Real, in the province of Sergipe.
4. Kaheten, on the shores of the river S. Francisco, in the
BRAZILIANS. 21
province of Pernambuco. 5. Tapininquins (the people first
met with by CABRAL), in the interior and on the coast of the
province of Espiritu Sancto, at Porto Seguro and Ilheos.
6. Tapigu<&, on the sea-coast from St. Paolo to Pernambuco.
7. Tummimioi and Tamoice, near Pdo Janeiro. 8. Tapinambas,
the largest of the tribes, in the provinces of Maranhao and
Gran Para, speaking the most generally diffused dialect.
MARTIUS divides the Tupis into north, south, west, east, and
central Tupis, and names, besides this people, 245 different larger
or smaller tribes living within the Brazilian empire.
ADELUNG calls the Tupis the North Guarany, and considers
their language as a part of the Guarany language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
"Aucuns Mots des Peuples de 1'Isle de Brezil." On four pages at the end of
Ant. Fabre's Extract of the MS. of PIGAFETTA'S Voyage, in the Ainbrosian
Library of Milan. This extract bears the title : Le Voyage et Navigation, faict
par les Espaignoles es isles de Mollucques, des isles quilz out trouve au diet voyage,
des roys dicelles, etc. Pari*, Simon de Colines, s. a., small 8vo. Black letter
(see BRUNET, Vol. Ill, p. 743).
The manuscript of Pigafetta was published in 1800, by Dr. Charles
Amoretti : Primo Viaggio intorno al globo terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della
navigazione alle Indie orientali per la via d'occidente, fatta sulla squadra del
Capitano Maggalianes negli anni 1519 1522, del Cavaliero ANTONIO PIGA-
FETTA. Milano, 1800, 4to.
French translation Premier Voyage autour du Monde par le Chevalier
Pigafetta, sur 1'escadre de Magellan, pendant les annees 1519 1522 ; suivi
de 1'extrait du traite de navigation du meme auteur et d'une notice sur le
Chevalier Martin Behaim, avec la description de son globe terrestre. Paris,
Jansen, 1801, 8vo, pp. 64, 415, maps and plates (the vocabulary, p. 241).
The extract of Fabre has been translated into Italian, and published in the
rare collection II Viaggio fatto dagli Spagniuoli atomo al mondo, s. 1. 1536,
4to (BRTJNET, Vol. IV, p. 603 before: Venezia, 1534, 4to?), wherein it is
printed on the last leaf. It is also reprinted in the first volume of Griam-
battis^a Ramusio Eaccolta di Navigazioni e Viaggi. Venezia, Giunti, 1550,
1559, 1556, 3 vols. folio, and often afterwards.
Brazilian words and a conversation in Brazilian are given by: JEAN DE LERY,
Histoire d'un Voyage fait en la Terre du Bresil, dite Amerique ; contenant
.... les mosurs et fa9ons de vivre etranges des sauvages Ameriquatns, avec un
colloque de leurlangue, s. 1. (a laRochelle). Printed by Anthony Chuppin, 1578,
8vo, engravings. Reprinted very often. Translated also into Latin, English,
Dutch, and German.
The Brazilian words and conversation are reprinted in the : Allgemeino
22 BRAZILIANS.
Historie der Reisen zu Wasser und zu Lande. Amsterdam, 1747 1774.
21 vols. 4to, maps, plates, in Vol. XVI, pp. 263 et seq.
Words from Lery and from Dutch notices, page 599, of: JOAN DE LAET, Novus
orbis seu descriptionis Indies occidentalis, Libri XVIII. Lugduni Batavorum,
Elzevir, 1633, folio.
Translated into French (Lei/den, Elzevir, 1640, fol.), and Dutch (Leyden,
Elzevir, 1644, folio).
Dictionariolum nominum et verborum linguae Brasiliensis maxime comunis
(collected by EMANTTEL DE MOEAES), cap. XI of: 1. Georgii Marggravii de
Leibstad, Tractatus topographicus et meteorologicus Brasilia, cum eclipsi solari,
quibus additi suiit illius et aliorum commentarii de Brasiliensium et Chilensium
Indole et lingua in : Historia Naturalis Brasilia (edid. Joan de Laet). Lugduni
and Amstelodami, F. Hackius, 1648, folio, pp. 276 et seq. And in: Q-. Pisonis De
Indise utriusque re naturali et medica, Libb. XIV. Lugduni Batavum, Elzevir,
658, fol., pp. 22 24. 2. O. Dapper, Die unbekannte neuwe welt. Amsterdami,
1673, fol., p. 412. (In Dutch, translated by Arnoldus Montanus : De nieuwe en
onbekende weareld. Amsterdam, 1671, folio). 3. John Ogil by, America. London,
1671, see pp. 485 487. 4. Had. Relandi, Dissertationes miscellanese. Trajecti
ad Rhenum, 1706, 1707, 3 vols. 8vo, Vol. Ill, p. 173.
Brazilian words are given by ANS. ECKAET, in his Additions to : Pedro Cudenas,
Description of Brazil, in: Christoph Gottlieb von Murr, Reisen einiger Mis-
sionarien der Gesellschaft Jesu in America. Nurnberg, Zeh, 1785, 8vo, pp. 614,
map and plates, pp. 419 et seq.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tab. XLIX et seq.
HEEVAS, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Tupi and Brasile volgare.)
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 98. (Tupi.)
SMITH BAETON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 450, 451, 458, 460, 603 (from Hervas, Laet,
Moraes, and Eckart).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 492. Brazilien, Lingoa geral,
Tupinamba, Tupi.
Diccionario Portuguez e Brasiliano ; Obra necessaria aos ministros do altar que
emprehenderem a conversao de tantos rnilhares de almas que ainda se achao dis-
spersas pelos vastos certoes do Brazil, sem o lume da Ee, e Baptismo, etc. Por
* * * Primeira parte. Lisboa, 1795, small 4to, pp. 79.
Some Brazilian songs are given in : Relacion de la Real Tragi-comedia con que
lo.s padres de la Compania de Jesus de Lisboa recibieron a Eelipe II de Portugal.
Lisboa, 1620, 4to.
A Glossary of Tupi Words, pp. 629 639 of: JOHN LtrccocK, Notes on Rio de
Janeiro and the southern parts of Brazil, taken during a residence of ten years
in that country, from 1808 to 1818. London, printed for Sam. Leigh, 1820, 4to
(some copies have the date altered into 1822), plates, pp. 639-
The author announces at the end of his book, that he is about to publish a
BRAZILIANS. 23
" Grammar and Dictionary of the Tupi Language." These works were never
published. The MSS. are deposited in the Library of the Geographical and
Historical Institute at Rio de Janeiro.
SIR ROBERT H. SCHOMBTJRGK, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of
the Lingua geral, in his Vocabularies of the Indians of Guyana, pp. 97, 98 of the :
Report of the British Association, Swansea Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8vo.
A Vocabulary of the : Langue de Nouros, Idiome de la Lengua geral, given
in : FRANCIS DE CASTELNATJ, Expedition dans les Parties Centrales de 1'Amerique
du Sud. Paris, A. Bertrand, 1850, 1851, 6 vols. 8vo. Vol. V, Appendix Vo-
cabulary, No. 13, pp. 285, 286.
Vocabulary of the Lingoa geral. Tableau and Remarks on the Vocabularies,
by R. G. LATHAM. Appendix, pp. 529 534 (534 536, Comparison of the
Lingua geral with the Tupi, Tupinamba, Mundrucu, Omagua, Guararri, and
pp. 539 541, with Languages of Guyana), of : ALFRED R. WALLACE, A Narrative
of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro, with Account of the Native Tribes.
London, Reeve & Co., 1853, pp. viii, 541.
Lista de Voces de la Lengua general del Brasil. Appendix to the MS.
Zeona Dictionary, in the possession of Colonel Joaquin Acosta, of Nueva
Granada.
A MS. " Vocabulario das Linguas Brasilica e Portugueza," on 200 pp.,
together with a " Doutrina e perguntas dos Mysteries principaes de nossa santa
Fe na Lingua Brazila," in Portuguese and Brazilian dialogues, stated to be written
by the Rev. P. MARCOS ANTONIO about 1750, is in the British Museum,
collection of King George IV, No. 223. (See FRED. FRANC. DE LA FIGANIERE,
Catalogo dos Manuscriptos Portuguezes existentes no Museu Britannico. Lisboa,
imprenta nacional, 1853, 12mo, pp. 184, 185.)
Vocabulario Brazileiro para servir de Complemento dos Diccionarios da Lingua
Portugueza, por Braz da Costa Rubim. Rio de Janeiro, 1853, 1 vol. 8vo.
Vocabulario Portuguez e Brazileiro, por Sr. Leonardo da Silveira das Dores
Castello Branco. MS. in the Library of the Historical and Geographical Institute
of Rio de Janeiro.
Vocabulario da Lingua geral, usada hoje em dia no Altos Amazonas. Por SR.
DR. ANTONIO GONCALVES DIAS. Pp. 553 576 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de
Janeiro, Tom. XVII.
Words in : Informacao dos Casamentos dos Indies do Brazil, pelo PADRE
JOSE DE ANCHIETA, pp. 254 263 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro.
Second series, Tom. I, No. 2.
Forty-three Words of the Language spoken by the Indians das Brenhas de Mu-
cury, pp. 451, 452 of : Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series, Tom. I,
No. 4.
Paraviana Words, pp. 252 256 of: Rela^ao Geographica-Historica do Rio
Branco da America Portugueza. Composta pelo BACHAREL FRANCISCO XATTER
RIBEIRO DE SAMPAIA, in : Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series,
Tom. VI, No. 18.
4-* BRAZILIANS.
Diccionario da Lingua geral dos Indios do Brazil; reimpresso e augmentado
con diversos Vocabularios e offerecido a S. M. Imperial, por JOAO JOAQUIM DA
SILVA GUIMARES. Bahia, 1854, pp. 106, 8vo.
Diccionario Portuguez e Brazileiro, contendo o Vocabulario dos Indigenas
Cayuas. Por Sr. BARAO DE ANTONINA. MS. in the Library of the Historical
and Geographical Institute of Rio de Janeiro.
GRAMMATIS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
JOSE DE ANCHIETA, Arte de Grammatica da Lingoa mais usada na Costa do
Brasil. Coimbra, 1595, small 8vo., pp. 120.
Extracts therefrom are given in Chapter X of the : Tractatus Brasilia of
Marggravius, in : De Lingua Brasiliensium e Grammatica P. Jos. de Anchieta,
e. 8. J., and in Relandus, in their above-mentioned works.
A Brazilian Grammar, Vocabulary, and Catechism, by EMANUEL VEGA, a Mis-
sionary, is mentioned by Adelung, in his Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, p. 442,
as written but not printed.
P. Luiz FIGUEIRA, Natural de Almodovar, Arte da Grammatica da Lingua
do Brasil. Lisboa, 1681, 8vo. Reprinted by Miguel Deslandes. Lisboa, 1687,
8vo, and .... 4th edition. Lisboa, 1795, small 4to.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 422446, 452457.
Langue Bresilienne, Monumens de la Linguistique du Brasil composes au XVII
Siecle. Note 6, pp. 355359, to : Une Fete Bresilienne celebre"e & Rouen, 1550
(Article de FERDINAND DENIS), in the : Bulletin du Bibliophile, 9me serie, Nos.
10, 11, 12. Paris, Techener, 1849, 8vo, pp. 355359.
See also the 9th note to the same article : La Chanson de Montaigne, Poesie
des Tupinambas. Drames des Missionaires, vers Tupiques composes par
eux, pp. 364379. Also printed separately. Paris, 1850. And : Parecer
da Commissao da Historia sobre o opusculo : Une Fete Brezilienne, etc.,
pp. 443449, Vol. XIV of: Revista Trimensal de Rio de Janeiro.
Grammatica da Lingua geral dos Indios do Brazil, pelo PADRE Luiz FIGUEIRA,
reimpressa por Joao Joaquim da Silva Guimares. Bahia, 1851, 1 vol. 8vo.
Memoria sobre a necesidade do Estudo e Ensino das Lenguas Indigenas do
Brazil. Por FRANCISCO ADOLPHO DE VARNHAGEN. MS. in the Library of the
Historical and Geographical Institute of Rio de Janeiro.
Remarks on the Language of the Tupis, in Section IX of : Historia geral do
Brazil, por FRANCISCO ADOLPHO DE VARNHAGEN. Vol. I. Rio de Janeiro,
Laemmert, 1856, 8vo.
Remarks on the Lingua geral and on Tupinamba, in Section VIII of: Historia
geral do Brazil, por FRANCISCO ADOLPHO DE VARNHAGEN. Vol.1. Rio de Janeiro,
Laemmert, 1856, 8vo.
Ethnographia Indigena, Linguas, Emigracoes, e Archseologia. Por Sr. F. A. DE
VARNHAGEN. Pp. 366376 of: Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second
series, Tom. V, No. 15.
BUGRE CADDOES. 25
Collecgao de Etymologias Brazilicas, por FE. FEANCISCO DOS PEAZEEES
MABANHAO. Pp. 69 80 of : Revista Trimensal do Rio de Janeiro. Second series,
Tom. I,No. 1.
BUGRE.
Brazilian Indians. BALBI, who calls them Bougres, says that
they are cannibals.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario da Lingoa Bugre (in Portuguese and Bugre), pp. 6077 of Vol.
XV of: Eevista do Institute Historico e Geographico do Brazil. Rio de Janeiro,
typ. Laemmert, 1852, 8vo.
CABAHOS.
Brazilian Indians of the Aldeas on the River Tocantins.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Cabaros (Aldeas du Tocantins). Vocabulaire, No. VI, pp. 273, 274
of: CASTELNATT, Vol. V j Appendice.
CADDOES. CADODAQUIOUS.
Indians on one of the branches of Red River. Their language
is spoken by the Nandakoes, Nabadaches, and Inies or Tachies.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 277.
No. 51, XVI, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305
367, and Supplementary Vocabulary of Caddo (six languages),
pp. 381397, by GEOEGE GEAT. Also, "Conjunctions," p. 2?2, and "Select
Sentences," in Caddo, pp. 409, 411, 413 of A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, in Vol. II
of the : Archseologia Americana.
Part of XVI, 51, reprinted under E, XVI, pp. 9698 of the Vocabularies
in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
CAPTAIN R. B. MAECY, U.S.A. Specimen of the Caddo and Witchita
Languages, pp. 709712 of Vol. V of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.
Caddo Vocabulary of Twenty Words, taken by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE,
p. 70 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to his Report on the Route
near the 35th Parallel, in Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington,
1855, 4to.
E
26 CAHITA CALIFORNIANS.
CAHITA.
In the northern parts of Mexico.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo. Vol. IV, pp. 262287.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua Cahita. Mexico, 1737, 12mo.
CAHUILLOS. CA-WI-OS.
Californian Indians residing near the Pacific, bet-ween the
sources of the San Gabriel and Santa Anna.
Cahuillo Vocabulary, taken by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 71 76 of
the Report upon the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant Whipple, Thomas Ewbank,
and Professor W. W. Turner, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Eeport on the
route near the 35th parallel, in Vol. II of the : Pacific Eailroad Keports. Wash-
ington, 1855, 4to, and
Twenty-eight Cahuillo Words compared with Kechi, Netela, and Zizh. Ibid.,
p. 77.
CALIEORNIANS
In general. See -
E. Q-. LATHAM on the Languages of New California, pp. 72 86 of Vol. VI of :
Proceedings of the Philological Society, London, 1850 ; G-. GIBBS' Observations
on some of the Indian Dialects of Northern California, pp. 420423 of Vol. Ill of :
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States. See also, pp. 99177 of the
same volume, the Journal of the Expedition of Colonel EEDICK M'EJEE, United
States Indian Agent, through North-western California, performed in the summer
and fall, 1851, by GEOKGKE GIBBS.
The United States Boundary Commissioner, JOHN E. BA.BTLETT, has taken the
following vocabularies in California :
Deguino or Comeya, at San Diego.
~Kechi. Mission of San Luis Eey.
San Luis Olispo. Mission of same name.
H.'hana,..\
Tehama...
Coluz Lin the Country watered by the Sacramento Eiver.
Noana ...
Diggers...)
Diggers of Napa Valley.
Makaiv of Upper California.
CAMACANS CANADA. 27
In a letter, lie says : " The name of Diggers is applied to all the California
Indians by the people (whites) generally, and it is difficult to get the real names of
the tribes. Half the time the natives will give one the name of their chief or
captain."
Languages of California, by ADAM JOHNSON. Pp. 406415 of Vol. IV of:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, gives vocabularies and words
of the following tribes : Tuolumne tribes, pp. 407 412. Co-co-noons on Mercedes
River, p. 413. Indians at King's Eiver and about Tulare Lake, pp. 413, 414.
Indians near to Mag Reading, on the upper waters of the Sacramento River,
pp. 414, 415.
CAMACANS.
Camacaes Mongoyoz, or Monxocos Indians of the Capitania de
Bahia, Brazil (MARTIUS, No. 11).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Reise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu Wied Neuwied nach Brasilien. Frankfurt
am Main, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, p. 327330.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 505, 50? (Camacans, Spix-
Martius).
CANADA.
Early travellers give words of the Indian tribes inhabiting
Canada under the name of Kanadians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN, Les Voyages de la Nouvelle France occidentale, dite
Canada, faites par De Champlain et toutes les decouvertes qu'il a faites
en ce pays depuis 1603 jusqu'au 1629, ensemble la relation de tout ce qui s'est
passe & la Nouvelle France en 1631. Paris, S. Lemure, Collet, 1632, 4to.
Contains the translations of: P. LADESME'S Doctrine Chretienne, in Canadian,
by Breboeuf; and of Prayers, by MASSE. Breboeuf's translation had been
printed at Rouen, 1610, 8vo.
Vater states that the edition Paris, Collet, 1627, 8vo contains the same
linguistic pieces.
HERYAS, Vocabulario Poliglotto, pp. 239, 240 (numerals).
SMITH BARTON, New Views, &c. Comparative Vocabularies.
Langues du Canada, pp. 499504 of Vol. VIII of: COURT DE GEBELIN,
Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Vocabularies taken from Sagard, Lahontan,
Lafiteau, and Louis Vincent. Reprinted, pp. 313 319 of: J. B. Scherer's Re-
cherches Historiques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet,
1777, 12mo.
28 CANISCHANA CARIBS.
CANISCHANA.
Warlike tribe of the Moxos stock, on the rivers Mamore and
Machupo, in Bolivia.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Ame"ricain, Vol. I, p. 164; II, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Somme Ame'ricain, Vol. II, pp. 245, 246.
CABAJAS.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Araguay (Carayas of
MARTIUS, No, 78).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Carajas (Rio Araguay), Vocabulaire, No. 4, pp. 268 270 of: CAS-
TELNAF, Vol. V, Appendice.
CARIBS.
Originally inhabiting the lesser Antilles, they settled, after their
expulsion, on both sides of the Orinoco, particularly in the
Sierra Paryme. There are -1. Caribs proper, who call them-
selves Karma, Kalina, or Kalinago ; the Galibis of French
Guyana are the principal tribe ; the Tuapoka and Kunaguara,
on the lower Orinoco, are closely related to the Galibis.
2. Yaoi, on the Island of Trinidad and the opposite shores of
Venezuela. 3. Guachire or Guaiqueries, on the Island of St.
Margarita and around Cumana ; they are the most advanced in
civilization. The Avarigotes, Purugotos, and Aclierigotes are
said to speak the Carib language likewise. Humboldt calls the
Caribs the "Buchares of the New World." The words used
by the men are often different from those used by the women.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Veritable Relation de tout ce que s'est fait et passe au Voyage que Mons. de
Bretigiiy fit a 1'Amerique occidentale. Avec une description des Mceiira et des
Provinces de tous les Sauvages de cette grande partie du Cap de Word ; un Die-
tionnaire de la Langue, et un avis tres necessaire a tous ceux qui veulent habiter ou
CA111BS.
29
faire habiter ce Pays-la., ou qui desirent d'y etablir des Colonies. Le tcut fait sur
ces lieux par PAUL BOYEK, Escuyer, Sieur de Petit Puy, Paris, 1654, small 8vo.
The " Dictionnaire," pp. 193 et seq.
P. PIEEEE PELLEPBAT, Eelation des Missions des E. P. de la Compagnie de
Jesus dans les Isles et dans la Terre ferme de I'Amerique meridionale. Avec une
introduction k la Langue des Galibis, sauvages de la Terre ferme de 1'Amerique
meridionale. Paris, Cramoisy, 1655, 12mo.
Brunet (Vol. Ill, p. 664) says that the "Introduction is sometimes
found separate from the Relation."
Voyage de la France equinoxiale enl'isle de Cayenne, entrepris par les Francois
en 1'annee 1652. Divisee en trois livres. Le premier contient 1'etablissement de
la Colonie, son embarquement et sa route jusqu'es a sonarrivee enl'islede Cayenne.
Le second, ce qui s'est passe pendant quinze mois que 1'on a demeure dans le pays.
Le troisieme traitte du temperament du pays et de la fertilite" de la terre et des
mceurs et fa9ons de faire des sauvages de cette contre*e ; avec un dictionnaire de la
jangue du meine pays. Par M. ANTOINE BIET, Superieur des Pretres qui ont
passe dans le Pays. Paris, Clousier, 1664, 4to.
Adelung, in his Mithridates (III, 684), says that the vocabulary of Biet is,
with a few exceptions, the same as the one given by Boyer.
Histoire naturelle et morale des Isles Antilles de 1'Amerique; enrichie de plu-
sieurs belles figures de raretez le plus considerables que y sont ecrites ; avec un
Vocabulaire Cara'ibe. Rotterdam, A . Leers, J 658, 4to.
This book, which has been several times reprinted and translated, is known
as : M. DE EOCHEFOET'S History of the Antilles. Brunet (II, p. 585) names
Louis DE POINCY and CESAR DE EOCHEFOET as the authors. Du Tertre,
who, at the same time prepared a history of the Antilles (published afterwards
at Paris, Jolly, 1667 1671, 4 vols. 4to), says that General Louis de
Poincy placed his notes and a vocabulary, made by P. EAIMOND BEETON,
in the hands of a young clergyman, M. de Eochefort of Rotterdam, who
had been twice in the West Indies. The dedication of the work is signed
" L. DE P.," which Barbier explains as Louis do Poincy.
Ecprints
Seconde edition : revue et augmentee. Rotterdam, 1665, 4to.
Histoire Naturelle des lies Antilles, par M. DE EOCHEFOET. Lyon, 1667,
2 vols. 12mo.
Dernier edition : augmentee par 1'autheur d'un Eecit sur .... la Yirginie, le
Marie Land et la Caroline. Rotterdam, 1681, 4to.
Is the edition of 1665, with but a new title and the " Eecit " annexed on
p. 44.
Translations
a. English:
The History of the Caribby Islands, with a Caribbian Yocabulary. Een-
dered into English by John Davis, of Kid welly. London, printed for
Thomas Dring and John Starkey, 1666, folio, pp. 8, 351, 10, 5,
Scarce, because a great proportion of the copies was consumed in the
great conflagration of London. The vocabulary, on teii not-numbered
pages, after p. 351.
30 CARIES.
b. German:
FranTcfurt-on-tfie-Main, 1668, 2 vols. 12mo. Ibid., 1688, 2 vols. 12mo.
c. Dutch :
Rotterdam, 1662, 4to.
Dictiormaire Cara'ibe-Francois et Francois-Caraibe, mesle de quantite de
remarques historiques pour 1'eclaircissement de la langue, par le P. RAYMOND
BRETON, de 1'Ordre des Freres Precheurs, Missionnaire. Auxerre, Q-illes Bouquet,
1663, 1664, 1665, 3 tomes in 2 vols. 8vo.
(Annexed is forming the volume of 1664 the same author's : Petit
Catechisme, ou Sommaire des trois premieres parties de la doctrine chre-
tienne, traduit du Francois en la Langue des Caraibes Insulaires. Auxerre,
Gilles Bouquet, 1664, 8vo.)
New titles. Hid., 1665, 1666, 2 vols. 8vo.
N.B. Ternaux Compans, in his : Bibliotheque Ame'ricaine (Paris, A.
Bertrand, 1837-8), No. 830, p. 143, names a : Dictionnaire Caraibe-Fransais,
par le PERE LECLEECQ Rennes, 1665 which must be a mistake.
Dictionnaire Galibi, pre"sente sous deux formes I. CommenQant par le mot
Francis ; II. Commei^ant par le mot Galibi ; precede d'un Essai de Grammaire
par M. D. L. S. (DE LA SAUVAGE). Paris, Banche, 1763, 8vo.
Good compilation from the above dictionaries. Makes part of: M. DE
PEEFONTAINE, Maison rustique, a 1'usage des habitants de la partie de la
France equinoxiale connue sous le nom de Cayenne.
Langues des Caribes et des Galibis, pp. 505 514 of Vol. VIII of : COURT DE
GEBELIN, Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. From Rochefort and P. Breton.
Reprint, pp. 319327 of: J. B. SC&EREE, Recherches Historiques et Geogra-
phiques surleNouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo.
Vocabulaire Francais et Galibi, a 1'usage de ceux qui voyagent dans les contrees
de la Guyane et a Cayenne, pp. 371 400 of: Voyage a la Guyane et a Cayenne,
fait en 1789 et dans les annees suivantes, par L. M. B., Armateur. Paris, Tom.
VI (1798), 8vo, pp. 400.
No actual voyage, but a mere superficial compilation made by Louis Prud-
homme, from other writers.
HERYAS, Vocabulario poliglotto, pp. 237, 241 (numerals).
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 112.
HERVAS, Origine, Ttxbb. L et seq.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies. (Galibi, Caraibes.)
WILL. HILLHOUSE, Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 10) in
the four Indian Languages of British Guyana. Caribisce, pp. 247, 248 of Vol. II
of the : Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. London, 1832,
8vo. Reprinted in Vol. V of : Montgomery Martin's British Colonial Library
(History of the West Indies, Vol. II). London, 1844, 12mo, pp. 155, 156.
COLONEL GALINDO, Carib Vocabulary (of Central America), seventeen words
CARIES. 31
and numerals, 1 10, p. 291 of Vol. Ill of the : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical
Society of London. London, 1833, 8vo.
ALCLDE D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8vo, Yol. II,
pp. 276399.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 655, 681, 696, 698.
(From Boyer, Pelleprat, Breton, and Biet, with comparison of the Taoi
from Laet, and the ArowacJc from Laet and Quandt.)
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique. Tab. XLI, No. 576 (Caribe pres du Cap Nord
Guyane Frar^aise He Dominique He Guadeloupe).
GUSTAVE DE EICHTHAL, Eapport des Langues Caribe et Polynesienne (pp. 253
269), and : Eapport des Langues Caribe et Ouolofe (pp. 990304), of Yol. II of
the : Me'moires de la Societe Ethnologique. Paris, Yeuve, Dondey-Dupre, 1845,
8vo ; with comparative vocabularies, viz., Caribe and Guarani, p. 256, note 1 j
Caribe and Polynesien, pp. 261, 262 ; Caribe, Sioux, and Polynesien, p. 264 ;
Caribe and Ouolofe, pp, 303, 304.
Some Charibbee Words compared with Mohegan and Hebrew. Pp. xxviii xxx
of: EZEKIEL SANFOBD, A History of the United States before the Revolution, with
some account of the Aborigines. Philadelphia, Anthony Finley, 1819, 8vo.
Same, compared with Mohegan, Greek, and Hebrew. Pp. 102, 103 of : ELIAS
BOTJDINOT, A Star in the West, etc. Trenton, N. J., 1816, 8vo.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Yol. I, p. 162 (Galibi, Kitemoca, Yaois),
Yol. II, p. 274 (Caribs), and Tab. to p. 276 (Galibi and Caribs of the Antilles).
A short Yaoi Yocabulary, compared with Shebay and Arrowac. Pp. 642, 643
of : JOAN. DE LAET, Novus orbis. Lugduni Batavorum, 1633, folio.
SIE EOBEET H. SCHOMBTJEGK, Comparative Yocabulary of Eighteen Words of
Twelve Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanakan stock, viz., Caribisi, Accaway, Macusie,
Arecuna, Soerikong, Waiyamara, Guinau, Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa,
Pianoghotto, and Tiverighotto. Pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of Eighteen Lan-
guages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana. (British Association
Eeport, Swansea meeting, 1848.) London, 1849, 8vo.
SIE EOBEET SCHOMBUEGK, A Yocabulary of the Maiongkong Language. Pp.
217223 of Yol. IY of the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London,
1850, 8vo.
SIE EOBEET SCHOMBTTEGK, Guinau Yocabulary, and affinity of words in the
Guinau with other languages and dialects in America, in his " Contributions to
the Philological Ethnography of South America." Pp. 208237 of Yol. Ill of
the : Proceedings of the Philological Society. London, 1848, 8vo.
Yocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Arawak, Accaway, and Warau.
Pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. BEETT, Indian Tribes of Guyana. New York, 1852,
12mo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. PIEEEE PELLEPEAT. See Vocabularies above.
32
CATAWBA CAYAPOS.
P. KAYMOND BRETON, G-rammaire Caraibe. Auxerre, Gilles Bouquet, 1668,
8vo.
D. L. S., Essai de G-rammaire G-alibi's. See Vocabularies above.
Mithridates, Yol. TIT, pp. 685 G96.
(From the extracts made by P. Sebast. Garcia from the MS. Grammar of
P. FEEN. XIMENEZ.)
On the Carib language as spoken by females, see : CHRESTOPH MEINEES Ges-
chichte des weiblichen Geschlechts. Hanover, Helwing, 17881800, 4 vols. 8vo,
Vol. I, pp. 47
CATAWBA KUTAHBA.
Indians of Tennessee and South Carolina.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from Smith Barton).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnograpbique. Tab. XLI, No. 794.
No. VII, 41, of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305 367 to: A. Gallatin's
Synopsis (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
(From SMITH BAETON and MS. authority of J. L. MILLEE.)
And No. D, VIIT. pp. 9496 of the vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society.
Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Waccoa of North Carolina, and
the Catawba of South Carolina. Pp. 57, 558 of Vol. V of : SCHOOLCEAIT'S Indian
Tribes of the United States.
CATHLASCONS.
On the Columbia River, Oregon. Nearly related to the Chinooks
and Haeltzucks.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary by JOHN SCOTJLEE, M.D. Pp. 243, 245, 247 of Vol. XI of the :
Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London. London^ 1841, 8vo.
CAYAPOS.
Indian tribe of the Aldeia S. Jose de Messamedes, in the Bra-
zilian province of Goyaz.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. E. POHL, Reise im Innern von Brasilien. Weimar^ 1832, 2 vols . 4to. Vol. I,
p. 447.
CAYU15ABAS CAYUGA. 33
CAYUBABAS.
Indians of " los Moxos/' in north-eastern Bolivia, on the Rivers
Mamore and Yacuma, Mission Exaltacion.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
HERYAS, Yocabulario poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 63, 64.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 102, 103.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 571, 576.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 466.
A. D'C-RBiaNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, pp. 162, 164 ; VoL II, p. 208.
GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Yol. II, pp. 255, 256.
CAYUGA, GOGOYANS, QUEUGUES.
Tribe of the Iroquois, and one of the original five nations.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES,
HERVAS, Yocabulario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals;.
SMITH BARTON, New Yiews Comparative Yocabularies, and p. 20 of the
Appendix to the edition of 1798.
And from him, No. V, e } of the : Yocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis
(Archseologia Americana, Yol. II, p. 376).
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, Part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335 (from BARTON and DEAN).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 799.
Cayuga Vocabulary, by Kev. ADAM ELLIOT, of Tuscarora. Appendix L, pp.
271 277, to : Henry R. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. New York,
Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo.
Also : New York State Documents, No. 24, in Senate, January 22, 1846 ;
and pp. 393 400 (Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois) of the same
work, edited as a book : Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo. And pp. 482
493 of Yol. II of : SCHOOLCRAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
An extract from this Vocabulary is given under R. Y. 4, p. 115, of the
Yocabularies in Yol. II of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
F
34 CElilS CHAYMA.
CERIS.
Indians of Sonora, occupying the Island of Tiburou, in the Gulf
of California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary has been taken by JOHN E. BAETLETT, United States Boundary
Commissioner (see : Personal Narrative, Yol. I, pp. 463 466).
CHAPACUBA, HITACHI.
Indians of Bolivia, near the Mission Carmen, on the Rio Blanco.
The Quitemoca tribe speak a different dialect.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OBBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. II, pp. 220, 221.
CHAYMA.
Indian nation of Venezuela, department of the Orinoco, on the
rivers Guarapiche, Areo, and Caripe, province of Cumana ; once
powerful, now nearly extinct. Their language is closely related
to the Tamanaca.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. FRANCISCO DE TATTSTE, Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua de los Indies
Chaymas, Cumanagotos, Cores, Parias y otros diversos de la provincia de Cumana
6 neuva Andalusia : con un tratado a lo ultimo de la doctrina Christiana y catecismo
de los misterios de nuestra Santa Fe ; traducido del Castellano en la dicha Lengua
Indiana. Madrid, Bern, de Villa Diego, 1680, 4to, pp. 16, 187.
A. VON HCMBOLDT and A. BONPLAND, Voyage aux Regions Equinoxiales du
Nouveau Continent. Paris, Scholl and Dufour, 1799-1840, 4 vols. 4to j and Atlas
in folio. Edition in 8vo, ibid, 1816-1831, 13 vols.
German translation :
A. VON HUMBOLDT and A. BONPLAND, E-eise in die Aequinoctial Gegenden
des Neuen Continents. Stuttgart and Tubingen, 1818, 8vo, pp. 213229,
258261.
A. D'OBBIGNY, L'Homme Americaii), Yol. II, p. 136.
CHEMEHNEVIS CHEPEWYAN. 35
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. FRANCISCO DE TATJSTE, see Yocabularies.
HUMBOLDT and BONPLAND, see Vocabularies.
CHEMEHKEVIS.
A band of Pah-utalis (Utahs of the River), belonging to the
great Shohonee family.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Chemehnevi Vocabulary , taken by LIEUT. A. W. WHIFFLE, pp. 7176 of
the Report upon the Indian Tribes, added to his : Report on the Route near the
35th Parallel (Yol. II of the: Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to).
CHEPEWYAN.
VATER calls this language the foundation of all the North
American dialects a kind of court tongue spoke a by the chiefs
of the different nations. The first attempt at a grammar is
said to have been made at Cazenovia, by a chief of the name of
Sahgah-jewagah-Bahweh. GALLATIN ranks theChepewyan among
the Athapascan family of languages a theory adopted likewise
by PRICHARD, LATHAM, and BUSCHMANN.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of the Indians on the north-west part of the Hudson's Bay, p. 206
211 of: ARTHTTB DOBBS, An Account of the Countries adjoining to Hudson's
Bay in the north-west part of America ; containing, etc. etc. to which are added
Y Vocabularies of the languages of several Indian nations adjoining to
Hudson's Bay. London, 1744, 4to, map, pp. 211. Reprint, pp. 181, 182, 183
of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
Example of the Chepewyan Tongue, pp cxxix cxxxii of : ALEX. MACKENZIE,
Voyages from Montreal through the Continent of North America
London, Cadell, jun., and Davis, 1801, 4to, maps, pp. viii, cxxxii, 412, 2. Reprint,
pp. 180, 181 183 of: Buschmann's Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin,
1856, 4to.
P. 145 of the German translation printed at Hamburgh, 1802, 8vo.
Pp. 304 310 of the French translation, by Castera. Paris, Dentu, 1807,
8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 424 (from Mackenzie).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 821.
Vocabulary after MACKENZIE, No. 6 (III) of the Comparative Vocabulary of
36 CHEllENTES.
Fifty-three Nations, in A. Grallatin's Synopsis, etc., pp. 305367 of Vol. II of:
Archseologia Americana. Reprinted under M. Ill, 1, p. 105 of the Vocabularies,
in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
PROFESSOR W. W. TURNER (from Mackenzie), Comparative Vocabulary of
Twenty-five Words of Chepewyan, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, Umkwa, Hoopah,
Tacully, Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes,
added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report (Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad
Reports), Washington, 1855, 4to.
Vocabulary of the principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the
Hudson's Bay Territory Chippewayan, pp. 323328 of Vol. II of: JOHHT
M'1/EAN, Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Territory.
London, R. Bentley, 1849, 3 vols. 8vo, pp. 308 and 328.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages Chepe-
wyan, I and II ; Beaver, I and II ; Sikanni Dialect of New Caledonia (pp. 191 198
of: Proceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1854).
Sir John Richardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition (London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo),
contains in Vol. II the/ollowing Vocabularies :
Vocabulary of the Chepewyan Tongue (by MRS. M'PHERSON), with Cree and
English Translations, pp. 387395.
Kutchin and Chepewyan Vocabulary, pp. 382 385.
J. H. LEFROT, a Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dogrib Words, pp. 400, 401.
MRS. M'PHERSON'S Vocabulary reprinted, pp. 174177, 182, 183 of: Busch-
mann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856. 4to.
Chepewyan, compared with Tahcully, Kutchin, Dogrib, Sussee, Tlatikanai, and
Umpqua (pp. 174 222) ; and, compared with the same, the Kinai languages,
Koloschian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269318 of: BTJSCHMANN, Athapaskischer
Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Grammatical Notices on the Cbippewyan Language, as Athapasca, are given
by A. GALLATIN, pp. 215, 216, 269 (Cheppeyan) of Vol. II of: Archaologia
Americana.
CHERENTES, CHAVANTES.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River Tocantins (and the
Araguay) MARTIUS, No. 75, 76, Xavantes, Xerentes. They
are total savages, and hostile to the other tribes of Brazilian
Indians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Cherentes ou Xerentes de la Riviere de Tocantins, province de G-oyaz
(Chavantes). Vocabulaire II, pp. 262264 of: CASTELNATT, Vol. V, Appendice,
and :
CHEROKEE. 37
Langue des Chavantes du Rio Tocantins (dialecte de celles des Cherentes), pro-
vince de Goyaz. Vocabulaire III, pp. 261268. Ibid.
CHEROKEE, CHILAKE.
The Cherokees, at tlie beginning of this century, still lived
south of the Ohio, in sixty-four towns or villages, divided into
Ottare (Mountain Cherokees) and Ayrate (Cherokees of the
Valley). They are now west of Arkansas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. AD AIR, History of the American Indians. London, 1775, 4to, pp. 43, etc.
German translation Breslau, 1782, 8vo.
SMITH BARTON, New Yiews, etc. Comparative Uocabularies.
T. SAT, Vocabularies of Indian Languages, pp. Ixx Ixxxviii of : Astronomical
and Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the
Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the
command of Major S. II. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo.
LTJIGI CASTIGLIONI, Yiaggio negli Stati Uniti dell' America Settentrionale, fatto
negli anui 1785, 1786, e 1787. Milano, 1790, 2 vols. 8vo. Yol. I, pp. 259266.
German translation, by A. M. Petersen. Memmingen, 1793, 2 vols. 8vo ;
Yol. I, pp. 322328.
Annual Report on the Civilization of the Indian Tribes. Neivhaven, 1824, 8vo,
pp. 5862.
No. VIII, 42, o'f the Comparative Vocabulary of fifty- three nations, pp. 307
367 of Yol. II of: Archseologia Americana (by BOTJDINOT and WORCESTER).
Reprinted under B, IX, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88 of the vocabularies in Vol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Pp. 398404 Supplementary Vocabulary in Cherokee (393 Words, by Rev.
S. A. WORCESTER) ; and pp. 914 - 420, Select Sentences, ibid.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 791.
The Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia possesses the
following MSS., presented to it by Thomas Jefferson :
Vocabulary of the Cherokee, by JUDGE CAMPBELL.
Vocabulary of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw, by BENJAMIN HAWKINS.
Vocabulary of the Creek, Chicasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw, by the same.
Cherokee numerals (1300 millions) by WILLIAM BUTLER. Pp. 209211,
Vol. II. of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
38 CHETIMACHA.
GBAMMAHS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Cherokee Alphabet. Boston, s. a., folio.
JOHN PICKERING, Remarks on the Indian Languages of North America, s. 1.,
1836, 8vo. Reprint of an article in the : Encyclopaedia Americana, Yol. VI
(1831).
German translation Ueber die Indianischen Sprachen Amerika's iibersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen begleitet yon Talvj (MRS. ROBINSON, wife of Dr. Robin-
son, of New York). Leipzig, Yogel, 1834, 8vo, pp. viii, 80. (Cherokee,
pp. 44 51, and note 5, pp. 58 72 on Sequoyah's Alphabet.)
JOHN PICKERING, A Grammar of the Cherokee Language. Boston, Mission
Press, 1830, 8vo.
Only four sheets (pp. 9 40) printed ; by the invention of Sequoyah's new
alphabet, the work was stopped in its further progress.
Kurre Grammatik der Tscherokesischen Sprache. Yon Dr. H. C. VON DEB
G-ABELENTZ, pp. 257 300 of : Hoefer's Zeitschrift.
Extracts from John Pickering's Grammar, and answers to grammatical queries,
by Rev. S. A. WORCESTER, missionary to the Cherokees, pp. 239250. Cherokee
Transitions, p. 276; and Notes to the Transitions, pp. 291294. New Cherokee
Alphabet, p. 301 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Yol. II of: Archseologia Ame-
ricana.
Rev. S. A. WORCESTER'S Remarks on the Principles of the Cherokee, in answer
to questions transmitted under the direction of the Bureau of Indian Affairs. Pp.
443_456 of Yol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
Cherokee Primer. Park Hill, Ark. Mission Press, John Candy, printer, 1840,
18mo, pp. 24. Reprinted, ibid., 1846, 18mo, pp. 24.
Cherokee Alphabet, p. 11 ; brief specimens of Cherokee Grammatical forms.
Pp. 12, 13, 30-32, 95, 96, 111, 112, 142144 of Yol I of: The Cherokee Mes-
senger (Nos. 1 XII, August, 1844, to May, 1846), Cherokee Baptist Mission
Press, 8vo.
Cherokee Alphabet, one sheet in piano. Printed at the same press. H. Upham,
printer.
CHETIMACHA.
Indians of Louisiana.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabulaire de la Langue des Chetimachas, pp. 73 84 of: J. S. YATER,
Analekten der Sprachenkunde. Leipzig, 2 s Heft, 2te Haelfte, 1821, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 759.
No. 49, XIY, of the : Comparative Yocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305
CHIAPANECAS CH1MANO. 39
367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana
(from DFRALDE), and No. D, XIV, pp. 9597 of Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.
A Vocabulary of the Chetimachas by MARTIN DURALDE. MS. in the Library
of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
CHIAPANECAS.
Indians of the Mexican province of Chiapas.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FR. DE CEPEDA, Artes de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinacanteca
Mexico, 1560, 4to.
CHIKKASAS, CHICACHAS.
Indians of Alabama, on the Mobile River, now of Arkansas.
The Conchas of Florida West spoke the same language; also
the Mobilians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
Pp. 38 et seq. in : J. ADAIR, History of the American Indians. London, 1775,
4to, pp. 464.
German translation reslau } 1782, 8vo.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
(Chikkasah, Conchac, Mobilian.)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 789.
No. IX, 44, of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, pp. 305
367 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana. (By A.
GrALLATiN, from a Chicasa boy.)
BENJAMIN HAWKINS, Vocabulary of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and
Choctaw. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 295302.
CHIMANO, KULINO, TIKUNA.
Indian tribes in the southern part of Hyabary, province of
Solimoes, Brazil. A part of the Chimanos live in the south of
Nueva Granada, on the shores of the Putumajo River, and are
called Tikuna.
40 CHIMMESYANS CHINUK.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 539.
CHIMMESYANS.
Indians of the north-west coast, from 55 30' to 53 30' north
latitude. Their language is similar to that spoken by the
Tacullies or Carriers.
WOBDS AND TO CABTTL ARIES.
Vocabulary, by JOHN SCOTTLEE, pp. 231, 233, 235 of: Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; and
H. XX, p. 103, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society.
CHINANTEKA, CINAKANTEQUA.
Indians of Oajaca, Mexico, in the partidos of Quiechapa, Jala-
log, and Chuapan.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FE. DE CEPEDA, Artes de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinacanteca.
Mexico, 1560, 4to.
CHINUK.
Indians of Oregon, on the right bank of the Columbia River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. S. RAPINESQTJE, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 134.
GABB. FEANCHEEE, Eelation d'un Voyage a la C6te Nord-ouest de 1'Amerique
septentrionale dans les aimees 18101814. Montreal, 1820, 8vo.
English translation, by J. V. Huntington New York, Kedfield, 1854,
I2mo ; and in A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., Appendix, Miscellaneous Vocabu-
laries, No. XXVIII, 63, p. 379 of Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana.
Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841,
Svo, pp. 243245, 247 : Vocabulary, by JOHN SCOTTLEK, M.D.
Tshinut Words; see Vocabularies of North- western America in: HOEATIO
HALE'S Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1840, 4to, pp, 569629.
CHIPPEWAY. 41
HALE, 1. c., mentions two dialects of Chinuk
Watlala (or Upper Chinooks), divided into Watlala proper (Cascade
Indians) and -Nihaloitih (Eclieloots) ; and Chinooks proper, divided into
Tshinuk, Tlatsap (Clatsops), and Wakaikams (Wahkyecums).
See also pp. 636 650 of the above work for a Vocabulary of, and Treatise
on, the " Tsliinuk" jargon, or Trade Language.
The Tschinuk (Watlala) Vocabulary of the above work (R) is reprinted
under U, XXVI, p. 121, of the : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II.
The Chiiiuk Vocabulary (Q) of the same work is reprinted under C,
XXVI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95,ibid.
Words used in the Chinook Jargon, pp. 147152 of: JOEL PALMER, Journal of
Travels over the Rocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia River, made
during the years 1845 and 1846, containing .... also .... about 300 Words of
the Chinook Jargon .... Cincinnati, P. A. and H. P. James, 1847, 12mo, pp. 189.
A short Vocabulary of the Clatsop Dialect. See pp. 343, 344 of : Ten Years in
Oregon, by D. LEE and F, H. FEOST, late of the Oregon Mission of the Methodist
Episcopal Church. New York, 1844, 12mo.
Vocabulary of the Chenook Language, as spoken about Fort Vancouver, pp.
336338 of: Rev. SAMUEL PAEKEE, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the
Rocky Mountains. Ithaca, New York, 1838, 12mo.
Chinook Vocabulary (Appendix), pp. 342 349 of: ALEXANDEE Ross, Adven-
tures of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia River ; being a Narrative of
the Expedition fitted out by John Jacob Astor, to establish the Pacific Fur
Company ; with an Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific.
London, Smith, Elder, and Co., 1849, 12mo, map, pp. 352.
(P. 349, Words of the Chinook Jargon.)
Vocabulary of the Chinook Trade Jargon, in Note 1 (pp. 548551) to the
article, " Philosophy of Utterance," pp. 543 551 in Vol. V of: SCHOOLCRAFT'S
Indian Tribes of the United States.
(Some further reports on this jargon are expected at Washington.)
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Pp. 562564 of: HOEATIO HALE'S Ethnography and Philology of the United
States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1847, 4to. Re-
printed on pp. 56 58 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II.
Pp. 635646 of: HALE'S Ethnography, etc. Article headed" The Jargon, or
Trade Language of Oregon." Reprinted (partly) on pp. 6270 of the : Transac-
tions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
CHIPPEWAY, OJIBWAY.
The principal dialect of the great Algonquin stock. The
eastern Chippeways are called Sauteux, or Ojibois.
42 CHIPPEWAY.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Chippeways, pp. 521, 522, of Yol. VIII of: COUET DE GEBELIN,
Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to.
A short Vocabulary of the Chippeway Language, in : JONATHAN CAEVEE, Three
Years' Travels through the Interior Parts of North America, for more than Five
Thousand Miles, containing an Account of the Great Lakes,
with a concise History of the Genius, Manners and Customs of the Indians
inhabiting the lands that lie adjacent to the Heads and to the Westward of the
Great River Mississippi London, 1778, 4to, map and plates, pp. 544 (the
Vocabulary, pp. 420 and following). Second edition, London, 1779, 8vo. Reprinted
at Dublin, 1779, 8vo. Third edition (by Dr. T. E. Lettsom), with an Account of-
the Author. London, 1781, 8vo. Reprinted at Philadelphia in 1789, 8vo.
Another Philadelphia reprint, by Joseph Cruikshank, 1789, 12mo, pp. xvi, 282.
(The Vocabulary on pp. 215 223.) A third Philadelphia edition, by Key and
Simpson, 1796, 12mo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 393 405.) A Boston edition,
1797, 12mo ; and one printed at Charlestown, Massachusetts, 1802, 12mo.
Reprinted again under the title : J. CAEVEE' 8 Travels in Wisconsin, from the
third London edition. New York, Harpers, 1838, 8vo, map and plates, pp. 376.
French translation, by M. de Montucla. Paris, 1784, 8vo.
German translation Hamburg, 1780, 8vo (the Vocabulary on pp. 350 and
following).
J. LONG, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, describing
the Manners and Customs of the North American Indians to which is
added, a Vocabulary of the Chippeway Language and a Table, showing
the Analogy between the Algonkin and Chippeway Languages. London, Debrett,
Egerton, and Co., 1791, 4to.
The English and Chippeway Vocabulary, pp. 218 295 ; the Comparative
Vocabulary, pp. 184211. (A. Gallatin calls this " Eastern Chippeway.")
German translation Hamburg, 1791, 8vo.
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
B. D. (BAUDEY DES LOZIEEES), Voyage k la Louisiane et sur le Continent de
1'Amerique septentrionale, fait dans les annees 1794 & 1798. Paris, Dentu,
1802, 8vo. (The Vocabulary on pp. 353 and following.)
PEOFESSOE T. SAT, Comparative Vocabulary of Various Dialects of the Lennape
Stock of North American Indians (Forty-five Words in Fifteen Dialects, among
them Chippeway). Pp. 135 145 of: DE. EDWAEDS' Observations on the Mohe-
gan Language, published by John Pickering, in Vol. X of the second series of:
Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society. Boston, Phelps and Farnham,
1823, 8vo. Reprinted at Boston, by Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo.
Annual Report on the Civilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven, 1824, 8vo,
pp. 55 57.
Indian Vocabularies Chippeway or Chippewa. Part 4, pp. 449 459, of the
CHIPPEWAY. 43
Appendix to Vol. II of: WILL. H. KEATING, Narrative of an Expedition to the
Source of the St. Peter's River, Lake Winnepeck, Lake of the Woods, etc. etc.,
performed in the year 1823 under the command of Stephan H. Long.
Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. Svo, map and plates. Reprinted at
London, by Whittaker, 1825, 2 vols. Svo.
Vocabulary of the Algic, or Chippeway Language, pp. 487 493 of the Appendix
to : THOMAS L. MCKENNEY, Sketches of a Tour to the Lakes, of the Character
and Customs of the Chippeway Indians, and of Incidents connected with the
Treaty of Fond du Lac ; also, a Vocabulary of the Algic, or Chippeway Language,
formed in part, and, as far as it goes, upon the basis of one furnished by the Hon.
Albert Grallatin. Baltimore, Fielding Lucas, 1827, Svo, plates, pp. 494.
Ojibway Words and Phrases, pp. 399418 of: DR. EDWIN JAMES, A Narrative
of the Captivity and Adventures of John Tanner, United States Interpreter at the
Saut de St. Marie, during Thirty Years' Residence among the Indians. New York,
Carvill, 1830, Svo, plates, pp. 426 (pp. 294312, 399417).
HENEY R. SCHOOLCRAFT, A Vocabulary of Words and Phrases in the Chippe-
way Language (comprising the Letters A and B, and stating at the end that cir-
cumstances prevented the insertion of the remainder of this Vocabulary), on
pp. 203 210 of his : Narrative of an Expedition through the Upper Mississippi
to Itaska Lake, the actual Source of this River. New York, Harpers, 1834, Svo,
maps, pp. 307.
Words under IV, 8, of: Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations, in
A. Gallatin's Synopsis in : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, "pp. 305367. Re-
printed under A, IV, pp. 78, 80, 82, of Vol. II of : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions. (From SCHOOLCRAFT, JAMES, and KEATING.)
Eastern Chippeways, under IV (e) of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Sixteen
Tribes. Ibid., pp. 369 (from J. LONG). Reprinted under N, IV, 3, p. 107 of the
Vocabularies in: American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II, pp. 414 4
416. Ibid. " Select Sentences."
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 415, 416 (from CARYEE, LONG, and BATJDRT
DES LOZLKRES).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 818 (Chippeway propre ou
Ochippeway) .
Reise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN ztr WIED in das Innere Nord Amerika's
in den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol.
II, pp. 592599.
Translated into French. Paris, Bertrand, 1843, 3 vols. Svo.
Sauteu or Ogibois Vocabulary (Eastern Chippeways), in the Vocabulary of the
Principal Indian Dialects in use among the TVibes in the Hudson's Bay Territory,
pp. 323-328 of Vol. II of: JOHN M'LEAN, Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service
in the Hudson's Bay Territory. London, Bentley, 1849, 2 vols. 12mo.
REV. M. HECKEWELDER, Comparative Vocabulary of Lcnut-Lennape proper,
44 CHIPPEWAY.
the Miusi Dialect, the Mahicanni, Natick, or Nadic Chippeway, Shawano, and
Nanticoke. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.
Numerals of I. Ojibway of Chegoimegon, by WILLIAM W. WAEEEN (1
billion, and 110 in the Pillagers, or Northern Ojibway Tongue), pp. 211
213. II. Chippewa of the Upper Mississippi, by M. FAIRBANKS (1100,000),
pp. 216218. And Ojibway (Vocabulary), Analytical Forms, with Comments,
pp. 412416, 417419 of: SCHOOLCEAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. III.
Vocabularies I, Algonquin Group. Ojibwa of St. Mary's, by G-. JOHNSTON;
Ojibwa of Grand Travene Bay, by KEV. P. DOUGHEBTY ; Ojibwa of Saganaw, by
G. MOEAN; Ojibwa of Michilimackinac, by W. JOHNSTON, on pp. 458 469 of
Vol. II of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
REV. FEED. BAEAGA, A Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language, explained in
English. This language is spoken by the Chippewa Indians, as also by the Otawas,
Potawatamies, and Algonquius, with but slight differences. For the use of mis-
sionaries, etc. Cincinnati, printed by Jos. E. Heemann, 1853, 12mo, pp. vii, 662.
Comparative Vocabulary of Pamptico, Natic, and Chippewa (of Michigan),
pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of : SCHOOLCRAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
A Lexicon of the Algonquin Language, part 1, Chippewa, A, pp. 565 569. Ibid.
Comparative Chippewa and Mahican Vocabulary of Twenty-two Words, p. 620.
Hid.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
EDWIN JAMES, Outline of the Paradigma of a Chippeway Vocabulary ....
s. a Albany, folio.
A. BINGHAM, Ojibwa Spelling-book, according to the improved orthography of
Edwin James. Albany, 1825, 8vo.
HENEY A. SCHOOLCEAFT, Two Lectures on the Chippewa Substantive. Pp.
169202 of: Narrative of an Expedition .... to Itasca Lake. New York,
Harpers, 1834, 8vo, map, pp. 307.
Part of a course of Lectures on the Grammatical Structure of the Indian
Languages, delivered before the St. Mary's Committee of the Algic Society.
The continuation of these lectures (Lectures III and IV) is published in:
HENEY A. SCHOOLCRAFT, Oneota, or the Eed Race of America New
York, Burges, Stringer, and Co., 1844-45, 1 vol. (Nos. 18) 8vo, pp. 512
(pp. 93104, 221 232) .
GALLATTDET, Picture-definer and Reading-book. Boston, Crocker and Brewster,
for the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1835, 12mo, pp.
123.
Ojibwa Spelling-book, designed for the use of native learners. Printed for the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions. Boston, Crocker and
Brewster, 1835, 12mo, second edition, pp. 127. Third edition, ibid., 1846, 12mo,
pp. 96.
CH1QUITOS. 45
Chippeway Nouns (from SCHOOLCRAFT'S Lectures), pp. 244 248 of: A. Gal-
latin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana. Chippewa Tran-
sitions, ibid., p. 289.
KEY. G-. A. BELCOURT, Principes de la Langue des Sauvages appeles Sauteux.
Quebec, imprimerie de Frechette and Co., 1839, 12rno, pp. 146.
A Chippeway Primer, compiled by the KEV. PETER DOUGHERTY. Printed for
the Board of Foreign Missions of the Presbyterian Church. New York, John
Westall, 1844, 12mo, pp. 44. Second edition, ibid., 1847, 12mo, pp. 123.
Short Reading Lessons in the Ojibway Language, translated by the KEY. PETER
DOUGHERTY. New York, John Westall and Co., 1847, 12mo.
JOSEPH HOWSE, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined an
Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, Rivington, 1844, 8vo, pp. xx, 324.
EDWIN JAMES, M.D., Essay on the Chippeway Language. Head before the
American Lyceum, at the third annual meeting, in the city of New York, May 3rd,
1833, pp. 7380 of No. V of: The North American Savages (September, 1835),
8vo.
KEY. FRED. BARAGA, missionary at L'Ance, Lake Superior, A Theoretical and
Practical Grammar of (he Otchipwe Language. Detroit, printed by JabezFox,
1851, 12mo, pp. 576.
The Transitions called " Chippeway," in : J. S. VATER, Analekten der
Sprachkunde. Leipzig, 1821, 8vo. Heft 2, pp. 15 20, are " Delaware."
KEY. THOMAS HURLBUT, A Memoir on the Inflections of the Chippewa Tongue.
Pp. 383396 of Yol. IV of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
Conjugation of the Verb " Waub." See pp. 291 388 of : SCHOOLCRAET'S Indian
Tribes of the United States.
Original Words of Indian Songs literally translated. Chippewa. Pp. 559
564, ibid.
Etymology (Chippewa), pp. 593 600, ibid.
Some Data respecting the Principles of the Chippewa and Mahican Languages,
in a series of letters written during the years from 1822 1827. Chippewa. Pp.
601-618, ibid.
CHIQUITOS.
In South America, on the Upper Paraguay, between the Chaco
and Brazil.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Gilii, Saggio, etc., Vol. Ill, pp. 244248, 334-339 (from the MS. notices of
PADRE CAMANO).
HERYAS, Vocabolario, pp. 163 et seq.
46 CHOCTAW.
HEEVAS, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 99101.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 570.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 463.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words. Vol. I, p. 164, of: ALCIDE
L'Homme Americaiu. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. II, p. 136, tbree words of
the Cuciguia dialect.
Vocabulaire, No. XIV, Langue des Cbiquitos, in : FE. DE CASTELNATJ, Expedi-
tion, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 286288.
Vocabulario de la Lengua Chiquita. Parte l a : Espanol y Chiquito. 1 yol. 4to,
of nearly 700 pages. Parte 2 a : Cbiquito y Espafiol del Pueblo de S. Xavier (where
it was composed by the Jesuits) . One vol. folio, of about 700 pages, two columns
on every page. MS. in the possession of M. Alcide D'Orbigny.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
GILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 244-248, 334339.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp 559563.
D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 134136 ; Vol. II, pp. 161
163, and p. 180 (Curuminaca tribe), p. 182 (Covarecatribe),p. 184 (Curaves tribe),
p. 185 (Tapiis tribe).
CHOCTAW, CHAHTAH.
Indians of the Appalachian stock. Their language is closely
related to those of the Chikasas and of the Muskoghees. The
French in Louisiana used the Choctaw language for their com-
munications with other Indian tribes. They live now west of
Arkansas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
LUIGI CASTIGLIONI, Viaggio negli Stati Uniti dell' America settentrionale, etc.
Milano, 1790, 2 vols. 8vo (Vol. I, pp. 259266).
German translation by A. M. Petersen. Memmingen t Seiler, 1793, 8vo
(pp. 322328).
SMITH BAETON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. III. part 3, pp. 292, 298, 304, 305.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XI, No. 790.
Choctaw Numerals, by JOHN DEENNEN, United States Agent, pp. 204 206 of
Vol. II. of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
Some Words from the Language of the Choctaws (18, of which 14 are numerals),
by LEWIS BEANTZ, 1785, p. 347 of Vol. Ill of the same work.
CHOLO. 47
No. IX, 43, of the : Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307367) to A. GALLATIN'S
Synopsis in Vol. IT of: Arehaeologia Americana (from Wright's Spelling-book),
and : Chocta Vocabulary, by ALFRED WEIGHT, ibid., pp. 371396. Also : Com-
parative Vocabulary of the Chocta and Muskoghee (97 words out of 600 which
have certain affinities), ibid., pp. 405, 406.
No. IX, 43, reprinted as B, X 1, pp. 82, 84, 86, 88, of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II. of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The com-
parative vocabulary, ibid., p. cxii.
MS. Vocabularies of the Cherokee (over Hill) and Choctaw ; and of the Creek,
Chickasaw, Cherokee, and Choctaw both by BENJAMIN HAWKINS are in the
Library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 300302 (from ADAIE, pp. 38, 39, 41, 44,
68, 7073).
A Spelling-book written in the Chahtah Language, with an English translation.
Second edition, revised. Cincinnati, printed by Morgan, Dodge, and Fisher, 1827,
8vo.
Chahta Holisso. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, for the American Board of
Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1830, 12mo, pp. 108. Third edition, revised,
ibid., 1835, 12mo, p. 72.
Chahta Holisso, it ini Anumpuli ; or, the Choctaw Header. For the use of
native schools. Union, printed for the American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign Missions, by John F. Wheeler, 1836, 12mo, p. 123.
CYEUS BYINGTON, An English and Choctaw Defmer for the Choctaw Academies
and Schools .... 18mo, pp. 252. New Yurie, 1852.
CTEUS BYINGTON, Choctaw Vocabulary, pp. 62 64 of the : Eeport upon the
Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Keport in Vol. II of :
Pacific Eailroad Eeports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
CHOLO, CHOCO.
Indians of Nueva Granada, from the Gulf of San Miguel to
the Bay of Choco, and thence, with a few interruptions, to the
northern parts of Equador.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Cholo Vocabulary, by DE. EDWAED CULLEN ; and Comparison of the Cholo
with the Languages of the Oronoco, by DE. E. Gr. LATHAM, p. 190 of part 2 of
Vol. XX of : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society. London, John Murray,
1851, 8vo.
Pp. 179 181 of: BEETHOLD SEEMAN, The Aborigines of the Isthmus of
Panama, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1.
48 CHONDAL CHOW-E-SHAK.
CHONDAL.
Language spoken by the Indians of Chontales, on the northern
shores of the Lake of Nicaragua.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E. GEO. SQUIEE, Nicaragua New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo.
Vol. II, pp. 314, 324, 325 (from JTJL. FROEBEL), and : Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106110.
CHOROTEGANS.
Indians of Nicaragua to the north of the Mexican inhabitants
of Nicaragua (the Niquirans), between the Pacific Ocean, Lake
Managua, and the Gulf of Fonseca. They are divided into
Chorotegans proper, or Dirians ; Nagrandans, in the plain of
Leon ; and Orotinans, in the district of Guanacaste.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E. GEO. SQUIEE, Nicaragua New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo.
Vol. II, pp. 320 333, Dirian from Masaya ; and : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill, part 1, pp. 101, 106110.
CHORTI.
On the banks of the Motagua, in Guatemala. A language
related to the Maya and Poconchi.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A short Vocabulary, taken by JOHN L. STEPHENS, at Zacapa, is given in:
A. Gallatin's Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico. (Vol. I of: Trans-
actions of the American Ethnological Society.) New York, Bartlett and Welford,
1845, 8vo, pp. 9, 10.
CHOW-E-SHAK.
Indians of north-western California, on the head of Eel River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
G-EOEGE Q-IBBS, Vocabulary, Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. Ill, pp. 434440.
CHUNTAQUIROS COCHIMI. 49
CHUNTAQUIUOS, PIEOS.
Brazilian Indians in the neighbourhood of Santa Rosa, in the
province of Goyaz.
WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Chuntaquiros ou Piros (Simisenchis) du Tillage de Santa Rosa,
Vocabulary, No. XVII, pp. 290, 291 of : CASTELNATJ, Vol. V, Appendice.
CINALOA, OR SINALOA.
According to HERVAS, three languages were spoken by the Indians
of the Mexican State of Cinaloa the Tubar, the Zoe, and the
Hiaquij which latter was the principal one. DE SOUZA mentions :
"Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, por P. Luis BONIFAZ.
BONIFAZ was missionary to the Indians of Cinaloa, between the
years 1602 and 1644. He died in the latter year at Valladolid,
in Michoacan; but probably left his MSS. in some of the reli-
gious establishments of the city of Mexico.
COBEU.
Indians on the Amazon.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521541 of: ALFRED R. WALLACE,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Keeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.
COCANAS.
Brazilian Indians on the Upper Amazon (Cocuannas of MAR-
TIUS? No. 224).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Cocanas de Nauta. Vocabulaire, No. XIX, pp. 293, 294 of:
CASTELNAU, Vol. V, Appendice.
COCHIMI.
Indians of Upper California, near the Mission St. Xaverio.
Related to the Laymons.
H
50 COCOMARICOPAS COCONUCOS,
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et eeq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 113.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 125, 233237 (Dialect of St. Gertrudis).
HEEVAS, Origine, Tab. L et seq,
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 185, 198, 199, Cochimi and Cochimi-Laymon
of the Missions S. Xaverio and Jos. Comandu ; S. Borgia and S. Gertrudis (from
HEEVAS). ^
BALBI, Atlas Etlinographique, Tab. XLI, No. 826.
A. FOEBES, History of California. London, 1839, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 192198.
COCOMAEICOPAS.
Indians of Sonora, near the River Gila.
Jf
t
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Short Vocabulary (Apache ?), collected by LIEUTENANT EMOBY, p. 109 of Vol.
II of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
A Vocabulary of the Cocomaricopa Language has been taken by JOHN R. BAET-
LETT, the United States Boundary Commissioner.
Cocomaricopa Vocabulary, by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE, p. 94 of the
Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Route near the 35th
Parallel, in Vol. II of : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
COCONUCOS.
Indians of the province of Gudinamarca in Nueva Granada.
The Polindaras and Guambias are kindred tribes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Notices and some Words of the Coconucos, Polindaras, and Guambias, given on
pp. 4345 of: TOMMASO C. DE MOSQUEEA, Memoria Sobre la Geografia Fisica
y Politica de la Nueva Granada. Nuevo York, imprenta de J. W. Benedict,
1852, 8vo.
English translation, by Theodore D wight. Ibid., 8vo.
COCOPAS COMANCHES. 51
COCOPAS.
Indians of Sonora, between the Rio Gila and the Gulf of Cali-
fornia.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary has been taken by JOHN R. BARTLETT, United States Boundary
Commissioner.
COMANCHES.
Indians of Texas, belonging to the great Shoshonee or Snake
family. They range from the sources of the Brazos and Colorado,
rivers of Texas, over the great Prairies, to the waters of the
Arkansas and the mountains of Rio Grande. They are also
called Hietans, Jetans, and Paducas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Comanche Names and Numerals, on pp. 273, 274 of: WM. BOLLAEKT'S Ob-
servations on the Indian Tribes in Texas, in Yol. II of : Journal of the Ethno-
logical Society of Londoai. London, 1850, 8vo.
DR. HEINKICH BERGHAUS, liber die Yerwandtschaft der Schoschonen, Komant-
schen und Apachen, in : Physikalischer Atlas ; Geographisches Jahrbuch, 1851.
N. III. Gotha, Justus Perthes, 4to, pp. 48 62, map. Yocabulary, pp.
5153.
CAPTAIN R. B. MARCY, Yocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Coman-
ches and Witchitas. Appendix H, pp. 273 276 of : Eandolph B. Marcy and Geo.
B. M'Clellan, Exploration of the Red River of Louisiana, in the year 1852. Wash-
ington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8vo. (33rd Congr., 1 Sess., House Exec.
Doc.)
Comanche Yocabulary, by ROB. S. NEIGHBORS, ESQ., pp. 494 505 of Yol. II
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
ROB. S. NEIGHBORS, The Na-ii-ni or Comanche of Texas ; their Traits and
Beliefs, and their Divisions and Intertribal Relations. Ibid. t pp. 125 134.
(Comanche Numeration, pp. 129, 130.)
Comanche Yocabulary, taken from Jesse Chisholm, a Cherokee, by LIEUTENANT
A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 71 76 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes; added to
his Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel, in Yol. II of: Pacific Railroad
Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
A Comanche Vocabulary has been collected by JOHN R. BARTLETT, the United
States Boundary Commissioner.
52 CONCHO CORA.
CONCHO.
A dialect of the Mexican language. Bishop JUAN ESPINOZA,
Franciscan, of the province of Zacatecas (Mexico), and Bishop
of Santiago de Chile, wrote, according to ARLEGUI and DE SOUZA :
Arte y Vocabulario completo del Idioma Concho.
CONIBOS.
Indians of the Pampa del Sacramento, on the left banks of the
Ucayale.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Words, pp. 286 and 292 of: Indiens Conibos, par M. DE SAINT CEICQ, pp. 274
295 of Tome VI of the fourth series of: Bulletin de la Socie'te' de Geographic.
Paris, A. Bertrand, 1853, 8vo.
COPEH.
Indians of north-western California, at the Putor Creek.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. Ill, pp. 428434.
CORA.
Indians of New Mexico, near the Missions of Najarit. Their
language resembles very much the Mexican.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. Jos. DE ORTEGA, Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Cora. Mexico, 1732,
4to. Fifty-two leaves.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 121.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 111113.
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 48, 49, 118, 120, 121, 178, Tabb. XLIX,
L, LI et seq. (Gives also Nayarit words.)
J. S. VATER, Proben, etc. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo, pp. 353373.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 703.
COROADOS COSTANOS.
53
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Doctrina Cristiana, Oraciones, Confesonario, Artc y Vocabulario de la Lengua
Cora, por P. JOSE ORTEQA. Printed by the Bishop of G-uadalaxara, Sr. Don
Nicolas Gomez de Cervantes, 1729.
Vocabulario del P. JOSEPH DE OETEGA. Mexico, 1732, 8vo. The preface
contains grammatical notices.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 131138.
COROADOS, COHOPOS.
Two Indian tribes on the banks of the rivers Paraiba and
Pomba, in the Brazilian provinces Bio de Janeiro and Miiias
Geraes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ESCHWEGE, Journal fur Brasilien. Weimar, 1818, 8vo, 1 s Heft.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 498, 499.
COKREGUAJES.
Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly
departamento del Assuai).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario Correguaje Espanol. Taken by the Presbytero MANUEL MAEIA
ALBIS, in 1854. Pp. 21 24 of: Los Indios del Andaqui. Popayan, 1855, 16mo.
COSTANOS.
Californian Indians on the Bay of San Francisco, and formerly
under the supervision of the Mission Dolores. There were five
tribes : A.h-wash-tes, Ol-hones (called, by the Spaniards, Cos-
tanos, or, Indians of the coast), Al-tah-mos, Ro-mo-nans, and
Tu-lo-mos. A few other small tribes round the Bay speak the
same language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Costanos Vocabulary, by PEDEO ALCANTARA, in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes
of the United States, Vol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Vocabularies, pp. 494
505, and Note, p. 506.
54 COSTA RICA CREOLE.
COSTA RICA, TALAMANCA.
Many Indian tribes inhabit Costa Rica, and especially the part
thereof bordering on the Atlantic, the so-called district of Tala-
manca. GALINDO names six, JUARROS twenty-six different
tribes and nations.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
DR. KARL SCHERZER, Sprache der wilden Indianerstamme der Blancos, Valientes
und Talamanoas entlang der Ostkiiste zwisehen dem Rio Zent und Bocca del Toro
im Staate Costa Eica. Pp. 2835 of Vol. XXV of: Sitzungsberichte der
Philosophisoh-Historischen Klasse der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften.
Vienna, 1855, 8ro. Also, with separate title : Sprachen der Indianer Central
Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.
Also, pp. 573576 of: Die Republik Costa Rica in Central Amerika mit
besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Naturverhaltnisse und der Frage der Deutschen
Auswanderung und Colonisation. Reisestudien und Skizzen aus der Jahren 1853,
1854, von DR. MORITZ WAGNER und DR. KARL SCHERZER. Leipzig, 1855, 8vo.
CREOLE
Is the general name given in the West Indies to Negro corrup-
tions of European languages. Thus the Negroes of Surinam,
originally an English colony, speak Creole, or Negro-English ;
those of Guadaloupe and Martinique, French colonies, Negro-
French, etc. ; and, consequently, the following divisions naturally
present themselves : Negro-English, Negro-Portuguese, Negro-
Dutch, Negro- Spanish, Negro-French.
I. NEGRO-ENGLISH
Called, by the Negroes, " Ningre-tongo" " Ningre" and also
f< Bakra" is the language used by the Negroes among them-
selves in the Dutch colony of Surinam, and with their European
masters. The language is not now what it originally was, viz.,
a broken or corrupted English, but it has expanded into a
Negro-English-Dutch language. Its general structure is English,
and very many words are of English origin ; but those words
which in course of time were superadded, with the new ideas they
were meant to express, are not taken from the English, but the
Dutch language, from which the Negro-English recruits itself
CREOLE. 05
constantly ; whilst many words, originally English, have fallen
into disuse, and been supplanted by corresponding Dutch ones.
The Moravians have had a mission among the Negroes of
Surinam for the last century. Their translation of the New
Testament into Negro-English was first printed in 1829, and
again in 1846.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. L. SCHUMANN, Neger-Englisch und Deutsches Woerterbuch. Editio tertia,
1783.
MS. iu the possession of the Moravians of Paramaribo.
H. C. FOCKE, Neger Engelsch Woordenboek. Leyden, P. H. v. d. Heuvel, 1855,
8vo, pp. xiii, 160.
Deutsch-Neger-Englisches Worterbuch. Nebst einem Anhang Neger-Englische
Spriichworter enthaltend, von H. R. WULLSCHLAEGEL. Lo'bau, 1856, 8vo, pp. x,
340.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Pp. 257, 258 of Yol. II of : CAPTAIN J. G. STEDMAN'S Narrative of a Five
Years' Expedition against the Revolted Negroes of Surinam. 2 vols. 4to, London,
1796.
Gemeenzame Leerwyze over het Bastard og Neger-Englisch op een gemakelyke
Wyze te leeren verstaan en sprecken. Door G. C. W. Paramaribo, 1798, 12mo,
pp. 150.
Page 117 of: COUNT ALBEET YON SACK'S Beschreibung einer Reise nach Suri-
nam, etc. 1 vol. 4to, Berlin, 1821.
Grammatical Remarks on Negro-English, in an article on the Negro-English
New Testament in : Edinburgh Christian Instructor, Dec., 1829.
A Philological Analysis of the Negro-English Language, in : WM. GBEENFIELD'S
Defence of the Surinam Negro-English Yersion of the New Testament, etc. Lon-
don, Bagster, 1830, 8vo, pp. 80.
A. HELMIG VAN DEE YEGT, Proeve eener handleiding om het Neger-Engelsch,
zoo als hetzelve over het allgemeen binnen de Kolonie Surinam gesproken word.
Amsterdam, 1844, 8vo.
Kurzgefasste Neger-Englische Grammatik, von H. R. WULLSCHLAEGEL. Baut-
zen, gedruckt bey Ernst Moritz Monse, 1854, 8vo, pp. 67.
H. R. WULLSCHLAEGEL, Jets over de Neger-Engelsche Taal en de Bijdragen tot
hare Ontwikkeling en Literatuur, door de Zendelingen der Evangelische Broeder-
gemeente geleverd. Paramaribo, 1854. Pp. 286 295 of: West Indie, Bijdragen
tot de Bevordering van de Kennis der Nedcrlandsch West Indische Kolonien
Eerste Deel. Haarlem, 1855, 8vo.
56 CREOLE.
II. NEGRO-POKTUaUESE.
Among the first settlers of Surinam were, besides Englishmen,
many Portuguese Jews, whose numerous slaves soon adopted, in
an imperfect manner, the language of their masters, speaking a
broken Portuguese, which has now vanished from the colony with
the wealth of those who originally introduced it. At the present
time it is only spoken by one tribe of the free Bush Negroes, the
so-called Saramaccans, on the Upper Surinam, descendants of the
Plantation Negroes, who, at the time of the treaty of the peace
in 1760, inhabited the forests on the Upper Saramacca, deep in
the interior. These Saramacca Negroes, at least those among
them who hold intercourse with the colony, understand, besides
their own " Djoe-tongo" (Jew's language), the Negro-English
language. No printed specimens known.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. L. SCHUMANN, Woerterbuch der Saramacca Negersprache, 1778. MS, in
the possession of the Moravian Missionaries at Paramaribo.
III. NEaKO-DUTCH-
Generally, but erroneously, called Danish-Creole is spoken on
the Danish West Indian Islands St. Thomas, St. Croix, and
St. John. There is a wide difference between this language and
the Negro-English of Surinam. It is Dutch in its structure, as
well as in the vocabulary, and the number of Danish, French,
English, etc., words received into it is very trifling. The first
book in the Creole of the Danish West Indies was printed in
1761. It contained the Litany and several hymns. The Creole
New Testament was first published at Copenhagen, in 1781,
next at Barby, in 1802, and again at Copenhagen, in 1818.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. G-. A. OLDENDOBPS Q-eschichte der Mission der Evangelischen Briider auf
den Caraibischen Inseln S. Thomas, S. Croix, und S. Jan. Herausgegeben von
J. Jac. Bossart. Barby and Leipzig, 1777, 8vo, plates, Vol. I, pp. 424 434.
Specimens of this jargon are given in two versions of the Lord's Prayer in :
Mithridates, Vol. II, pp. 252, 253, from the translation of the New Testament,
published, Copenhagen, 1781, 8vo, and Barby, 1802, 8vo.
CREOLE. 57
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
J. C. KINGOS, Kreool A B C Buk. S. Croix, 1770, 8vo.
J. M. Grammatica over de Creoolske Sprog pa de Danske Eilande i America.
Kjolenhaun, 1770, 8vo.
OLDENDOEPS Geschi elite der Missionen (see Vocabularies above).
IY. NEGRO-SPANISH.
The Spanish-Creole language, a broken Spanish, interspersed
with some Dutch words, is spoken by the Negroes of the Dutch
island of Curacao. We possess no information about a Creole
language of Cuba the words given in the Glossary (below
mentioned) lending no countenance to the acceptation of a
special Cuban-Creole tongue. A translation of the Gospel of
St. Matthew into the Creole of Curacao was printed in 1844.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS,
G-emeenzame Zamenspraken (Conversations in Dutch and the Creole of Cura9ao).
Door J. J. PUTMAN. Santarosa, Curasao, 1853, pp. 66, 12mo.
Glossary of Creole Terms in common use in Cuba, and of those relative to
Slavery and the Trade in Slaves, pp. 184 188 of: Poems, by a Slave in the Island
of Cuba, recently liberated ; translated from the Spanish, by E. E. Madden, M.D.
London, 1840, 8vo.
Note. A Grammar of the Dutch Language, for the use of the Negroes of
Curagao, is published under the title : Proeve eener Hollandsche Spraak-
kunst, ten Gebruike der Algemeene Armerischool, in de Gemeente van de
H. EOSA, op Curagao. Door J. J. Putman. Santarosa, Curasao.
V. NEGEO-FEENCH.
French-Creole of San Domingo, Guadaloupe, Martinique, and
of Trinidad. A poem in the Creole of Trinidad, printed as a
fly-sheet, is in the possession of his Highness the Prince Louis
Lucien Bonaparte. A Monsieur BORDE, of Trinidad, is said to
have written a Creole Grammar.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
S. G. DuccETJB-JoLY, Manuel des Habitants de St. Domiiique, contenant un
Precis de 1'Histoire de cette He depuis sa Decouverte suivi du premier
Vocabulaire Frangais- Creole et de Conversations Fran9aises-Creoles. Paris, 1802,
2 vols. 8vo.
58 CROWS CUMANA.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Catechisme en la Langue Creole ; precede d'un Essai de Grammaire sur 1'Idiome
usite dans les Colonies Fran9aises. Paris, impr. Vrayet de Surcy, 1842, 18mo
(pp. 720).
Creole Proverbs are given in.: VICTOR SCHOELCHER, Les Colonies Fran9aisesj
1' Abolition Immediate de 1'Eselavage. Paris, Pagnerre, 1842, 8vo.
CROWS, TJP-SA-RO-KA, COENEILLES.
Indians of the Missouri territory and Oregon. They are divided
into three different tribes, speaking different dialects, viz. :
1 . Kikatsa, or Crow proper, on the banks of the Yellow Stone ;
2. Ahnahaways, or Ahwahaways (Black-shoes or " Souliers
noirs"), between the Mandans and Minetarees ; arid, 3. Alia-
kaiveah, or Paunch Indians (" Indiens ventrus"), on the Snake
River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SAT, Vocabularies, p. LXXIX.
PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, Reise in das Innere Nord Amerikas in 1832-
1834. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, Yol. II, pp. 490.
No. VI, o, of the Miscellaneous Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, p. 377 (from SAT).
Upsaroka Vocabulary. E, VI (Sioux), 3, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89 of the Vocabularies
in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis-
souri Minetares and those of the Sioux, pp. cxv, cxvi of: American Ethnological
Society's Transactions, Vol. II.
Upsaroka and Mandan "Words compared (no affinity) : SCIIOOLCRAFT'S Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 255, 256.
CUMANA.
A province of Venezuela. See also under Chayma.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Diccionario de la Lengua de Cumana ; y Arte de la Misma, del P. YANGUJAS.
Corregido y aumentado por Fr. Matias Blanco, 4to. Burgos, 1683.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua Cumana, por FR. MANUEL YANGUAS, 4to. Burgos, 1683.
CUNACUNA DAHKOTAH. 59
CUNACUJSTA.
Independent Indians of Nueva Granada, on the south-easterly
side of the Isthmus.
WOHDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 616.
CURETU.
Indians on the Amazon. MARTIUS (VII, B, 198) calls them
Coretus, and says that they are settled on the Upper Apaporis.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 520. (Coretu.)
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521 541 of: ALFRED E.. WALLACE, A
Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro. London, Keeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo (p. 536, Comparison with the Curetii Words given by BALBI).
CUSHNA.
A Californian tribe on the mountains of the South Yuba.
Their language is common to most of the tribes inhabiting the
upper portion of the Sacramento valley.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Cushna Vocabulary, by ME. JOHNSON, United States Agent, in : Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II. Languages, Miscellaneous Vocabu-
laries, pp. 494505, and Notes, pp. 506508.
DAHKOTAH, SIOUX, NADOWESSIEB,
Indians between the Missouri and Mississippi, of which eleven
tribes are mentioned. HECKEWELDER thinks they are Iroquois,
but CASS claims them as a separate nation. The Assinipoils
(Assinibules, Stone-Indians), on the Lake Winnipeg, are said to
be a separate tribe of the Sioux. Formerly they were called
Issati.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Nadowessiens. Pp. 552, 523 of Vol. VIII of : COTJET DE GEBELIN,
Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to.
60 DAHKOTAH.
JONATHAN CAEVEE, A Short Vocabulary of the Naudowessie Language, in :
Three Years' Travels through the Interior Parts of North America. London, 1778,
8vo, pp. 420 et seq.
In other editions Dublin, 1779, 8vo, pp. 405412 ; Philadelp7iia, 1789,
12mo, pp. 223228 ; Ibid, 1796, 8vo, pp. 288292 ; German translation,
Hamburg, 1780, 8vo, pp. 356 and following.
B. (AUDEY) D. (ES LOZIEBES), Voyage a la Louisiane. Paris, Dentu, 1802,
8vo, pp. 348 et seq. (from CAEVEK and B. D).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 265.
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Dacota, or Sioux, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix, part 4,
Vol. II, pp. 449459 of: WM. H. KEATING, Narrative of Major S. H. Long,
Second Expedition. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo.
(In Chap. VIII of Vol. I, pp. 376 439, an accurate " Account of the Dacotas,
or Sioux Indians," is given.) The Vocabulary is prepared by PEOF. SAY,
and printed in the vocabularies added to the Astronomical and Meteorological
'.Record of this Expedition : Philadelphia, 1822, 4to, pp. Ixxii Ixxxviii.
A Vocabulary of the Sioux Language, pp. 152 172 of: CALEB ATWATEE,
Remarks made on a Tour to Prairie du Chien, thence to Washington City, in
1829. Columbus, Isaac N. Whiting, 1831, 12mo.
Sioux Vocabulary in : GEO. CATLIN'S Letters and Notes on the Manners, Cus-
toms, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. London and
New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262
265.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 774 (Sioux, Dacotah, Yanctou).
Dakota Vocabulary, by a member of the Dakota Mission (S. R. RiGGs). New
York, printed by R. Craighead, 1852, 8vo, pp. 120.
Keprint of the English-Dakota part of Kiggs' Dictionary. (See Grammars,
under Riggs.)
No. VI, Sioux (thirteen dialects, Nos, 3340, m, n, o, p, q. Among them,
No. 34, Dakotah), in the Comparative Vocabulary, etc., to : A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 367, 374, 377, 379).
No. 34, reprinted under B, VI, 1, pp. 83, 85, 87, 89, of the Vocabularies
in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Memoires de la Societe Ethnologique. Paris, 1845, 8vo, Vol. II, p. 264.
Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis-
souri Minetares and those of the Sioux. Pp. cxv, cxvi of the : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
Dakota Numeration (1 billion), by PHILANDEB PEESCOTT, in : Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 206208.
Indian (Dahkotah) Names and Writing. III. Preliminary Remarks, pp. xxiv
xxviii of: MES. MAEY EASTMAN, Dahcotah ; or, Life and Legends of the Sioux
around Fort Snelling. New York, Wiley, 1849, 12mo.
DA1UEN. 61
ED. UMFBEVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay .... London, 1790,
8vo, pp. 195, 196, and Table to p. 202.
He calls them As-sin-e-po-e-tuc, or Stone Indians (from Umfreville) .
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 263265.
VI, m., in A. GALLATIN'S Comparative Vocabulary, above quoted, p. 374.
Eeise des PBINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 1839, 1841, 2 vols. 4to,
Vol. II, pp. 474480.
B. T. DENIG, of Port Union, Assiniboin Vocabulary, pp. 416429, 432, and
numerals, pp. 429431, of Vol. IV of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Eudiments of the Grammar of the Sioux Language, pp. 149 151 of: CALEB
ATWATEE'S Eemarks (see Vocabularies) .
Sioux Dahcota Dialect ; from MS. Grammatical Notices of GEN. CASS, pp. 251,
252 of: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
Sioux Spelling-book, designed for the Use of Native Learners. Boston,
Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 12mo, pp. 22.
STEPHEN BIGGS and GIDEON H. POND, The Dakota First Eeading-Book.
Cincinnati, Kendall and Henry, 1839, 18rno, pp. 50.
EEY. S. W. POND, Wowapi Inonpa. The second Dacota Eeading-Book.
Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 12mo, pp. 54.
S. E. EIGGS, Wowapi Mitawa, Tamakece Kaga. My Own Book. Boston,
Crocker and Brewster, 1842, 18mo, pp. 64.
The printers compiled : A Mother's Primer, and Child's Picture-defining
and Beading Book (after T. H. Gallaudet).
S. E. EIGGS, Dakota Tawoonspe, or Dakota Lessons ; a book designed for
schools. Louisville, Ky., 1850, 12mo, p. 96.
Grammar and Dictionary of the Dacota Language, collected by the Dakota
Mission. Edited by S. E. EIGGS, Missionary of the American Board of Com-
missioners for Foreign Missions, under the Patronage of the Historical Society of
Minnesota. Accepted for publication by the Smithsonian Institution, December,
1851. New York, Craighead, printer, 4to, pp. xii, 412.
Grammar, pp. 1 64 j Vocabulary, 65278; Dakota-English, 279338;
English-Dakota.
S. E. EIGGS, Address on the Dakota Language, pp. 123 142 of: Annals of the
Minnesota Historical Society for the Year 1850-1. St. Paul, D. A. Eobertson,
printer, 1851, 8vo.
DAEIEN.
The aborigines of the Isthmus have been hitherto known under
the names of Dariel, Urabac, and Idibae. Their language was
62 DEGUINOS.
said to be similar to the Cunacuna. Later researches have
shown that four tribes the Savaneric, Manzanillo, or San
Bias Indians, Cholo, and Bayano inhabit the Isthmus, who
speak different languages.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
LIONEL WAFER, A New Voyage and Description of the Isthmus of America,
giving an Account of the Indian Inhabitants, their
Language, etc. London, James Knapton, 1699, 8vo, map, plates, pp. viii, 224, 14,
pp. 181, 182, 187, 188.
French translation, by Montirat, in : GK Dampier, Voyage autour du
Monde. Amsterdam, 1705, 8vo, p. 250 and following,
German translation, in : Allgerneine Historic der Keisen, Vol. XV, p. 280
and following.
SMITH BAKTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 106, 107.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 708.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 631.
N.B. The words given by Wafer correspond with the Bayano given by
Seeman.
DEGUINOS, DTEGENOS.
The Indians round San Diego Deguinos, Diegehos were in a
savage state, and their language almost unknown. BARTLETT
says that they are also called Comcya ; but WHIFFLE asserts that
the Comeya, a tribe of the Yumas, speak a different language.
Different dialects were spoken near San Juan Capistrano
(FATHER BOSCARA calls the aboriginal inhabitants of San Juan
Capistrano the Acagcliemem nation), San Gabriel, San Luis
Obispo, and San Antonio.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabularies of San Diego, San Juan Capistrano, pp. 246, 248, 250 ; San Luis
Obispo, San Antonio, pp. 247, 249, 251, by DR. JOHN SCOULER, in : Journal of the
Koyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 246 251.
Keprinted, San Diego, W. 2, San Luis Obispo, W. 4, San Antonio, W. 5, p. 129
of Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
The Names of the Months in Acagchemem are given in : P. BOSCARA'S Chinig-
chinich, pp. 303, 304 of: A. Robinson's Life in California. New York, Wiley
and Putnam, 1846, 12mo.
Nos. 15 (San Raphael), 16 (KizTi, at San Gabriel), and No. 17 (Netela, at San Juan
Capistrano} of the Vocabulary of Languages of North-western America, pp, 569
DELAWARE. 63
629, in : HOE. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Explor-
ing Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. Ibid., pp. 533, 634 :
Vocabulary of Languages spoken at the Missions, "La Soledad and San Miguel."
]S T os. 15, 16, 17, reprinted under U, p. 128, of the Vocabularies in Yol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. The words of the Missions :
La Soledad and San Miguel, ibid., p. 126.
Twenty-eight Words of Netehvand Kizh compared with Cahuillo and Kechi,
by PKOFESSOE W. W. TURNER, p. 77 of: Keport upon the Indian Tribes, added
to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Eeport (in Yol. II of the Pacific Railroad
Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to).
Des Langues Kizh et Netela de la Nouvelle-Californie, by DR. BFSCHMANN, in :
Monthly Report of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Berlin, for September and
October, 1855.
Diegefio and English Yocabulary, taken by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE from
Tomaso, the chief the Tribe, pp. 5, 6, of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Extract from
a Journal of an Expedition from San Diego, California, to the Rio Colorado, from
September 11 to December 11, 181-9. (Congress Documents, 31 Congress, Second
Session, Senate Executive Documents, No. 19). Reprinted, pp.95 to 101, and Diegefio
numerals, by Lieutenant W. A. Whipple, compared with those given by Dr.
Scouler, pp. 103 of: Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report upon the Indian Tribes,
etc. (Vol. II of Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 3855, 4to). Also re-
printed on pp. 103, 104 of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Yol. II.
Twenty-eight Kechi Words (from BARTLETT) compared with Cahuillo, Netela,
and Kizh, p. 77 of: Report upon the the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant A.
W. Whipple's Report (Yol. II of Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington,
1855, 4to).
Vocabularies of the Deguino or Comeya, at San Diego ; Kechi, at San Luis Rey
and San Luis Obispo, have been taken by JOHN R. BARTLETT, the United States
Boundary Commissioner.
See also under Californians and Cahuillos.
DELAWARE, LENAPE, LENNO-LEKAPE.
Belonging to the Algonquin stock. The following are men-
tioned as the three original tribes : 1. The Unami, or Wanami
(Turtle tribe) 2. The Unalachtgo (Turkey tribe). 3. Minsi,
Ministi, or Munseyi (Wolf tribe).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERYAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals, etc.)
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies, and " Specimen
of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of the Six
Nations." Ibid., Appendix, p. 20.
In the vocabularies he gives also Canestoga (or Susquehannocs) words.
64 DELAWARE.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374376.
(From a MS. Vocabulary of the Bussian General BUTTLAR, and from
SMITH BARTON.)
Words, Phrases, and Short Dialogues in the Language of the Lenni-Lenape and
Delaware, pp. 451 464 of HECKEWELDER' s Account, in Vol. I of: Transactions
Of the Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society.
Philadelphia, printed by Abraham Small, 1819, 8vo.
PROF. T. SAY, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape (or
Delaware) Stock of North American Indians, together with a Specimen of the
Winnebags (or Nipegon) Language.
(Contains forty-five words in the Language of the Mohegan, Lenape, Shaw-
anese, Nanticoke, Narraganset, Mansel, Massachusetts, Penobscot, Abnaki, St.
Francis Indians, Messisaugers, Algonkins, Chippeway, Knistenaux, Winne-
bagos.) Printed, with notes, in J. Pickering's edition of D. Edwards' Observa-
tions on the Mohegan Language in : Collections of the Massachusetts His-
torical Society. Vol. X of the second series. Boston, Phelps and Farnham,
1823, 8vo, pp. 135145, 146, 148. Keprinted, Boston, Little and Brown,
1843, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 810 (Delaware and Minsi).
No. IV, Nineteen of the Comparative Vocabularies of Fifty-three Nations in A.
Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367.
(From HECKEWELDER and ZEISBERGER.)
Reprinted under A, IV, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of:
American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
CTJMMINGS, Indian Agent, Delaware Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, Languages ; 1, Algonquin group, pp, 470
481.
Vocabulary of the Delawares in 1792. From the papers of JAMES MADISON.
Ibid., Vol. Ill, pp. 424 427, Delaware (and Iroquois) words.
GEO. HENRY LOSSKIEL, History of the Mission of United Brethren among the
Indians in North America. Translated from the German by Christian Ignatius
Latrobe. London, 1794, 8vo.
A Collection of "Words in English, Magua, Delaware, and Mohikan (by KEY.
JOHN ETTWEIN, compiled in 1788, from Zeisberger's work, for General Washington),
pp. 41 44 of : Bulletin of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. I. Phila*
delpUa, 1848, 8vo.
REV. MR. HECKEWELDER, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape and
Algonquin.
REV. MR. HECKEWELDER, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape
proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, and Nanti-
coke.
REV. MR. HECKEWELDER, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape
and Miami, or T wight wee.
DELAWARE. 65
REV. ME. HECKEWELDEE, Names of Various Trees and Plants in the Language of
the Lenni-Lenape, or Delaware, distinguishing the Dialect of the Unamis and Minsi.
The above four manuscripts are in the Library of the American Philo-
sophical Society at Philadelphia.
Memorandum of the Names and Significations which the Lenni-Lenape, other-
wise called the Delaware, had given to Rivers, Streams, Places, etc., within the
States of Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Maryland, and Virginia ; together with the
names of some chieftains and eminent men of this nation. Taken from MS. papers
of the REV. JOHN HECKEWELDEE, during his mission among the Indians of Penn-
sylvania. Presented to the Historical Society of Philadelphia, by Maurice 0.
Jones, of Bethlehem. Pp. 121135, 139154 of Vol. I of: Bulletin of the His-
torical Society of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, printed for the Society, 1848, 8vo.
Comparative Vocabulary of Lenape-Algonquin, Copte, Archipel, and Ternate,
pp. 280 284 of: GrUSTAV DE EICHTHAL, Rapport entre quelques Langues Ameri-
caines et le Copte. Langue Lenape-Algonquin, pp. 272 289 of Vol. II of the :
Me"moires de la Socie'te Ethnologique. Paris, Veuve Dondey-Dupre, 1845, 8vo.
Delaware Vocabulary, taken by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE from the Chief
of the Black Beaver Tribe. Pp. 5060 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes,
by Lieutenant "Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Prof. W. W. Turner, added to
Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in Vol. II of :
Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
DAVID ZEISBEKGKEE, Essay of a Delaware Indian and English Spelling-book, for
the use of the schools of the Christian Indians on Muskingum River. Phila-
delphia, Miller, 1776, 12mo. Reprinted, Philadelphia, 1806, 12mo.
DAVID ZEISBEBGEB, Grammar of the Language of the Lenni-Lenape, or Dela-
ware Indians. Translated from the G-erman MS. of the late Rev. David Zeisber-
ger, for the American Philosophical Society, by Peter Stephen Du Ponceau, with a
preface and notes by the translator. Philadelphia, James Kay, 1827, 4to, pp.
188, 1.
Translated in 1816. Forms part of (No. 2 of part 1) Vol. Ill of : Trans-
actions of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia, for pro-
moting useful knowledge, second series. Philadelphia, printed by James
Kay, jun., 1840, 4to, pp. 65251 (pp. 6596 : the translator's preface).
Presented to the Society, 2nd December, 1816. The MS. of the translation
(in folio, pp. 140) is in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at
Philadelphia.
On the Indian Languages (Delaware and Iroquois), pp. 18 23 of: LOSSKIEL'S
History of the Mission, etc. (see Vocabularies above).
N.B. Pp. 19, 20, more particularly on the Delaware.
JOHN PICKEEING, Remarks on the Indian Languages of North America, s. 1.,
1836, 8vo.
Reprinted from Vol: VII of the : Encyclopaedia Americana.
German translation by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8vo.
K
66 DOGRIB INDIANS.
P. E. DtfPONCEArr, Memoire sur le Systeme Grammatical des Langues de quel-
ques Nations Indiennes de 1'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1838, 8vo.
E. A. TAIL, Notice sur les Indiens de 1'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1840, 8vo,
pp. 50.
Grammatical Notices Delaware (from ZEISBERGER), pp. 220 224. Delaware
Transitions, pp. 267, 268, 282 288 ; and Comparative View, p. 289. Notes, pp.
294 298 of: A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc. Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 369372.
Lenapi Wawipoetakse ave Apwatuk. First Lessons in Delaware. J. MEEKER.
Baptist Shawanoe Mission, 1834, 18mo, pp. 48.
Lenapee Spelling-book. Shawnee Mission, J. MEEKER, for the Baptist Society,
1834, 12mo, pp. 24.
Chapter IX, Language, No. Ill, Lenape, pp. 106 112 of : HECKE WELDER'S
Account of the History, etc., of Indian Nations. Vol. I of: Transactions of the
Historical and Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society. Phila-
delphia, printed by Abraham Small, 1819, 8vo.
DOGRIB INDIANS.
Indians of the northern part of North America, between
Martin's Lake and the Coppermine River. They call them-
selves Thing-e-ha-dtinne,and belong to the Dtinne or Athapaskan
stock. The " Mauvais Monde " and Slave Indians are tribes
belonging to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Dogrib Vocabularies, collected at Fort Confidence (pp. 395, 396), at Fort Simp-
son (p. 397), and by MR. O'BRIAN, of the Hudson's Bay Company (p. 398).
Mauvais Monde and Slave Vocabulary (pp. 399, 400). J. H. LEFROY, Vocabulary of
Chepewyan and Dogrib Words (pp. 400, 401), and Dogrib Vocabulary, from
BARRETT, pp. 401, 402 of: Sir John Eichardson, Arctic Exploring Expedition,
Vol. II. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
The same reprinted and compared with the other Athapaskan and Kinai Lan-
guages, pp. 179222, 269318 of : BUSCHMANN'S Athapaskischer-Sprachstamm.
Berlin, 1856, 4to.
PROFESSOR W. W. TURNER, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Dogrib (from EICHARDSON), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Tacully, Umkwa, Hoopah,
Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to
Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Eeport in Vol. II of: Pacific Eailroad Eeports.
Washington, 1855, 4to.
EHNEK ENGEREKMUNG. 67
EHNEK.
Indian band of north-western California, at the mouth of the
Salmon or Quoratem River. The language reaches from
Buffalo Creek to Clear Creek, thirty or forty miles above the
Salmon, varying, however, from point to point ; on the Salmon
it extends to the sources. They are a tribe of the Pehtsik
Indians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. Ill, pp. 44.0445.
ELE.
In South America, on the banks of the River Casanare. Their
language has much affinity to that of the Betoi and Yarara.
The Ququaro speak a dialect of the Ele.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III.
ENGEREKMUNG.
Called by the Portuguese Botokudos, by others Amores, Aimbores.
In Brazil, south of the Rio Pardo, in the provinces Minas Geraes
and Espiritu Santo. A plain language, without gutturals, but
with many nasals. The Gherins of Almada sur le Taipe are a
tribe of the Botokudos.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mithridates, Vol. IV, p. 459.
J. S. VATEE, Proben Deutscher Volksmundarten : Dr. Seetzen's Linguistischer
Nachlass. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo, pp. 352374.
PRINZ MAXIMILIAN zu WIED NEUWIED, Keise n-ach Brasilien in den Jaliren,
1815-1817- FranJcfurt-am-Main, Broiiner, 1819-1821, 2 vols, 4to, and Alias.
French translation, par F. B. B. Eyries. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1821,
3 vols. 8vo, and Atlas.
PRINZ MAXIMILIAN zu WIED NEUWIED, Eeise in das Innere Nord Amerika.
Coblenz, Hoelscher, 1838-1841, 2 vols. 4to, and Atlas, Vol. I, p. 588.
68 ESKELEN.
AUGUSTE DE SAINT-HILAIEE, Voyage dans les Provinces de Rio de Janeiro et
de Minas Geraes dans le District des Diamans et sur le Littoral du Bresil ; suivi
de Notes sur quelques Plantes characteristiques et d'un Precis de 1'Hietoire des
Revolutions de 1'Empire Bresilien. Paris, Gide, 1830-1833, 4 vols. 8vo.
ALCIDE D'OEBiaNY, L'Homme Americain. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8yo, Vol. I,
p. 164.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 501.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, p. 164.
Vocabulaire de Botecudes, d'apres M. MAECTJS POETE, pp. 379382 of: Note
sur les Botecudes, accorapagnee d'un Vocabulaire de leur Langue et de quelques
Kemarques, par E. F. JOMAED, pp. 377 384 of: Bulletin de la Societe de Geo-
graphic de Paris, Tome VI, de la 3 me serie. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1846, 8vo.
Portuguese translation Pp. 107 113 of: Revista Trimensal do Eio de
Janeiro, 2 a ser., Tom. II, No. 5.
Deux Vocabulaires de la Langue de- Botecudos, recueillis par M. VICTOE RE-
NAULT de Barbacena. A. Langue des Nak-nanouks (Habitans des Montagnes),
pp. 248 252. B. Langue des Juporocas, Boutomoras et Craikmouses, pp. 253,
254 j and Note, pp. 259262 of Vol. V of: Castelnau, Voyage, ^ppendice.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 347.
ESKELEN, ESLENES.
Californian Indians, east of Monterey. The Ekklemaches are
said to be a tribe of the Eskelen, and to speak the richest idiom
of all the Californian Indians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JEAN-FEANC. GALATTP DE LA PEEOUSE, Voyage autour du Monde (1785-1788),
redige et public par M. L. A. Millet-Mureau. Paris, imprimerie de la Republique,
an V (1797), 4 vols. 4to, and Atlas. Reimprime, Paris, 1798, 4 vols. 8vo. (In
Chap. 12 of Vol. I.)
English translation London, Robinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to, and Atlas.
German translation Berlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. I, p. 388.
The linguist of the Expedition was De la Manon. He collected words
of the "Ecclemaches dialect.
J. F. BOUEGOING, Relation d'un Voyage recent des Espagnols sur les Cotes
Nord-ouest de 1'Amerique septentrionale. Paris, 1789, 3 vols. 8vo. Second
edition, 1792 ; third edition, Paris, 1803.
German translation Jena, 1789, 8vo. Reprinted in : Archives Litteraires
de 1'Europe, 1804, No. 4, p. 87.
Relacion del Viage hecho por las Goletas Sutel y Mexicana en el afio de 1792,
ESKIMO. 69
para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca ; con una introduccion en que se da noticia de
las Expediciones executadas anteriormente por los Epaiioles en busca del pays de
nordeste de la America de Orden del Rey. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802
8vo, pp. clxviii, 185, Atlas.
Pp. 172, 173, and p. 127 of Vol. II of : American Ethnological Society's
Transactions.
A. DE HUMBOLDT, Essai politique de la Nouvelle Espagne. Paris, Schoell,
1811, 2 vols. 4to (or 5 vols. 8vo) ; often reprinted.
Vol. I, p. 322, of the 4to edition gives Eskelen numerals from the MS. of
P. LASUEN.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 (Eslenes, from BOURGOING ; Ecclemaches,
from DE LA MANON, in La Perouse).
BA.LBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 831.
ESKIMO.
North of 60 northern latitude. The three principal dialects of
the Eskimo are those of 1. Tlieltaralis, Greenlanders. 2. The
Eskimo proper, on the shores of Labrador. 3. The Western
Eskimos.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of English and Eskimo Words, pp. 203205, and "A Short
Vocabulary of the Language spoken among the Northern Indians inhabiting the
north-west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at different times from the
mouths of Babiana and Zazana, two Indians, who were on board H. M. S. the
' Furnace,' in the year 1742. By EDWARD THOMPSON, Surgeon of said ship."
Pp. 206 211 of: ARTHUR DOBBS, An Account of the Countries adjoining to
Hudson's Bay, in the north-west part of America .... to which are added
.... V Vocabularies of the Languages of several Indian Nations adjoining to
Hudson's Bay .... London, 1744, 4to, pp. 211, map.
HANS EGEDE, Det gande Grdiilands nye Perlustration. Kjobenhavn, 1741, 8vo.
(Chap. XVII of the language, with a short Vocabulary.)
English translation A Description of Greenland. London, 1745, 8vo.
French translation Description et Histoire Naturelle du Greenland, trad,
en Francais par D. R. D. P. (Des Roches de Parthenay). Copenhague et Geneve,
1763, 8vo.
German translation Beschreibung und Naturgeschichte von Greenland
In' s Deutsche iibersetzt von J. G. Kriinitz. Berlin, Mylius, 1763, 8vo.
J. ANDERSON, Nachrichten von Island, Greenland und der Strasse Davis.
Hamburgh, 1746, 8vo, pp. 285 325.
PAUL EGEDE, DictionariumGroenlandico-Danico-Latinum, completens primitiva
cum suis derivatis quibus interject sunt voces primarise e Kirendo Angokkutorum
adornatum. Hafnice, typ. orphanotr. Reg. Gottfr. F. Kisel, 1750, 8vo, pp. 16, 312.
Greenland, pp. 1 207 ; Danish, pp. 208 -263 ; Latin, pp. 264312.
70 ESKIMO.
Langue des Esquimaux et des Groenlandais, pp. 494498 of Vol. VIII of:
COURT DE GEBELIN, Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Vocabulary taken from
EGEDE. Eeprint, pp. 306312 of: J. B. SCHEEEB, Recherches Historiques et
Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo. Ibid.
" Eskimo and Greenland Words compared."
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L, et seq. (Greenland).
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 126, 127.
Table to show the Affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalaska and
Norton Sound, and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux. Appendix VI to
Vol. Ill of: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction
of Captains COOK, CLARKE, and GORE, in H. M. S. " Resolution" and " Discovery,"
in the years 1776 1780. London, 1784, 3 vols 4to, and Atlas. Dublin, 1784, 3
vols. 8vo, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555.
And in Vol. I, p. 308, of: PETER SIMON PALLAS, Neue Nordische Beitraege
zur Physikalischen und Geographischen Erd-und Voelkerbeschreibung,
Naturgeschichte und Oekonomie. 'St. Petersburg, Logan, 17811796, 7
vols. 8vo.
Eskimaux-English Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expedition. Published
by order of the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. Compiled by Captain
JOHN WASHINGTON, R.N. London, John Murray, 1850, 12mo, oblong. Pp. xvi,
160 : pp. 2 109, English -Eskimaux; pp. 115 160, Eskimaux-English; pp. 110
113, Comparative Table of a few (21) Words of the Eskimaux (or Innuit), Chuckchi,
Aleutian, and Kadjak Languages, chiefly from BALBI and KLAPROTH.
J. LONG, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader .... to
which is added .... a List of Words in the .... and Esquimaux Tongues.
London, Robson, Debrett, and Co., 1791, 4to, p. 183 (twenty-two words).
German translation, by G. "Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1792, 8vo ; and by
A. W. Zimmermann. Hamburg, Hoffman, 1791, 8vo.
CAPTAIN WILLIAM E. PARRY, R.N., Journal of a Voyage for the Discovery
of a North-west Passage, etc. London, 1821, 4to.
CAPTAIN WILLIAM EDWARD PARRY, R.N., Journal of a Second Voyage for the
Discovery of a North-west Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific, performed in
the years 1821, 1822, and 1823, in H. M. S. " Fury" and " Hecla." Published
by authority. London, Murray, 1824, 4to, pp. 600, pp. 559569. Reprinted,
New York, W. E. Dean, printed for E. Duyckinck, C. Long, and others, 1824, 8vo,
pp. xx, 464.
On the Eskimaux Language (of Melville Peninsula and the adjoining
islands, more particularly Winter Island and Igloolik), pp. 451 457. Voca-
bulary of Eskimaux Words and Sentences, pp. 459 464. Eskimaux Names of
Places, p. 464.
OTHO FABRICITJS, Den Groenlandske Ordbog, forbedret og foroget. Kjb'benTiavn,
C. F. Schubert, 1804, 8vo, pp. viii, 795 (pp. 10544, Gronl. Danish ; 545795,
Danish Register).
Words are also given in the same author's : Fauna Grcenlandica. Hafnice,
1780, 8vo.
ESKIMO. 71
CAPTAIN F. W. BEECHEY, R.N., Narrative of a Voyage to the Pacific and
Behring's Strait, to co-operate with the Polar Expeditions, performed in H. M. S.
"Blossom," in the years 1825, 1828. London, 1831, 4to, pp. 742 ; also, 2 vols.
8vo.
Vocabulary of Words of the Western Esquimaux, pp. 620627 of the 4to
edition, and Vol. II, pp. 366383 of the 8vo edition.
Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North-west Passage,
by SIE JOHN Boss, C.B. London, 1835, 4to, pp. 376, plates.
Names of Mammalia, Birds, and Fishes, in : CAPTAIN W. A. G-RAAH, Narrative
of an Expedition to the East Coast of Groenland, sent by order of the King
of Denmark in search of the lost Colonies. Translated by C. Gordon Mac-
dougall. London, Parker, 1837, 8vo, pp. 16, 199. Appendix No. II, B, pp.
178180.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 340, 431, and part 3, pp. 422, 424, 454, 455, 462
(from EGEDE, ANDEESON, DOBBS, and LONG), Vol. IV, pp. 251253.
Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 5) of the Behring Strait, Eskimo, Kadjak,
Igloolik Eskimo, and Unalachka Languages compared, p. 123 of: VON BAEE and
VON HELMESEN, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Russischen Eeichs, Bd. 1. St.
Petersburg, Academy of Sciences, 1839, 8vo.
No. 1, 1, 2, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations in A. GALLA-
TIN'S Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367 ; and Com-
parative Vocabulary of Sixteen Tribes. Ibid., pp. 368 372 (Hudson's Bay, 1;
Kotzebue Sound, 2 ; Greenland, a) .
(From PAEEY, BEECHEY, EGEDE, and CBANTZ)
Keprinted, I 1, under A I, pp. 78, 80, 82 ; I 2 a, under L I, p. 104, of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 856. Groenlandais propre
Esk. d. 1. Baie du Prince Eegent (Ross); Esk. (DOBBS) ; Esk. d. 1'Ile d'Hiver
(Parry).
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (Greenlanders,
Esquimaux).
Comparative Table of the Dialects spoken by the Behring' s Strait and Labrador
Eskimo, pp. 369382 of Vol. II of : SIE JOHN RICHAEDSON, Arctic Exploring
Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
Note. The Behring's Strait Eskimo, or Kuskutchewak, from WEANGEL ;
the Labrador Coast Eskimo from a Vocabulary of Rev. P. LATEOBE.
GRAHMABS AND GBAMHATICAL NOTICES.
M. WOELDIKE, Meletema de -Linguae Grcenlandicse ejusque a ceteris linguis
differentia, in: Semestria Sooietatis Hafniensis. Kafnice, 1746, part 2, p.
137 et seq.
En Grocnlandsk A B D Bog. Kjobenliavn, 1760, 8vo. Reprinted, Kattitsio-
72 FLATHEADS.
marsut attuaromarsullo Malligekseit. Gnadau, 1835, 8vo. Nye udg. ved STEEN-
BEEG. Kjobenhavn, Missions Collegium, 1849, 8vo, pp. 20.
PAUL EGEDE, G-rammatica Grcenlandico-Danico-Latina. Ha/nice, 1760, 8vo.
DAYLD CEANTZ, Historie von Greenland enthaltend die Beschreibung des Landes
und seiner Einwohner, insbesondere die G-eschichte der dortigen Mission zu NEU
HEEENHUT und LICHTENFELS. Barby and Leipzig, Kummer, 1765, 8vo. Fortset-
zung, ibid , 1770, 8vo. Second edition, ibid., 1770, 8vo, pp. 277287. Keprinted
in Vol. XX of : Bibliothek der neuesten Reisebeschreibungen. Frankfurt and
Leipzig, 1779-97, 21 vols. 8vo.
English translation The History of Greenland, including an Account of
the Mission carried on by the United Brethren in that country. London,
1767, 2 vols. 8vo. Reprinted, with a continuation to the present time, Notes,
and Appendix. London, Longmans, 1820, 2 vols. 8vo.
EGIL. THOBHALLESEN, Schema Conjugationis Grcenlandicse verborum in ok, vok
et rpok desinentium. Hafnics, 1776.
OTHO FABEICITJS, Forsoeg til en forbedret Groenlandsk Grammatica. Kjoben-
kavn, 1791, 8vo. Andet oplog, ibid., C. F. Schubert, 1801, 8vo, pp. viii, 388.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 435, 447, 452-454.
A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. in Yol. II of: Archeeologia Americana, Appendix,
No. I, pp. 211214.
(From CBANTZ and the Mithridates).
Brief Sketch of the Eskimaux Grammar, pp. si, xvi of: Eskimaux-English
Vocabulary, for the use of the Arctic Expeditions. London, John Murray, 1850,
12mo, oblong.
SAM. KLEINSCHMIDT, Grammatikder Groenlandischen Sprache, mit theilweisem
Einschluss des Labrador Dialectes. Berlin, Reimer, 1851, 8vo, pp. 10, 182.
Grammatical Notices concerning the Eskimo Dialects of Behring's Strait and
the Labrador Coast, pp. 364368 of Vol. II of: SIE JOHN RICHAEDSON'S
Arctic Exploring Expedition. London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
The Grammar of KOENIGSEE, 1780 ; exists only in MS.
FLATHEADS, SELISH.
(ATNAH, SHOTJSCHWAP.)
Indians of the Rocky Mountains and Oregon ; divided into many
tribes, of which the Salish, Ponder ays, ai.d Spokein Indians are
the most important
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
PEINZ MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, Reise in das Innere Nord Amerika's in 1832,
bis 1834. Coblenz, Hoelscher, 18381841, 2 vols. 4to, Vol. II, pp. 501, etc.
FLATHEADS. 73
No. XVIII, 53, of the : Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty -three Nations. A.
GALLATIN'S Synopsis, Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367.
(Salish, from a MS. authority in Duponceau's Collections.)
Vocabulary of the Tsihaili- Selish family, in four branches (northern, middle,
western, and southern), pp. 569629 of: H. HALE'S Ethnography and Philology
of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard,
1846, 4to, map.
HALE divides the four branches of the Selish into the following languages :
1. NORTHERN BRANCH:
a. E. Shushwapumsh (Shushwaps, Atnahs).
N.B. A short Atnah or Chin Indians Vocabulary is given by A. Gallatin,
under No. XXIII, 58, of his Comparative Vocabulary of Fifty-three Nations,
p. 378 (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), from MACKENZIE, pp. 257, 258 of
his Voyages. London, 1801.
b. F. SelisJt or Flatheads, divided into three dialects :
aa. c. Kullespelm, (or Ponderays Pend d'Oreilles).
bb. d. Tsdkaitsitlin (Spokan Indians) .
cc. e. Soaiatlpi (Kettle-falls).
c. Or. Skitsuish (Coeur d'alene).
d. H. PisJcivaus (Piscous).
2. MIDDLE BRANCH:
I. SJcwale (Nasqually).
3. WESTERN BRANCH :
a, J. Tsihailish (Chickailis, Chilis), divided into :
aa. f. Tsihailish.
bb. g. Kwaiantl.
cc. h. Kwenaiwitl.
b. K. KawelitsTc (Cowelits).
4. SOUTHERN BRANCH:
L. Nsietshawus (Killamuks).
In the : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, the Vocabu-
laries of Cr, H, I, J, K, are given under T, XXIII, pp. 118, 119 ; the Vocabulary
L, under U, XXIII, p. 120 ; the Vocabulary F, under C, XXIII, " Selish Flatheads,"
pp. 88, 90, 92, 94.
Ad. 3, a, a short Vocabulary of this language, called " Checalish" is given by
Messrs. D. LEE and J. H. FROST, pp. 341343 of their: Ten Years in Oregon.
New York, J. Collord, printer, 1844, 12mo.
A short Vocabulary of the Flathead Language, and the Lord's Prayer in the
Flathead and Pend d'Oreille language, are given on the last, not numerated, pages
of: P. P. J. DE SMET, e. S. J., Oregon Missions and Travels over the Rocky
Mountains in 1845-1846. New York, Edw. Dunigan, 1847, 12mo, pp. 408, 4to.
Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of: E,. Gr. LATHAM, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory pp. 154 166 ; and
Chikeeles and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of : DR. JOHN SCOULER, on the Indian
L
74 FOX ISLANDS GE.
Tribes inhabiting the North- West Coast of America, pp. 228252 of : Journal of
the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Grammatical Remarks on the Language of the Tsihaili-Selish family, in : H.
HALE, Ethnology and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, 4to, map, pp, 535542 ; and
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. II, pp. 2634.
EOX ISLANDS.
Russian America; continuation of the Aleutan Islands. See
Unalaschka.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Cap-
tains COOK, CLARK, and GOEE, in the years 1776 1780. London, 1784, 3 vols.
4to. Vol. II, Appendix 6.
J. BILLINGS, Voyages (Kussian edition). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, pp. 121
129.
Mithridates, Vol. I, p. 567.
K. E. VON BAEE und GE. VON HELMEBSEN, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des
Russischen Beiches und der angraenzenden Lander Asiens. St. Petersburg, Vol. I,
1839, 8vo, p. 259.
FUCA STRAIT.
Between the territory of Washington and the southernmost part
of Vancouver's Island.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Varias Palabras del Idioma que se habla en la boca S. del Canal de Fuca y sus
equivalentes en Castillano, p. 41 of: Relacion del Viage hecho por las goletas
Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca. Madrid,
imprenta real, 1802, 8vo.
This Vocabulary is reprinted under No. XXIV, 59, of the Comparative
Vocabulary in A. Grallatin's Synopsis (ArchaBologia Americana, Vol. II,
p. 378).
GE, GES, GEIKO (JAHYCOS).
People living on the sea -shores of the Brazilian provinces
Maranham and Gram Para. They are divided into several
GUAQUES GUARANI. 75
tribes, of which MARTIUS (iv, 80) names nine, among them the
Ao-ges, Cran-ges, Canacata-ges, Ponkata-ges, and Paycob-ges.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. B. VON SPIX and K. F. PH. VON MAETIUS, Eeise in Brasilien. Miinchen,
18231831, 3 vols. 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 513.
GUAQUES.
New Granadian Indians, inhabiting the plains on the rivers
Caqueta, Oteguasa, Caguan, and Putumayo, in the territory of
Mocoa (formerly departmento del Assuai).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario G-uaque-Espaiiol, taken by the Presbytero MANTJEL MAKIA ALBIS,
in 1854, pp. 24 27 of: Los Indios del Audaqui. Popayan, imprenta de la
Matricaria, 1855, 16mo.
GUANAS.
Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-Grosso, on the banks
of the Paraguay. MARTIUS (No. 29) calls them also Guanans,
says that they live between the Paraguay and the Sierra de
Chainez, and thinks that they are related to the Cohans or Coa-
huanas (men of the wood), whom the Guaycurus call Cayu-
babas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Guanas (Rio Paraguay). Vocabulary, No. VII, pp. 274 276 of:
CASTELNAF, Vol. V, Appendice.
GUABANI.
The most extended nation of southern Brazil and the Argen-
tine Republic, Paraguay, and Uruguay. They were christian-
ized by the Jesuits, under the dominion of whom they lived,
enjoying a theocratic form of government. ADELUNG (in
Mithridates) distinguishes 1. South Guarani, or Guarari pro-
per, in Paraguay. 2. West Guarani, or Chiviguana and
Guarayi. 3. North Guarani, or Tupi (see Brazil). MARTIUS
(I, A) calls the southern Tupis, Guaranis.
76 GUARANI.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ALPHONSUS BAEZENA, Lexica et praecepta grammatica, item liber confessionis
et precum in quinque Indorum Linguis, quarum usus per Americam australem,
nempe Puquinica, Tenocotica, Catamareana, Guaranica, Natixana, sive Mogaznana-
PeruvicB, 1590, folio.
This title is given by Brunet (Vol. I, p. 259) from : SOTWELL, Bibliotheca
Societatis Jesu Nath. Eibadeneirse. Home, 1676, folio, p. 33.
P. ANTONIO Ruiz (DE MONTOTA), Tesoro de la Lengua Guarani que se usa en
el Peru, Paraguay y Rio de la Plata. Madrid, Juan Sanchez, 1639, 4to j consists
of 8 and 407 numbered leaves.
The author had resided thirty years among the Guaranis. He published
also : Catecismo de la Lengua Guarani. Madrid, 1640, 8vo.
Yocabulario de la Lengua Gruarani, por el P. ANTONIO Ruiz ; revisto y aumentado
por otro Religiose. En el pueblo de S. Maria la Mayor, 1722, 4to.
This is apparently a new edition of the Vocabulary annexed to : Arte de la
Lengua Guarani of P. Ruiz.
GILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 249, 357 and following.
CHEISTOPH GOTTLIEB VON MUEE, Journal zur Kunstgeschichte und zur Allge-
meinen Literatur. tfilrnlerg, Zeh, 1775-1790, 17 vols. 8vo, Vol. IX, p. 98-
HEEVAS, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 95, 96.
HEEYAS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 48, 49, 55, 56, 78, 136, 178, Tabb. XLIX,
L et seq.
HEEYAS, Saggio, pp. 95, 98.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 458, 459, 466. (From GILII and HEEVAS )
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 490.
J. A. VAN HEUVEL, El Dorado ; being a Narrative of the circumstances which
gave rise to the reports in the sixteenth century of the existence of a rich and
splendid city in South America. New York, Winchester, 1844, 8vo, Appendix V,
pp. 164, 165.
ALCEDE D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Paris, 1839, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol.1,
p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 276 (Guarani of Paraguay and Guarayos of Bolivia compared
with Carib, Galibi, and Oyampis).
Six Words of the Fullah, Archipel, and Guarani Languages compared, p. 115
of Vol. I of: Memoires de la Socie"te Ethuologique. Paris, Dondey-Dupre,
1841, 8vo.
Deux Vocabulaires de Dialectes du Guaraui. Vocabulaire XI. Langue de Cayo-
was (Dialecte du Guaranis), pp. 282, 283. Vocabulaire XII. Langue des Guarani
du Paraguay, pp. 288290 of Vol. V of: CASTELNAU, Voyage, Appendice.
GUARPES GUATOS. 77
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. ANTONIO Ruiz DE MONTOYA, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Guarani.
Madrid, 1640, 4to.
The Arte was again published under the following title : Arte de la Lengua
Guarani, con los Escolios, Anotaciones y Apendices, del P. Paulo Restivo
e S. J. Sacados de los papeles del P. Simon Bandini y otros. En el pueblo
de Santa Maria la Mayor, 1734, 4to. Title given by FERDINAND DENIS, in :
Bulletin du Bibliophile, IX me Serie, Nos. 10, 11, and 12. Paris, Techener,
1849, 8vo, p. 358. Brunet, Vol. IV, p. 148, puts the date at 1724, from the
Catalogue of Chaumette.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 432437, 457.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 299302. Ibid., pp. 325
(Guarayos), p. 336 (Chiriguanos), pp. 342, 343 (Sirionos).
GUAKPES.
Indians of the Chilian provinca Cuio, who are said to speak
the Allentiac or Mikokayac languages.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
LUYS DE VALDIVIA, Arte Grammatica, Vocabulario, Catecismo y Confessionario
en Lengua Chilena y en las dos Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac que son las inas
Generales de la Provincia de Cuio en el reyno de Chile, y que Hablan los Indios
Guarpes y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo. (See Allentiac.)
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
LTTYS DE VALDIYIA (see Vocabularies).
GUASAVA.
A language spoken in the department of Michoacan, in Mexico
(according to DE SOUZA). LATHAM (Varieties of Mankind) says
the Guazave language is mentioned as being that of the coast
of Cinaloa. Whether it was different from the Maya dialect is
doubtful.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Arte d Grammatica de la Lengua Guasave, por P. FERNANDO VILLAPANE, de la
Compafiia de Jesus. MS.
GUATOS.
Brazilian Indians of the province Mato-grosso, on the Rio
Paraguay. (On the Tacoary arid Araguaya; of a fairer com-
plexion than the other Indians. MARTIUS, No. 32).
78 GUAYKURU.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Guatos. Vocabulary, No XII, pp. 283 285 of: CASTELNAU,
Vol. V, Appendice.
GUAYKURU, MBAYA.
South American Indians of the province Cujaba, on the left
banks of the Paraguay, who call themselves Eijiguaijegi. The
Spaniards called them " Cavalleros/' because they were excellent
horsemen. Their language has two principal dialects the
Mbaya and the Enakaga, and is said to bear much affinity
to the Baskish language. A similar language is spoken by
the neighbouring Juiadge, Kochaboth, Guentuse, and even
the Payaguas, who, besides, have their own very difficult
language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 367371.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 221 223.
(From the Spanish missionary P. JOSE SANCHEZ LABRADOR'S MSS.)
HERVAS, Aritmetica, p. 99.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 106, 107 ; and Payagua, p. 228.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 478, 505, 506.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 545 (Payagua- Guaycuru, Guay-
curu-Mbaya).
CASTELNATJ, Voyage, and Vol. V, Appendice, Vocabulaires, No. X, Langue des
G-uaycurus, pp. 280, 281.
On the Payaguas, see : Fragments d'un Voyage au Paraguay execute par Ordre
du Gouvernenient ; lus & 1'Assemblee (de la Societe de Geographic) Generale du
23 Decembre, 1853, par ALFRED DEMERSAT, pp. 5- 31 of Vol. VII of the fourth
series of : Bulletin de la Societe Ge"ographique. Paris, Arthur Bertrand, 1854,
8vo. (Pp. 30, 31, Words and Phrases.)
A few Payagwa "Words, and some Account of the Payagwas, by CHARLES
BLACHFORD MANSFIELD, ESQ., M.A., Clare Hall, Cambridge ; with Remarks by
Robert Gordon Latham, M.D., pp. 496504 of : Paraguay, Brazil, and the Plate.
Letters written in 1852-1853, by C. B. MANSFIELD, ESQ., M.A., map, portrait,
and illustrations. Cambridge, 1856, 1 vol. 12mo, pp. xxii and 504.
GUENOA GUYANA. 79
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 482488.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. II, p. 120 of the : Lenguas or Juiadge
Dialect.
GUENOA.
Indian nation, on the eastern banks of the Uruguay River, south
of the Guarani Missions.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 228229.
HEEVAS, Catalogo, p. 46.
GUYANA.
The principal tribes of British Guyana, besides the Accaways,
are the Atorays, the Macoussies, and the Tiber acottes. SIR
ROBERT SCHOMBURGK enumerates, besides the Lingua Geral,
the Arawaak, Warau, and Taruma, the following dialects, as
spoken in Guyana, viz. : 1. Of the Caribi-Tamanaken stock, the
Caribisi, Accaway, Macusi, Arecuma, Soerigong, Waiyamara,
Guinau, Maiongkong, Woyawai, Mawakwa or Maopityan, Piano -
ghotto, Tiverighotto. 2. Of the Wapisian-Parauana stock, the
Wapisian or Wapityan, Atorai, Taurai or Dauri, of all of which
he gives a comparative vocabulary of eighteen words.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabularies of the Languages of Five Indian Nations in Guyana Accoways,
Atoray, Macoussie, Tiberacottis, Guarano. Appendix No. V, pp. 164, 165 of:
J. A. YAN HETTVEL'S El Dorado. New York, Winchester, 1844, 8vo.
P. 166, ibid., Comparison of the Arrowak, Atoray, Maypure, Moxos, and
Quichua.
SIE EOBEET H. SCHOMBUEGK, (Vocabulary and) Kemarks to accompany a
Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes
inhabiting Guiana, pp. 96 99 of the : Report of the Eighteenth Meeting of the
British Association for the Advancemeut of Science, held at Swansea, in August,
1848. London, J. Murray, 1849, 8vo.
Vocabulary of Eighty-two Nouns and Numerals (1 10) in the Four Indian Lan-
80 HAEELTZUK HAIDAH.
guages of British Guiana Arawaak, Accaway, Caribisce, Warow, by WILLIAM
HILLHOUSE, pp. 247, 248 of Vol. II of : Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society
of London. London, John Murray, 1832, 8vo.
HAEELTZUK, HAILTSA.
Naass Indians of the north-west coast, from 50 30' to 53 30'
northern latitude. Dialects of their language are spoken by
the Billechoola, and the inhabitants of MACKENZIE'S Friendly
Village.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ALEXANDER MACKENZIE, Voyages from Montreal through the Continent of
North America. London, 1801, 4to, p. 376.
Eeprinted, London, 1802, 2 vols. 8vo, Vol. II, p. 273. German transla-
tion. Hamburg, 1802, 8ro, p. 545. Eeprinted under No. XXVI, 61, of the
Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (p. 378 of Vol. II of the : Archa3ologia
Americana).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 216 (Friendly Village, from MACKENZIE).
Vocabularies, by JOHN SCOULEB, M.D., of Haeeltzuck and Billechoola, pp. 230,
232, 234. Chimmesyan, pp. 231, 233, 235 of Vol. XI of: Journal of the Eoyal
Geographical Society of London (1841), 8vo.
Hailtsa Vocabulary, by A. ANDEESON, p. 634 of: Horatio Hale's Ethnography
and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and
Blanchard, 1846, folio.
The Vocabularies of MACKENZIE and ANDEESON, reprinted in the Vocabula-
ries in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, sub. H,
XX (Naass), p. 103.
Billechoola, Friendly Village, Fitz-Hugh Sound, Haeltzuk Words, p. 155 of :
E. G. LATHAM, The Langiiages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 166 of Vol. I
of the : Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).
HAIDAH.
Indians of Queen Charlotte's Island. A branch of this tribe,
the Kyganies (Kigarnies) live in the southern part of the
Archipel of the Prince of Wales.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of Kigarnee, Casarnee, Skittageets, Camshava, and Wdrds of other
tribes on the north-west coast (from MS. authorities of STUEGIS and BETANT).
No. XXVIII, 64, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseologia
Americana, Vol. II, p. 380).
H4ITI H1TCHITTEES. 81
Vocabulary by DK. JOHN SCOTJLEK, pp. 231, 233 235 of Vol. XI of : Journal
of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London. London, 1841, 8vo.
HAITI.
The aborigines of this island (San Domingo) are extinct.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 220227.
(Collected Haitian Words (from OYIEDO, PIEDRO MAETYE, and ACOSTA).
Supplements, see in : Earth ol. de las Casas, Regionum Indicarum accuratissima
descriptio. FranJcofurti, 1598, 4to, pp. 810.
C. S. EAPINESQTJE, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, 8vo, pp. 50 et seq. ,
Comparative Taino Vocabulary of Hayti, pp. 230 253 of: C. S. RAFINESQUE,
The American Nations. Philadelphia, 1836, 12mo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 3.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Abecedaire Hay tien ; suivi d'un Precis Historique, Chronologique et Geographique
sur 1'Isle de Haiti. Paris, 1839, 8vo.
The Haytian or Taino Language restored, with Fragments of the Dialects of
Cuba, Lucagas, Boriquen, Eyeri, Casiri, Araguas. Grammatical Notices and Com-
parative Vocabularies (pp. 215 259 of: C. S. RAPINESQTTE, The American
Nations ; or, Outline of their General History. Philadelphia, printed for the
Author, 1836, 12mo.)
HITOHITTEES.
A branch of the Creek confederation, on the rivers Chatahsochee
and Flint.
WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. X, r, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis (Archseo-
logia Americana, Vol. II, p. 377.)
From MS. authority of M. RIDGE, a Cherokee.
Numerals of the Hitchittee or Chel-o-kee Dialect (1 1000), spoken by several
tribes of the great Muscogee race. By CAPTAIN J. C. CASEY, United States Agent,
Florida; pp. 220, 221 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States.
M
82 HOCHELAGA HUASTEKA.
HOCHELAGA.
An extinct tribe of Canada, speaking a dialect of the Mohawk
language. Montreal is situated on the place where this tribe
formerly resided.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E. HACKLUTT, Collection of Voyages. London, 1599, 3 vols. folio ; Yol. II,
p. 231.
G. B. KAMUSIO, Navigation* e Viaggi. Venezia, 1606, 3 vols. folio ; Vol. Ill'
p. 385.
A short Vocabulary (from CARTIER), pp. 48, 49 of: John de Laet, Orbis Novus.
'Ltigduni Batavor., Elzevir, 1633, folio.
From De Laet, reprinted in A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseologia Americana,
t - Vol. II, p, 376, under V, 0), and Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 335337.
See also : JACQUES CARTIER, Brief Eecit de la Navigation faite es Isles de
Canada, Hoohelaga, Saguenay et autres, et particulierement des Moeurs, Lan-
gage et Ceremonies des Habitants d'icelles. Paris, Ponce Kiffet, 1545, 8vo ;
Rouen, 1598, 8vo ; and Italian, Prima Eelatione della Navigatione di Jaques
Cartier, in : Bamusio, Vol. III.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 804,
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabulary.
HOO-PAH.
Indian tribe on the lower part of the Trinity River, in north-
western California. Their language extends to the south fork.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary in: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. Ill, pp. 440445.
PROFESSOR W. W. TURNER, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Hoopah (from GIBBS), Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Dogrib, Umkwa, Tacully,
Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85, of : Keport upon the Indian Tribes ; added to
Lieutenant A. W, Whipple's Report, in Vol. II of: Pacific Eailroad Eeports.
Washington, 1855, 4to.
HUASTEKA.
Mexican Indians, north-east of Vera Cruz and the city of
Mexico, in the State of Tamaulipas, near the Bio Panuco.
83
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ANDEEAS DE OLMOZ, Grammatica et Lexicon Linguae Mexicanse, Totonaquse
et Huastecse. Mexici, 1560, 2 vols. 4to.
Neither Rich nor Ternaux Compans, nor even Brunet, gives the title of this
book. Brunet (III, p. 559) states only that Antonio, in his Bibliotheca
Nova, Vol. I, p. 81, names several linguistic publications of Olmoz, but does
not give their titles. De Souza makes the same remark, but gives no titles
either.
CAELOS DE TAPIA ZENTENO (see Grammars).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 123, 124.
J. S. VATER, Proben der Deutschen Volksmundarten und andere
Sprachforschungeu. Leipzig, Fleischer, 1816, 8vo, pp. 353375.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XL!, No. 704.
Nouvelles Annales de Voyage. Paris, 1840, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 937.
A. GALLATIN, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc. (American
Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 9, 10, Comparative Table to p. 114,
and Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 298304).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
ANDREAS DE OLMOZ (see Vocabularies).
CAELOS DE TAPIA ZENTENO, Arte la la Lengua Huasteca. Mexico, 1747, 4to,
CAELOS DE TAPIA ZENTENO, Noticia de la Lengua Huasteca con Catecismo y
Doctrina Christiana. Mexico, imprenta de la Bibliotheca Mexicana, 1767, 4to,
pp. 10, 128.
(Pp. 147, Grammar; pp. 48 88, Vocabulary; pp. 89128, Catecismo
and Doctrina.)
An extract of this work is given by A. Gallatin in: Collections of the
Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. I, pp. 276 286, and also in :
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 106113.
HUDSON'S BAY INDIANS.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BOWEIE, A Dictionary of the Hudson's Bay Indian Language, s. 1. e. a., 1776,
two sheets in folio.
A short Vocabulary of the Language spoken among the Northern Indians
inhabiting the north-west part of Hudson's Bay, as it was taken at different times
from the mouths of Babiana and Zazana, two Indians who were on board H. M. S.
" Furnace," in the year 1742, by EDWAED THOMPSON, surgeon of said ship.
(Pp. 206211 of: ABTHUE DOBBS, An Account of the Countries adjoining
Hudson's Bay. London, 1744, 4to.)
84 HURONS.
PROFESSOR W. W. TURNER, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Hudson's Bay (from DOBBS), Chepewyan, Dogrib, Tacully, Umkwa, Hoopah,
Navajo, and Apache, pp. 84, 85 of: Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report upon
the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel, in
Vol. II of : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
A Specimen of sundry Indian Languages spoken in the inland parts of Hudson's
Bay, between that coast and the coast of California. Table to p. 202 of : EDWARD
UMFREVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which are added
a Specimen of Five Indian Languages London, Walker, 1790,
8vo, pp. 230.
German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmstedt, 1791, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 419, 422, 424 (from DOBBS).
LIEUTENANT EDWARD CHAPPELL, R.N., Narrative of a Voyage to Hudson's
Bay, in H. M. S. " Rosamund," containing some Account of the Tribes
inhabiting that Remote Region. London, Mawman, 1817, 8vo, map, 4 plates,
pp. 12, 280.
HURONS, WYAKDOTS.
Formerly of Canada. Belonging to the Mohawk stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Dictionnaire de la Langue Huronne, on 72 leaves, in : FRERE GABRIEL SAGARD
THEODAT, Le Grand Voyage du Pays des Hurons, situe en 1'Amerique, vers la mer
douce es derniers confins du Canada, avec un Dictionnaire de la Langue Huronne.
Paris, Denis Moreau, 1632, 8vo, 92 leaves, and pp. 380.
The Dictionary is sometimes found separately, and the work occasionally
bound in two volumes, the first of which is dated 1631.
Court de Gebelin has extracted Fifteen Words from SAGARD THEODAT:
Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII, p. 501.
N. DE LAHONTAN (see Algonquin).
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 231, 232.
SMITH BARTON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 335, 336, 337 (Huron, from SAGARD;
Wyandot, from SMITH BARTON).
A. G-ALLATIN, Synopsis, etc., Comparative Vocabulary, V, 26 ft (p. 372 of Vol.
II of: Archseologia Americana). The Wyandot is No. 26 of the Comparative
Vocabulary, pp. 307367, and is reprinted under A, V, 2, pp. 79, 81, 83 of Vol. II
of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
JOHN PICKERING, in the Encyclopaedia Americana, 1831. Translated iuto Ger-
'man by Talvi (Mrs. Robinson). Leipzig, Vogel, 1834, 8vo.
P. E. DUPONCEATJ, Memoire sur le Systeme Grammatical des Langues de
quelques Nations Indiennes de 1'Amerique du Nord. Paris, 1838, 8ro.
IAKONS, 85
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, Nos. 802, 803 (Wyandot Huron).
JOHN JOHNSTON, of Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Indian Tribes
inhabiting Ohio (Archaologia Americana, Yol. I, pp. 292 297).
Keprinted, with some additions, in the Comparative Vocabulary of the
Iroquois, pp. 393400 of : H. R. SCHOOLCEAFT'S Notes on the Iroquois.
Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
See also: COTTET DE G-EBELIN, Monde Primitif, 4to (Pam, 1772), Vol.
VIII, pp. 499504.
Wyandot numerals (13,000,000), by WILLIAM WALKEE, pp. 218220 of
Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages Hurons,
Iroquois, Mohawks of Amherstburg, Stone Indians ; pp. 113 121 of: Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FEERE G-ABEIEL SAGAED THEODAT (see Vocabularies above) .
From SAGAED, extracted by Professor Fiorillo, of Gottingen, in Mithridates,
Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 323329.
De la Langue (des Hurons), Vol. II, pp. 458 490 of: P. . LAFITEATJ, Mceurs
des Sauvages Americains. Paris, 1724, 2 vols. 4to.
Supplementary Notices to Sagard are given by : GENERAL PARSONS, Discoveries
made in the Western Country. (Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and
Sciences, Vol. II, part 2.) Boston, 1793, 4to, pp. 124 et seq.
Grammar of the Huron Language, by a Missionary of the Village of Huron
Indians at Loretto, near Quebec ; found amongst the papers of the Mission, and
translated from the Latin, by John Wilkie ; pp. 94198 of Vol. II of : Trans-
actions of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec. Quebec, printed by
Thomas Cary and Co., 1831, 8vo.
IAKONS, LOWER KILLAMUKS.
Indians of Oregon, on the shores of the Pacific, north of the
Umpqua River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. 8, T, of the Vocabularies of North, western America, pp. 569629 of: HOE.
HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.
F. XXVIII, pp. 99, 101, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.
86 ILLINOIS 10WAYS.
ILLINOIS.
Indians formerly of Illinois, belonging to the Algonquin stock.
The Mackenzies are closely related to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 233.
SMITH BARTON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 363, 364 (only two Words).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 808.
No. IV, 22, in : A. G-ALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc. Comparative Vocabulary
(Archffiologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305367), after an anonymous French MS.
in Duponceau's Collection, and (partly) under O, IV, 2, p. 112, of the Vocabu-
laries in Vol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
INGANOS.
Indians of the New Granadian territory of Mocoa (formerly
clepartamento del Assuai).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario Ingano-Espanol, taken by the Presbyter MANUEL MARIA ALBIS,
in 1854 ; pp. 20, 21, of : Los Indios del Andaqui. Popayan, impreuta de la Matri-
caria, 1855, 16ino.
INKULUCHLUATE, KANGJULIT.
In Russian America, on the rivers Chulitna, Kuskokwim, and
Kwichpack. They belong to the Eskimo stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULAR1KS.
Vocabulary of Twenty Words, p. 119 of: K. E. YON BAR and Gr. TON HELMEB-
SEN, Beitraege zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Heiches, Band I. St. Petersburg,
1839, 8vo.
SAGOSKIN, Kwigpak Vocabulary (compared with Tchwagmjute, Kuskokwimjute,
Kadjak, and Namoller Languages), pp. 488512 of Vol. VII of: Erman, Archiv
fur wissenschaftliche Kenutniss von Russland. Berlin, 1849, 8vo.
IOWAYS.
Indians on the River Des Homes.
1QUITOS IROQUOIS. 87
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. VI, n, of the Comparative Vocabulary in A. Gallatin's Synopsis (Archseo-
logia Americana, Vol. II), p. 376. From CASS' MS. authority.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Eev. Messrs. S. M. IRYIN and WM. HAMILTON, An Iowa Grammar, illus-
trating the Principles of the Language used by the Iowa, Otae, and Missouri
Indians. Iowa Mission (Presbyterian) 1848, 18rno, pp. 152.
Iowa Primer, ibid., only eight pages (17 24) printed, containing Dissyllables
and Trisyllables, with English explanation.
Eemarks on the Iowa Language, by EEV. WM. HAMILTON, pp. 377-406 of
Vol. IV of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
IQUITOS.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the Amazon.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Iquitos, Vocabulary No. XXI, pp. 295, 296 of: CASTELNAU, Vol. V ?
Appendice.
IROQUOIS.
The great league of five (afterwards six) nations Senecas,
Mohawks, Onondagos, Oneidas, Kayugas, and Tuscaroras. For
books on their languages, see under the different nations.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Specimen of a Comparison of the Languages of the Delaware Stock and those of
the Six Nations, p. 20 of the Appendix to SMITH BAETON, New Views (edition
of 1798), and Comparative Vocabularies.
J. LONG, Voyages and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to
which is added .... A List of Words in the Iroquois, etc., Tongues. London,
Eobson, Debrett, etc., 1791, 4to, pp. 184194, 212215.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 336, 337.
Iroquois Words, pp. 22, 23 of : GEO. HENKT LOSKIEL, History of the Mission of
the United Brethren among the Indians, translated by Ch. Ign. Latrobe. Lon-
don, 1794, 8vo.
A small Collection of Agoneasean Words (the Agoneasedh are the five nations),
pp. 271 275 of Vol. II of: JAMES MACCAULEY, History of the State of New
York. New York, Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 vols. 8vo.
88 ITE JTONAMA.
Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois (and its Cognate, the Wyandot),
pp. 393400 of: HENRY R, SCHOOLCEAFT, Notes on the Iroquois. Albany,
Erastus H. Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
A Vocabulary of Geographical Names of the Five Nations, compared with the
French Names of the same places, is prefixed to : COLDEN'S History of the Five
Indian Nations of Canada. Second edition. London, John Whiston, Lockyer,
Davis, and John Ward, 1750, 8vo, pp. xv, xvi. Many reprints, among others, on
pp. xi, xii of: An Account of Conferences held between Major-General
Sir William Johnson and the Indian Nations. London, A. Millar,
1756, 8vo.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages Iroquois
(Language of the Iroquois Indians of Caughnavassa and St. Regis), Mohawks,
Hurons (Amherstburg, Stone Indians), pp. 113 121 of: Proceedings of the
Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1856.
Dictionnaire Iroquois et Francois, M, S, C, N, etc., folio, in the Mazarin Library
at Paris. (See HAENEL, Catalogus MSS., etc., p. 328.)
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Language of the Iroquois, etc., with a Table exhibiting the Dialectical Variations
of the Language of the Iroquois, as illustrated in their geographical names ; Chap.
II, Book III, pp. 394 411, and Schedule, explanatory of the Indian Map
(geographical names), Appendix I, pp. 465 474 to : LEWIS H. MORGAN, League
of the Ho-de-no-san-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, Sage and Brother ; New York,
Mark Newman and Co., 1851, 8vo.
The Language of the Iroquois, Appendix, pp. 298301 of: MINNIE MYRTLE,
The Iroquois ; or, the Bright Side of Indian Character. New York, Appletons,
1855, 12mo.
ITE, ITENES.
Independent Indians of Bolivia, on the frontiers of Brazil, on
the western banks of the River Guapore.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'C-BBIGNY, L'Hoinme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 259, 260.
ITONAMA.
Indians of the province "los Moxos/' in Bolivia, on the
Nonaraa and Machupa rivers, Missions Magdalena and San
Ramon.
IURIS KACHIQUEL. 89
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEETAS, Saggio, pp. 92, 93.
A. D'C-KBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 162164 ; Vol. IT, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 572576.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 239, 240.
IUBIS.
Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro. MARTIUS
(VII, 196) calls them Yuris, and gives the names of ten tribes
among them the Tucano-Tapuiija.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521511 of: ALFRED E. WALLACE,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro. London, Keeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.
KACHIQUEL.
Indians of the province of Solola, in Guatemala. The Kiche
(Quiche), and Zutugil (and Poconchi), belong to the same stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BENEDICT DE VILLACANAS wrote, according to Adelung (Mithridates, Vol. Ill",
part 3, p. 5, note **), a Vocabulai-y and a Grammar of the Cakchiquel lan-
guage, of which he was Professor at the University of Guatemala. Juarros does
not, however, mention his name.
Numerals in the Kachiquel Language (1 100), by COLONEL GALINDO, p. 214
of Vol. XVIII of the First Series of: Bulletin de la Soci^te de Geographic*
Paris, 1832, 8vo.
Nouvelles Anuales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Paris, 1840, 8vo, pp. 836.
Compendio de Nombres en la Lengua Cakchiquel ; por el P. FR. PANTALEON DE
GUZMAN, cura del itinero por el Real patronato en esta doctrina y Cura de S.
Marie de Jesus Pache. En 20 dias del mes de Octubre, 1704. MS. in 4to,
pp. 336, in the possession of E. G. Squier,
HERYAS, Saggio, pp. 226, 227.
DR. KARL SCHERZER (see Popoluka).
Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Guatemalteca que se llama Cakchiquelchi.
MS. in 4to of 500 pages (of the 17th century), in the Imperial Library at Paris.
N
90 KADJAK.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
BENEDICT DE YILLACANAS (see Vocabularies above).
P. F. ALONZO FLORES, Arte de la Lengua Kakchiquel y paralelo de las quatro
Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy integran en el reyno de Goathemala. Antigua,
Guatemala, 1753.
Although Juarros (T, p. 343) states that this "Arte" was printed, and had
proved very useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, when
the Abbe Brasseur de Bourbourg wrote from Guatemala that he had obtained
four copies (see E. G-. Squier's letter in the London Athenaeum, December 8,
1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Kachiquel with the
Quiche and Zutugil, all three being dialects of one parent stock. Flores was
Professor of the Kakchiquel language at the San Carlos University of Guate-
mala.
Arte du las tres Lenguas Cacchiquel, Quiche y Yutuhil ; por el R. P. FBAY
FRANCISCO XIMENEZ, del orden de predicadores.
Second division of the Padre's great work on the history, languages, and
antiquities of Guatemala, existing, in MS, only, in t'^e University Library of
Guatemala. (For an account of this MS, see N. Trubner's paper on Central
American Archaeology, in the London Athenteum, May 29, 1856, No. 1492.)
Arte de Lengua Kakchikel del usso de Fr. Estevan Torresano Pre r - Ano de
1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris.
KADJAK.
Island of Russian America. The inhabitants, called Konages,
belong to the Eskimo stock, and speak a language similar to that
of the Tschugazzi.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. BILLINGS' Voyages (in Eussian). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, p. 121.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 458, 459, 466468; Vol. IY,
pp. 251 255. (From notices taken by ROBECK, RESANOFF, and officers of the
Russian-American Company.)
Yocabulary of the Languages of Kamtshatka, the Aleutan Islands, and of
Kadjak, Appendix, No. 2, pp. 9 14 of: MAKTIN SATTEB, Account of the Expe-
dition to the Northern Parts of Russia .... performed by Commodore
Joseph Billings, in the years 1785 to 1794. London, Cadell, jun., and Davis,
1802, 4to.
French translation, by J. Cast^ra. Paris, 1802, 2 vols. 8vo ; Yol. II,
pp. 304-311.
German translation. Berlin, 1802, 8vo, pp. 399 406.
KAWITSCHEN. 91
Vocabulary of the Languages of the Islands of Cadiack and Oonalashka, the
Bay of Kenay, and Sitka Sound, Appendix III, pp. 329 337 of: UREY
LISIANSKY, A Voyage round the World in the Years 1803, 180 A, 1805, and 1806.
London, John Booth, 1814, 4to.
CHROMTSCHENKO, Journal kept during a Cruise along the Coast of Russian-
Aruerica, in : Northern Archives for History, Statistics, and Voyages (in Russian).
St. Petersburg, 1824, 8vo, Nos. 1118.
Translated into German in: Hcrtha, 1825, pp. 218221.
KLAPROTH, Asia Polyglotta, pp. 324, 325.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 857. (Tschougatchi, Konega,
Tschougazzi propre, Konega d'lle Cadjac.)
Vocabularies to A. Grallatin's Synopsis, in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana
No. 1, b (from KLAPEOTH), p. 368.
Some Words (3) and Numerals (1 5) of Kadjak compared with Unalachka and
Eskimo, p. 123 of: K. E. VON BAEB and G-B. TON HELMERSEN, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Russischen Reiches und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, Vol. I.
St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo.
JVAN VENIAMINOV, Samjetschania o Koloschenskom, Kadjacks-kom Jasikaa.
St. Petersburg, 1839, 8ro.
Sitka and Kadjack Words compared, p. 163 of: R. Gr. LATHAM, The Languages
of the Oregon Territory ; pp. 154166 of Vol. I of: Journal of the Ethnological
Society of London. Edinburgh, 18i<3, 8vo.
Eskimo and Kadjak words (21) compared, pp. 110 113 of the Eskimo and
English Vocabulary of H. B. M. Admiralty. London, 1850, 12mo, oblong.
SAGOSKIN, Kadjak Vocabulary compared with Kangjulit dialects, Tschngmjute
and Namoller languages, pp. 488512 of Vol. VII of: Erman, Archiv fur wissen-
schaftliche Kunde von Russland. Berlin, Reimer 1849, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A few Notices from J. VENIAMINOV, pp. 142, 143 of: Erman' s Archiv, Vol.
VII (1849).
KAWITSCHEN.
North of Fraser's River, on the north-west coast, and on the
opposite shores of Vancouver's Island. Their language bears
affinity to that of the Haeeltzuk.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Kawitchen Vocabulary, by DR. JOHN SCOULER, in : Journal of the Royal Geo-
graphical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 242, 244246.
92 KERES KINAL.
KEKES, QUEUES.
Pueblo Indians, living at San Diego and the neighbouring
pueblos. The Kiwomi (Ki-o-a-me) or Teguas (Tiguex) at San
Domingo; the Cochitemi, or Quime, near Sandia and Isleta;
and the Acoma, are tribes belonging to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Keres Vocabularies XIII, Kiwomi; XIV, Cochitemi; XV, Acoma taken by
LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIFFLE. Pp. 8689 of Chap. V of the : Report upon
the Indian Tribes, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Prof. W.
W. Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the
35th Parallel (VoL II of the Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, etc.,
4to).
See alio " Pueblo Indians," LIEUTENANT SIMFSON'S Vocabulary, No. 1.
KICHAIS, KEECHIES, KEYES.
Indians of the Great Prairies, related to the Pawnees, living on
the Canadian River, near Chouteau's old trading-house.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Kichai Vocabulary, pp. 65 68 of Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thos. Ewbank,
and Prof. W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieu-
tenant A. W. Whipple's Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II
of the Pacific. Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to).
Fifteen Kichai Words compared with the Pawnee, Ricaree, Witchita, and
Hueco. Ibid., pp. 68, 69.
KIKKAPU, UKAHIPU.
Tribe of the Shawanoe nation, between the Mississippi and Lake
Michigan.
WOHDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views Comparative Vocabularies ; and from him, in :
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 363.
KINAT, KENAI, KENAIZE, TTYNAI.
Indians of Russian America at Cook's Inlet and the Lakes
Iliamna and Kisshick. Their language belongs to the great
KINAI. 93
Athapascan (or Tinne) family. They call themselves " Tnaina"
men. SAGOSKIN distinguishes four dialects of the Kinai lan-
guage, among which are the Inkilik, lnl\,alit y and Ingelmut.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Wortersammlung aus der Sprache der Kinai (from DAVIDOFF and REZANOFF), pp.
59 68 of: J. von Krusenstern, Woertersammlungen aus den Sprachen einiger
Volker des ostlichen Asiens und der Nordwestkuste von Amerika. St. Petersburg,
1813, 4to.
CHYOSTOY i DAVIDOFF, Puteschestwie w Ameriku (Voyage to America, in
Russian), St. Petersburg, 1810, 1812, 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. II, Appendix, pp. xiii
xxviii.
German translation, by C. J. Schultz. Berlin, 1816, Svo.
Vocabulary of the Languages of the Bay of Kenay, Appendix No. Ill, pp. 329
337 of: UBEY LISIAFSKY, A Voyage round the World in the Years 18031806.
London, John Booth, 1814, 4to.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 230, 231, 235, 237, 238. (From
RESANOFF, DAVIDOFF, LISIANSKT, and others.)
II, 4, of the Comparative Vocabularies, pp. 30536? to A. Gallatin's Synopsis
(Vol. II of the Archseologia Americana, from RESANOFF).
Reprinted under No. F, II, pp. 99, 101 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of:
American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 854, 855 (Ougagliakmuzi-Kinaia,
Kinaitsa).
VON WRANGEL, in : K. E. von Far and Gr. von Helmersen, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Russischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander, St. Petersburg,
1839. Vol. I, p. 259.
Ttynai Vocabulary (of the Dialects Inkilik, InJcalit, and Ingelmut}, from L.
SAGOSKIN'S Travels (m Russian). St. Petersburg, 1847-48, 2 vols. Svo. Pp. 481
487 of Vol. VII of : A. ERMAN, Archiv fur wissenschaftliche Kenntniss von
Russland (Berlin, Reimer, 1819, Svo) ; and also in Vol. I of the: Denkschriften
der Russischen Geographisehen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg (Weimar, 1849,
Svo), pp. 3 . . . 3 . . . 'Ehelnkilik and Inkalit Vocabularies reprinted in : BUSCH-
MANN'S Great Comparative Vocabulary, Athapask. Spi'achst. Berlin, 1856, 4to,
pp. 269318.
Wortverzeichniss der Kinai Sprache (from DAVIDOFF, RESANOFF, WBANGEL,
KKUSENSTERN, and LISIANSKY), pp. 233 249 ; and Grosses Wortverzeichniss des
Athapaskischen Sprachstarnmes oder der Athapaskischen und Kinai-Sprachen,
pp. 269 318 of: J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm. Berlin,
1856, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 232236.
94 KIOWAYS KNISTENAUX.
KIOWAYS.
Roving Indians of Texas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary of their Language has been taken by the United States Boun-
dary Commissioner, JOHN B. BAETLETT.
Kioway Vocabulary, taken from AndresNunares, a Mexican, who was five years
a captive among them, by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE, on pp. 78 80 of Lieu-
tenant Whipple, Thomas E wbank, and Prof. W. W. Turner's Report upon the Indian
Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple' s Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel
(Vol. II. of the Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to).
Also : Seventeen Kioway Words compared with Shoshonee Affinities. Ibid., p. 80.
KNISTENAUX, KBISTENAUX, CKEES.
Called also Killisteno, northernmost tribe of the Algonkin
stock, between the Rocky Mountains and Hudson's Bay.
Kindred dialects are spoken by the Nqheihawa, Monsonik,
Nenawehk, Abbitibbe, and were spoken by the Attikamey, who
have entirely disappeared.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
EDWARD UMFREVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which
are added A Specimen of Five Indian Languages London,
Walker, 1790, 8vo, pp. 179 et seq.
German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann, Helmstedt, 1791, 8vo ;
gives the dialect of the Nehethawas or Kalisteno.
Names of the Moon, and Examples of the Knistenaux and Algonquin
Tongues, pp. cv, cvi, cvii cxvi of: ALEXANDER MACKENZIE, Voyage from Mon-
treal through the Continent of North America ..... J^ondon, Cadell,
jun., and Davis, 1801, 4to.
French translation, by J. Castera. Paris, Dentu, 1807, 8vo, pp. 261274.
German translation. Hamburg, 1802, 8vo, pp. 118 et seq.
KB. The Knistenaux Vocabulary is reprinted, pp. 133 141 of: New
Travels among the Indians of North America ; being a compilation
from Lewis and Clark, and .... others, with a Dictionary of the Indian
Tongue. Compiled by WILLIAM FISHER. Philadelphia, James Sharan,
1802, 12mo. Also in the popular book : Events in Indian History
also an Appendix containing an Indian Vocabulary, Philadelphia,
G. Miles and Co., 1842, 8vo, pp. 529- 533.
KNISTENAUX. 95
A Specimen of the Cree or Knistenaux tongue, which is spoken by at least three-
fourths of the Indians of the north-west country on the east side of the Rocky
Mountains, pp. 385 4U3 of: DANIEL WILLIAM HARMON, A Journal of Voyages
and Travels in the Interior of North America .... to which are added ....
considerable Specimens of the Two Languages most extensively spoken ....
Andocer, Massachusetts, Flagg and Gould, 1820, 8vo.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 418, 419 (from MACKENZIE), and the Nehethwa
(from UMFREVILLE).
Killisteno, or Cree, in the Vocabularies of Indian Languages. Appendix
(part 4, pp. 449459 of Vol. II) to: WILLIAM H. KEATING, Narrative of an
Expedition to the Sources of St. Peter's River .... performed in the year 1823
.... under the command of Stephen II. Long, Major, U. S. T. E. Philadelphia,
Carey and Lea, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo.
Vocabulary taken by PROFESSOR SAT, and printed also in the : Astronomical
and Meteorological Records, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in
the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and the Western Waters, under
the command of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo, pp. Ixx, Ixxxviii.
And in the Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape
.... together with a Specimen of the Winnebago, pp. 135148 of the
reprint of: DR. EDWARDS, Observations on the Mohegan Language; pp. 81
160 of: Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, second series,
Vol. X. Boston, Phelps and Faruham, 1823, 8vo. Reprint, Boston, Little
and Brown, 1843, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 819. (Knistenaux propre, Cree).
IV, 7, of the Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305367 of A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana (from HARMON and
MACKENZIE). Reprinted, partly, under N, IV, 1, p. 106 of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Reise des PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED in das Innere von Nordamerika in
den Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, 1839, 18 il, 2 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 505
511.
Vocabulary of the Principal Indian Dialects in use among the Tribes in the
Hudson's Bay Territory .... Cree, pp. 322328 of Vol. II. of: JOHN McLEAN,
Notes of a Twenty-five Years' Service in the Hudson's Bay Company. London,
Richard Bentley, 1819, 2 vols. 12mo.
Vocabulary of the Chipewyan Tongue, with Cree and English translations, pp.
387395 of Vol. II of: SIR JOHN RICHARDSON, Arctic Exploring Expedition.
London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
Note. The Cree from a very full alphabetical MS. Vocabulary, found by
Richardson at the Caultere House (trading port) .
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
J. HOWSE, A Grammar of the Cree Language, with which is combined an
Analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. London, 1844, 8vo.
96 KOLTSCHANES KOLUSCHES.
KOLTSCHANES, GALZANES.
Indian nation of Russian America, north of the River Atna.
Divided into many tribes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
VON WEAN GEL, in : K. E. von Bar and G. von Helmersen, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Russischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, St.
Petersburg, 1839, 8vo ; Yol. I, p. 259.
Reprinted in the Great Comparative Vocabulary pp. 269318 of: BTJSCHMANN,
Atkapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
KOLUSCHES.
In Russian America, at Sitka Bay and Norfolk Sound. The
Tschinkitans belong to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
G-. FORSTER, Geschicbte der Reisen an der Nordwestlichen und Nordostlichen
Kuste von Amerika. Berlin, 1791, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 142 et seq. (from
PORTLOCK), 155, 169, 175, 216 (from DIXON).
A Voyage round the World, but more particularly to tbe North-west
Coast of America, performed in 1785 1788, in the " King George," and
"Queen Charlotte," Captains Portlock and Dixon. By CAPTAIN GEORGE
DIXON. London, Goulding, 1789, 4to, pp. 32, 360, 48, twenty-two plates.
French translation, by M. Lebas. Paris, 1789, 2 vols. 8vo.
Same, by Captain NATHANIEL PORTLOCK. London, Stockdale, 1789, 4to,
pp. 450, twenty plates.
Abridgment of Portlock and Dixon's Voyage. London, Stockdale, 1789,
8vo, pp. 272, map and plate. New title, ibid., 1791, 8vo.
Voyage autour du Monde peudant les annees 1790, 1791 et 1792, par L. MAR-
CHAND ; precede d'une Introduction Historique .... par C. L. Claret Fleurieu.
Paris, imprimerie de la Republique, 1799, 4 vols. 4to. Vol. I, pp. 587 et seq.
Voyage de La Perouse autour du Monde, publie conformement au Decret du 22
Avril, 1791, et r^dige par L. A. Milet Mureau, General de Brigade. Paris, 1797,
2 vols. 4to, and atlas.
German translation Berlin, 1799, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, p. 339.
CHVOSTOV I DAVIDOFP, Puteschestwie w Americu, St. Petersburg, 1812, 2 vols.
8vo. Appendix, pp. 1 et seq.
Wortersammlung aus der Sprache der Koljuschen (from REZANOFF, LISIANSKY,
and others), pp. 47 55 of: J. v. Krusenstern, Woertersamnilungen aus den
Sprachen einiger Volker des ostlichen Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika.
St. Petersburg, 1813, 4to.
KONZA KULA-NAPO. 97
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 212, 213, 224, 226228, 235, 237 ; Vol. IV,
pp. 251253.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 851, 852 (Kolouches, Tchinkitans).
No. XXVII, 62, of Vocabularies to : A. (Matin's Synopsis, etc., Vol. II of:
Archseologia Americana, p. 371 (from DAVIDOFF).
No. a, XVIII, 1, p. 102 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society.
Nossow, Koloschian Vocabulary (G-erman, Russian, and Kolosch), in Russian
letters, pp. 271 274 of: K. E. VON BAB and GE. TON HELMERSEN, Beitrage zur
Kenntniss des Russischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens. St. Peter s-
burg, 1839, 8vo, Vol. I.
Eleven Words compared with Atna and Ugalenze, p. 99, ibid.
JV.AN VENIAMINOY, Sapiski ob ostrovach Unalaschkinskago otdjela. (Notes on
the Islands of the District of Unalaschka). St. Petersburg, 1840, 3 vols. 8vo.
JVAN VENIAMINOV, Samjetschania o Koloschenskom i Kadjackskom. St. Peters-
burg, 1846, 8vo.
W. SCHOTT, Etwas uber die Sprache der Koloschen in : Erman's Archiv fiir
die wissenschaftliche Kunde von Russland. Berlin, 1843 ; Vol. Ill, pp. 439445.
ft
Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan, Kinai, and Koloschian Languages,
pp. 269 318 of: BUSCHMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachstamrn. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
W. SCHOTT, Etwas liber die Sprache der Koloschen (see Vocabularies above).
KONZA, KANZE, KANSAS.
Indian tribe belonging to the Dacota stock, like the Sioux and
Osage, on the northern banks of the Kansas River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (Akansas).
T. SAY, Vocabularies, pp. LXXII LXXVIII of: Astronomical and Meteoro-
logical Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition
.... of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 778.
Reise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Coblenz, 1839, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, p. 504.
KULA-NAPO.
One of the Clear Lake Bands in north-western California.
Their language is spoken by all the tribes occupying the Large
Valley.
98 KUSKOKWIMES KUTANAE.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE G-IBBS, Vocabulary, in: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. Ill, pp. 425434.
KUSKOKWIMES, TCHWAGMJTJTES, KUSKUT-
SCHEWAK, OR, KTJSHKUKCHWAKMUTES.
Tribe of Russian America, between the rivers Nushagak,
Ilgajak, Chulitna, and Kuskokwina, on the sea-shore.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
VON WRANGEL, Kuskokwim (Russian and G-erman) Vocabulary, pp. 259276
of: K. E.von Bar and Gr. von Helmersen, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Kussischen
Reichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens. fit. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo, Vol. I,
printed in Russian letters. The Names of the Months and of some Planets are
given ; ibid., pp. 134, 135,
Reprinted in the Comparative Table of the Dialects spoken by the Behring's
Strait and Labrador Eskimos (the former called Kuskutchewak), pp. 369 382
of Vol. II of : SIR JOHN RICHARDSON'S Arctic Exploring Expedition. London,
1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
SAGOSKIN, Tchwagmjute and Kwigpak Vocabularies (compared with Kuskok-
wime, Kadjak, and Namoller), pp. 488 512 of Vol. VII of: Erman's Archiv fur
wissenschaftliche Kunde von Russland. Berlin, 1849, 8vo.
KUTANAE, KUTANI, KITTJNAHA,
OB KUTNEHA, COUTANIES, FLATBOWS.
Indian tribe near the sources of the Mary River, west of the
Rocky Mountains.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols. 4to j
Vol. II, pp. 511-513.
Vocabulary, 2 D of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 629
of: HORATIO HALE'S Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expe-
dition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.
E, XXII, and pp. 97, 99 of the Vocabularies, Vol. II of the : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society.
Vocabulary in J. HOWSE'S Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Lan-
guages Kutani, Flathead, Okanagan, Atna j pp. 199 206 of: Proceedings of
Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.
KUTCHIN LENCA. 99
KUTCHIN, LOUCHEUX.
Indians of North-western America, on the banks of the Yukon
or Kutchi-Kutchi. They belong to the Athapascan family.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of the Kutchin, of the Yukon or Kutchi-Kutchi. Drawn up by MB.
M'MuERAT ; to which the Chepewyan Synonymes were added by MBS. M'PHEESON.
Pp. 382 385 of Vol. II of: Sir John Eichardson's Arctic Exploring Expedition.
London, 1851, 2 vols. 8vo.
Reprinted and compared with the Athapascan and Kinai Languages, pp. 179
222,269 318 of: Buschmann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
LAYMON.
Indians of California, near Loretto, related to the Cotchimi.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 234237.
P. DUCRUE, in: Christoph. Grottl. von Murr, Journal zur Kunstgeschichte und
zur allgemeinen Literatur. Niirriberg, 1775 1790, 17 vols. 8vo ; Yol. XII,
pp. 268 et seq.
CHEISTOPH. GOTTL. VON MUEE, Nachrichten von verschiedenen Landern des
Spanischen Amerika, aus eigenhandigen Aufsatzen eiuiger Missionarien der Gresell-
schaft Jesu herausgegeben. Halle, Hendel, 1809, 2 vols. 8vo ; Yol. II, p. 394.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 198, 199, Cochirui-Leymon (from P.
PUCRUE).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 194198.
LENCA.
Spoken by the Indians of the same name, inhabiting principally
the central parts of Honduras (Central America), especially the
departments of Comayagua and Tegucigalpa. For an account
of them see "Notes on Central America, particularly the
States of Honduras and San Salvador, etc/' By E. G. SQUIER.
8vo. New York, 1855. Note C of Appendix.
100 LULE LUTUAMI.
There are several dialects of the Lenca language, viz., Guaji-
quero, Opatoro, Intibucat, and Similaton, of all of which SQUIER
presents vocabularies. See pp. 371 373 of the Spanish edition
of the work above quoted, viz. : " Apuntamientos sobre Centro-
America, particularmente sobre los Estados de Honduras y San
Salvador, etc., por E. G. SQUIER, Antiguo Ministro de los
Estados Unidos cerca de las Republicas de Centre- America;
traducidos del Ingles por un Hondurerio (Don Leon Alvarado)."
Paris, 1856, imprenta de Gustavo Gratiot. 8vo, pp. xii and
384, maps and plates.
LULE.
Once a powerful nation in South America (Paraguay, near the
River Vermejo), perhaps identical with the Mataras, who were
much feared by the Spaniards. They were divided into Lule,
Isiftine, Tokistine, Oristine, and Tonocote. Their language
bears a close res3mblance to the Vilela.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. ANTONIO MACHONI DE COEDEEIA (Procurator-general of the Jesuits in Para-
guay), Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Lule y Tonocote. Madrid, 1732, 12mo.
HEEVAS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 49, 121, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 102, 103.
HEETAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 161 et seq., 223.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 97, 98.
Mithridates, Yol. IV, pp. 508, 516, 517.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 456.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. ANTONIO MACHONI DE COEDEEIA (see Vocabularies above).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 510512, 514516 (from the extract made by
Hervas, from MACHONI).
LUTUAMI, CLAMETS.
Also Tlamatl. Indians of south-western Oregon, near the
Clamet Lake.
MACONIS MAHA. 101
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. 9, U, of the Vocabularies of North- western America, pp. 569629 of: HOB.
HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1816, folio ; and F. XXIX, pp. 98, 100 of the
Vocabularies in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
MACONIS.
Brazilian Indians, nearly exterminated by the Botocudos. The
remnants of this tribe live now near Porto Seguro, in the
province of Espiritu Santo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIET> NEUWIED. Frankfurt, 1820, 1821,
2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 323325.
BALBI, Atlas Ethriographique, Tab. XLI, No. 503 (Maconi de Minas Novas).
MAHA, OMAHA.
On the junction of the Platte and Omaha rivers and the Mis-
souri. They belong to the Sioux-Osage family. The Ponchas
(Poncars, Puncaws) speak a kindred dialect.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. SAY, Vocabularies of Indian Languages, pp. Ixxii Ixxviii, Ixxxi Ixxxii, in :
Astronomical and Meteorological Records, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages
taken on the Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi and its Western Waters,
under the command of Major S. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo ; pp. Ixx
Ixxxviii.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 779 (from SAT).
A. GALLATIN'S Comparative Vocabulary, No. VI, 39, pp. 305 367 of: Archa?o-
logia Americana, Vol. II ; and S, VI, 5, p. 117 of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Eeise des PBINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Collenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 599612, 632.
102 MAIA.
MAIA, MAYA.
Language of the Indians of Yucatan. The Puctunc is a dialect
of this language spoken in the southern part of Vera Paz.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Vooabolario, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 115, 116.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 110, 111.
HEEVAS, Origine (Yucatan) pp. 29, 41, 48, 121, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.
P. PEDEO BELTEAN DE SANTA KOSA MAKIA, Arte de el Idioma Maya reducido a
succinctas reglas y Semi-lexicon Yucateco. Mexico, Bernard de Hogal, 1746, 4to.
PEEFECTO BAEZO, Vocabulario de las Lenguas Castellana y Maya, pp. 215
217 of Yol. XYIII of the First Series of the : Bulletin de la Societe de Geographic.
Paris, 1832, 8vo.
Maya Numerals (1 10) and five "Words in the Puctunc Dialect, given by
COLONEL GALINDO, pp. 213, 214 of Vol. XYIII of the First Series of the : Bulletin
de la Societe" de Geographic. Paris, 1832, 8vo.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 23.
MALTE BEFN, Gemalde von Amerika und seinen Bewohnern. Uebersetzt von
Greipel. Leipzig, 1824, 2 vols. 8vo.
Yocabulaire Maya, avec les noms de nombre et quelques phrases a. 1'usage des
voyageurs (Spanish, French, and Maya), pp. 79 90 (89, 90, phrases) of: FEED.
WALDECK, Voyage Pittoresque et Archeologique dans la province de Yucatan.
Paris, Bellizard, Dufour, and Co., 1838, folio.
Pp. 29 33, ibid., in a list of cities, villages, etc., in Yucatan, the significa-
tion of many of the names is given.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 676.
A brief Maya Vocabulary (English and Maya, with the Numerals annexed),
Appendix, pp. 255 263 of: B. M. NOEMAN, Rambles in Yucatan. New York,
J. and H. G. Langley, 1842, 8vo (third edition, ibid., 1843, 8vo), plates, pp. 304.
A. GALLATLTST, Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, Yucatan and
Central America, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I
(Neiv YorJc, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo), Article I, pp. 1352 ; pp. 9, 10,
104, 108, 298304.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1840, 8vo, Vol. IV, pp. 9 37.
According to the notices given by Cogolludo, the historian of Yucatan
(Madrid, 1688, folio), several MS. Dictionaries and Vocabularies have been com-
piled of the Maya Language ; the principal one having been that of FEAY ALONZO
MAINAS. 103
DE SOLANA (" Un Vocabulario Muy copioso "), and particularly that of FEAY
ANTONIO DE CIUDAD REAL, which was called the " Calepino," and which, according
to Cogolludo, held more than " 1200 pliegos de limpio."
Another Vocabulary is mentioned to have been written by FEAT BEENARDINO
DE VALLADOLID, who was known by bis perfect pronunciation of the language.
In Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 16, besides the above, ANDEEAS DE AYENDANO
is mentioned as having compiled a Maya Vocabulary. Cogolludo says nothing of
this author.
GRAMMARS AtfD GEAMMATICAL NOTICES.
The Grammars of FRAY Louis DE VILLALPANDO, improved by Archbishop
LAND A, those by FRAY JULIAN DE QUAETES and by FRAY JUAN COEONEL exist,
or rather have existed, merely in MS. Cogolludo mentions, besides, an " Arte mas
Breve," compiled by FEAY JUAN DE AZEVEDO.
FRANCIS GABRIEL DE SAN BONAVENTUEA, Arte del Idioma Maya. Mexico,
1560, 8vo.
Norman, p. 240, says that this Grammar is founded upon the one of
VILLALPANDO, improved by Lancia. In Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 16,
an edition (Mexico, 1684) is mentioned, from which Hervas, assisted by the
Missionary Don Rodriguez, had made an extract, the MS. of which Adelung
made use of.
P. PEDRO BELTEAN DE SANTA ROSA MAEIA, Arte de el Idioma Maya reclucido
a succinctas regulas y Semi-lexicon. Yucateco. Mexico, Bernardo de Hogal,
1746, 4to.
An Extract from this Grammar is given in Chapter XIV of : B. M. Norman,
Rambles in Yucatan (New York, F. and H. G. Langley, 1842, third edition,
1843, ibid., 8vo), pp. 241249 ; and also in : A. Gallatin, Notes on the Semi-
civilized Nations of Mexico, Yucatan, and Central America, in Vol. I of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society (Neiv York, Bartlett
and Welford, 1845, 8vo), Article I, pp. 4547, and Appendix No. 1 (3),
pp. 252 268 ; for which Article also MS. notes of DON Pio PEREZ, Gefe
politico of Peto, Yucatan, given in 1842 to John L. Stephens, have been used.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 13 23 (taken from the above-mentioned
extract of Hervas from SAN BONAYENTUEA).
A Yucatecan Grammar, translated from the Spanish into Maya, and abridged
for the Instruction of the Native Indians, by the REV. J. Ruz, of Merida.
Translated from the Maya into English by John Kingdom, Baptist Missionary,
Belize, Honduras. Belize, printed at the Baptist Mission Press, 1847, 8vo, pp. 68.
MAINAS.
Indians of South America, on the banks of the rivers Pastazas,
Nukurai, and Chambira.
104 MAIPURES.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p, 94 (Lingua di Cerros).
HEEVAS, Catal. d. Ling., pp. 61, 62 (List of the Known Languages (16) in the
provinces of May n as and Maranou).
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLVIII, L et seq.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES,
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 592, 595, 596.
MAIPUHES.
Indians of the Upper Orinoco and on the banks of the Ventuari.
Their language is very generally spoken in the Orinoco regions,
and particularly in the Mission of Atura. Dialects are spoken
by the Avanes, Kaveres, Parenes, Guypunavi, and Chirupa.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILIT, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 44, 35 ; Yol. Ill, pp. 185375.
Translated in Ch. Gr. von Murr, E-eisen einiger Missionarien der Gesellschaft
Jesu in America. Niirnberg, 1785, 8vo ; pp. 1.06 et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 616, 617, 618, 628, 629, 631 (Maipure, Avanoe, Kavere,
and Guypunavoe).
HEEVAS, Origine delle Lingue, pp. 80, 104, 120, 121, and Tabb. XII, XIII, L,
LI et seq. ; and for the Dialect of the Avanes, pp. 164, 165, Tabb. XIII, LI et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 110, 111 ; and Avanes, pp. 87, 88.
HEEVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 104.
A. VON HUMBOLDT, Eeise, Yol. IY, p. 128.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 611 (Maypure).
Some (7) Maipure "Words compared with Arrowack, Atoray, Moxos, and
Quiohua, in Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. VAN HEUVEL, El Dorado. New York,
Winchester, 1844, 8vo.
A. D'ORBIQNY, L'Homme American), Yol. II, p. 274.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 614623.
MAKOBY MANAOS. 105
MAKOBY.
Indians of the Chaco, on the banks of the Vermejo River, by
descent and language related to the Abipones.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
(He used for this the MS. of the Missionary KAIMTTKD TEEMEYEE.)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 497, 505, 506.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 496, 497, 501, 502, 504, 505.
MALALIS.
Indians of the Brazilian province Minas Geraes, who speak a
language very difficult to pronounce (MARTIUS, I, No. 7).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Keise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED NEUWIED nach Brazilien, in den
Jahren 18151817. Frankfurt, 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 321
323.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 508.
MAME (POKO-MAMPj.
Indians of Guatemala, speaking a language related to the
Kachiquel.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FEAT HIEEONYMUS LAEIOS, Arte de laLengua Mame. Mexico, 1697.
Ternaux-Compans (Bibliotheque Americaine, p. 60, No. 306) gives the
following title : Arte de la Lengua Mame, por Fr. Hieron. Larios, s. 1., 1607.
MANAOS, MONOAS.
Brazilian Indians of the province of Para/ between the rivers
Urariva and Chinara, and particularly on the Rio Padavari
(MARTIUS, VII C, No. 228, and Voyage, Vol. Ill, p. 1125).
p
100 MAN DANS M AQUAS,
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Dialogues in Manao and Portuguese, " Caderno da doutrina pella Liugua Monoa
ou dos Manaos," and " Compendes da doutrina christaa que se manda ensinar
com preceyto, anno de 1740," on twenty pages, in MS. No. 223 of the King
George IV Collection, British Museum (see FEED. EUANC. DE LA FIGANIEBE,
Catalogo dos Manuscriptos Portuguezes existentes no Museu Britannico. JLisboa,
imprensa nacional, 1853, 12mo, p. 185).
MANDANS, WAHTANI.
Indians of the Upper Missouri, nearly extinguished by the small
pox in 1838.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. S. KAPINESQTTE, Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 8vo; p. 132.
A. GALLATIN, Synopsis, etc., in Vol. II of: Archeeologia Americana, Appendix
No. IV, Vocabularies, VI, p. 379.
(Names of chiefs, from the treaty of the Mandans with the United States,
July, 1825, with corresponding Minetare words.)
Mandan Vocabulary, Appendix B, pp. 262 265, Vol. IT. of: GEO. CATLIN,
Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North American
Indians, fourth edition. London and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2 vols.
8vo.
Eeise des PBINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols. 4to j
Vol. II, pp. 514562.
JAMES KIPP, Mandan Vocabulary, pp. 446459 of Vol. Ill of : Schoolcraft's
Indian Tribes of the United States ; and
Mandan and Upsasoka, and Mandan and Minetare Words compared, ibid.,
pp. 255, 256.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Eeise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 18391841, 2 vols. 4to ;
pp. 514-562.
MAQUAS.
Extinct tribe of the Iroquois in eastern Pennsylvania and
western New York. Their language, as it appears by the oldest
vocabulary, bears some affinity to the Wyandot and Mohawk.
MASCHACARIS MASSACHUSETTS. 107
At a later period we find the Onondaga sometimes called
Maqua.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabula Mahakuassica, pp. 155160 of: Lutheri Cathechismus ofwersatt
pa American Yirginiske Spraket. Stockholm, 1693, 12mo.
A Collection of Words (English, Maqua, Delaware, Mohican) by Eev. John
Ettwein, from ZEISBERGEK'S MSS. (pp. 41 44 of No. 1, Yol. I, of the : Bulletin
of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania. PhiladelpJiia, printed for the Society,
1813, 8vo).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
The Library of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia has the
following MSS. :
DAVID ZEISBERGEK, Essay of an Onondaga Grammar, or a short Introduction
to learn the Onondagua, alias Maqua, Tongue, 4to, pp. 67.
CHE. PYRL^TJS, Affixa nominum verborum Linguse Maquaicse, 4to, pp. 25.
CHR. PYRL^TJS, Adjectiva, nomina et pronomina Linguse Maquaicse, cum
nonnullis de verbis, adverbiis et prsepositioiiibus ejusdem Linguse, 4to, pp. 86.
MASCHACAHIS.
Indians of the Brazilian province of Porto Seguro, on the
banks of the rivers Pardo, Belmonte, and Santa Cruz.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED NEUWIED. Frankfurt, 1820, 1821,
2 vols. 4to ; Yol. II, p. 319.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 502 (Machacali des bords du
Jiquitinhonha).
MASSACHUSETTS INDIANS, NATICK.
These Indians belong to the Algonquin stock were formerly
very numerous, but are now much reduced in numbers. The
Montagnards and Skoffi, west of Hudson's Bay, are related to
them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JOHN ELIOT (see Grammars, second edition, Appendix, pp. xlix liy).
JOSIAH COTTON, Vocabulary of the Massachusetts (or Natick) Indian Language.
Edited, from the original MS. (in Cambridge), by John Pickering, pp. 147257
108 MASSACHUSETTS.
of Vol. II of the Third Series of : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical
Society. Cambridge, printed by E. W. Metcalf and Co., 1830, 8vo. (Copies
with separate title ; Cambridge, 1829, 8vo.)
Contains : Pp. 148151, Notice of the MS., with Kemarks on the Author's
Ethnography and the Pronunciation of the Language, by J. P. ; 155 213,
Yocabulary ; 244 57, Appendix (from ELIOT'S Primer).
Specimen of the Mountaineer or Sheshatapoosh-Shoish, Skoffie, and Micmac
Languages. Yocabulary from an Indian boy, Gabriel, pp. 16 33 of Vol. VI of
the First Series of : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society for the
year 1799. Boston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8vo.
SMITH BAKTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387389 (from ELIOT), and Skoffies and
Mountaineers, ibid., pp. 418, 419.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 613.
Comparative Vocabulary (of Forty-five Words) of various Dialects of the
Lenape (or Delaware) stock of the North American Indians, by T. SAY, in Note
15, pp. 135 145, to John Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on
the Mohegan Language, in : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society,
Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo.
Reprinted, Boston, Little and Brown, 18 i3, 8vo ; pp. 81160.
ScofHes (from G-ABKIEL), No. IV, g, Sheshatapoosh (Indian boy, Gabriel),
Labrador, No. IV, 11, and Massachusetts (from ELIOT and COTTON), No. IV, 15,
of A. Gallatin's Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 305367, 369 of Vol. II of : Archseo-
logia Americana.
Also, under O, IV, 1 (Sheshapootosh) , 2 (Skoffie), p. 100, and P, IV, 1 (Mas-
sachusetts, p. 108), of the Vocabularies, in Vol. II of: Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society ; and an extract, Article I of the Appendix, p. 491,
to : JOHN W. DE FOREEST, History of the Indians of Connecticut. Hartford,
Hamersley, 1852, 8vo.
SILIS WOOD, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns of Long
Island. Brooklyn, 1824, 8vo. Reprinted, ibid., Spooner, 1828, 8vo.
James Macauley, History of New York. New York, Gould and Banks,
1829, 3 vols. 8vo ; Vol. II, pp. 264, 265 (from WOOD).
REV. M. HECZEWELDEE, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape proper,
the Minsi dialect, the Machicanns, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano, and
Nanticoke. MS. in the Library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.
Vocabulary of the Massachusetts Indians, extracted from ELIOT'S translation,
pp. 288299 of Vol. I of : Henry Schoolcraft, Historical and Statistical In-
formation respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes
of the United States. Collected under the direction of the Bureau of Indian
Affairs. Philadelphia, Lippincot, Grambo, and Co., 1851, 4to.
MATAGUAYA MATLACINGA. 109
Comparative Vocabulary of Pamptico of North Carolina, Natic or Massa of
Massachusetts, and Chippewa of Michigan, pp. 556, 557 of Vol. V of: SCHOOL-
CRAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
The Indian Grammar begun ; or, an Essay to bring the Indian Language into
Rules, for the help of such as desire to learn the same, for the furtherance of the
Gospel among them. "By JOHN ELIOT (Isaiah 33, 19, 66, 18 ; Dan. 7, 14 j
Psalt. 19, 3; Mac. 3, 11). Cambridge, printed by Marmaduke Johnson, 1666, 4to.
Reprinted, witb Notes and Observations by JOHN PICKERING and DUPONCEAU, in :
Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. IX.
Boston, 1832, 8vo ; pp. 223366.
Contains : Pp. 223 242, the Massachusetts Language : Introductory
Observations, by JOHN PICKERING ; dated Salem, July, 1821.
Pp. 243 312, reprint of ELIOT'S Grammar.
Pp. (313 311) i xxix, Notes and Observations on Eliot's Grammar.
Addressed to John Pickering, by PETER S. DUPONCEAU.
Pp. (342 360) xxx xlviii, Supplementary Observations, by the Editor.
Pp. (361366), xlix liv, Index of Indian Words in ELIOT'S Grammar;
including Select Words from his Translation of the Bible.
There are separate copies of this edition mentioned (Brunet, II, p. 173) ;
dated Boston, 1822, 8vo.
Extracts from ELIOT'S Grammar are given in : J. H. M'Culloch's Eesearches
concerning the Aboriginal History of America. Baltimore, Lucas, 1829, 8vo ;
Chap. II, on the Languages of the American Indians, pp. 42 53.
The Indian Primer. Boston, 1720, 12mo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 381387.
E. A VAIL, Notice sur les Indiens de 1'Amerique du Nord. Paris t 1840, 8vo ;
p. 55, Conjugation.
MATAGUAYA.
Indians of the Gran Chaco, belonging to the Pampeen or Pata-
gonian stock.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Anu'ricain, Vol. II, pp. 109, 110.
The Padres of the Mission 4 of Tanja have compiled a MS. Vocabulary of
this language.
MATLACINGA.
A Mexican language, mentioned by PRICHARD as being spoken
in the valley of Toluca, in Mexico. DE SOUZA mentions :
110 MAYOEUNAS MENIENG.
"Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Matlazinga, y Sermones
y Catecismo en diclia Lengua, por FR. ANDRES CASTRO/'
CASTRO went to Mexico in 1542, and not only learned the
Nahuatl (Mexican), but also the Matlazinga and Toluca. which
DE SOUZA characterises as " Lengua la mas dificil de la Nueva
Espaiia." He died in the Convent of Toluca, in 1577, leaving
his MSS. in the Library of Santiago, Tlateluco, where they
were seen by DE SOUZA.
According to the same authority, FRAY DIEGO BASALANQUE,
who was elected, in 1623, Provincial of the Convent of San
Luis Potosi, Mexico, and who afterwards retired to the Convent
of Charo, composed both a grammar and dictionary of the Mat-
lazinga language. DE SOUZA also mentions that a volume of
Sermons, in the Matlazinga, was composed by the FR. GERONIMO
BAUTISTA, Franciscan, in the year 1562, in the College of
Tlateluco, in Mexico. He adds, " This language is one of the
most difficult of New Spain " and also states that the volume
above referred to exists in the library of the College just men-
tioned.
MAYOEUNAS.
Brazilian Indians of the province do Rio Negro, on the banks
of the Rio Yavari (MARTIUS, No. 184, and Vol. Ill, p. 1195
of his Voyage).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Mayorunas civilises (& 1' Amazon), Vocabulary XXV, pp. 299,
8vo, of: CASTELNATT, Vol. V, Appendice.
Langue des Mayorunas sauvages (au Yavari), Vocabulary XXVI, pp. 300,
301 of: CASTELNATT, ibid.
MENIENG.
Indians of the Brazilian province of Espiritu Santo, on the
banks of the Rio Belmonte. They, speak now the Portuguese
language, but used formerly a dialect of the Kamakan.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des PEINZEN MAXIMILIAN YON NEUWIED, etc. Frankfurt^ 1820, 1821,
2 vols. 4to; Vol. II, pp. 212.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 506.
MENOMONIES MEXICAN. HI
MENOMONIES.
Indians of the Algonkin stock, north of Green Bay, Wisconsin,
between the Chippeways and Winnebagos.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Comparison of Words and Sentences in the Dialects of the Ottawaws and Me-
nomonies, pp. 392 398 of: A Narrative of the Captivity and Adventures of John
Tanner, during Thirty Years' Eesidence among the Indians Edited by
EDWIN JAMES, M.D. New York, G. arid C. and H. Carvill, 1830, 8vo.
No. IV, 25, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in Yol. II of: Archaeologia Americana, pp. 305367, from D. DOTY (MS.),
JAMES, and Notices in the Department of War, United States. Reprinted under
O, IV, 5, p. 113, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transactions of the Ameri-
can Ethnological Society.
Menomony Vocabulary, by Mr. BKTJCE, Indian agent at Green Bay, pp. 470
481 of Vol. II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
MESSISSAUGEH.
Indians of the Algonkin stock, south of Lake Superior.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BABTOTT, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 415, 416 (from SMITH BARTON).
No. IV, f, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, Vol. II of: Archseo-
logia Americana, p. 375 (from SMITH BARTON).
Comparative Vocabulary, etc., of T. SAY (Notes to John Pickering's edition of
Edwards' s Observations on the Mohegan Language, in : Collections of the Massa-
chusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boston, printed by Phelps and
Earnham, 1823, 8vo. Keprinted, Boston, Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo j pp. 135
145.
MEXICAN, NAHUATL, AZTEK.
The Mexican language, properly called "Nahuatl," seems to
have been used from the valley of Mexico down to Nicaragua.
It was spoken originally by the Nahuatlacs, occupying the valley
of Mexico, or Anahuac; and the Tolteks, in subjugating the
Nahuatlacs, are said to have adopted their language. The
112 MEXICAN.
Spaniards, finding the Azteks at the head of the Chichimek
Empire, the denomination "Azteks" has also promiscuously
been used for Mexican, or Nahuatl. The languages spoken by
the Niquiraris of Nicaragua, and the Tlascalteks of San Salvador
are dialects of the Nahuatl.
WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ANDRES DE OLMOS (see Grammars).
FRAY ALONSO DE MOLINA, Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Mexicana, com-
puesto por el tnuy reverendo Padre Fr. Alonso de Molina, de la Orden del bien
aventurando nuestro Padre San Francisco. Dirigido al muy excelente Senor
D. Martin Enriquez, visorrey desta Nueva Espanna. En Mexico, en casa de
Antonio Spinosa, 1571, 2 parts, in 1 vol. folio.
First part : Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Mexicana, 4to, 126 leaves.
Second part : Yocabulario en Lengua Mexicana y Castellana, 2, 162 leaves.
The Dedication is dated 1569. The: Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y
Mexicana (Mexico, 1555, 4to), mentioned by Antonio in his Biblioteca
Hispana Nova, I, 37, may therefore be a mistake, and refer to the Vocabulary
of DE OLMOS, annexed to the Grammar of the same author.
Dialogosen Lengua Mexicana, por FR. ELIAS DE SAN JUAN BAUTISTA. Mexico,
1598, 8vo.
PEDRO DE ARENAS, Vocabulario Manual de las Lenguas Castellana y Mexicana.
Mexico, Henrico Martinez, s. a. (privilege, dated 1611), small 12mo. Reprinted,
ibid., 1728, in 12mo, and .1793, in 12mo.
Vocabulario Manual de las Lenguas Castellana y Mexicana, en que se contienen
las palabras, preguntas y respuestas mas comunes y ordinarias que se suelen
ofrecer en el trato y cornunication entre Espauoles e Indios. Compuesto por
PEDRO DE ARENAS. Reimpreso en Pueblo,, en la Imprenta del Hospital de S.
Pedro a cargo del C. Manuel Buen Abad. Ano de 1831, 12mo ; pp. 11,131.
Two parts : Spanish-Mexican, pp. 1 93 ; Mexican-Spanish, pp. 94 131.
A short Vocabulary, p. 241 of: JOAN. DE LAET, K"ovus Orbis. Lugduni Bata-
vorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 228, 355 et seq.
Diccionario Espailol y Mexicano, pp. 248, 8vo, 1742 (sine loco et auctore) ; in
the collection of C. A. TJhde, Esq.
ANT. COURT DE GEBELIN, Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII. Paris, 1772 ; pp. 523,
524, 525. Reprinted on pp, 332 334 of: J. B. Scherer, Recherches Histo-
riques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo.
R. FORSTER, Bemerkungen auf seiner Reise um die Welt. Berlin, 1783, 8ro,
p. 254.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 116 118.
MEXICAN. 113
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 120, 121, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI
et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 63, 64, 107109.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies, gives also words
of the Indians of Colb.ua.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Paris, 1810, 8voj Vol. IV, pp. 8 36.
BALBI, Atlas Etbnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 701 (Azteque).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 87, 88, 105, 106, 212, 213.
A. GALLATIN, Notes on tbe Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc., Vol. I of:
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. New York, Bartlett and
Welford, 1845, 8vo ; pp. 9, 10, 298304.
E. G. SQTTIEK, Nicaragua. New York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. II,
p. 314 (compared with Niquiran, which is a Mexican dialect).
American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. Ill, p. 101.
Nahual Vocabulary of the Balsam Coast (San Salvador) and of Tzalco,
pp. 351, 352 of: E. G-. SQTHER, Notes on Central America, particularly the States
of Honduras and San Salvador. New York, Harpers, 1855, 8vo.
Aztec Glossary in : Evangeliarium, Epistolarium et Lectionarium Aztecum, sive
Mexicanum, ex antiquo codice authographo BERNAEDINI SAHAQUNII depromptum,
nunc primum cum interpretatione, adnotationibus, glossario edidit B. Biondelli.
This important monument of the ancient Aztec language will be published
at Milan, in 5 parts, 4to, with fac-similes.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
ANDRES DE OLMOZ, Ars et Vocabularium Mexicanum. Mexici, 1555, 4to.
Brunet (III, p. 559) gives this title from Equiara.
Vater gives the following title : A. DE OLMOZ, Grrammatica et Lexicon
Linguae Mexicans?, Totanacoe et Huaxtecse. Mexico, 1555, 1560, 2 vols. 4to.
In the Mithridates, III, 3, p. 92, the same title is given, but added to it :
Cum Catechismo, Evangeliis, Epistolisque Mexicanice. Mexico, 1560, 2 vols.
4to.
OLMOZ also wrote a Vocabulario Megicano, an Arte and Vocabulario in the
Totonaca language, and an Arte, Vocabulario, Catecismo, Confessionario, and
Sermons in the Huaxteco or Huasteca language.
The Vocabularium Mexicanum (Mexici, 1855 4to) is sometimes mentioned
as a separate work.
ALONSO DE MOLINA, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana y Castellana. Mexico^ en
casa de Petro de Ocharte, 1571, 8vo.
PADRE ANTONIO DEL RINCON, dela Compania de Jesus (Natural de S. Puebla
de los Angelos), Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1595, small Svo. He-
printed, ibid., 1598, 12mo.
Q
114 MEXICAN.
D. P. DIEGO DE GALDO GUZMAN, del Orden de S. Aug., Arte Mexicano 6
Gramatica de la Lengua Mexicana. En Mejico, vidua de Bernardo Calderon, 1643,
8vo (Mithridates, III, 3, p. 91, " 1642," 8vo).
HOEACIO CABOCHI, Arte Mexicano Copioso, para que siii maestro se pueda
aprender la Lengua. Mexico, 1645, 4to.
Mithridates, III, 3, p. 92, gives the same title, but in Latin : Ars Copio-
sissima Linguse Mexicanse ut sine magistro possis illam condiscere. Mexici,
1645, 4to.
The following may be either an extract from or a new edition of the book :
Compeudio del Arte de la Lengua Mexicana del P. HOKACIO CABOCHI .....
dispuesto con brevedad, claridad y propiedad por el P. Ignatio de Paredes.
Mexico, en la imprenta de la Biblioteca Mexicana, 1759, 4to, pp. 24, 202.
PADBE F. AUGUSTIN DE YETANCUBT, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico,
1673, 4to, 49 leaves.
Arte de la Lengua Mexicana, compuesto por el BACHILLEB DON ANTONIO
YASQUEZ GASTELU EL KEY DE FIGUECOA, Catredrutico de dicha Lengua en los
Keales Collegios de San Pedro y San Juan. Sacalo a luz por orden del illustr. Sr.
Dr. D. Manuel Fernandez de Santa Cruz, Obispo de Puebla. Puebla de los
Angelas, 1689, 4to, 53 leaves. Eeprinted, Mexico, 1693, 4to. Eeprinted, Cor-
regido segun su original, por el Br. D. Antonio de Olmeda y Torre. Mexico,
1716, 4to. Another edition, Puebla, 1726, 8vo, pp. 55.
Arte de la Lengua Megicana segun el Dialecto de los Pueblos de la Nueva Gal-
licia, por FB. JUAN GUEBBA. Mexico, 1699, 4to.
FBANCISCO DE AVILA, Predicador, cura ministro por su Majestad del Pueblo de
la Milpar y lector de Idioma Mexicana, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana y breves platicas
de los mysteries de N. Santa Fe catolica y otras para exortacion de su obligation
a los Indios. Mexico, 1717, small 8vo, pp. 78.
P. F. MANUEL PEEEZ, Arte de el Idioma Mexicano. Mexico, pp. 98.
CAELOS DE TAPIA ZENTENO, Arte Novissima de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico,
Viuda de Bernardo Hogal, 1753, 4to, pp. 22, 58.
D. JOSE AUGUSTIN DE ALDAMA Y GUEVABA, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana.
Mexico, en la imprenta de la Biblioteca Mexicana, 1754, 4to.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Yol. Ill, pp. 228 et seq., 355 et seq.
KAFAEL DE SANDOVAL, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1810, 8vo,
pp. 62.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 93104.
Nouvelles Annales des Yoyages. Paris, 1840, 8vo ; Yol. IY, pp. 836.
Consulta a los estudiosos sobre la Lengua Mexicana, in the : Museo Mexicano.
Mexico, 1843, 8vo ; No. 2, Yol. I (April 15, 1843), pp. 251-253.
A. Gallatin, Grammatical Notices Mexican Language, Appendix 1
to his Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, in Yol. I of the : Transac-
MEXICAN. 115
tions of the American Ethnological Society. New York, Bartlett and Welford,
1845, 8vo ; pp. 215245.
(From the Grammars of CAEOCHI and TAPIA ZENTENO.)
JOH. KARL ED. BUSCHMANN, Tiber die aztekischen Ortsnamen. Erste Abtheilung.
JBerlin, Diimmler, 1853, 4to, pp. 205. More particularly pp. 2037, 140172
(the Aztek Language in Nicaragua).
MANUSCRIPTS.
Arte de la Lengua Megicana, por FE. ALONSO K ANGEL, provincial de Tula
(1529 1546), according to De Souza.
FOCHEE (FE. JUAN) was one of the earliest ecclesiastics of Mexico, where he
died, 1572. Wrote, according to Torquemada : Arte de la Lengua Megicana.
FE. ANTONIO PADILLA DAVILA, native of Mexico, and Member of the Imperial
Convent of that city in 1576, wrote: Arte para aprender la Lengua Megicana ;
which is highly spoken of by Pinelo and Antonio.
Arte de la Lengua Chichimeca, Diccionario de la Misma, y Catecismo en la Misma,
por P. DIEGO DIAZ PANGUA, natural de Durango. PANGUA died 1631, leaving,
according to De Souza, this MS.
DON BAETOLMI ALVA translated three poems of Lope de Vega into Mexican,
which, according to De Souza, are preserved in the Library of the College of San
Gregorio, in Mexico.
Elementos de la Gramatica Megicana, por DON ANTONIO TOBAB CANO T
MOCTEZUMA, 1662. MS , according to Eguiara.
Vocabularies y Dialogos Megicanos, por JUAN FEANCISCO IEAGOEEI. Written
about the year 1780, and, according to De Souza, in the Library of the University
of Mexico.
Arte de los artes, 6 Florilegio de los artes de la Lengua Megicana, que se han
Escrito ; y en que con nuevo y facil modo se ensefia su Gramatica, por FB.
ANTONIO ROSA LOPEZ FIGUEEOA. MS. in the Convent of San Francisco, in
Mexico.
Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Megicana, preparados para las perusas, por
FEAY DIEGO OSOEIO, Cura de Chalco y de S. Jose de Megico.
Reglas para apreuder con facilidad la Lengua Megicana, por FE. BEENABE PAEZ,
Catedratico de Idioma Megicano en la Universidad de Megico. MS., according to
Eguiara.
Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Megicana, por Illm6. D. FE. JUAN AYOEA,
Obispo de Michoacan ; mentioned in the CrOnica de la Provincia de San Gregorio.
Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Megicana, por FE. FEANCISCO SOLCEDO. 4to,
in the Library of the Franciscan Convent of Guatemala.
Arte, Vocabulario, y Catecismo Megicanos, por Jllm6. D. FB. FEANCISCO
XIMENEZ, primero Obispo de Oaxaca. Died in Mexico, and, according to De Souza,
was the first who composed a grammar of the Mexican language.
116 MIAMI.
Arte de la Lengua Megicana, y Diccionario trilingue Latino, Espanol, y Megi-
cano, por FE. BEBISTARDINO SAHAGIJN. MS., probably in the Convent of San
Francisco, in Mexico.
MERCADO (P. NICOLAS), Jesuit of Mexico, 1700: went as Missionary to
Cinaloa, where he was the first to discover that the Indians of the south coast
spoke a dialect of the Mexican, in consequence of which he wrote : Arte de la
Lengua Megicana, segun el dialecto que usan los Indios de la Costa del sur de
Cinaloa.
MIAMI.
Indians of the Algonquin stock, formerly of the eastern part of
Upper Louisiana, now west of the Mississippi. The Illinois
and the Piankashaws are related to them.
WORDS AND YOCABULARIKS.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Yocabularies.
C. F. VOLNEY, Tableau du Climat et du Sol des E'tats Unis d'Amerique, suivi
d'eclaircissements sur les sauvages. Paris, 1803, 2 vols. 8vo ; Tome II,
p. 433.
Nouvelle edition, Paris, 1822, 2 parts in 1 vol. 8vo, p. 402.
English translation, by C. B. Brown, A View of the Soil and Climate of
the United States of America, with supplementary remarks on
the Aboriginal Tribes of America, by C. F. VOLNEY. Philadelphia, 1804, Svo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 363, 364 (from VOLNEY and BARTON).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 808 (Miami, Illinois).
No. IV, 21, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, . &c., in
Vol. II of: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305, 367 (from MS. authorities of J.
THORNTON, and in the War Department).
And (partly) G N., 1, p. 112, of the Vocabularies in Vol. II of the : Transac-
tions of the American Ethnological Society.
CHARLES HANDY, Indian agent, Miami Vocabulary, pp. 470, 481 of Vol. II
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
N.B. In the library of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia
are :
MS! Vocabulary of the Miami, by VOLNEY.
MS. of a Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape and Miami, or
Twightwee.
, MS. of the Miami, from the mouth of the Little Turtle, and of the inter-
preter William Wells, by W. THORNTON.
HUE- MIKMAK. 117
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
C. F. VOLNEY (see Vocabularies).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 353 356 (from VOLNEY).
MIJE (MIXE?).
Mexican language. According to DE SOUZA, the FRAY FERNANDO
BEJARANO, native of Anteguera, in Oaxaca. and prior of the
Dominican convent of that town, passed a considerable part
of his life amongst the Mije Indians, and perfected himself
in their language, which, this author adds, " was very difficult
to pronounce, as well as to write in Roman characters."
BEJARANO died in 1703, leaving in the hands of FR. ANTONIO
ZEBALLOS, vicar of Quezaltepec, in Oaxaca, the following
MSS. : "Vocabulario de la Lengua Mije;" " Sermones en
Lengua Mije y en Castellano." A copy of the first was also
preserved in the convent of Tuquila.
The FRAY MARCOS BENITO, according to the same authority,
originally of the Dominican convent of Valencia del Cid, went
to America as missionary amongst the Mije Indians, and com-
posed " Arte-de la Lengua Mije, y Devocionario Manual de los
Misterios del Rosarip, en la Misma Lengua."
MIKMAK.
French name for the inhabitants of Acadia, Nova Scotia, New
Brunswick, and Maine. The following are considered dialects
of the Mikmak : 1. Nova Scotia; 2. Terre neuve Island:,
3. The Miramichi of New Brunswick. They are closely related
to the Etchernins and Souriquois.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Specimen of the Mountaineer, or Shesha-ta-poosh-shois, Skoffie, and Micmac
Languages (by the Indian boy Gabriel), pp. 1633 of Vol. VI of the First Series
of the: Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society for the year 1799.
Boston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 401404 (from the boy Gabriel).
118 MIKOKATAK.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 817 (Gaspesien et Mikmak).
No. IV, 12, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc.,
(Vol. II of : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305367), and under Q, IV, 3, p. 109, of
the Vocabularies, Vol. II of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions.
The Indian of New England and the North-eastern Provinces : A Sketch of
the Life of an Indian Hunter Ancient Traditions relating to the Etchemin Tribe,
their Modes of Life, Fishing, Hunting, etc. ; with Vocabularies in the Indian and
English, giving the Names of the Animals, Birds, and Fish, the most complete that
has been given for New England in the Languages of the Etchemins and Micmacs.
These are now the only Indian tribes to the north-east, the former inhabitants
of New England, that have preserved their language entire, being the oldest and
purest Indian spoken in the Eastern States. This book is the only work of its
kind to be had. It contains the elements of the Indian tongue, and much that is
new to the reading public, especially the names by which the red men of the forest
designated the natural objects before them. Middletown, Connecticut, Charles
H. Pelton, printer, 1851, 12mo, pp. 24.
The first edition had on the title-page the words " Derived from NICOLA
TENESLES, by a Citizen of Middletown." Afterwards, this was covered by a
slip of paper, bearing the words " By JOSEPH BAEEATT, M.D., Member of
several Learned Societies." The preface is signed J. B. The book is written
by the said NICOLA TENESLES.
Vocabularies of the Apache and Micmac Languages (the Micmac by S. T. RAND,
Protestant Mission at Halifax, December 10, 1853), pp. 578589 of Vol. V
of : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Micmac, from P. MAYNAED'S MS. Notes in: A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc,
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), pp. 227232.
NICOLA TENESLES, by Joseph Barratt, M.D. (see Vocabularies).
MIKOKAYAK, MILCOCAYAC,
Language spoken by the Indians of the Chilian province of
Cuio.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
LUYS DE VALDIVIA, Arte Grammatica, Vocabulario, Catecismo y confessionario
en Lengua Chileua y en las dos Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, que son las mas
Generales de la provincia de Cuio en el reyno de Chile y que hablan los Indies
Guarpos y otros. Lima, 1607, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
LUYS DE VALDIVIA (see Vocabularies).
MILICITE MINETARES. 119
MILICITE.
Indians of New Brunswick, belonging to the Huron stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
S. T. KAND, Milicite Numerals (11,000,000,000), pp. 690, 691 of Vol. V of:
Sehoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
MINETAKES.
Indians on both sides of Knife River. Their language has
three dialects, viz. : 1. The Minetare proper, called also (( Gros-
ventre" Bigbellies, Ehatsar. 2. The Alasar or Fall Indians.
3. The Kattanahaws.
.WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E. UMFREVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay to which are
added .... a Specimen of Five Indian Languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8vo.
German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmstadt, 1791, 8vo.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 254 (of Fall Indians, from UMFREVILLE).
PROFESSOR T. SAY, Yocabularies of Indian Languages, in : Astronomical and
Meteorological Eecords and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the
Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi under the command of Major
S. H. Long. Philadelphia^ 1822, 4to ; pp. Ixxii Ixxviii, Ixxxiv Ixxxv.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 780.
Keise des PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Co&lenz, 18391811, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 499, 500, 562, 590,
No. VI, 40, of the Comparative Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis', etc.,
(Vol. II of: ArchaBologia Americana, pp. 305, 367) ; also to No. VI, ibid., p. 379,
Names of Chiefs (from SAY).
The Vocabulary partly reprinted, under S, VI, 6, p. 117 of the Vocabularies in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Affinities of the Upsaroka or Crow Language with that of the Sedentary Mis-
souri, Minetares, and those of the Sioux, pp. cxv, cxvi, of Vol. II of: American
Ethnological Society's Transactions.
Minetare and Mandan Words compared, p. 256 of Vol. Ill of: SCHOOLCRAFT'S
Indian Tribes of the United States.
120 MINSI MIXTEKA.
MINSI.
Tribe of the Delaware or Lenape.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
" SMITH EABTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Yocabularies.
PEOF. T. SAY, Comparative Vocabulary of various J)ialects of the Lenape
Stock of North American Indians ; in Note 15 to John Pickering's edition of Dr.
Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Yol. X. of the Second Series
of the Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society). Boston, printed by
Phelps and Tarnham, 1823, 8vo ; reprinted by Little and Brown, 1843 ; 8vo,
pp. 135145.
No. IY, h, of the Comparative Yocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, &c.
(Yol. II of: Archa?ologia Americana, p. 370), and (enlarged) under P. IY, 5,
p. Ill, of the Yocabularies, Yol. II of the American Ethnological Society's
Transactions (from HECKEWELDEE'S MS.).
KEY. M. HECKEWELDEE, A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape
proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano,
and Nanticoke.
REY. M. HECKEWELDER, Names of various Trees, Shrubs, and Plants in the
Language of the Lenape, or Delaware, distinguishing the Dialects of the Unamis
and Minsi.
The above two MSS. are in the library of the American Philosophical
Society at Philadelphia,
MIXTEKA, MISTECO.
Indians of the Mexican State Oajaca. There are six dialects
of this language Tepozkolula (the best), Yankitlan, Tlahiako,
Mitlantongo, Under Mixteka, and Mixteka of the Coast.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario del Idioma Misteco, por FEAY FEANCISCO ALYAEADO, printed in
4to, in Mexico, by Pedro Balli, 1593.
Diccionario Copioso y Erudito de la Lengua Misteca, por FE. DIEGO Rio, MS.
(Rio died in Tlachiaco, in the year 1644.)
HEEYAS, Saggio, pp. 118, 119.
HEEYAS, Origine, Tab. L.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 60.
J. S. VATER, Proben der Deutschen Volksmundarten : Dr. Seetzen's Liii-
guistischer Nachlass. Leipzig, E. Fleischer, 1816, 8vo ; pp. 352 374.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo ; Vol. IV, pp. 260286.
MOBIMI MOCOBY.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FRAY ANTONIO DE LOS EETES, Yicario del Convento de Tamazulapa, Arte de la
Lengua Mixteca conforme a lo que se habla en Tepozcolula. Mexico, 1593, 12mo ;
pp. 16, 163 contains Notices of the Ancient History of the Indians, and of
their mode of computing years.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 3444 (extract from the above).
Arte y Grammatica de la Lengua Misteca, y Catecismo Cristiano en la Misma.
(This MS., by FE. FEANCISCO OETIZ, an Augustan of Mexico, was seen by the
Bishop Eguiara in the library of the College of San Pablo, in Mexico.)
MOBIMI (MOVIMI, MOVIMA).
Moxos Indians of the Bolivian Missions San Francisco di Borja
and Santa Anna. Their language is very harsh.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 91, 92.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLYIII, L et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 571, 572, 576.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 464.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, p. 164 ; Yol. II, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND 'GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 251, 252.
MOCOBY, TOBA.
South American Indians, on the banks of the rivers Vermejo
and Ypita, related to the Abipones. D^ORBIGNY writes their
name "Mbocoby."
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161223 (from the MS. of the Missionary
KAIMUND TEEMEYEE).
HEEYAS, Aritmetica, p. 99.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 105.
HEEVAS, Origine, p. 37, Tabb. XLYIII, L et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 478, 497, 505, 506.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 449.
122 MOCOROSI MOHAWK.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 501, 502, 503, 505 (from TEEMEYEE'S Notices, given
by Hervas).
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. II, p. 98.
MOCOROSI.
In JULG, the Mokorosi (Mocorosi) is stated to be the language
of the Indians of Mexico, now perhaps extinct ; reference being
made to a " Yocabulario de la Lengua Mocorosi." Mexico, 1599,
8vo.
Upon this, DR. LATHAM furnishes the following notice :
JULG'S notice of the Mokorosi is inaccurate. The work he means
is an " Arte," etc., published in Madrid, 1699. The language,
however, is Moxa ; and what is called the Mokorosi Vocabulary,
is only an edition of MARBAN'S Arte de la Lengua Moxa. Lima,
1701.
MOHAVI, MOYAVE.
Indian tribe occupying the couutry on both sides of the River
Mohave, in south-eastern California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary of their Language has been taken by JOHN R. BAETLETT, United
States Boundary Commissioner.
Mojave Yocabulary, taken by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 95 101 of
the Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Route near
the 35th ParaUel, Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855, 4to.
MOHAWK.
Principal tribe of the Iroquois, now in Canada west. The
Cochnewagoes (or Cocknawaga) are a smaller tribe belonging
to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary, Tome LXIII, part 1, p. 142 of the Philosophical Transactions of
the Royal Society of London. London, 1665, etc.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).
MOHEGANS. 123
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 125, 126.
A Primer, for the use of the Mohawk Children, in the English and Mohawk
Languages. Montreal, 1781, 12mo. Eeprinted, London, 1786, 12mo.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies ; and p. 20 of the
Appendix to the edition of 1798.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 330333 (Cochnowago and Mohawk,
from SMITH BARTON).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 795.
No. V, 27, of the Comparative Vocabularies, etc., A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana, pp. 303367.
(From MS. authorities of P. PARISH and D. DWIGHT.)
Eeprinted A, V (1), pp. 79, 81, 83 of Vol. II of: American Ethnological
Society's Transactions.
KEY. ADAM ELLIOT, of Tuscarora, Mohawk Vocabulary, Appendix L, to :
Henry E. Schoolcraft's Notes on the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Welford,
1846, 8vo; pp. 264 270 and
Pp. 393 400 (Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois) of the same work,
published at Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
Indian Names and Places (of the St. Eegis Indians, a tribe of the Caughnawaga),
pp. 178181 of: FRANCIS B. HOUGH, M.D., History of St. Lawrence and
Franklin Counties. Albany, Little and Co., 1853, 8vo.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages Mohawk,
Iroquois, Hurons of Amherstburg, Stone Indians, pp. 113 121 of: Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850. (Language of the Mohawks,
living on the Grand Eiver.)
MOHEGANS, MAHIKANS, MUHHEEKANEW.
Principal tribe of the Algonquiris, 011 the Hudson River, from
Esopus to Albany. They were divided into Muchquanh (Bear
tribe), Mechchaooh (Wolf tribe), and Toon-paooh (Turtle tribe).
The Pequods are related to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mohegan Vocabulary (of 45 words), by PROF. T. SAY (Note 15, pp. 135145)
and Index of Mohegan and other Indian Words explained in Edwards's Observa-
tions, pp. 155 157 of: DR. EDWARDS, Observations on the Mohegan Language.
Edition by John Pickering. (See Grammars.)
Mohegan, English, and Shawanee Vocabulary, pp. 209 210 of: J. LONG, Voyages
and Travels of an Indian Interpreter and Trader. London, 1791, 4to.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 400, 402-404 (from BARTON and LONG).
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
124 MOHEGANS.
BALBT, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 815 (Mohegan propre Abenaki).
No. IV, 17, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., Vol.
II of : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305367, and (partly) under P, IV, 3, p. 110
of the Vocabulary in Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society. Also, Article 1 of the Appendix (p. 491) to JOHN W. DE FOBKEST'S His-
tory of the Indians of Connecticut. Hartford, Hamersley, 1852, 8vo (from
JEFFEESON (MS.), HECKEWELDEE, EDWAEDS, and JENKS).
A Collection of Words (English, Maqua, Delaware, Mahican), pp. 41 44 of :
KEY. JOHN ETTWEIN'S Remarks and Annotations concerning the Traditions,
Customs, Languages, etc., of the Indians, from the Memoirs of Zeisberger
(Bulletin of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. I. Philadelphia, 1848,
8vo).
Comparative Cbippewa and Mohegan Vocabulary (of 22 words), p. 620 of Vol.
V of : SCHOOLCEAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
KEY. ME. HECKEWELDEE, A Vocabulary of. the Mohicanni, taken down from the
mouth of one of that nation born in Connecticut. (MS. in the library of the
American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.)
KEY. ME. HECKEWELDEE, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni-Lenape proper,
the Minsi dialect, the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, and Nanticoke.
(MS. in the same library.)
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Observations on the Language of the Muhhekaneew Indians, in which the
extent of that Language in North America is shown, its genius is grammatically
traced, some of its peculiarities, and some instances of analogy between that and
the Hebrew are pointed out. Communicated to the Connecticut Society of Arts
and Sciences, and published at the request of the Society. By JONATHAN ED-
WAEDS, D.D., Pastor of a Church in Newhaven, and member of the Connecticut
Society of Arts and Sciences. Newhauen, printed by Josiah Meigs, 1788, 8vo.
Reprinted at Philadelphia in 1789, 8vo ; at London in 1789, 8vo ; at New York
in 1801, 8vo.
A new edition of the same, pp. 81 160 of: Collections of the Massachusetts
Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by Phelps arid
Farnham, 1823, 8vo, and reprinted at Boston by Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo.
(Copies of this new edition, with separate title, Boston, 1823, 8vo, have
been issued.)
The contents of this new edition are: Pp. 81 89, Advertisement to the
present edition, by John Pickering, dated Salem, May 15, 1822. Pp. 84
98, Reprint of Dr. Edwards's Observations. Pp. 98151, Notes by the Editor.
Note 15, pp. 135145, contains T. Say's Comparative Vocabulary of various
Dialects of the Lenape (or Delaware) stock of North American Indians,
together with a specimen of the Winnebago (or Nipegon) Language (forty-
five words in Mohegan, Leuape, Shawanese, Nanticoke, Narraganset, Munsee,
Massachusetts, Penobscott, Abnaki, St. Francis Indians, Messisaugas, Algon-
kin, Chippeway, Knistenaux, and Winnebago). Pp. 152154, Psalm xix, in
MOSQUITO. 125
Muh-he-con-nuk, translated by Rev. John Sergeant (from Morse's Eeport.
Newhaven, 1822, 8vo ; pp. 359, 360). Pp. 155157, Index of Mohegan and
other Indian words, explained in Edwards's Observations. Pp. 158 160,
Index of the principal matters in Edwards's Observations, and the Editor's
Notes.
An extract from Edwards is given in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp.
391 399, where reference is made to : American Museum, Tome V, pp. 22,
14-1144. Columbus, May, 1787, pp. 672.
Specimen of the Moheagan Language, taken at Cambridge, February 28, 1804
(from JOHN KONKAPOT, jun.), pp. 98, 99, in: Additional Memoir of the Mohea-
gans, and of Uncas, their ancient Sachem. Collections of the Massachusetts His-
torical Society, Vol. IX, First Series. Boston, Hall and Hiller, 1804, 8vo ; pp.
7799.
The pages 75, 76 of the same volume contain a List of the Families of the
Tribe of Moheagan, and number of each family. By A. HOLMES; dated
February 1, 1804.
Some data respecting the Principles of the .... and Mahican Languages,
pp. 618, 619 of Vol. V of: SCHOOLCRAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States.
MOSQUITO.
The Mosquitos, or Miskitos, who inhabit the Moskito territory
in Central America, are a mixed tribe, the issue of aboriginal
Indians with negroes shipwrecked on the coast, or escaped from
the Spanish settlements of the interior.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
CAPTAIN HENDERSON, R.A., An Account of the British Settlement of Hon-
duras ; being a Brief View of its Commercial and Agricultural Resources, Soil,
Climate, Natural History, etc., with Sketches of the Manners and Customs of the
Mosquito Indians, and a Journal of a Voyage to the Mosquito Shore. London,
Baldwin, 1809, 8vo, map, pp. 203. Second edition, ibid., 1811, 8vo.
Mosquitian and English Vocabulary, pp. 170172 of: THOMAS YOUNG, A
Narrative of a "Residence on the Mosquito Shore during the years 1839, 1840, and
1841 ; with an Account of Truxillo and the adjacent islands of Bonacca and
Roatan. London, Smith, Elder, and Co., 1842, 8vo, plates, pp. iv, 172.
Vocabularium, pp. 269 274 of : Bericht iiber die im hoechsten Auftrage . . . .
bewirkte Untersuchung einiger Theile des Mosquito Landes, erstattet von der
dazu ernannten Comission. Berlin, Duncker, 1845, 8vo, maps, pp. iv, 274, 1.
Mosquito Vocables and Dialogues, pp. 28 44 of: ALEX. HENDERSON'S Gram-
mar (see Grammars).
ALEX. J, COTHEAL, Mosquito Vocabulary, pp. 257 264 of: Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
E. G. SQTJIER'S Nicaragua (flew York, Appleton, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo), Vol. II,
126 MOSSA.
pp. 314, 320323, and American Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. Ill,
pp. 101, 106110 (from COTHEAL).
Brief Vocabulary of the Mosquito Language, Appendix, pp. 363 366 to :
SAM. A. BARD, Waikna ; or, Adventures on the Mosquito Shore. New York,
Harpers, 1855, 12mo, illustrations, pp. x, 366.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Ueber die Sprache der Mosquito Indianer, pp. 241 268 of: Bericht iiber einige
Theile des Mosquitolandes. Berlin, 1845, 8vo (see Vocabularies).
ALEXANDER J. COTHEAL, A Grammatical Sketch of the Language spoken by
the Indians of the Mosquito Shore, pp. 235 264 of: Transactions of the Ameri-
can Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
A Grammar of the Mosquito Language, by ALEXANDER HENDEESON, Belize,
Honduras. New York, printed by John Gray, 1816, 8vo, pp. 47.
MOSSA, MOXA.
Nation of the province " los Moxos/' in Bolivia, South
America. Their language is related to the Maipure. Dialects
are the Baure, Tikomcri, Cliudm, Kupeno, Mosotie, and
Mochono or Muchojeone, all in the Mission S. Xaverio.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. PEDEO MAEBAN, Arte de la Lengua Moxa, con un Vocabulario y Cathecismo.
Lima, Jose deContrevas, 1701, 12mo. Vocabulario Espanol-Moxa, pp. 118 361,
Moxa-Espanol, pp. 362650.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 367 et seq.
HERVAS, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq. (Moxa, dialetto Moxo).
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 103.
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 44, 45, 48, 49, 118, 120, 121, 136, Tabb. XI,
XLVIII, L, LI et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 90, 91.
. Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 466, 554, 570, 617, 618 (from HEEVAS and GILII).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 612 (Moxos).
Eight Moxos Words compared with Arrowak, Atoray, Maipui'e, and Quichua,
Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. VAN HEUVEL'S El Dorado. New York, Winchester,
1844, 8vo.
ALCIDE D'OKBIGNY, L'Homme Americain. Vol. I, pp. 162164, Vocabulary of
twenty-three words ; Vol. II, p. 208, Baure and Moxos words of 1703 and 1831 ;
p. 229, Moxos and Muchojeenes worcs.
MUNDRUCUS MUSKOGHEE. 127
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. PEDRO MAKBAN (see Vocabularies), the Grammar, pp. 1 117.
GTILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 238.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 563 5G9.
A. D'OKBIGNT, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, pp. 203209, 228230.
Arte de la Lengua Baure, escrito por el P. ANTONIO MEGIO, de la Compania de
Jesus, despues de muchos anos de Misonero, y muchisima aplicacion y estudio &
dicha Lengua en las reducciones de la Concepcion, S. Martin y S. Nicolas, donde
ultimamente escribio dicho arte, 1H9, folio. (MS. in possession of Alcide
D'Orbigny.)
MUNDRUCUS, MUTUEICUS.
Indians of the Brazilian province of Para, between the rivers
Tapajoz and Mauhe (MARTIUS, V, No. 122).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 514.
MUHAS.
Brazilian Indians of the province of Para, on the Rio Madeira
(MARTIUS, VI, A, No. 129).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 521.
MUSKOGHEE, CHEEK.
The most numerous tribe of the Creek confederation, in the
northern parts of Florida.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 292, 304, 305.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 788.
128 MUYSKA.
Reise des PRINZEN MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 1839 1811, 2 vols. 4to ;
Yol. II, pp. 590592.
No. X of GALLATIN'S Synopsis in : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II (Hitchltti
and Muskoghi Dialect). Authorities Vocabulary of 452 Words, by RET. L.
COMPERE. Communication from EIDGE, an educated Cherokee. HAWKINS
(vid. infr.), 112 Select Sentences, pp. 408412; the Lord's Prayer, p. 421.
Further Notices by GTALLATIN, in : Transactions of the American Ethnologi-
cal Society, Vol. II, p. cxii, Comparison of 600 Choctaw and Muskoghee
Words, ninety-seven agreeing ; p. 83 88, List of Choctah and Muskoghee
Words.
E. A. VAIL, Notice sur les Indiens de 1'Aine'rique du Nord. Paris, 1840, 8vo,
p. 55.
BENJAMIN HAWKINS, Vocabulary of the Creek, Chickasaw, Cherokee, and
Choctaw. (MS. in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Phila-
delphia.)
Many geographical names of the Creek are explained in : COLONEL BENJAMIN
HAWKINS, Sketch of the Creek Confederacy ; being Collections of the Georgia
Historical Society, Vol. Ill, p. 1. Savannah, 1848, 8vo, pp. 88.
LIEUTENANT-COLONEL J. C. CASEY, United States Agent, Muskogee or Creek
Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV, pp. 416
429, 432.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. G-ALLATIN, Synopsis : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 256 258 ;
Transitions, pp. 270, 271, 272, 273, 275, 290, 291.
Muskokee, or Creek First Reader, by W. S. ROBEKTSON, A.M., and DAVID
WINSLETT. New York, 1856, 12mo, pp. 48.
MUYSKA, MOZKA, CHIBCHA.
Indian nation (nearly extinct) in the neighbourhood of Santa
Fe de Bogota, Nueva Grenada. Their language was called,
also, Chibcha.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 705.
Journal Asiatique, Vol. Ill (Paris, 1829, 8vo), pp. 401, 409.
The numerals are given by A. G-ALLATIN, Tab. A to : Notes on the Semi-civilized
Nations of Mexico, etc. (Vol. I of : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society), p. 114.
MYNCQUESAR. 129
J. S. VATEB, Proben, etc Seetzen's Nachlass. Leipzig, 1816, 8vo ;
pp. 352374.
COLONEL JOAQUIN ACOSTA, the author of " Compendio Historico del decubri-
miento y colonization de la Nueva Granada," possesses a "Diccionario y Grammatica
de la Lengua Mosca Chibcha." MS., in 12mo, of 200 and 96 pp. The Dictionary
is the only one existing ; the Grammar is different from that of Fray B. de Lugo.
GRAMMAES AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. FEAT BEENAEDO DE LUGO, Grammatica en la Lengua general del nuovo reyno
llamada Mosca. Madrid, Bernardino de Guzman, 1619, small 8vo, pp. 158.
(The year 1613, in Kaetzel's Catalogue, p. 117, seems to be an error.)
Mithridates (extract from the above Grammar), Vol. Ill, pp. 702704.
Adelung, in Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 701, note ft, states that a P. DADDEI
(DADET ?) has printed a Grammar of the Muysca language.
JOSEPH DADEY (DADDEI ?), a native of Milan, one of the Jesuit founders of the
University of Bogota, 1604, wrote a Vocabulary and a Grammar of the Muysca
Language, but no copies can now be traced. The National Library of Bogota
possesses a MS. Grammar (pp. 96, 12mo) and a MS. Dictionary (pp. 200, 12mo)
of the Muysca Language. These are, perhaps, Dadey's.
Ezequiel Uricoechea, a native of Bogota, intends to publish these MSS. in
his forthcoming work, <e Monumenta Chibcharum."
Sur la Langue des Muyscas, ou la Langue Chibcha, Bulletin de la Societe de
Geographic. Third Series, Vol. VIII, pp. 8588. Paris, A. Bertrand, 1847, 8vo.
A Comparison of the Chibcha Language with the Japanese, Bask, and Arabic,
by SENOE PABAVEY, in : Annales de Philosophic Chretienne, No. 56 ; also sepa-
rately : Memoria sobre el origin Japones Arabe y Vizcaino de los pueblos de
Bogota. Paris, 1835, 8vo, pp. 32.
Remarks on the Chibcha Language, likewise Chibcha numerals (quoted from the
above), in : Memoria sobre las Antiquedades Neo-Granadinas, por EZEQUIEL
UEICOECHEA. Berlin, 1854, 4to, pp. 6 10.
MYNCQUESAB,, MYNCKUSSAR,.
Language of the Mohawk stock, spoken in New Sweden (on the
Delaware).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
THOMAS CAMPANIUS HOLM, Kort Beskrifning om provincien Nya Swerige.
Stockholm, 1702, 4to, p. 181.
English translation by P. S. Duponceau, for the Historical Society of
Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, 1834, 8vo, p. 158 (also as part 1 of Vol III of
the Collections of the Pennsylvanian Historical Society. Philadelphia,
M'Carty and Davis, 1834, 8vo ; pp. 1168.)
Mithridates (from CAMPANIUS), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 334, 335.
J. S. VATEB, Proben, etc. Leipzig, 1826, 8vo ; pp. 381 et seq.
S
130 NAASS NANTICOKE.
NAASS.
Indians of English North-western America, on and above Mill-
bank Sound. Of four of the Naass tribes, viz., the Hailtsa,
Haeeltzuk, Billechoola, and Chimmesyan, vocabularies are given
(see Haeeltzuk and Chimmesyans).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabularies of the Four Tribes, Transactions of the American Ettinological
Society, Vol. II (New YorJc, Bartlett and Welford, 1848, 8vo), H, XX, p. 103 ;
from the Vocabularies of JOHN SCOULER, M.D., Journal of the Koyal Geogra-
phical Society of London, Vol. XI (London, Murray, 1841, 8vo), pp. 230235.
Billechoola and Friendly Village Words, p. 155 of B. G. LATHAM, The Lan-
guages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London,
Vol. I, pp. 154 1GO. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).
NAGBANDANS.
Chorotega tribe of the plains of Leon, Nicaragua.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E, G. SQTJIEE, Nicaragua, etc. New YorJc, Appleton, 1852, 2 rols. 8vo; Vol.
II, pp. 314, 320325 ; numerals, pp. 326, 327.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
E. Geo. Squier, Nicaragua New York, Appleton, 1852 j 2 vols. 8vo,
Vol. II, pp. 315319 (from COLONEL FRANCISCO DIAZ ZAP ATA).
NANTICOKE.
Tribe of the Algonkin stock, formerly on the Susquehannah
now west.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. SAY, Comparative Vocabulary, etc., in Note 15, pp. 135145, to John
Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language.
(Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Bos-
ton, printed by Phelps and Faruham, 1823, 8vo. Beprinted, Boston, Little and
Brown, 1843, 8vo).
No. IV, 20, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in : Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305367 ; and (partly) under P, IV, 6,
p. Ill, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II.
(From MS. Notices of HECKEWELDER and MTJIIRAY VANS.)
A Nanticoke Vocabulary (presented by Thomas Jefferson), and a Vocabulary of
NARRAGANSET. 131
the Nanticoke, taken from the mouth of a Nanticoke chief, by EEV. ME.
HECKEWELDER, in 1785, are among the MSS. in the library of the American
Philosophical Society, at Philadelphia.
KEV. MR. HECKEWELDER, Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape
Proper, the Minsi Dialect, the Mohicanni, Natick or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano,
and Nanticoke. (MS. in the same library.)
NAURAGANSET.
New England Indians. The Pequods, ICavasumsenk, and
Quintikuk belong to this stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A small Vocabulary in : WILLIAM WOOD, New England's Prospect ; being a
true, lively, and experimental Description of that part of America commonly called
New England. London, 163 4-, 4to. Eeprinted, ibid., 1635, 4to, and 1639, 4to.
Third edition, with an Introductory Essay. Boston, Fleet, Green, and Kussell,
1764, 8vo, pp. xviii, 128.
EOGER A. WILLIAMS (see Grammars). The Vocabulary contained in this
Grammar, at the request of Smith Barton, has been extracted and reprinted
as: Vocabulary of the Narrogansett Language, pp. 80 105 of: Collections of
the Massachusetts Historical Society for the year 1798 (Vol. V of the First
Series). Boston, printed by Samuel Hall, 1798, 8vo. Eeprinted, Boston, John
Eliot, 1816, 8vo ; and ibid., John Eastburn, 1835, 8vo.
T. SAT, Comparative Vocabulary, etc., Note 15, pp. 135 145, to John Pickering's
edition of Dr. Edwards' s Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collections of
the Massachusetts Historical Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boston, printed by
Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo). Eeprinted by Little and Brown, ibid., 1843, 8vo.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabulary.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387 389 (from EOGER WILLIAMS), and as
" New England" (from WOOD).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 812.
No. IV, 16, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in : Archffiologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 364, and (partly) under P, IV, 2,
p. 110, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, and an Extract, Article 1 of the Appendix, p. 491, to JOHN W.
DE FORREST, History of the Indians of Connecticut. Hartford, . Hamersley,
1852, 8vo.
From WILLIAMS, and MS. Notices of ME. TREAT.
SILAS WOOD, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns of Long
Island. Brooklyn, 1824, 8vo. Eeprinted, ibid., Spooner, 1828, 8vo, p. ,and:
JAMES MACAULEY, History of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, 1829,
3 vols. Svo j Vol. II, pp. 267, 268.
132 NATCHES NAVAJOS.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A Key into the Language of America ; or, an Help to the Language of the
Natives in that part of America called New England ; together with brief Ob-
servations of the Customs, Manners, and Worships, etc., of the aforesaid Natives,
in Peace and Warre, in Life and Death. On all which are added, Spiritual Ob-
servations, Generall and Particular, by the Author, of chiefe and speciell use (upon
all occasions) to all the English inhabiting these parts ; yet pleasant and pro-
fitable to the view of all men. By EOGEE WILLIAMS, of Providence, of New
England. London, printed by Gregory Dexter, 1643, 8vo, pp. 197.
Thirty-two chapters, each with Vocabulary and Spiritual Observations.
Reprinted, pp. 17 163 of Collections of the Rhode Island Historical Society,
Yol. 1. Providence, printed by John Miller, 1827, 8vo.
The grammatical and ethnological parts of the 32 chapters alone were
reprinted under the title
A Key, etc., in Life and Death, in : Collections of the Massachusetts Historical
Society, for the year 1794 (Vol. Ill of the First Series). Boston, printed by
Joseph Belknap, 1794, 8vo, and reprinted, Boston, Munroe and Francis, 1810,
8vo ; pp. 203239.
Smith Barton, of Philadelphia, afterwards caused the Vocabulary to be
reprinted in the same Collection, Series I, Vol. V (1798) . (See Vocabularies.)
NATCHES.
Tribe of the Creek confederacy, on the Lower Mississippi, now
nearly extinct.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
No. VI, 47, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc.,
in : Vol. II of the Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367 ; and No. D, XII, Ameri-
can Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II, pp. 94, 96.
Some Words are given in : Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 287. (From LE
PAGE DU PEATZ, Histoire de la Louisiane. Paris, De Bure, 1758, 3 vols. 12mo ;
Vol. II.)
NAVAJOS, NAVAHOES.
A powerful tribe of the Apache family, related to the great
Athapascan stock, residing on the tributaries of the River San
Juan, west of the Rio Grande, and east of the Colorado, in New
Mexico, between the 35th and 37th parallel of northern lati-
tude. The Spaniards call them Apaches de Nabajoa.
NEW BRUNSWICK NEWFOUNDLAND. 133
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JAMES H. SIMPSON, Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Language of
the Pueblo or civilized Indians of New Mexico, and of the wild tribes inhabiting
its borders. Appendix B, pp. 140 143, to his: Journal of a Military Recon-
noissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to the Navajo Country, made .... in
181'9; pp. 56 168 of: Reports of the Secretary of War, with Reconnoissances of
Routes from San Antonio to El Paso Also .... the Report of LIEUT.
J. H. SIMPSON of an Expedition into the Navajo Country. (Exec. Docum. Senate,
No. 64, 31st Congress, Session 1). Washington, printed at the Union Office,
1850, 8vo, plates, maps, pp. 250.
A Yocabulary of the Navajo Language has been taken by the United States
Boundary Commissioner, JOHN R. BARTLETT.
CAPTAIN J. H. EATON, United States Agent, Navajo Vocabulary, pp. 416
432 (pp. 429431, numerals) of Vol. IV of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the
United States.
Navajo Vocabulary, taken in 1852 by LIEUTENANT A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 81
83 of Chap. V of his, Thomas Ewbank's, and Professor W. W. Turner's Report
upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on the Route
near the 35th Parallel (Vol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington,
1855, 4to).
PROFESSOR W. W. TURNER, Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-five Words of
Navajo, Apache, Hudson's Bay, Dogrib, Chepewyan, Tacully, Umkwa, and Hoo-
pah, pp. 84, 85, ibid.
Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai Languages (also, Navajo
and Ticorilla), pp. 269318 of: BUSCHMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm.
Berlin, 1856, 4to.
NEW BRUNSWICK.
A dialect of ihe Mikmak.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, Nipis-
sing, Shawnees, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102 113 of: Proceedings of
Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.
All these are in one dialect the Mikmak. It seems that the sound of the
letter r is wanting in this language. The Vocabulary was originally made by
ANTONY ROGERS, an intelligent old hunter (but not an Indian), who had lived
some time amongst the Indians, and is believed to have been well acquainted
with their language. He was assisted by ABITASE, said to be half Indian and
half English.
NEWFOUNDLAND.
Island on the coast of Labrador. Its inhabitants belong to the
Eastern Algonkins. The Milicite and Mikmaks are part of
them. The Bethuck are extinct.
134 NIPISSING NORTON SOUND.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of the Language of the Natives of Newfoundland, procured by the
REV. J. LEIGH from Mary March, a native woman, taken up the Bay of Exploits
by Mr. Peyton, in March, 1818 (Journal of the Royal Geographical Society
of London, Vol. IV, pp. 218220. London, 1834, 8vo).
An extract from MART MARCH'S Vocabulary is contained in : R,. Mont-
gomery Martin's British Colonial Library, Vol. VI, pp. 300, 301. London,
1851.
NIPISSING.
Of the Algonquin stock of Indians, living on the Lake of the
Two Mountains, in the district of Montreal, Lower Canada.
*
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. HOWSE, Comparative Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Lan-
guages, Nipissing, Shawnees, Brunswick, and Duplicate Blackfoot (Proceedings
of the Philological Society, Vol. IV, pp. 102113. London, 1850).
NIQUIRANS.
Mexicans settled in the district of Nicaragua, between the Lake
of Nicaragua and the Pacific Ocean. They speak a dialect of
the Mexican language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
E. GEO. SQTJIEE, Nicaragua .... New York, Appletons, 1852, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol.
II, p. 314 and Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. Ill,
part 1, p. 101.
On the Aztek Language in Nicaragua, pp. 746 778 of : JOHN GAEL EDWAED
BUSCHMANN, Tiber die Aztekischen Ortsnamen, l e Abtheilung. Berlin, Diimmler,
1853, 4to.
NORTON SOUND.
On the north-west coast, inhabited by Eskimaux.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Captains
COOK, CLARK, and GOEE .... 17761780. London, 1784, 3 vols, 4to ; Vol.
IF, p. 334. Edition, Dublin, 1784, 8vo ; Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 555. Appendix VI, a
table to show the affinity between the Languages spoken at Oonalashka and Nor-
ton Sound, and those of the Grreeulanclers and Esquimaux.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 461 466 (from the above).
NOTTOWAYS NUTKA. 135
NOTTOWAYS.
Iroquois tribe of Virginia, nearly extinct. They called them-
selves Cherohakah.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. V, 32, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archaeologia Americana, Yol. II, pp. 305367).
From MS. authorities of J. WOOD and TEEVEZANT.
And under E, Y, 6, p. 115, of the Yocabularies in Yol. II of : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society.
NUSDALUM.
Indian tribe of the north-west coast on Hood's Channel, related
to the Haeeltzuk and Nutka Indians.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Noosdalum Yocabulary, by DR. JOHN SCOFLER (Journal of the Royal Geogra-
phical Society of London, Yol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244246).
Ifoosdalum and Atnah Words compared, p. 157 of: K. G.LATHAM, The Languages
of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 166 of Journal of the Ethnological Society of
London, Yol. I, pp. 154166). Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
NUTKA, WAKASH.
Indians of Vancouver's Island (their proper name is Yucuatl).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Yoyage to the Pacific Ocean .... performed under the direction of Captains
COOK, CLAIIK, and GOKE .... 17761780. London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to ; Yol.
II, Appendix No. 4.
Appendix IY, Yocabulary of the Language of Nootka or King George's Sound,
April, 1778, pp. 542548 of the Dublin edition : Chmeenlaque, W. Watson, and
Al. 1784, 3 vols. 8vo.
Tlaoquatch and Nootka (from COOK) Words compared, p. 156 of : E. G.
LATHAM, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 166 of Yol I of
the Journal of the Ethnological Society of London) . Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
J. FR. BOUBGOING-, Eelation d'un Voyage recent des Espagnoles sur les C6tes
136 OMAGUA.
Nord-ouest de 1'Amerique septentrionale (Archives Litteraires de 1'Europe. Paris
and Tulingue, 18041818, XVII, 8vo, No. IT, 1804, pp. 78, 79).
The numerals 1 10, from a MS. of MR. MOZINO in : A. de Humboldt, Essai
politique sur le Royaume de la Nouvelle Espagne. Paris, Schoell, 1811, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. I, p, 322.
Yocabulario del Idioma de los Habitantes de Nutka (Eelacion del Yiage hecho
por las goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792, para reconocer el estrecho de
Fuca. Con una introducion en que se da noticia de los expediciones executadas
anteriormente por los Espanoles en busca del paso del nord-este de la America.
Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802, 8vo, atlas, pp. clxviii, 185 ; pp. 178 184).
A list of Words in the Nootkian Language the most in use, p. 5, and "War
Song of the Nootka Tribe, p. 166 of: Narrative of the Adventures and Sufferings
of JOHN K. JEWITT, only survivor of the crew of the ship " Boston," during a
Captivity of nearly Three Years among the Savages of Nootka Sound, with an
Account of the Manners, Mode of Living, and Religious Opinions of the Natives.
New York, printed for the publisher, s. a., 16mo.
A popular book, compiled from Jewitt's Oral Relations, by RICHARD ALSOP,
in 1815. It has very often been reprinted.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 115 (from COOK, numerals from DIXON and
HTJMBOLDT).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 846.
The numerals 1 10, as given by COOK and by DIXON, compared, p. 35, note *,
of: J. H. M'CuLLOCH, jun., Researches, etc. Baltimore, F. Lucas, jun,, 1829, 8vo.
No. XXY, 60, of the Comparative Yocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.,
in: Yol. II of the Archseologia Americana, p. 371 (from JEWITT). Reprinted in
the Yocabularies, Yol. II of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
under U, XXI, p. 121.
No. 14 of Yocabularies of Languages of North-western America, pp. 569 629
of : HORATIO HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring
Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. The language is by
him called : Kwoneatshatka (Newittee). Reprinted, CXXI, pp. 89, 91, 93, 95 of the
Yocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. II.
Fuca Strait and Wakash Words, p. 156 of: R. G. LATHAM, The Languages of
the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, pp. 154
166). Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
OMAGUA.
Formerly a powerful nation of the regions between the Maranon
and Orinoco. The principal tribes of the Omaguas were
1. The Omagua propre, between the Maranon and Yapura.
2. The Enagua, on the Guaviari, in Venezuela. 3. The Yuri-
magua, on the Yuruba, and in the province of Solimoes.
OXJS1DA. U37
4. The Agua, in New Granada and Venezuela. 5. The
Kokama, on the Lower Ucayale. 6. The Yete, on the Napo, in
New Granada. 7. The Tokantin, on the Tokanthr, in the
Brazilian provinces Goyaz and Para.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio cli Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371 375.
HERVAS, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 98, 99.
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 29, 37, 41, 48, 78, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
HERVAS, Catalogo, p. 24, nota 1.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 96, 97.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 554, 603, 611 (from GILII).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnograpliique, Tab. XLI, No. 493.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 274.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 371375. -
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 604610.
ONEIDA.
Indians of the Iroqnois stock, in the west of the State of New
York.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies ; and p. 20 of the
Appendix. Edition of 1798.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333 (from SMITH BARTON).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 796.
P. E. DUPONCEA.U, Memoire sur le Systeme Grammatical, etc. Paris, 1838,
pp. 259269.
No. V, 30, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Vol. II of the : Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367), and (partly) under R, V,
3, Vol. II, p. 114, of : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society. (From
BARTON and MS. Notes of JEFFERSON.)
T
138 ONONDAGA.
RICHABD UPDIKE SHERMAN, Oneida Vocabulary, Appendix M, pp. 279281,
to: Henry E. Sehoolcraft, Notes on the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Wei-
ford, 1846, 8vo (New York State Documents, No. 24, Senate, 1846), and pp.
393 400, Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, of the same work, published
as a book. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
Oneida Vocabulary, by YOUNG SKENANDO, Oneida Castle : Schoolcraft's Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. II, pp. 482493.
ONONDAGA.
Iroquois tribe, formerly of the west of the State of New York.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).
SMITH BABTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabulary; and Appendix,
p. 20 (edition of 1798) ; and, from him,
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 332, 333.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 797.
Onondaga Vocabulary, by ABEAHAM LE FOEST : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of
the United States, Vol. II, pp. 482493.
No. V, 28, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Vol. II of the: Archseologia Americana, pp. 305 367). Reprinted, with addi-
tions, in the Comparative Vocabulary of the Iroquois, No. 3 : Henry R. School-
craft, Notes on the Iroquois, pp. 393400. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
Reprinted (partly) under R, V, 1, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, p. 114,
Deutsch Onondagisches Worterbuch von DAVID ZEISBEEGEE, 7 vols. 4to ; and,
A Collection of Words and Phrases in the Iroquois and Onondago Language,
explained in German, by the Rev. CHE. PYELJEUS, 4to, pp. 140. The above two
MSS. are deposited in the library of the American Philosophical Society, at Phila-
delphia.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
The following MSS. are deposited in the library of the American Philosophical
Society at Philadelphia :
Essay of an Onondago Grammar, or a Short Introduction to learn the Onendago
alias Maqua Tongue, by DAVID ZEISBEEGEE, 4to, pp. 67.
Onondagoische Grammatica, by the same, 4to, pp. 87.
Another Onondago Grammar, in the German language, by the same, 4to,
pp. 176.
OP ATA OS AGE. 139
OPATA.
Christian Indians of Sonora, in the central part of that State.
The Eudeve is closely related to the Opate language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 124.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq,
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 161, 165169 (from HEEVAS).
The United States Boundary Commissioner, JOHN E. BARTLETT, has taken a
Vocabulary of their language.
OHEGONES.
Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. (MARTIUS, No. 190, says that
the Portuguese call a wild nation on the I^a Orelhudos, but
that the Spaniards call them Orejones. The name of Orelhudos
is given by the Portuguese also to the Aroaquis, on the rivers
Nhamunda and Negro, No. 143.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Oregones : Vocabulary, No. XX, pp. 294, 295 of: CASTELNAU,
Vol. V, Appendice.
OSAGE.
Dacotah Indians, called also Wawah, Huzzaiv, Osawses, Wash-as,
or Ous; about Arkansas and Osage rivers. They are divided
into the Chamers (Arkansas, Clermont), Great and Little
Osages.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. S. VATER, Analekten, Zweites Heft, Abtheilung 2, pp. 5362.
Vocabulary of some Words in the Osage Language, Appendix I, pp. 213 219
of: JOHN BRADBURY, F.L.S., Travels in the Interior of America, in the years
.1809, 1810, 1811. Liverpool, printed for the author, by Smith and Galway.
London, published by Sherwood, Neely, and Jones, 1817, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 784. No. VI, 37, of the Com-
parative Vocabulary to A. Oallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Vol. II of: Archseologia
Americana, pp. 305 367).
(From BRADBURY, and MS. Notices of L. CASS and DR. MURRAY.)
140 OTO.
Reprinted under B, VI, 2, pp. 82, 85, 87, 89 of the Vocabulary, in Yol. II of :
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED in Amerika. Coblenz, 18391841,
2 vols. 4to ; Yol. II, pp. 637645.
Glossaire Osage, pp. 261, 262 of: YICTOE TEXIER, Voyage aux Prairies Osages
en Louisiane et Missouri, 1839, 1840. Clermont Ferrand, Perol. Paris, Rovet,
1844, 8vo.
A MS. Vocabulary of the Language of the Osage Indians, by DE. MUEBAT, of
Louisville, Kentucky, is in the library of the American Philosophical Society at
Philadelphia.
Vocabulary of (69) Words in the Osage Language, p. 275 of the : Diary of
MATTHEW CLAEKSON, west of the Alleghennies, in 1766. (Schoolcraft's Indian
Tribes of the United States, Vol. IV, pp. 265278).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Washashe Wageressa Pahugreh Tse. The Osage First Book. Boston, Crocker
and Brewster, for the American Board of Foreign Missions, 1834, 18mo, pp. 126.
OTO.
Called also Otoes, Othouez, Oktolaktos, Wahtohtana, Wahtoldak,
on the left banks of the Platte River. They are divided into
Otoes and Pahoja.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. SAY, pp. Ixxii Ixxx of: Astronomical and Meteorological Records and
Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken, on the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi .... under the command of Major Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 776 (Otoes, Ouahtokta).
No. VI, 38, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305367), and S, VI, 4, p. 117, of the
Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II
(from SAY).
Reise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Coblenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 612630.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Note 16 (on the Winnepago and Otoe Dialects), pp. 149 151, of John Picker-
ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collections
of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X, Second Series. Boston, printed
by Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo ; pp. 81 160. Reprinted, Boston, Little and
Brown, 1843, 8vo).
OTOMI. 141
OTOMI.
Mexican Indians, the north-west of the Valley of Anahuac.
Some also in the neighbourhood of the city of Mexico,
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabulario de la Leugua Otomi, por Fray PEDRO CASTILLO. MS.
Castillo was one of the earliest missionaries amongst the Otomies, whose
language he perfectly understood and taught. He died in 1577, and was
buried at Tula. (De Souza.)
HORATIO CAROCHI, Grrammatica y Vocabulario de la Lengua Otomi. Mexico,
1645, 4to.
De Souza states that the MSS. of the Grammar and of the Vocabulary are
in the library of Tepozotlan.
Yocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por P. JCJAN DE DIGS CASTRO, 4to.
Castro wrote about the year 1690, and his MSS. of both the Vocabulary
and Grammar are preserved in the library of the College of Tepozotlan. (De
Souza.)
Vocabulario de la Lengua Otomi, por Illmo. D. FR. SEBASTIAN RIBERO,
Obispo de la Pa/. Printed in Mexico, according to Pinelo.
Vocabulario Megicano y Otomi, por Fr. PEDRO PALACIOS. MS., according to
De Souza, in the library of the College of Tlateluco, in Mexico.
El Licenciado D. Luis DE NEVE Y MOLINA, Eeglas de Orthographia, Diccio-
nario y Arte del Idioma Othomi, breve instrucciou para los principiantes. Mexico,
1767, 8vo, pp. 160 (the Dictionary, pp. 13 96).
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 37, 118, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 119, 120.
HERVAS, Vocabolario, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 109, 110.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 123, 124 (from HERVAS and NEVE).
On p. 115, RANQEL, P. PALACIOS, SEBAST. RIBERO, and JUAN DE DIGS
CASTRO are named as having written Grammars and Vocabularies of the
Otomi a statement confirmed by De Souza, upon whose authority we give
the full titles.
J. S. VATER, Proben der Deutschen Volksmundarteu und Dr. SEETZEN'S Lin-
guistischer Nachlass, etc. Leipzig, Fleischer, 1816, 8vo ; pp. 353375.
P. JOAQTTIN LOPEZ YEPES, Catecismo y Declaracion de la Doctrina Cristiana
en Lengua Otomi ; con un Vocabulario del Mismo Idioma. Meyico, 1826, 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 706.
EMANUEL NAXERA, De Lingua Othomitorum Dissertatio. Philadelphia, 1835 r
142 OTOMI.
4to, in: Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, New Series, Vol.V.
Philadelphia, published by the Society ; printed by James Kay, 18341837, 4to ;
pp. 249296.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages. Paris, Vol. IV (1840), 8vo ; pp. 9 37.
Vocabolario Spagnuolo-Italiano-Otomi, pp. 27 78 of: PICCOLOMINI'S Gram-
mar (see Grammars).
Otomi Vocabulary in : A. GALLATIN'S Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of
Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I,
pp. 298-304. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte y Catecismo de la Lengua Otomi, por FB. ALONZO RANGEL, Provincial de
Sula (1529, 1546, MS.)
Gramatica de la Lengua Otomi, mas correcta y aumentada que la de Fr. PEDRO
PALACIOS. MS. by OEOZ (Fr. PEDKO), Franciscan, Instructor in the Imperial
College of Sta. Cruz de Tlateluco ; died 1597. Wrote, besides, various works in
Nahuatl.
HOKATIO CAEOCHI, Grammatica, etc. (see Vocabularies), pp. 112, 97
160.
Arte de la Lengua de los Otomites, con todos sus diferentes Dialectos, por
D. FEANCISCO PUEON, Maestro de el Idioma Otomi en la Universidad de Megico,
ano 1690. MS. in the library of the University of Mexico.
Gramatica de la Lengua Otomi, y metodo para confesar a los Indies en ella,
por Don FEANCISCO HAEDO, 8vo. Printed a second time in Mexico, 1731.
Luis DE NEVE T MOLINA (see Vocabularies).
An Italian Extract of this Grammar was published under the title : Conte
Enea Silvio Vincenzo Piccolomini, Grammatica della Lingua Otomi esposta in
Italiano, secondo la traccia del Licenjiate Luis de Neve y Molina. Col Vocabulario
Spagnuolo-Otomi, spiegato in Italiano. Roma, Tipogr. Propag. Fide. 1841, 12ino,
pp. 82 (the Grammar, pp. 526).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 113 123 (from NEVE T MOLINA).
EMANUEL NAXEEA (see Vocabularies).
V. PICCOLOMINI (see Vocabularies).
A. Gallatin, Notes, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. I, pp. 286 298: extracts from NEVE Y MOLINA, pp. 286 294, and from
NAXEEA, pp. 294298).
Arte 6 Gramatica de la Lengua Otomi, por P. JUAN DE Dios CASTEO, MS.
(see under Vocabularies).
Arte 6 Gramatica de la Lengua Otomite, por DON JUAN FEANCISCO ESCAMILLA.
Escamilla was Professor of Otomi in the University of Mexico (De Souza's
authority).
OTTAWAS OTTOMAKU. 143
Arte de la Lengua Otomi, y Catecismo y Confesonario, por Fr. PEDBOPALACIOS,
8vo. MS., according to De Souza, in the library of the College of Tlateluco, in
Mexico.
Arte breve de la Lengua Otomi, compuesto por el Pe. Fr. ALONZO UEBANO,
de la Orden N. P. S. Augustin, 15 leaves, 4to, MS.
Original in the Imperial Library of Paris ; copy in possession of E. G-. Squier,
New York. The original is accompanied with a large and very complete
Dictionary Otomi, Nahuatl (Mexican), and Spanish (421 leaves, 4to), quite
equal in extent to Molina's celebrated Yocabulario Mexicano.
OTTAWAS.
Indians of the Algonquin stock in Michigan and Ohio.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
Comparison of Words and Sentences in the Dialects of the Ottowwaws and
Menomonies, pp. 392 398 ; Comparison of the language of some Versions of the
Bible, with the Ottawwaw of the present time, pp. 421 422 ; and Comparison of
a Greek Sentence with the Dialect of the Ottawwaws, p. 423 of: JOHN TANNEE'S
Narrrative of his Captivity and Adventures prepared for the press by
Edwin James, M.D. New York, G. and C. and H. Carvill, 1830, 8vo.
No. IV, 9, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatiii's Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 367). Eeprinted (partly) under
N, IV, 4, p. 107, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Trans-
actions, Vol. II.
(From TANNEE, and MS. Notices of ME. HAMELIN.)
Anichinabek Amisinahikaniwa, The Indian Book. Detroit, printed by Geo.
L. Whitney, 1830, 18mo, pp. 106 ; contains, on pp. 104, 105, a Vocabulary of 40
words in French and Ottawa, by the Missionary DEJEAN.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
JONATHAN MEEKEE, Ottawa First Book. Shaivnee Mission, printed by
J. G. Pratt, 1838, 18mo, pp. 229.
Abinodjnag Omasindiganiwan. Buffalo, printed by Oliver Steele, 1837, 8vo,
pp.8.
Child's Book. Detroit, Bagg and Harmon, 1845, 18mo, pp. 8.
OTTOMAKU, OTTOMACQUE.
Indians of Bolivia, on the banks of the Yarura. The Taparita
are said to speak a dialect of their language.
1 14 OTUQU1S PACAGUARAS.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, p. 213 ; and, from him, in the : Mithridates, Vol. Ill,
p. 650.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
OTUQUIS.
Indians of Bolivia, of the province of Chiquitos. Having been
compelled by the Jesuits to adopt the Chiquito, their language
is nearly lost.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Das Land Otuquis in Bolivia. Nach einem Originalbericht von MORSSACH,
beschrieben von Dr. GK L. Kriegk. Frankfurt, 1838, 8vo ; pp. 23, 24.
Otuke Vocabulary (23 words) given by: D'ORBIGNT, L'Homme American),
Vol. I, pp. 163 164. ; Vol. II, p. 136 ; who also gives some general remarks on
the Language of the Otuke, Vol. II, pp. 176, 177.
OYAMPIS.
Carib tribe of French Guyana.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
ADAM DE BAUKE et P. FERRE, De la Langue Oyampis, avec Vocubulaire, pp.
107109; and LEPRIETJR, Vocabulaire Oyampis, pp.225 229 of : Bulletin de
la Societe de Geographic, Second Series, Vol. I. Paris, 1834, 8vo.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 276.
PACAGUAIIAS.
Moxos Indians, on the confluence of the rivers Beni and
Mamore, in Bolivia.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 164 ; Vol. II, p. 208.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 263.
PAICOXECA FAMPT1COUGH.
PAICONECA.
Indians of the province of Chiquitos, near Conception, between
the rivers Bianco and Verde. They belong to the Chiquito
stock ; one of their tribes is the Paunaca.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 161 of Vol. I of: A. D'ORBIGNY,
L'Homme American], and p. 162 of Vol. I, and p. 136 of Vol II, Vocabulary of
five Words of the Paunaca tribe.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'OBBIQNY, L'Homme Amcricain, Vol. IT, pp. 190, 191.
PALAIHNI, PALAIKS,
Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of
Upper California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. 11, W, of the Vocabularies of North-western America (pp. 569-629) of:
HOE. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion. Philadelphia, Lea and Blauehard, 1846, folio ; and
F, XXXI (pp. 98, 100), of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
PAMPTICOUGH.
Indian tribe of North Carolina, now extinct.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A small Dictionary of Tuskerura, Pampticough, Woccon, in : JOHN LAWSON,
Q-ent., Surveyor-General of North Carolina, a New Voyage to Carolina .... and
a Journal of a I housand Miles travelled through several Nations of Indians,
giving a pai ticular Account of their Customs, Manners, etc. London, 1709, small
4to; pp. 225-227.
First printed in : Capt. John Stevens, A New Collection of Voyages and
Travels .... none of them ever before printed. London, December, 1708.
To be continued monthly, 4to. (In Vol. I, afterwards with separate title,
ibid., 1709, 1714, and 1718, 4to.)
German translation, Hamburg, 1772, 8vo.
JOHN BBICZELL, M.D., The Natural History of North Carolina, with an Account
U
146 PANOS PATACHOS.
of the Trades, Manners, and Customs of the Christian and Indian Inhabitants.
Dublin, 1737, 8vo ; new title, ibid., 1743, 8vo (the Dictionary from LAWSON).
HERVAS, Aritmetica, p. 114.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360362.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 809.
No. IV, K, p. 375, of the Comparative Vocabulary to : A. Gallatin's Synopsis
(^ rchseologia Americana, Vol. II). From LAWSON, HERIOT, LANE.
Comparison of the Language of the ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with
the Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waccoa of that State and the
Catawba of South Carolina (SCHOOLCRAFT'S Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol.
V, pp. 552 558 ; Tuskarora, Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 555, 556 j Pamptico,
Natic, and Chippewa, pp. 556, 557).
PANOS.
Brazilian Indians on the banks of the River U cay ale.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Panos (Langue generale de I'Ucayale), Vocabulary, No. XVIII of:
CASTELNAU, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 292, 293.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Note sur la Grrammaire Pani. Recueillie par les Missionaires de PUcayale :
CASTELNAU, Vol. V, Appendice, pp. 301, 302.
PARENT.
Indians of the Maypure Mission, on the River Mataveni.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
AL. DE HTJMBOLDT et A. BONPLAND, Voyage aux Regions equinoxiales du
Nouveau Continent. Paris, 1819, 2 vol=. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 366 et seq.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 610.
A. D'C-RBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 274.
PATACHOS.
Brazilian Indians in the province Porto Seguro, on the rivers
Porto Seguro and Mucury.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Frankfurt^ 1820, 1821, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, pp. 320 et seq.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 504.
PAWNEE PENOBSCOT. 1 17
PAWNEE, PANI.
Warlike tribe on the banks of the rivers Platte and Kansas, also
on Red River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. SAY, Vocabulary, pp. Ixii Ixxxv of: Astronomical .... Kecords and
Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi .... under .... Major St. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822, 8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 738.
Reise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Collenz, 18,39 1841, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. II, pp. 630632.
No. XVII, 52, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, pp. 305 367) ; and
No. E, XVII, pp. 9698, of Vocabularies in: Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
Fifteen Pawnee Words compared with Eiccaree, Kichai, Hueco, and Witcliita,
pp. 68, 69 of the Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant WHIPPLE'S
Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to).
Six Caddo Words and Pawnee Affinities. Ibid., p. 70.
PEBAS.
Brazilian Indians on the Amazon.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Pebas, Vocabulary No. XXII, pp. 296, 297 of : CASTELNATJ, Vol.
V, Appendice.
PENOBSCOT.
Abenaki tribe, greatly reduced, above Banger, Maine.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BABTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates (from above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402404.
T. SAY, Comparative Vocabulary of various Dialects of the Lenape Stock, etc.
] 18 PENNSYLVANIANS.
Note 15, pp. 135 145, to John Pickering's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observa-
tions on the Mohegan Language. (Collections of the Massachusetts Historical
Society, Second Series, Vol. X. Boston, printed by Phelps and Farnham, 1823,
8vo. Beprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8^0.)
No. IV, 14, B, p. 370, of the Comparative Vocabulary to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II). From MSS. of TREAT and Mrs.
GARDINER.
H. HALE, Remarks on the Language of the St. John or Colastukweek Indians,
with a Penobscot Vocabulary. Boston, 1834, 8vo, pp. 8.
PENNSYLV ASIANS.
The Indians inhabiting Pennsylvania, or New Sweden, were of
the Algonkin and of the Iroquois stock (Mohawks).
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabularium Barbaro-Virgineorum ; additis passim locutionibus et observa-
tionibus hi^toricis brevioribus ad linguae pleniorem notiiiam, pp.133 ]54of:
Lutheri Cathechismus. ofwersatt pa American-Vergiuiske spruket. Stockholm,
1696, 12mo (from THOMAS CAMPANIUS).
"Words, on pp. 49, etc. : Journal des Scavans, 1716, 4to.
Book IV, Chap. I X, Vocabulary, and Chap. XI and XII, Dialogues of:
THOMAS CAMPANIUS HOLM, Kort beskrifning om Provincieu Nya Swerige.
Stockholm, 1704, 4to ; pp. 153599.
English translation, by P. St. Duponcean, A Short Description of the
Province of New Sweden Translated for the Historical Society of
Pennsylvania, with notes, pp. 144 156, in: Memoirs of the Historical
Society of Pennsylvania, Vol. III. Philadelphia, M'Carty and Davis, 1834,
8vo ; pp. 1 168.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (Indians of Penn-
sylvania, according to William Penn), from CAMPANIUS.
No. IV, 198 (p. 371), of Comparative Vocabulary to A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
ANT. COURT DB GEBELTN, Langue de Pennsylvanie (Monde Primitif, Vol.
VIII, p. 523). Reprinted in: J. B. Scherer, Rechercbes Historiques et Geo-
graphiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777, 12mo, p. 231.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387 389 (from the Virginian Catechism).
J. S. VATER, Proben Deutscher Mundarten : Dr. Seetzen's Linguist. Nachlass.
Leipzig, 1816, 8vo ; pp. 376380.
I'KCJUOT P1M\. 149
PEQUOT.
Indians of Connecticut, related to the Mohegans. The Nanga-
tuck Indians speak a kindred language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of Pequot and some Nangatuck Indian Words, Article I of the
Appendix (p. 491) to : JOHN W. DE FOKREST, History of the Indians of Con-
necticut. Hartford, Hamersley, 1852, 8vo.
PESCHERAI, YAKANAKU, FUEGIANS.
Indians of Fireland (Tierra del Fuego) and of the peninsulas
Brunswick and King William IV ; divided into three tribes
Kamenetcs, Kennekas, and Karaikas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JAMES WEDDELL, Master, R.N., A Voyage towards the South Pole, performed in
the years 1822 1824. Containing a Visit to Tierra del Fuego ; with a particular
account of the Inhabitants London, Longman, 1825, 8vo, pp. 280,
13 maps and plates. Second edition, ibid. t 1827, 8vo, pp. 324, maps and piates ;
p. 174.
HERVAS, Catalogo, p. 15.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 412.
PIANKASHAWS.
Southern tribe of the Ojibway stock.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies ;
And, from him, Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 360 362.
PIMA.
Indian nation of New Mexico and Sonora, where the country
inhabited by them is called Pimeria, and divided into Alfa and
Baja.
150 PINALENOS,
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 124, 125.
IGNATZ PFEFFEEKOEN, Beschreibung der Landschaft Sonora. Kolln, 1794,
2 vols, 8vo.
Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162169.
A Vocabulario de las Lenguas Pima, Eudeve y Seris, is said, by De Souza, to have
been written by Fr. ADAMO G-ILG, a Jesuit missionary in California.
Pima Vocabulary, by Dr. JOHN SCOULEB, in : Journal of the Royal Geogra-
phical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 246, 248, 250.
Pima Vocabulary, under W, 1, p. 129, in : Transactions of the American Ethno-
logical Society, Vol. II.
Dr. C. C. PAERY (Botanist to the Boundary Commission), Vocabulary of the
Language of the Pimo Indians on the Rio Gila, New Mexico, pp. 161, 162 of :
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. III.
Pima Vocabulary, by Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE, p. 94 of : Eeport upon
the Indian Tribes (see Keport on the Route near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific
Railroad Reports, Vol. II). Washington, 1856, 4to.
JOHN R. BAETLETT, the United States Boundary Commissioner, has also taken
a Vocabulary of the Pimo Language,
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 162 169 (from IGNATZ PFEFFEEKOEN).
PINALENOS.
Also called Pinon Lanos, Pinols, Pinal Leno. Apache tribe,,
ranging over an extensive circuit, between the Sierra Final and
the Sierra Blanca, near the Upper San Francisco River, north
of the Gila, in New Mexico.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Pinal Leno Vocabulary, taken in 1852, by Lieutenant A. "W. WHIPPLE
(see Report upon the Indian Tribes, in the Report on the Route near the 35th
Parallel, Chap. V, pp. 8183 of : Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington,
1856, 4to).
PIRINDA POKONCHI. 151
PIRINDA.
Language of the Indians of Mechoacan, Mexico. Identical with
Tarasca ? DE SOUZA says of Fr. JUAN BRAVO, the author of a
Grammar of the Lengua Tarasca (see under Tarasca), "fue
maestro peritissimo de la lengua Pirinda, llamada Tarasca."
WOllDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 120.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 126128.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua Pirinda, and also various Sermons in the same Language, by
the Fray FRANCISCO ACOSTA, of the order of San Augustin, in the province of
Michoacan. These MSS. were left in the library of the Convent of Charo.
Arte Yoeabulario y Manuel de la Lengua Pirinda, por Fr. MIGUEL GUEVAEA.
According to De Souza, in the Convent of Charo, province of Michoacan.
PIEO.
Indians of New Mexico, near El Paso.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary of the Piro Language has been taken by JOHN E. BARTLETT, the
United States Boundary Commissioner.
POKONCHI.
Or Pokoman. Indian Nation of the district of Vera Paz, in
Guatemala. Their language bears close affinity to the Maya.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
TH. GAGE (see Grammars below).
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 113115.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 15, 23.
Pp. 9, 10 of: A. GALLATIN'S Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico
(Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. New York, Bartlett
and Welford, 1845, 8vo.)
152 FOPOLUCA.
Dr. KARL SCHERZEK, Sprache der Indianer von Palin (Poconchi) 24 engl.
Meilen von Neu Guatemala, pp. 2835 of Vol. XV of the : Sitzungsberichte der
Philosophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften.
Vienna, 1855. 8vo. Also under the separate title : Sprachen der Indianer Central
Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
THOMAS GAGE, The English- American, his Travail by Sea and by Land, or a
New Survey of the West Indies .... with a Grammar or some few Rudiments
of the Indian tongue, called Poconchi or Pocoman. London, printed by R. Cotes,
1648, small folio. Second Edition, A New- Survey of the West Indie?, etc. London,
1655, small folio ; the Grammar on pp 213, et seq. Third Edition. London, 1677,
8vo. The Fourth Edition, enlarged by the Author. London, printed for T.
Nicholson, 1699, 8vo.
French translation Nouvelle Relation, contenant les Voyages de Thomas
Gage dans la Nouvelle Espagne. Traduite par le Sieur De Beaulieu Hues
O'Neil. Paris, Clousier, 1676, 2 vols. 12mo ; and added to it : Brieve Instruc-
tion pour apprendre la Langue Indienne appelee Poconchi ou Pocoman.
Paris, 1676, 12mo.
This French translation has often been reprinted, viz., Amsterdam, Moret,
1680, 2 vols. 12mo ; ibid., 1685 ; ibid., 1687 ; ibid., 1695 ; ibid., Third Edi-
tion, revue et corrigee, 1699, 2 vols. 12mo ; ibid., Fourth Edition, 1720,
2 vols. 12mo; ibid., 1721; ibid., 1722.
BIIUNET, Vol. II , p. 345, however, remarks that the edition of 1676 is the
one to which the translation of the Poconchi Grammar was added. This
translation having appeared under a separate title, is generally found sepa-
rately.
German translation Ganz neue, merkwurdige Reisebeschreibung nach
Neuspanien .... aus dem Franzosischen iibersetzt. Leipzig, 16U3, 4to.
The Grammar on pp. 457 471.
Dutch translation Nieu we ende seer naeuwkeerige Reyze door de Spaensche
West Indien, van Thomas Gage ..... overgeset door H. v. Q. (H. van
Quellenburgh). Utrecht, 1682, small 4to.
Spanish translation Nueva Relacion qne contiene los Viages de Tomas
Gage en la Nueva Espana. Paris, Rosa, 1838, 2 vols. 12mo.
Mithridates (from GAGE), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 613.
A. GaUatin (from GAGE), Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc ,
pp. 45 47 } 269 275, of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. I. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1845, 8vo.
POPOLUCA,
Or Populuka, Papoloka, Indians of Central America, in Oajaca,
and in the State of San Salvador. The same as Poconchi and
Pocoman, i.e., Kachiquel (?). MUHLENPFORDT does not mention
them in Oajaca.
POTTAWATAME POWHATTANS. 153
WORDS AND VCCABULARIKS.
FRANC. DE TOKAL, Arte y Voeabulario en la Lengua Popolaca de Tecomachalco
(printed ? ).
Dr. KAEL SCHERZER, Sprache der Tndianer von St. Maria, am Fusse des Was-
ser-Vulcan's (Pupuluka-Katchikel), 5 engli. Meilen von Antigua Guatemala (Sitz-
zungsberichte der Philosophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akademie
der Wissenschaften, Vol. XV, pp. 2835. Vienna, 1855, 8vo. Also under the
separate title: Sprachen der Indianer Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo,
pp. 11.)
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FRANCESCO DE TORAL (see Vocabularies above).
POTTAWATAME, POUTEOTAMIS.
Indians of the Algonkin stock, formerly near Detroit, Michigan.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates (from the above), Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343346, 360362.
No. IV, a, of the Comparative Vocabulary (p. 375) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) . From BARTON, and MS. Notices in the
War Department of the United States.
Keprinted and enlarged under N, IV, 5, p. 107 of Vocabularies in : American
Ethnological Society's Transactions, Vol. II.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICKS.
Pottawottomie Spelling-book. Shaivnee Mission, J. Meeker, printer, 1834.
12mo, pp. 32.
Letter of P. WOLCOTT to General Cass (in answer to printed queries), On the
History and Language of the Pottowattamies, note, pp. 380 386 of: Henry R.
Schoolcraft, Travels in the Central Portions of the Mississippi Valley (performed
.... 1821). New York, Collins andHannay, 1825, 8vo.
Pewani ipi Potewatomi Missinoikan eyowat nemadjik Catholiques endjik (Catho-
lic primer). Baltimore, John Murphy, 1846, 24mo, pp. 31.
POWHATTANS.
Tribe of the Algonkin stock, in Maryland and Virginia, no\v
extinct. JEFFERSON, in the Notes on Virginia, gives a view of
their extent and tribes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Captain JOHN SMITH, General History of Virginia, New England, and the
X
154 PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND PUEBLO INDIANS.
Summer Isles London, 1626. folio. Reprinted, Hid., 1627 and 1632,
folio ; at the end of Book II.
Eeprinted : The Travels, Adventures, and Observations of Captain John Smith,
etc. Richmond, republished at the Franklin Press, William W. Gray^
printer, 1819, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, pp. 147, 148.
No. IV, i (376), of the Comparative Vocabulary to A, GALLATIN'S Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
Vocabulary of the Powhattan Language (from CAPTAIN SMITH) in : James
Macauley's History of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, 1829, 3 vols.
8ro; Vol. II, pp. 265-270.
PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND.
On the north-west coast of North America (Russian possessions),
inhabited by Eskimaux.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JAMES COOK, Voyage to the Pacific Ocean (third voyage, under Cook,
Clark, and Gore). London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to ; Vol. II, pp. 374376.
Captain GEORGE DIXON, A Voyage round the World, but more particularly
to the North-west Coast of America. London, Goulding, 1789, 4to, p. 241.
French translation, by M. Lebas. Paris, 1789, 2 vols. 8vo.
German translation, by J. R. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1790, 4to, p.
Captain NATHANIEL PORTLOCK, A Voyage round the World, etc. London,
Stockdale, 1789, 4to.
German translation, by G. Forster, Geschichte derKeisen an der Nord-
west und Nordostkiiste von Amerika .... von Dixon, Portlock, Cook ....
Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to.
And PORTLOCK, G. Mortimer's and Long's Travels, translated with
separate title. Berlin, Voss, 1796, 4to.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 238.
PUEBLO INDIANS (ZUNI, KETtES).
Indians of New Mexico. The tribes living at Santo Domingo
and the neighbouring Pueblos are catted Keres, or, by the
Spaniards, Queres.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JAMES H. SIMPSON, A Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Languages of
the Pueblo or Civil Indians of New Mexico, and of the wild tribes inhabiting its
borders, pp. 140 113 of: Journal of a Military Eeconnaissance from Santa Fe,
.New Mexico, to the Navajo country, pp. 56 168 of: Keports of the Secretary of
War, with Reconnaissances of Routes from S. Antonio to El Paso ; also, the
PUELCHES. 155
Report of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson. Washington, printed at the Union Office }
1850, 8vo (Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, 31st Congress. Session).
SIMPSON distinguishes Pueblo Indians of:
1. St. Domingo S. Anna.
S. Felipe Silla.
Laguna Pojuate.
Acoma ... .. Cocbiti.
2. S.Juan S. Clara
S. Aldefonso Pojuaque.
Marabe Tesuque.
3. Taos Picori Sandia Isleta.
4. Yenies (old Pecos).
DAVID Y. WHITING, Pueblo (of Tusuque) Vocabulary, in : Schoolcraft's Indian
Tribes of the United States, Yol. Ill, pp. 446459.
Captain J. H. EATON, United States Agent, Pueblo (of Zuiii) Vocabulary,
ibid., Vol. IV, pp. 416432 (pp. 429431, numerals).
Zuni Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 9193 of the
Report upon the Indian Tribes (Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel in :
Pacific Eailroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to).
PUELCHES.
Indians of the Argentine Republic, between the Rio Negro and
the Rio Colorado. They are divided into Checlieliet, Divihet,
and Taluhet ; the two latter are called by the Spaniards
"Pampas." The wild Charruas are related to them. HALE
distinguishes only Pampas (north of the Rio Colorado) and
Tehuetches (south of that river) .
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
TH. FALKNER, Description of Patagonia (see Araucans) .... Hereford, 1774,
4to, p. 138.
German translation, by Schack Hm. Ewald. Gotha, Ettinger, 1775,
8vo, p. 13.
HERVAS, Catalogo, p. 20.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423. Puelches and Tuelhet (from FALKNER and
HERVAS).
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162164 of Vol. I of: ALCIDE D'O-R-
BIGNY, L'Homme Americain.
Puelche Vocabulary and Sentences (Pampas and Tehuiliche), pp. 653656
of United States Exploring Expedition. Ethnography and Philology, by HOR.
HALE. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1816.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNT, L'Homme Americain, Yol. II, pp. 79, 80 ; and p. 87, Notices on
the Charrua Language-
156 PUQUINI QUAPPAS.
PUQUINI.
Peruvian Indians, on the islands of the Chuquito Lake, and at
the Mission of the Patres Mercenarii, near the Pucarani. They
spoke their language exclusively among themselves, and did not
permit strangers to learn the same. For worshipping, they
used the Quichua. No affinity to any other American lan-
guage.
WOKDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 93.
Mithridates (from HERVAS), Vol. Ill, pp. 548550.
PURYS.
Brazilian Indians, of the provinces Rio de Janeiro and Espiritu
Santo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
WILH. L. VON ESCHWEGE, Journal fur Brasilien, Heft 1. Weimar , 1818,
8vo.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 497.
QUADUS.
Brazilian Indians, in the neighbourhood of Miranda.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Quadus. Vocabulary No. IX, pp. 278280, of: CASTELNAU, Vol.
V, Appendice.
QUAPPAS.
Indians on the banks of the Arkansas River. (See NUTTALI/S
Journal, pp. 8189.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. VI, 36, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367) to A. GALLATIJJ'S
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. llj.
QUEEN CHARLOTTE'S ISLAND ^ICHE. 157
S, IV, 3, p. 117, of the Vocabularies (Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II).
QUEEN CHARLOTTE'S ISLAND.
On the north-west coast of America. The language spoken by
the Indians of this island is but little known. The Cumsheivar,
Massif, Skittayeets, Iteesarn, and Kigarnee are mentioned as
living on the island.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Pp. 302, 380 of: Miscellaneous Vocabularies, in A. Gallatin's Synopsis
( Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), contains, under XXIX, 64, p. 380, words of the
Kigarnee, Casarnee, Skittageets, Cumshawa, and other tribes of the north-west
coast, and the numerals 1-10 in the Queen Charlotte Island Language. (From
MS. authorities of Messrs. STURGIS and BRYANT.)
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 850.
Words, p. ] 54 of : R. G-. LATHAM, The Languages of the Oregon Territory
(Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. X, pp. 154166). Edin-
burgh, 1848, 8vo.
Skittagets (Queen Charlotte's Island) Vocabulary, No. 6, XIX, p. 102, of
Vocabularies in ; Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
QUICHE, KICHE.
Indians of Guatemala, belonging to the Great Tzendal or Maya
stock, which occupies that State. Their language is closely
related to that of the Kachiquels and Zutugils, and bears much
resemblance to the Maya.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Kiche (^Jiche) Dictionary (from the Convent of Papuna ?, sold by Pierre Bavila,
on the 24th November, 1833). MS. vol. in 4to, on paper of the 18th century ; in the
Imperial Library of Paris. Apparently a copy of the Cakchiquelchi Dictionary.
A MS. Vocabulary of the Quiche Language is in the possession of Abbe
Dominic Jehl, of Palin, near Amatitan, Guatemala.
Quiche Numerals, p. 191 of: JOHN L. STEPHENS, Incidents of Travel in Cen-
tral America. New York, Harpers, 1844, 2 vols. 8vo.
Dr. KARL SCHERZER, Sprache der Indianer von Ixtlavacan (Quiche), 10 engl.
Meilen von Quesaltenango, Guatemala, pp. 28 35 of A r ol. XV of: Silzungsberichte
der Philosophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akadernie der Wissen-
schaften. Vienna, 1855, 8vo. Also under the separate title : Sprachen der Indianer
Central Amerika's. Vienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.
158 QUICHUA.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. F. ALONZO FLORES, Arte de la Lengua Kakchiquel y paralelo de las quatro
Lenguas Metropolitanas que hoy integran en el reyno de Goathemala. Antigua,
Guatemala, 1753.
Although Juarros (I, p. 343) states that this "Arte" was printed, and had
proved very useful, the book was considered apocryphal until recently, when
the Abbe" Brasseur de Bourbourg wrote from Guatemala that he had obtained
four copies (see E. G. Squier's letter in the London Athencsum, December 8,
1855, No. 1467). It contains a comparison of the Kachiquel, with the
Quiche* and Zutugil, all three being dialects of one parent stock. Flores was
Professor of the Kakchiquel language at the San Carlos University of Guate-
mala.
Arte de las tres Lenguas Cacchiquel, Quiche y Yutuhil ; por el R. P. Fray
FRANCISCO XIMENEZ, del Orden de Predicadores.
Second division of the Padre's great work on the history, languages, and
antiquities of Guatemala, existing, in MS. only, in the University Library of
Guatemala. (For an account of this MS. see N. Triibner's paper on Central
American Archaeology, in the London Athenaeum, May 29, 1856, No. 1492.)
Arte de Lengua Kakehikel del uso de Fr. ESTEVAN TORRE SANO, Pre r - Ano de
1754. A MS. of 143 leaves, in 8vo, in the Imperial Library at Paris. (Copy in
possession of E. G. Squier.)
Contains: Parallelo de las Lenguas 4 iche (Kiche, Quiche), Cakchiquel
(Kachiquel) y Zutuhil (Zutugil).
A, comparison is also made between this dialect and the Zutugil and
Kachiquel Grammar of Flores.
Arte de Lengua 4 iche (Quiche), compuesto por N. M. R. P. Fray BARTHO-
LOME AULEO, Religiose Menor de N. S. P e San Francisco.
In the Imperial Library of Paris. MS. of 67 leaves in 4to. (A copy also
in possession of E. G. Squier, New York.)
The Imperial Library also possesses the following MS. : Marial sacro y
Santoral. Sermones en la Lengua A iche, escritos por varios autores, princi-
palmente por un Indio por lo qual hay mucho' que correjir, o emendar en
todos los Textos Latinos. Pertenece al uso del P e - P r - Fr. I e A. S., hijo de
la S ta - Prov a - del dulcisimo fibre de J.H.S. Guatem a - ano de 1796. Con-
tains 23 Sermons.
QUICHUA, KECHHUA.
The language of the Peruvians. It was spoken by all the tribes
subject to the Incas, from Pasto to the River Manle, in Chili,
and is still in use. Many of the Spanish inhabitants speak it
well and correctly. The Aymara bears a close affinity to the
Quichua.
Dialects of the Quichua : 1. Dialect of Cuzco, or the QuicJma
QUICHUA. 159
proper , the most cultivated dialect. 2. Lamano or Lamissa,
round Truxillo. 3. Chinchaisuyu, round Lima. 4. Kalchaqui,
in Tucaman, the best after the Cuzco dialect. 5. Dialect of
Quito ; the least cultivated corrupted by many foreign words.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Fr. DOMINGO DE S. THOMAS, de la orden de S. Domingo, Lexicon 6 Vocabu-
lario de la Lengua general del Peru llamada Quichua. Valladolid, impresso por
Francesco Fernandez de Cordova, 1560, 8vo, of 8 and 179 leaves.
(See Grammars, where also the edition of 1586 is noticed.)
P. DIEGO GONZALEZ HOLQUIN, Yocabulario de la Lengua general de todo el
Peru llamada Quichua, o del Inca. En la Ciudad de los Reyes, 1586, 8vo.
Reprinted : Corregido e renovado conforme a la propiedad cortesana del Cuzco.
En la Ciudad de los Reyes, impresso por Francisco del Canto, 1607, 1608, 2 vols.
4to j pp. 375, 332.
(Two parts Quichua-Spanish and Spanish- Quichua.)
DIEGO DE TOEEES RUBIO, E S. J., Grammatica y Vocabulario en la Lengua
general del Peru, llamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espanola. Sevilla, 1603, 8vo.
The Grammar on 40 leaves. The Vocabulary, Quichua-Spanish, on 11
sheets (A L), Spanish-Quichua on 12 sheets (A M).
Reprinted : Arte de la Lengua Quichua, compuesto por el Padre DIEGO DE
TOEEES RUBIO, de la Compania de Jesus. Lima, por Francisco Lasso, 1619, 8vo,
103 leaves (4 and 44 numbered, 55 not numbered).
Brunet, IV, p. 495, says that, independently of the Grammar, it contains
two small Vocabularies, Spanish-Quichua and Quichua-Spanish.
Reprinted : Tercera edicion, nuevamente corregida con auadidos los romances,
el catecismo corregido pequeno, el Vocabulario auadido y otro Vocabulario de la
Lengua Chinchaysuyu, por el M. R. JTJAN DE FIGTJEEEDO. En Lima, por Joseph
de Contreras, 1700, small 8vo, 12 and 115 leaves.
Reprinted : Anadio el P. JUAN DE FIGUEEEDO, de la misma compania, ahora
nuevamente corregida y aumentada en muchas Vocables .... por un religioso
de la misma compania. Lima, 1754, 8vo.
El P. Maestro Fray JUAN MAETINEZ, Vocabulario en la Lengua general del
Peru, llamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espanola. En los Reyes, 1604, small 8vo.
Arte y Vocabulario en la Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quichua. En los
Reyes (Lima}, Francisco del Canto, 1614, Svo.
(Bibliotheca Heberiana, VI, 35, No. 512, X, 18, No. 522.)
A short Vocabulary, pp. 477, 478 of: JOAN. DE LAET, Novus Orbis. Lugduni
Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 355 et seq.
HEEVAS, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 49, 79, 118, 135, 136, 139, 140,
177, 178, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI.
160 QUICHUA.
HFRVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq. (Kichua o Peruano-Kichua dell'
anno 1560, Kitena), p. 224 (Kichua e Kitena).
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 100, 101 (Kichua, Kitena, Lamano, Chinchaysuyu).
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 88, 89.
JOHN KEINHOLD FOESTER, Observations made during a Voyage round the
World, on Physical Geography, Natural History, and Ethic Philosophy. London,
Kobinson, 1778, 4to.
German translation Uebersetzt und mit Anmerkungen versehen yon G.
Forster. Berlin, Haude and Spener, 1783, 8vo, pp. 254.
SMITH BARTON, New Yiews, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 522, 537, 538, 547, 571 (from HERYAS, TORRES, and
HOLGTTIN).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 459 (dialect Quitana).
WILL. MARSDEN, Miscellaneous Works. London, Cox and Son, 1834, 4to,
p. 104.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I- of: A. D'ORBIGNY,
L'Homme Americain.
Four Quichua Words compared with Arrowack, Atoray, Maipure, and Moxos,
Appendix VI, p. 166 of: J. A. VAN HEUVEL'S El Dorado. New York, Winchester,
1844, 8vo.
A MS. Vocabulary of the Chichua Language is in the library of the Koyal
Geographical Society of London (Journal, etc., Vol. X. London, Murray, 1841,
8vo), p. xxiv.
J. J. VON TSCHUDI (see Grammars).
Vocabulary of Eighty-eight Words, Inca, Quichoa, and Italian, and numerals
1 to 20, 30, 40, etc., to 100, 200, etc., to 1000, pp. 4950 ; and : Alcuni Vocabuli
piu communi in Lingua Quichoa, pp. 289300 of: GAETANO OSCULATI, Ex-
ploracioni delle regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo ed il fiume delle Amazoni, etc.
Milano, Typographia Bernardoni, 1850, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Gramatiea 6 Arte de la Lengua general de los Indios de los Reynos del
Peru. Nuevamente compuesto por el Maestro Fray DOMINGO DE S. THOMAS, de
la Orden de S. Domingo, Morador en los dichos Keynos. Impresso en Val-
ladolid, por Francisco Fernandez de Cordova, 1560, small 8vo, of 8 and 96
leaves.
The Vocabulary by the same author (see Vocabularies) is generally found
annexed to this Grammar. Both are reprinted in : Arte y Vocabulario en la
Lengua general del Peru, llamada Quichua y en la Lengua Espanola. En
la Ciudad de los Reyes, por Ant. Eicardo, 1586, small 8vo.
The Vocabulary has a separate title, given by Brunet, IV, p. 676 : Voca-
QU1CHUA. 1(51
bulurio en la Lengua general del Peru llamada Quichua y en la Lengua
Espafiola. ~En los Reyes, por Ant. Eicardo, 1586, small 8vo.
The preface of this Vocabulary is signed "Eicardo." Eivero and
Tschudi name ANTONIO EICARDO as the author of the Vocabulary and
Grammar.
DIEGO DE TORRES EUBIO (see Vocabularies above).
P. DIEGO GONZALES HOLGTJIN, de la Compania de Je*sus, Natural de Caceres,
Gramatica y Arte nueva de la Lengua general de todo el Peru llamada Quichua,
6 Lengua del Inca, anadida y cumplida, en todo lo que le faltava de tiempos y
de la Gramatica, y recogida en forma de Arte lo mas necesario en los dos primeros
Libros. Con mas otros dos Libros postreros de Adiciones de Arte, para mas
perficionarla, el uno para alcanzar la Copia de Vocablos, y el otro para Elegancia
y Ornato. Impresso en la Ciudad de los Reyes del Peru, por Francisco del Canto,
1607, 4to, of 4 and 144 leaves.
Keprinted : Nueva Edicion, revista y corregida s. 1. Genova, Pagano, 1842,
8vo, pp. 320.
D. ALONSO DE HUERTA, Arte de la Lengua Quechua general de los Yndios de
este Reyno del Peru. Impresso por Francisco del Canto, En los Reyes, 1616, 4to,
of 8 and 40 leaves.
A MS. copy of this Grammar was in the library of M. Chautnette des
Fossees (see MSS., p. 162).
DIDAC. DE OLMOS, Gramatica de la Lengua Indica. Lima, 1633, 4to. (Tschudi
has "1634.")
D. JUAN Eoxo MEXIA T OCON, Natural de la Ciudad del Cuzco, Arte de la
Lengua general de los ludios de Peru. Impresso en Lima, por Jorge Lopez de
Herrera, 1648, small 8vo, of 18 and 88 pp.
El Bachiller Don ESTEBAN SANCHO DE MELGAR, Arte de la Lengua general
del Ynga llamada Qqechhua. Lima, Diego de Lyra, 1691, 8vo.
Langue du Perou, pp. 525533 of Vol. VIII of : COURT DE GEBELIN, Monde
Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to. Eeprinted, pp. 334336 of : J. B. Scherer, Eecher-
ches Historiques et Geographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet, 1777,
12mo.
GILII, Saggio, Vol. Ill, pp. 233243.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 526534.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, pp. 272274.
La Lengua Quichua, Cap. V, pp. 86115, of: MARIANO EDTJARDO DE EIVERA
y JUAN DIEGO DE TSCHUDI, Antiguedades Peruanas. I'ienna, imprenta imperial,
1851, 4to.
J. J. VON TSCHUDI, Die Kechua Sprache. Erste Abtheilung : Sprachlehre.
Zweite Abtheilung : Sprachproben. Dritte Abtheilung : Worterbuch. Wien,
K.K. Hof und Staatsdruckerci, 1853, 3 vols.Svo ; pp. iv, 268; vi, 110, 1 ; viii, 508, 2.
Y
162 QUICHUA.
On the Language and Literature of the Incas, pp. 161 201 of : Crzco, A
Journey to the Ancient Capital of Peru, with an Account of the History, Language,
Literature, and Antiquities of the Incas. And : Lima ; a Visit to the Capital and
Provinces of Modern Peru ; with a Sketch of the Viceregal Government, History
of the Eepublic, and a Keview of the Literature and Society of Peru. With
illustrations and a map. By CLEMENTS R. MAEKHAM, F.R.G.S. Crown 8vo,
pp. 420. London, 1856.
A Sketch of the Grammar, etc., of the Incas, with Vocabularies and Specimens
of Composition in Quichua ; Appendix A of the above work, pp. 389 408.
DIALECTS.
1. Quito. Breve instruction 6 Arte de la Lengua Commune de los Indies,
segun que se habla en la Provincia de Quito. Lima, en la imprenta de la Plazuela
de San Christoval, 1753, small 8vo.
2. Chinchaisuya. Vocabulario de la Lengua Chinchaisuyo, por JTJAN DE
FIGTJEEEDO (see Vocabularies above, sub voce: DE TOEEES EUBIO).
J. J. YON TSCHUDI, Peru. Reiseskizzen aus den Jahren 1838 1842. Sanct
Gallen, 1846, 2 vols. 8vo j Vol. II, p. 379 ; also in the first part of: Die Kechua-
sprache, pp. 257262.
3. Yunga (see under Yunga, regular Alphabet).
PEEUVIAN MS. VOCABULARIES AND GKAMMAES.
A MS. Grammar, late of the library of Wilhelm von Humboldt, is now in the
Royal Library at Berlin.
In the library of the late French Consul at Peru, M. Amede"e Chaumette des
Fossees (Catalogue, Paris, Labitte, 1842, 8vo), many linguistic MSS. concerning
Peru were contained, viz.
ALONZO DE HUEETA, Arte de la Lengua Quechua (Catal., p. 50, No. 574).
Arte de la Lengua general del Inca llamada Quichua. MS. on paper, 12mo
(Catal., p. 50, No. 575).
Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Campos en la Pampa del Sacramento nel Peru.
MS. on paper, 4to.
Copied from a MS. in possession of D. Manuel Arnes, Governor of Anda-
namarca (Catal., p. 51, No. 581).
Vocabulario de la Lengua Passa 6 Setaba. MS. on paper, 1795, 8vo, oblong
(Catal., p. 51, No. 582).
Arte de la Lengua Cholona, advertencias para el idioma Chiriguano. 2 vols.
12mo, MS. on paper (Catal,, p. 51, No. 583).
Vocabulario de la Lengua Caniba, por el P. BUENAYENTTJEA MAEQUES, predi-
cador en Ucayali (Escrito en favor del Colegio de Ocopa), MS. 4to (Catal., p. 51,
No. 584).
.Cuaderno que contienc el Voeabulario en Lengua del Inca segun se habla en el
RICCAREES RUMSEN. 163
Obispado de Maynas y Ucayali, eserito por el Herrnano Fray GERONIMO DE LOS
DOLOEES Y LECETA, Conversor de los Pueblos de Pisqui y Cuntamana de Manca,
Mayo 21, 1814. In the Missionary Convent of Santa Kosa de Ocopa, province of
Jauja. (See Tschudi's Vocabulary, preface, p. vii.)
RICCAUEES,
Ricaras, Aricaras ; also, Satrahe. Indians of the Pawnee
stock, on the right banks of the Missouri.
WORDS AND YOCABTJLAKIES.
Riccaree Vocabulary in : GEO. CATLIN, Letters and Notes on the Manners,
Customs, and Condition of the North American Indians. Fourth edition. London
and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1842, 2vols. 8vo; Vol. II, pp. 262-265.
Reise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Collenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, pp. 465474.
Fifteen Riccaree Words (from Prince MAXIMILIAN) compared with Pawnee,
Kichai, Witchita, and Nueco, pp. 68, 69 of : Report upon the Indian Tribes (added
to Lieutenant A. W. Whipple's Report in : Pacific Railroad Report, Vol. II.
Washington, 1856, 4to).
RUMSEN, PvUNSIENES,
Indians in the neighbourhood of Monterey, California. The
Achastliers speak a dialect of the same language.
WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. F. BotTRGOiNa, Relation d'uu Voyage recent des Espagiiols sur les C6tes Nord-
ouest de 1'Amerique septentrionale. Paris, 1789, 8vo, p. 78. Third edition.
Paris, 1803, 8vo.
German translation Jena, 1789, 8vo.
Relacion del Viage hecho por las Goletas Sutil y Mexicana en el anno de 1792,
para reconocer el estrecho de Fuca, etc. Madrid, en la imprenta real, 1802, 8vo j
pp. 172, 173.
P. 127 of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
DE LA PEROUSE, Voyage autour du Monde, etc. Paris, 1797, 4 vols. 4to j
Vol. I, Chap. 12.
Translation London, Robinson, 1799, 2 vols. 4to.
German translation, by J. R. Forster and Math. Chr. Sprengel. Berlin,
Voss, 1799, 1800, 2 vols. 8vo; Vol. I, p. 388. (From: Magazin der inerk-
wiirdigsten Reisebeschreibungen. Berlin, Voss, 17901810, XXXI, 8vo.)
104 SABUJA SACRAMENTO INDIANS.
Archives Litte"raires de 1'Europe, 1804. (Publies par une Societe de Gens de
Lettros, Messrs. Su AED, MORELLET, DEGERANDO, etc.) Paris and Tubingue, 1804
1808, XVII, 8vo ; No. IV, p. 87 (from BOUEGOING).
A. DE HUMBOLDT, Essai Politique sur le Eoyaume de la Nouvelle Espagne.
Paris, F. Schoell, 1811, 2 vols. 4to ; Vol. I, p. 321.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 205 (from BOUEGOING, and Achastliers from
DE LAM ANON) .
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 830.
SABUJA, KIRIBI.
Or Cariri. Two tribes of christianized Indians, in the Brazilian
province Bahia, near Cochoeira, now inhabiting the villages
Caranquejo and Villa da Pedra Branca. Their languages are
nearly the same.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 237 (numerals 1 10). Hervas
derives the Kiriri from the Charib).
HERYAS, Saggio, p. 108, and " Dialetto Kozzo," p. 109.
J. B. YON SPIX and F. PH. YON MAETIUS, Eeise in Brasilien. Miinchen, 1823
1831, 3 vols. 4to; Vol. II, p. 615 (Sabuja).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 466, 469.
KALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 509 (Kiriri, dialect Sabuja).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
P. Luis VINCENCIO MAMIANI, E S. J., Avte de Graramatica da Lingua Bra-
silica da Nacam Kiriri. Lisboa, Miguel les Condes, 1699, 18mo, pp. 124.
The same author has published : Catecismo da Doutrina Christiana, na
Lingua Brasil da Naa5 Kiriri. Lisboa, 1698, 8vo.
German translation Grammatik der Kiriri Sprache. Aus dem Portugies-
ischen des P. Mamiani, iibersetzt von H. C. von der Gabelentz (Beitrage zur
Sprachenkunde, 3 s Heft). Leipzig, Brockhaus, 1852, 8vo, pp. 62.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 468, 469.
SACRAMENTO INDIANS.
The Indians Hying on the Upper Sacramento River, in California,
were .visited by JAMES D. DANA, attached to the United States
Exploring Expedition ; DANA could not, however, learn the name
SAKI SAINT JOHN'S INDIANS. 165
of the tribe. The Pujuni, Sekumne, and Tsamak live on the
western banks. DANA has likewise collected vocabularies of
their languages.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HOK. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of United States Exploring Expedi-
tion. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio ; pp. 630, 631, 632, 633.
Reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. IT,
pp. 122. 124, 125.
Words of the Language of the Indians near to Mag Readings, on the upper
water of the Sacramento River, by ADAM JOHNSON, pp. 414, 415 of Vol. IV of :
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, United States.
SAKI, OTTOGAMI.
Also Sanltees, Sacs, Sakewi, Sawkis or Saques, and the latter
Onthagamies, Utagami, Foxes. Two Indian tribes, closely
related,, west of the Mississippi. The Kikkapoes speak the same
language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
WILLIAM II. KEA.TING, Vocabulary of the Sakewi or Sauk, in : Narrative of
an Expedition to the Sources of the St. Peter's River, performed in the year 1823,
under the command of Major Stephen H. Long. Philadelphia, Carey and Lea,
1824, 2 vols. 8vo ; Vol. I, Appendix IV, pp. 450459.
BALBI, Atlas Etlmographique, Tab. XLI, No. 806.
Reise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 18391811, 2 vols. 4to j
Vol. II, pp. 522 et seq., 633 et seq.
No. IV, 24, of Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367). to A. Gallatin's Sy-
nopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II), and (partly) under Q, IV, 4,
p. 113, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II (from KEATING).
.SAINT JOHN'S INDIANS, ETCHEMINS.
A tribe of the Etchemins } speaking the same language as the
Passamaquoddies. They belong to the Lenape stock.
\VORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JOAN. DE LAET, Novus Orbis, seu Descriptionis India) occidentalis, libri XVIII.
Lnyduni Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio, p. 51.
166 SALIVA SANKIKANI.
French translation Histoire du Nouveau Monde. Leyde, Elzevir, 1610,
folio.
Dutch translation Leyden, Elzevir, 1644, folio.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
KEV. ELLAS KELLOGG, Vocabulary of Words in the Language of the Quoddy
Indians (Passamaquoddi, i. e., Pollock-fish), located in Perry, Pleasant Point, State
of Maine, on the waters of the Schoodak, adjoining the British Provinces (Collec-
tion of the Historical Society of Massachusetts, Third Series, Vol. Ill, pp. 181, 182.
Cambridge, Metcalf and Co., 1833, 8vo).
No. IV, 13 (Etchemius Passamaquoddi), of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp.
305 367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archgeologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and
(partly) under O, IV, 4, p. 109, of Vocabularies, in : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions, Vol. II (from KELLOGG'S and TREAT'S MS. notices).
DAVID TENESLES, by Joseph Barratt, M.D., The Indian of New England (see
Mikmak).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
H. HALE, Remarks on the Language of the St. John's or Colastukweck Indians,
with a Penobscot Vocabulary. Boston, 1834, 8vo ; printed for the author.
SALIVA.
Indians on the left banks of the Orinoco, between the rivers
Guaviare and Meta, in the New Granadian province Boyaca.
Dialects of their language are spoken by the Atures, Quaquas
(whom the Tamanaques call " Mapoje"), and the Macos, or
Piaroas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
G-ILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, p. 212.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. Ill, 230, 231.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 628629 (from GILII and HERYAS).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 604.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 624627.
SANKIKANI.
Ojibway tribe, late of the eastern banks of the Hudson. A
kindred dialect of this language was spoken by some of the
Indians of New Sweden.
SANTA BARBARA. 167
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A short Vocabulary, pp. 75, 76 of: JOAN. DE LAET, Novus Orbis, seu Descrip-
tionis Indise occidentalis, libri XVIII. Lugduni Batavorum, Elzevir, 1633, folio.
French translation Ibid., 1640, folio.
Dutch translation Ibid., 1644, folio.
German translation in : (J. Jo. Schwabe) Allgemeine Historic der Eeisen
zu Wasser und Lande (Amsterdam, Arkstee, 1747 1774, 21 vols. 4to), Vol.
XVI, pp. 605 et seq.
SMITH BAKTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 374376 (from DE LAET).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 811.
No. IV, 19, B, p. 371, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(ArchaBologia Americana, Vol. II ; from DE LAET).
SANTA BARBARA.
Indians of California; Mission S. Barbara.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 201, 202, 205.
The words taken from : An Historical Journal of the Expeditions by Sea
and Land to the North of California, in 1768, 1769, and 1770, when Spanish
Establishments were first made at San Diego and Monterey. From a
Spanish MS., translated by "William Revely, Esq. Published by A. Dal-
rymple. London, Elmsley, 1790, 4to, pp. 76. This book is, without doubt,
a translation of: Diario Historico de los Viages de mar y tierra hechos al norte
de California, de orden del Virrey de Nueva Espanna Marques De Croix y por
direccion de D.Jose de Gfalvaz. Executados por la tropa destinada a dicho
objeto al mando de D. Graspar de Portola, y por los Paquebotes S. Carlos y
S. Antonio de orden del Exc. Sr. Virrey. En la imprenta del G-obierno.
Mexico, 1770, folio, pp. 56. Signed : D. Miguel Costanso. Printed merely
for private distribution.
Extracts translated in : P. F. Bruns and E. A. W. Zimmermann's Reposi-
torium fur die Neueste Gfeographie, etc. Tubingen, Cotta, 1792, 1793, 3 vols.
8vo ; Vol. I, p. 25.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 829.
Vocabulary, by DE. JOHN SCOULER, pp. 247, 249, 251 of : Journal of the
Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, Murray, 1841, 8vo.
Reprinted, W, 3, p. 129, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
168 SAPIBOKONI SAVANERIC.
SAPIBOKONI.
Indians of the province of Moxos. Their language is related
to the Quichua.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEBVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 102.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 571, 576 (from HEEVAS).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 467.
SABABECA.
Christianized Indians of the Mission of Santa Anna, in the pro-
vince of Chiquitos, now Bolivia. Their language is nearly lost,
like that of other Chiquito tribes.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words : D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I,
pp. 163, 164 ; Vol. II, 136, and pp. 172, 173, where a general view of the character
of the Sarabeca language is given.
SASTE, SHASTIES.
Indians of south-western Oregon, on the northern frontiers of
Upper California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. 10, V, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569629 of:
HOE. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expe-
dition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio ; and, F, XXX, pp. 98
100, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II.
SAYANERIC.
Indians of the New Granadian province Veraguas, near the
village Las Palm as.
SEMINOLES SENEKAS. 169
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BERTHOLD SEEMANN, The Aborigines of the Isthmus of Panama (Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. Ill, p. 1, pp. 179181).
SEMINOLES.
Or, Isty-semole (wild men). Tribe of the Creek Confederacy in
Florida. They are said to speak the Muskoghee.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Names of Seminole Chiefs, pp. 9, 10, 30 of : The War in Florida .... by a
late Staff Officer. Baltimore, Lewis and Coleman, 1836, 12mo.
A Vocabulary of the Seminole Language, pp. 97 105 of: Notice of East
Florida, with an Account of the Seminole Nation of Indians. By a recent Traveller
in the Province. Charleston, South Carolina, 1822, 8vo.
A Vocabulary of the Seminole Language, pp. 90 108 of : Sketch of the Semi-
nole War, and Sketches during a Campaign, by a Lieutenant of the Left Wing
.... Charleston, South Carolina, Dan. F. Dowling, 1836, 12mo.
SENEKAS.
Tribe of the Iroquois, near Buffalo and Niagara, in western
New York.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 239 (numerals).
SMITH BARTON, New Yiews, etc. Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix,
p. 20.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335 (from SMITH BARTON).
A short Vocabulary in the Language of the Seneca Nation, and in English.
Ung-eish-neut ten-au-geh noh-nuh, yoh-weh-neut-sah eng-lish. London, printed
by W. and S. Graves, 1818, 8vo, pp. 35.
Annual Report, Civilization of Indian Tribes. Newhaven, 1824, 8vo, pp.
6365.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 798 (Seneca or Macehachtini).
No. V, 29, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305 367) of A. GALLATIN'S
Synopsis, (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II). Eeprinted (partly) under E, V, 2,
p. 114, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological Society's Transactions,
Vol. II.
170 SEVERNOVSKIA SHAHAPTAN.
Seneca Vocabulary (of 452 Words and Phrases), from a MS. in the War Depart-
ment of the United States, pp. 381 597 of A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc., in :
Archseologia Americana, Vol. II.
Seneca Appellative Words, Note B, pp. 158 164, of : Eev. TIMOTHY ALDEN,
An Account of sundry Missions performed among the Senecas and Munsees.
New York, printed by J. Seymour, 1827, 18mo, pp. 180.
Vocabulary of Concrete Terms and Conversational Forms, 16 pp. at the end of :
Diahsawahgwah Gayadoshah. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42.
Seneca Vocabulary (from ELY S. PABKEE, SCHOOLCEAFT, etc.), in Comparative
Vocabulary of the Iroquois, pp. 393 400 of : H. E. Schoolcraft, Notes on the
Iroquois. Albany, Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Diahsawahgwah Gayadoshah. Eeading Lessons, by Eev. A. WEIGHT, Mis-
sionary. Boston, Crocker and Brewster, 1836, 8vo, pp. 42.
Eev. A. WEIGHT'S System of Writing the Seneca is given in the preface to :
Gaa-na-shoh-ne Deowaahsaonyohgwah Na wen ni yuh (Hymns) Dosyowa (Buffalo
Creek). Mission Press, 1843, 18mo, pp. 136.
Table, exhibiting in the Seneca Dialect the conjugation of the Verb " Ge-jase,"
" I shoot," Appendix II, pp. 475 477 of: LEWIS H. MOEGAN, League of the
Ho-de-no-sau-nee, or Iroquois. Rochester, Sage and Brother, 1851, 8vo.
G6-wana Gwo-ih sat' hah you de yas dah' gwah a Spelling-book in the Seneca
Language, with English definitions. Buffalo Creek Reservation, Mission Press,
1842, 12mo, pp. 112.
SEVERNOVSKIA, SEVERNOVZER.
Or, fc Northerners." Indians. north of Bodega Bay. They call
themselves Chwachamaja.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Woerter aus zwei Sprachen Neu Kaliforniens von KOSTEOMITOV. Severnovzi
(Chvachamaja), pp. 234 254 of: X. E. VON BAEE und GE. VON HELMEESEN,
Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Eussischen Reichs, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839,
8vo. (Russian, German, and Severnovze, printed in Eussian type.)
SHAHAPTAN, CHOPUNISH, SAHAPTIN.
The Nez-perces of the Canadians. The Kliketat, near Mount
Rainier, the Walla- Wallas, and the OJcanagan, on the upper
part of Frazer's River, speak kindred dialects.
SHAHAPTAN. 171
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Kliketat, Shahaptan, and Okanagan Yocabularies, by Dr. JOHN SCOTTLER, in :
Journal of the Eoyal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI (London, 1841,
8vo), pp. 236, 238, 240 ; and
Shahaptan, Wallawalla, and Kliketat Words, by same, pp. 250252 of: Journal
of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
Words used in the Nez-perce Language, pp. 152 157 of: JOEL PALMER,
Journal of Travel over the Eocky Mountains to the Mouth of the Columbia
Elver. Cincinnati, J. A. and U. P. James, 1847, 12mo.
Salish and Okanagan Words, p. 158 of: E. G. LATHAM, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory, pp. 154166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of
London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo.
Sahaptin Vocabulary, divided into 1, M. Sahaptin (Nez-perces). 2, N. Wal-
lawalla, which is again divided into a. i. Pelus (Peloses) ; b. j. Joakema
(Yakemas) ; c. Jc. Tlakatat (Klikatats) ; pp. 569629 of : HOKATIO HALE,
Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-
delphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.
The Vocabulary M reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, pp, 88, 90, 92, 94.
Vocabulary of the Nez-perce Language, pp. 327 330, and Vocabulary of the
Clicatat Nation who inhabit the country north of the Cascades, pp. 330 333 of:
Ecv . SAMUEL PARKER, Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Eocky Moun-
tains, under the direction of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign
Missions, performed in the years 1835, 1836, and 1837. Ithalca, New York,
printed by Mark Andrus and Woodruff, 1838, 12mo.
Vocabulary of the Languages spoken by the Nez-perces and other tribes
inhabiting the country about the Great Forks of Columbia Eiver, pp. 313 322
of Vol. I of : The Fur Hunters of the Far West, by ALEXANDER Eoss, 2 vols.
8vo. London, 1855.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Nez-perceV First Book. Designed for Children and New Beginners. Clear
Water Mission Press, 1839, 18mo, pp. 20.
Sahaptin Family (Grammatical Notes), pp. 542561 of: KOKATIO HALE,
Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia,
Lea and Blauchard, 1846, folio ; and : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Vol. II, pp. 3455.
172 SUAWANOE.
SHAWANOE, SHAWANEES.
Formerly of Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Kentucky ; afterwards in
Indiana and Illinois, now west of Missouri. They were divided
into the tribes Piqua, Mequachake, Kiskapocoke, and Chili-
cothe.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Shawanee Vocabulary, p. 209 of : J. LONG, Voyages and Travels of an Indian
Interpreter and Trader, etc. ; to which is added a List of Words in the Shawanee
Tongues. London, Robson, et al., 1791, 8vo.
German translations Hamburgh, 1791, 8vo, by G-. Forster. Berlin,
Yoss, 1792, 8vo (part of : Geschichte der Reisen die seit Cook an die Nord-
westkiiste von America unternommen worden sind. Aus dem Englischen
von G. Forster. Berlin, Voss, 1791, 1792, 3 vols. 4to, and 3 vols. 8vo), and
together with Forster' s translation of Portlock's and Mortimer's Voyages.
Berlin, Voss, 1796, 4to.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 126.
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 343346, 360362 (from Generals BTJTLAB
and GIBSON).
Vocabulary of the Language of the Shawanoese, pp. 287 292, and : Names of
Rivers, by the Shawanoese, pp. 297, 298 of: JOHN JOHNSTON, United States
Indian Agent at Piqua, Account of the Present State of the Indian Tribes
inhabiting Ohio (Archseologia Americana, Vol. I, pp. 269 299).
Forty-five Words in Shawanese are given in the : Comparative Vocabulary of
Professor T. SAY, in Note 15, pp. 135 145, to John Pickering's edition of
Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collections of the Massa-
chusetts Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston, printed by
Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo. Reprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo ;
pp. 81160.)
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 805.
Shawnee Vocabulary, by ME. CUMMINGS, Indian Agent, pp. 470 481 of Vol.
II of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
IV, 23, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367) to A. GALLATIN'S
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and (partly) under Q, IV, 3,
p. 113, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society.
(From MS. Notices of JEFFEESON, in the War Department, and from
BAETON, GIBSON, BUTLAE, and PAESONS.)
SHEBAYI SHINICOOKS. 173
Shawnee Vocabulary, taken by Lieutenant A. W. WHIFFLE, pp. 56 60 of:
Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W. Turner's Eeport upon the
Indian Tribes ; added to his Report on the Eoute near the 35th Parallel in : Pacific
Kailroad Eeports. Washington, 1856, 4to.
Rev. M. HECKEWELDER, A Vocabulary of the Shawano, taken from the mouth
of a white woman who had been twenty years a prisoner with that nation. (MS.
in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia).
A Comparative Vocabulary of the Lenni Lenape Proper, the Minsi dialect,
the Mohicanni, Natik or Nadik, Chippeway, Shawano, and Nanticoke. (MS. in the
same library.)
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, Shawnee
(Miami River), Nipissing, Brunswick, Duplicate Blackfoot, pp. 102113 : Pro-
ceedings of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 354356 (from General BTTTLAR'S MS.)
Siwinowe Eawekitake. Shawnee Speller and Reader, by JOHNSTON LTKINS.
Shawanoe Mission. J. Meeker, printer, 1834, 18mo, pp. 54.
Summary of the same (by Pratt). Ibid., 1838, ISmo, pp. 24.
SHEBAYI.
Indians of French Guyana,, near Cayenne.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A short Vocabulary (compared with Arrowac and Yaoi), pp. 642643 of: JOAN.
DE LAET, Novus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Batavorum, 1633, folio.
SHINICOOKS, MONTAUK.
Indians of Long Island, neighbours of the Unschagogs and
Montauks, who spoke kindred dialects.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SILAS WOOD, Sketch of the First Settlement of the several Towns on Long
Island. Brooklyn, 1824, 8vo. Reprinted, ibid., Spooner, 1828, 8vo, pp. 182.
Gives a MontauJc Vocabulary (from a MS. of JOHN GARDINEK), which is
Reprinted in : James Macauley, The Natural, Statistical, and Civil History of
the State of New York. New York, Gould and Banks, and Albany, Will. Gould
and Co., 1839, 3 vols. 8vo ; in Vol. II, pp. 263, 264, 265 ; and (from WOOD) the
Montauk Words are given in :
No. IV, 18 (Montaucs, Long Island), of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305
174 SHOSHONEES.
367) to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and
(partly) P, IY, 4 (Long Island), p. Ill, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
The MS. of THOMAS JEFFERSON'S Vocabulary of the Language of the TJnquachog
Indians is in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia.
SHOSHONEES.
Also Snake Indians, Serpens. Indians of the Rocky Mountains,
on the sources of the Missouri and Columbia rivers. They are
divided into the Shoshones Proper and the Gens de Pitie, or
Radigeurs (Root- diggers, by the Spaniards called Maradigos}.
WOBDS AND YOCABT7LAHIES.
P.lxxix of: T. SAY'S Vocabularies in : Astronomical and Meteorological Eecords
and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the Expedition for Exploring the
Mississippi and its Western Waters, under the command of Major J. H. Long.
Philadelphia, 1822, 4to.
C. S. EAFINESQUE, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 12mo, p. 133.
No. xxii, 57, p. 378, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II ; from SAT).
Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, etc. Collenz, 18391841, 2 vols.
4to ; Vol. II, p. 635.
Vocabularies of Languages of North-western America. N. 12, Shoshoni; x,
Shoshonees, Snakes ; y, Wihinasht (Western Shoshonees). Pp. 569629 of: HOE.
HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-
delphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio. And in the Vocabularies in : Transactions
of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II, C, No. xxxii (East Shohonees),
pp. 88, 90, 92, 94 ; U, No. xxxii (Wihinasht), p. 121.
Shoshone Words, p. 159, and Shoshone and Sussee Words compared, p. 161 of:
B. G-. LATHAM, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnolo-
gical Society of London, Vol. I, pp. 154166. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).
Vergleichendes Worter Verzeichniss der Schoshonen und der Komantschen
Sprache (Willinascht), p. 54 of: Dr. BEEGHATJS' Geographisches Jahrbuch,
No. III. Gotha, Perthes, 1851, 4to.
Snake Language. Vocabulary of Forty-nine Words, on pp. 153 154, Vol. I, of :
ALEXANDEB, Eoss, Fur Hunters of the Far West ; a Narrative of Adventures in
the Oregon and Eocky Mountains, 2 vols., crown 8vo. London, 1855.
Seventeen Words of Shoshonee Dialects compared with Kioway, by Professor
SHYENNES SITKA. 175
W. W. TURNER, p. 80 of the : Eeport upon the Indian Tribes (added to Lieute-
nant A. W. Whipple's Keport, Pacific Eailroad Eeports, Yol. II. Washington,
1856, 4to).
SHYENNES, CHEYENNES.
Also, Shara, Shaivhays, on the River Cheyenne, one of the
tributaries of the Missouri.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Names of Shyenne Chiefs who signed the treaty of July, 1825 (with 'correspond-
ing Sioux words), No. YI, 9, p. 379, of the Yocabularies to A. G-ALLATIN'S Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Yol. II).
Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN ztr WIED. Coblenz, 1839 1841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Yol. II, pp. 487489.
Affinities of the Shyenne with Languages of the Algonkin Family, pp. cxiv,
cxv; and
Yocabulary of the Shyenne Language, with some Notes by Lieutenant J". W.
ABERT, Top. Eng., pp. cxvi cxviiiof . Transactions of the American Ethnological
Society, Yol. II ; originally in Abert's Eeport of his Examination of New Mexico,
in the years 1846, 1847, pp. 417 548 of : Notes of a Military Eeconnaissance, etc.,
by Lieutenant-Colonel W. H. Emory. Washington, 1848, 8vo.
Langue deslndiens Cheyennes (numerals), Bulletin de la Societe de Geographie
(Paris, 1846, 8vo, Third Series), Tome VI, pp. 384386.
JOHN S. SMITH, Cheyennes Yocabulary, pp. 346 459 of Yol. Ill of: School-
craft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Lieutenant J. W. ABEET (see Yocabularies).
SICANNIS, SIKANNI.
Dialect of New Caledonia, related to the Tacullies.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabulary of the Sikanni Dialect of New Caledonia, J. HOWSE'S Yocabularies
of certain North American Indian Languages Sikanni, Chepewyan. I and II,
Beaver, I and II, Dialect of New Caledonia. Pp. 192 198 of : Proceedings of
the Philological Society, Yol. 1Y. London, 1850.
SITKA.
Sitka proper is but a name for King George IIFs Archipel,
inhabited by Kolusches. In general, the name Sitka is applied to
176 SKETAPUSHOISH.
the languages of some ten tribes, who live between the 50th and
55th degrees of northern latitude. The tribes who speak this lan-
guage, and who may number some 6500 souls, are the Chilcart,
the most numerous and influential tribe ; Sitka, on King George
IIPs Island ; Hoodsunhoo, at Hood's Bay ; Ark, and the Kake,
on Prince Frederick's Sound; Eclikino, in Chatham's Strait;
Kooyen, near Cape Decision ; Hennega, on the Island of the
Prince of Wales; Stickeen, and the Tumgarsee. (See Note to
A. GALLATIN'S Synopsis, etc., p. 302 of: Archaeologia Americana,
Vol. II.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of the Languages of the Islands of Cadiack and Oonalaschka, the
Bay of Kenay and Sitka Sound, Appendix, No. Ill (pp. 329337), to : UEET
LISIANSKY, A Voyage round the World, in the years 18031806. London,
John Booth, Longman, Hurst, Kees, Orme, and Brown, 1814, 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 851 (Kolouches de Sitka Sound).
Sitca (Koulishen) Vocabulary, under a, XVIII, 2, p. 102, of the Vocabularies
in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
' Sitca, Cadiack, and Tunghaase Words, p. 163 of K. G-. LATHAM, The Languages
of the Oregon Territory (Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Vol. I.
Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo, pp. 154166.)
SKETAPUSHOISH, SHESHATAPOOSH.
Also Mountaineers (Montagnards) , or Skoffies (Escopies).
Indian tribes west of Labrador, speaking a language closely
related to the Knistenaux. (See Massachusetts Indians.}
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Specimen of the Mountaineer, or Sheshatapooshshoish, Skoffie, and Micmac
Languages (from an Indian boy, Gabriel), pp. 1633 of: Collections of the
Massachusetts Historical Society for the year 1799, Series I, Vol. VI. Boston,
printed by Samuel Hall, 1800, 8vo ; and (from this Vocabulary)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 344, 418, 419.
No. IV, 11, of the Comparative Vocabularies (pp. 305307), to A. GALLATIN'S
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
And No. O, IV, 1, p. 108, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions, Vol. II.
Scoffie Vocabulary IV, g, p. 369, of the Vocabularies to A. G-ALLATIN'S Synopsis,
SOURIQUOIS STONE INDIANS. 177
etc., and O, IV, 2, p. 108 of the Vocabularies in: American Ethnological Society's
Transactions, Vol. II. ^
SOU1UQUOIS, ACADIANS.
.
Indians of the Algonquin stock at the Bay of Funcly, Nova
Scotia. They are sometimes also called Micmacs.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES
MAEC L'ESCAEBOT, Histoire de la Nouvelle France. Paris, Jean Milot, 1609,
small 8vo, pp. 888 ; p. 688. Keprinted, Paris, Milot, 1612, small 8vo ; Paris,
Adv. Perier, 1618, small 8vo.
A short Vocabulary, p. 53 of: J. DE LAET, Novus Orbis, etc. Lugduni Bata-
vorum, 1633, folio.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, p. 240 (numerals).
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies (from DE LAET).
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 402404 (from L'ESCAEBOT).
No. IV, 12, B, p. 369, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
SQUALLYAMISH.
Indians at Puget's Sound, related to the Haeeltzuk and the
Indians of Nootka Sound.
Wt)RDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Squallyamish Vocabulary, by DE. JOHN SCOULEE, in: Journal of the Eoyal
Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 242, 244 247.
STONE INDIANS, ASSINEBOINS, ASSINI-
POILS, ASSINIBL1LES.
The Stone Indians are the most numerous of any of the tribes
inhabiting North-western America. They are about 1,200 to
1,400 tents. They inhabit the mid- country from between the
Missouri and Assineboin rivers from within fifty miles of Red
River, westward, to the sources of Qu'Appelle River, about the
source of the Elbono, or north branch of the Assineboin River,
and from thence to the Red Deer's River, Saskatchewan. The
Swampy Ground Stone Indians are now living close to the
Rocky Mountains, near the source of the Red Deer's River,
A A
178 SUSSEE TACULLIES.
Saskatchewan. The Iroquois, Mohawk, and Huron are mem-
bers of the same class of languages. The place of the Stone
Indian is more equivocal ; although generally separated by most
authors from the Mohawk (or Iroquois) tongues, it has, by some,
been connected with that group. (See also under Dahkotah.)
WORDS AND VOCABULAEIES.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain American Indian Languages Stone Indian,
Iroquois, Mohawk, Huron, pp. 113121 of: Proceedings of the Philological
Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850.
SUSSEE, SURSEE.
On the sources of the Saskatchewaine, a tribe of the Cheppe-
wyans.
WORDS A> T D VOCABULARIES.
EDWAED UMFEEVILLE, The Present State of Hudson's Bay ; containing a
Specimen of Five Indian Languages. London, Walker, 1790, 8vo, p. 202.
German translation, by E. A. W. Zimmermann. Helmstedt, Fleckeisen,
1791, 8vo, p. 148. Keprinted in :
No. Ill, c, p. 374, of the Vocabularies to A. Gallatin's Synopsis, etc.
(Archseologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and a few words in :
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 254.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 769.
Sussee Words and Sussee compared with Shoshone, pp. 160, 161 of: E.. G.
LATHAM, The Languages of the Oregon Territory (pp. 154166 of Vol. I of :
Journal of the Ethnological Society of London. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo) .
Sussee Vocabulary (from UMFEEVILLE) compared with the other Languages of
the Athapascan Stock, pp. 177 222 ; and, with the same, the Kinai and Koleschian
Languages, pp. 269 318 of : Buschmann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin,
1856, 4to.
TACULLTES, CARRIERS, NAGAILER.
Indians of North-western America, on the sources of Eraser's
Kiver. The Sicaunies are related to them. MACKENZIE calls
them Nagailer and Carrier Indians.
WORDS AND YOCABTJLAJRIES.
Nagailer or Chin Indian Words, pp. 257, 258 of : ALEXANDEE MACKENZIE'S
Voyages. London, 1801, 4to.
TAH-LE-WAH. 179
And (from him) Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 424.
A Specimen of the Takully or Carrier Tongue, pp. 403 413 (p. 413, numerical
terms) of : DANIEL WILLIAMS HARMON, A Journal of Voyages and Travels in the
Interior of North America ; to which are added a Description of the Inhabitants
and considerable Specimens of the Languages most extensively spoken. Andover,
EJagg and Gould, 1820, 8vo.
Professor W. W. Turner (from HARMON) Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-
five Words of Tacully, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Umkwa, Hoopah, Navajo, and
Apache, pp. 84, 85 of the : Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant
A.W. Whipple's Keport, in Yol. II of the : Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington,
1855, 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 822.
No. Ill, 5, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Yol. II, from HARMON).
Tahkali (Carriers) Vocabulary, No. 1, A, of the Vocabularies of Languages of
North-western America, pp. 569 629 of : HOR. HALE, Ethnography and Philo-
logy, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard,
1846, folio.
Hale divides the (1) Tahkali Umpqua language into
A. Tahkali (Carriers).
B. Tlatskanai, with the dialects
a. TlatsJcanai.
b. Rwalhioqua.
C. Umkiva (Umpqua).
The Tahkali Vocabulary was furnished to Hale by Mr. Anderson of the
Hudson's Bay Company. It is reprinted, pp. 78, 80, 82, under A, III, in
Vol. II of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
Tacullies Vocabulary (from MACKENZIE, HARMON, and HALE) compared with
the other Languages of the Athapaskan Stock, pp. 177222, 269318 of: Busch-
mann, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A short notice of the Character of the Language is given, pp. 534, 535 of: HOR.
HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-
delphia, 1846, folio.
TAH-LE-WAH.
California:! tribe, on the Klamath River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary in : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp-
440-445.
] 80 TALATU I TAMANAQU E .
TALATUI.
Indian tribe on the Kassiraa River, a tributary of the Sacra-
mento, in California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HOR. HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expedition.
Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio, p. 631. (From JAMES D. DANA.)
Reprinted in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II,
p. 123.
TAMANAQUE.
Indians of South America, on the banks of the Orinoco, near
the Mission Encaramada. Their language, related to those of
the Charibs and Chaymas, is spoken by the Parechi, Uara-
Mukuru, Uaraca-Paccili, Paiure, Acherekotti, and Oje; kindred
languages are those of the Palencas, Pariagotos, or Parias,
and still more so the Cumanagota. (See also under Cumana.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
G-ITJI, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 375382 386389.
HEEVAS, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 49, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 112, 113.
HEEVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 104, 105.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 618, 696, 697 ; p. 655 (with some Pajure and
Avarigote Words, from GILII).
A. DE HTTMBOLDT and A. BONPLAND, Voyage aux Regions Equinoxiales du
Nouveau Continent (Paris, Schoell, Dufour, Gide, and Maze, 18161831, 13
vols 8vo), Yol. I, pp. 482 et seq.
German translation Stuttgart and Tubingen, 1818, Yol. I, pp. 217 et seq.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Yol. I, p. 162.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 581, 582 (Cumanagita), p. 274
(Tamanaque, Pariagotos de la Riviere Omabiche et du Golfe de Paria-Tamaiiaque).
SIR ROBERT II. SCHOMBTJRGK, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Words of
Twelve Dialects of the Caribi-Tamanatan Stock, pp. 97, 98 of his Vocabularies of
Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian Tribes inhabiting Guyana (British
Association Report, Swansea Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8vo).
TAK AHUM AHA. 181
GEAMMABS AND GEAMMATICAL NOTICES.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Tomo III, pp. 176 185.
G-ilii wrote a Grammar of the Tarnanaka, which, however, was never
published.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 656, 662, 666 (from GILII).
DIALECTS.
P. Fr. FEANCISCO DE TAUSTE, Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua de los Indies
Chaymas, Cumanagotos, Cores, Farias, y otros Diversos de la Frovincia de Cu-
mana 6 Nueva Andalusia ; con un Tratado a lo ultimo de la Doctrina Christiana
y Catecismo de los Misterios de Nuestra Santa Fe". Traducido de Castellano en la
dicha Lengua Indiana. Madrid, Bernardo de YiUadiego, 1680, 4to ; pp. 16, 187
(without the Doctrina, etc.)
In : Bibliotheca Scriptorum Capuccinorurn a P. DIONYSIO GENUENSI ; con-
testa, retesta et extensa a F.Bernardo a Bononia (Venetiis, Sebast. Coleti,
1747, folio), p. 94, it is stated that this author's name was FBANCISCUS DE
HAUSTE, and that, in 1684, he was poisoned by the savages. It is further
stated that he published : Dictionarium Indicum, adjuncto Catechismo in
Lingua Indica. Matriti, 1680, 4to.
Brunei, however (IV, 404), calls him De Tauste, and he appears under
the same name in: Bibliotheca Heberiana, YI, p. 255, No. 3482.
A MS. copy of the book is in the Royal Library at Berlin ; the author is
named " De Tauste."
MANUEL DE YANGUES, Principles y Reglas de la Lengua Cummanagota general
en varias Naciones que habitan en la Provincia de Cumana en los Yndios Occi-
dentales, con un Diccionario. Burgos, 1683, 4to. The Dictionary bears the
following title : M. Ruiz BLANCO, Diccionario de la Lengua de los Indies Cu-
managotas y Palenques.
According to Gilii, 1. 1., Yol. Ill, p. 410, P. Ruiz has printed a Grammar of the
Cumanaootti language.
TAIIAHUMAEA.
Language of Nueva Biscaya, or Northern Mexico; related to
the Mexican.
WOEDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, p. 238 (numerals).
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 122, 123.
HEEVAS, Origiue, Tabb. L et seq.
P. MATH. STEFFEL, Tarahumarisches Worterbuch, nebst einigen Nachrichten
von den Sittcn und Gebriiucheu der Taralnunaren iuNeu-Biscayain der Audiencia
182 TARASCA.
Guadalaxara im Vicekonigreiche Alt-Mexico oder Neu Spanien. Briinn, 1791,
8vo. Reprinted in : Christoph Gottlieb von Murr, Nachrichten von verschie-
denen Landern des Spanischen Amerika, aus eigenhandigen Aufsatzen einiger
Missionare der Gesellschaft Jesu herausgegeben. Halle, Heudel, Band I, No. 1
and 2, 1809, 8vo.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 87, 88, 146, 153, 154.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 719.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV (Paris, 1841, 8vo), pp. 261287.
A Vocabulary has been taken by JOHN R. BARTLETT, the United States
Boundary Commissioner.
Arte y Vocabulario complete de la Lengiia Tarahumara general en toda la
Custodia del Parral, por Fr. JOSE VICTOEINO, Lector de Teologia en el Convento
de Zacatecas. MS. (De Souza).
Arte y copioso Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Catecismo,
y Confessionario en dicha Lengua, por Fr. GEEONIMO FIGUEEOA.
Figueroa was born in Mexico, 1640 ; went as Jesuit Missionary to Pacaca,
among the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, in 1683. He left
four copies of the above "Arte " in his own handwriting.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 146153 (from P. STEPFEL).
P. Fr. MIGUEL TELLECHEA, Compendio Grammatical para la Inteligencia del
Idioma Tarahumar. Mexico, imprenta de la Federacion, 1826, small 4to, pp. 16,
162, 10.
Clavigero mentions MS. Grammars of: AGOSTINO DE KOA and GIEOLAMO
FIGUEEAS (with Dictionary). P. Steffel mentions a Grammar begun by P.
THOMAS GUADALAXABA. De Souza mentions likewise : Arte para aprender el
Idioma de los Tarahumares, por P. AUGUSTIN ROA, Misionero. MS. Roa
died in 1723.
TABASCA.
Language spoken in Michoacan. (See also under Pirinda.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulario de la Lengua Tarasca de Michoacan, dirigido al Illmo. D. Vasco
de Quirogo, primero Obispo de aquella Provincia, por Fr. MATURING GILBEETI.
Mexico, 1559, 4to.
Also, by the same author : Dialogo de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua
Tarasca ; Dedicada al Virey D. Luis de Velasco. Mexico, 1555.
Vocabulario y Sermones en Lengua Tarasca, por Fr. JUAN RAMIREZ, Maestro
en Teologia de la Provincia de S. Nicolas Tolentino de Michoacan. (MS., accord-
ing to De Souza.)
TARIANA. 183
C. S. KAFINESQTJE, Atlantic Journal, pp. 9 et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 129.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 120.
HEBYAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX, L et seq.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 107.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua de Michoacan (Tarasca), por Fr. JUAN BEAVO. Mexico, 1574.
This Grammar formed part of three volumes in 8vo, printed by Pedro
Balli, in the same year. It was accompanied by a Confessionario, etc., in
the same language. Souza says of the Fr. Bravo, " fue maestro peritisimo
de la lengua Pirinda, llamada Tarasca."
Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, y Serinones en la Misma, por P. TOM AS CHACON,
1630.
MS. in the library of the College of San Gregorio, in Mexico. (Souza.)
Manuel trilinque, Latino, Castellan o, y Tarasco, para administrar los Sacra-
mentos a los Espanoles y a los Indies, por Fr. ANGEL SEEEA. Mexico, 1697, 4to.
SEEBA also wrote : Arte, Diccionario, y Confesonario de la Lengua Tarasco,
which was prepared for the press, but never published ; probaby in the city of
Queretaro.
Arte y Diccionario de la Lengua Tarasca, por Illmo. D. Fr. JTJAN ALGOEA.
Mentioned by Nicholas Antonio, and quoted by De Souza.
P. NICOLAS DE QUIXAS, Arte de la Lengua Tarasca, del P. DIEGO BASALENQUE.
Mexico, 1714, 8vo.
An extract of this Grammar is given by A. Gallatin, Appendix I, No. 2,
pp. 245 252, to : Notes on the Semi-civilized Nations of Mexico, etc.
(Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I. New York,
1845, 8vo). See also pp. 34, 4548, ibid.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 126128.
Clavigero mentions Grammars and Dictionaries by MATUEIN GILBEET and
ANGELO SIEEEA (see titles above, from De Souza), and a Grammar of JTJAN
BATTISTA DE LAGUNAS.
TARIANA.
Brazilian Indians of the province Rio Negro. (MARTIUS, VII,
p. 208.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521541 of: ALFBED E. WALLACE,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Kio Negro. London^ Eeeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.
184 TCHO-KO-YEM TEHUKLHET.
TCHO-KO-YEM.
Indian band of Sonoma Valley, in north-western California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEOEGE GIBBS, Vocabulary (Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 428
434).
TEHUELHET, PATAGONIANS.
Is the general name of the Indians inhabiting Eastern Pata-
gonia. They are divided into Tehuel Cunny, to whom belong
the Yacana Cunny, Sehuak Cunny, and Culilan Gunny, and
Tehuelhet proper, or Callilehet (mountain people), by the
Spaniards called Serranos. Their language is said to be related
to the Araucanian.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
THOMAS FALKNEE, Description of Patagonia (see Araucan). Hereford, 1774,
4to, p. 132.
German translation, by Scliack H. Ewald. GotJia, Ettinger, 1775, 8vo.
Primo viaggio intorno al globo terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della navigazione
alle Indie Orieutali per la via d'occidente, fatta sulla squadra del Capitano Mag-
galianes negli anni 1519 1522, dell CAV ANTONIO PIGAFETTA. Milano, 1800,
4to, pp. 191 et seq.
Edited by Dr. Charles Amoretti, from a MS. in the Ambrosian Library of
Milan.
French translation, by the author himself .... suivi de 1'extrait du traite
de navigation du meme auteur ; et d'une notice sur le Chevalier Martin
Behaim, avec la description de son globe terrestre (par H. J. Jansen). Paris,
Jansen, 1801, 8vo ; pp. 241 et seq.
Captain JAMES BFKNEY, A Chronological History of the Discoveries in the
South Sea or Pacific Ocean ; Part I commencing with an account of the earliest
discoveries of that sea by Europeans, and terminating with the voyage of Sir
Francis Drake, in 1579. London, Hansard, 1803 1817, 5 vols. 4to; Vol. I,
pp. 37 et seq.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 423 (from EALKNEE).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 443 (Patagonien du Port St.
Julien).
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Words, pp. 162, 164 of Vol. I of : A. D'OEBIGNY,
L'Homme Americain ; and Eight Words from PIGAFETTA, 1520, and D'OKBIGNY,
1829, compared, p. 59, Vol. II, ibid.
TEPEGUANA TEQUIMA. 185
TEPEGUANA, TEPEHUANA.
Indians of north-western Mexico, in the province of Sinaloa.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
FONTE.
FlGUEROA. I
FERNANDEZ. SeeGrammars '
RlNALDINI. -
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, by the Padre JUAN FONTE, a
Jesuit, and missionary amongst the Tepehuanas, by whom he was killed in 1616.
Arte y Copioso Vocabulario de las Lenguas Tepehuana y Tarahumara, y Gate-
cismo y confesonario en dichas Lenguas, por el Fr. JEEONIMO FIQUEROA.
Figueroa, born in Mexico, 1604, Jesuit, went to Oaxaca, as missionary
amongst the Tepehuanas, and died in the city of Mexico, 1683. He left four
copies of the above " Arte " in his own handwriting.
Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Tepehuana, generica en la Sierra Madre, por
Fr. JOSE FERNANDEZ, Franciscano.
Fernandez went to Zacatecas in 1717, where he was Provincial (Arlegui's
authority).
P. BENITO RINALDINI, Arte de la Lengua Tepeguana, con Yocabulario, confes-
sionario y Catechismo. Mexico, vidua de Tgnazio Bernardo de Hogal, 1743, 4to ;
pp. 72, 43, and 148.
N.B. Clavigero mentions MS. G-rammars and Yocabularies of TOMMASO
DE GrUADALAJARA and of GlROLAMO FlGUEROA.
TEQUIMA, OR OPATA.
One of the languages spoken in the seventeen Jesuit Missions of
Sonora.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabulario de la Lengua Tequima y Platicas doctrinales en ella, por NATAL
LOMBARDO. Mexico, 1702.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 47.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua Tequima, vulgarinente llamada Opata, por NATAL LOMBARDO.
Mexico, 1702, 4to.
B B
186 TETONS TICORILLAS.
TETONS.
Sioux tribe between the Mississippi and Missouri.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Eeise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Collenz, 18391841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Yol. II, p. 498.
TEXAS INDIANS.
In : Museo Mexicano, Tomo III, p. 537, mention is made of
" Manuel para administrar los SS. Sacramentos a los Indios de las
Naciones Pajalates, Orejones, Pacaos, Pacoas, Filijayas, Ala-
sapas, Pamanes y otras muchas, come son : los Pacalmches,
Mescalos, Pampopas, Tacames, Chapopines, Venados, Pamaques
j toda la juventud de Pihniques, Borrados, Samipaos y Manos
de Perro. Compuesto por el P. Fray BARTOLOMEO GARCIA,
Predicador Apostolico .... Franciscano de la Mission de San
Antonio de Texas, 1769, 4to."
TICORILLAS.
Apache Indians of western New Mexico. Their language shows
affinity with the great Athapaskan stock of languages.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
JAMES H. SIMPSON, Comparative Vocabulary of Words in the Language of
the Pueblo, or Civilized Indians of New Mexico, and of the Wild Tribes inhabit-
ing its borders, Appendix B, pp. 140 143, to: Journal of a Military Recon-
naissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to the Navajo Country, etc. (Eeports of
the Secretary of War, with Reconnaissances of Routes from San Antonio to El
Paso .... also .... the Report of Lieutenant J. H. Simpson, of an Expedi-
tion into the Navajo Country. Exec. Docum. Senate, No. 64, Congress 31,
Sess. 1. Washington^ Union Office, 1850, 8vo j pp. 86168).
Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai Languages (also Navajo
and Ticorilla), pp. 269 318 of : BFSCHMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachstamm.
Berlin, 1856, 4to.
TICUNAS T1MUACA. 187
TICUNAS.
Brazilian Indians on the Amazon. (MARTius,No. 179). Tacunas,
Tecunas, Ticonas, Tucunas, on the River Intahy. (See Voyage,
Vol. Ill, p. 1196.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Ticunas (Cavallo coche), Vocabulary, No. XXIV, pp. 298, 299 of:
CASTELNAU, Vol. V, Appendice.
TILTJEX, TEGUAS, KIWOMI.
Pueblo Indians, belonging to the Keres family, residing at the
pueblo of Santo Domingo, in New Mexico.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A Vocabulary has been taken by the United States Boundary Commissioner,
JOHN R. BARTLETT.
Kiwomi Vocabularies (one from the chief, the other from another member of the
tribe) taken by Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 86 89 of the Report upon the
Indian Tribes, added to his Report on the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific
Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to).
TIMBIRAS, GRANS.
Brazilian Indians of the province of Goyaz. They are related to
the Ges, and their language shows a close affinity to that of the
Ges. Their three principal tribes are called Timbiras de Mat a,
Timbiras de Canella fina, and Timbiras de Bocca furada.
(MARTIUS, IV, No. 81.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 511 (Timbiras de Canella fina).
TIMTJACA, TIMUIQUANA, TIMTJICANA.
Language of Florida Indians, in the neighbourhood of S.
Augustin.
188 TINQUA TLAOQUATCH.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, p. 113.
HERVAS, Origine, formazione e meccanica degli Idiomi (p. 180, No. LXV)
Lingua Timuacana della Florida ; on two tables.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 285, and (from Mitbridates) in : Norton's
Literary Gazette (New York, 4to), 1855, No. 5 (March), p. 95 (Timuacana or
Timuaca Language).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 785.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Grramatica de la Lengua Timuiquana de Florida, por Fr. FEANCISCO PAEEJA.
Mexico, 1614.
Also, by the same author : Confesonario en Lengua Timuiquana. Mexico,
1612. Catecismo de la Doctrina Cristiana en Lengua Timuiquana. Mexico,
1617.
Pareja was a native of Toledo, in Spain, and was one of the founders of the
Franciscan Order in Sa. Elena, in Florida, and Guardian of the first convent
established there.
TINQUA.
A language of Florida, in which were written a " Doctrina
Cristiana," and a book on the administration of the sacraments,
by Fray GTREGORIO MORILLA, which were printed, the first at
Madrid in 1631, and afterwards reprinted at Mexico in 1635,
and the second at Mexico in 1635 (SouzA).
TLAOQUATCH, TLOQUATCH.
Indians of the south-western coast of Vancouver's Island.
Their language appears to be the same as that of the Nootka
Sound Indians, and is related to that of the Haeeltzuk.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Tloaquatch Vocabulary, by Dr, JOHN SCOTJLEE, in : Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society of London, Yol. XI (London, 1841, 8vo), pp. 242, -244,
246.
Dr, JOHN SCOULEE, Chikeelis and Tlaoquatch Words, p. 236 of: On the
Indian Tribes inhabiting the North-west Coast of America (pp. 228 252 of the :
Journal of the Ethnological Society of London, Yol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).
TLAPANEKA TLATSKANAI. 189
Tlaoquatch and Nootka Words, p. 156 of: E. G. LATHAM, The Languages of
the Oregon Territory (pp. 154 166 of Vol. I of the same Journal).
TLAPANEKA.
Indians of Tlapa, in the Mexican State of Puebla.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HUMBOLDT (Essai politique sur le Koyaume de la Nouvelle Espagne, Vol. I,
p. 243) mentions that at Tlapa a particular language is spoken.
TLASCALTEKAS.
Indians of San Salvador, who speak a dialect of the Mexican
language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Dr. KAEL SCHERZER, Sprache der Tlascaltekas Indianer im Dorfe Isalco im
Staate San Salvador, pp. 2835 of Vol. XV of: Sitzungsberichte der Philo-
sophisch-Historischen Klasse der Kaiserlichen Akademie der AVissenschaften.
Vienna, 1855, 8vo. A Iso under the separate title of : Sprachen der Indianer Centra 1-
Amerika's. fienna, 1855, 8vo, pp. 11.
TLATSKANAI, KWALHIOQUA.
Indians of the Athapaskan stock and the Tacoullie-Umpqua
family of north-western America,, speaking different dialects of
one language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
1, B, a, b, pp. 569 629, of the Vocabularies of North-western America, in :
HORATIO HALE'S Ethnography and Philology, United States Exploring Expe-
pedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1816, folio.
HALE'S Vocabulary compared with the other Athapaskan, pp. 177 222, and
with the Kinai Languages and Koloschian, pp. 269 318, of: Buschinann's Atha-
paskischer Sprachstamm. JBerlin, 1856, 4to.
M, III, p. 105, of the same Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. VI.
190 TOTONAKA.
TOTONAKA.
Language of Indians in the districts of Zacatlan, State of
Puebla, and in the State of Vera Cruz. The four dialects of this
language are the Tatiquilhati , Chacahuaxti, Ypapana, and
Tatimolo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 118, 119.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
Mitliridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 60 (three dialects of the Sierra Caja, Sierra
Alta, and others).
J. S. VATER, Proben, etc. ; Seetzen's Linguistischer Nachlass. Leipzig^ Vogel,
1816, 8vo 5 pp. 352375.
BALBI, .Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLT, No. 699 (Totonaca, Sierra-alta).
Nouvelles Annales des Yoyages. Paris, 1841, 8vo ; Yol. IY, pp. 261267.
N.B. Clavigero says that AKDEEAS DE OLMOS and CEISI OVAL DIAZ DE ANAYA
have written Grammars and Vocabularies of the Totonaka language.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de Lengua Totonaca, conforme el Arte de Antonio Nebrija. Compuesto
por D. JOSEPH ZAMBBANO BONILLA, Cura beneficiado, etc. Dedicado al Exmo. Sr.
D. Domingo Pantaleon Alvarez de Abreu, Arzobispo, Obispo de esta Diocesi.
Lleva anadido una doctrina de la Lengua Naolingo, con algunas voces de la Lengua
de aquella Sierra y de esta de Aca, que por orden desu Illustrmo. se imprirao. Su
autor el Lie. D. Francisco Dominguez, Cura de Xalpam de los Angelos. Puebla,
1752, 8vo, pp. 134, 79.
(Naolingo is the dialect generally called Tatimolo.)
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 4659.
Adelung (Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 92) mentions, upon Marsden's
authority : EUGENIC KOMEEO, Arte para aprender las Lenguas Mexicana y
Totonaca.
According to De Souza, the title is as follows : Arte 6 Gramatica de la
Lengua Totonaca, por D. EuaENio EOMEEO, de Antequera, MS.
Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengna Totonaca, y varies Opusculos Catequisticos
en la misma, por Illmo. D. Fr. FEANCISCO TOEAL, Obispo de Yucatan. MS.
Toral died in Mexico, 1571 (De Souza).
Arte para aprender el Idioma Totonaco, and also : Yocabulario Totonaco-Cas-
tellano, by CEISTOBAL DIAZ ANAYA, Cura of Olintla, in the province of Puebla,
Mexico. MSS. (De Souza).
TSCHUGATSCHI TSCHUKTCHI. 191
TSCHUGATSCHI.
Eskimo tribe, driven from the Kadjah Islands to Prince Wil-
liam's Sound and Cook's Inlet.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Mitliridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 458, 459, 466; Yol. IY, pp. 251
253.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 857 (Tchougatchi Konaga).
K. E. v. BAEE und Gr. v. HELMERSEN, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Kussischen
Eeicbs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, Band I. St. Petersburg ', 1839, 8vo,
p. 259.
TSCHUKTCHI.
They occupy the north-western part of Russian Asia, and the
opposite shores of north-western America. A part of them are
settled in Asia, and call themselves Namollo. They are un-
doubtedly Eskimos. The Wild, or Reindeer, Tchuktchi call
themselves Tchouktschee, Tchekto, and have been invaders,
possibly, of the Korjake nation. Only the settled Tchuktchi
belong to the American continent.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Yocabularies.
J. BILLING, Puteschestvie, &c. (Kussian edition of his Voyage, by Sarytschev,
with Twelve Yocabularies). St. Petersburg, 1811, 4to, pp. 190 ; pp. 102111.
(The Yocabularies collected by the Head Physician, Dr. KOBECK) .
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 340, 341, 407, 408; Yol. IY, pp. 242, 251
253 (from KOBECK, MERCK, and KOSCHALEFF).
A. J. KRUSENSTERN, Wdrter-Sanamlungen aus den Sprachen einiger Volker des
oestlichen Asiens und der Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. St. Petersburg, 1813,
4to ; pp. 3344.
J. S. VATER, Proben deutscher Yolksmundarten and Seetzen's Lin-
guistischer Nachlass. Leipzic, Yogel, 8vo, 1816 ; pp. 149167.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 860, Tchouktchi Asiatiquesj
859, Tchouktchi Americains.
N.B. No. I, 3, of A. G-ALLATIN'S Comparative Vocabulary, pp. 307367 of :
Archseologia Americana, Yol. II (the Asiatic Tshutchi).
192 TUJ3AR TUSCARORA.
TUBAR,.
Indians of Sinaloa, speaking a language related to the Tepe-
guana and Tarahumara.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLIX et seq.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 122.
And (from him) in the Mithridates, III, 3, pp. 139141.
TUCANO.
Brazilian Indians of the province Rio Negro. MARTIUS (VII,
196) enumerates them among the tribes of Juris.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521541 of: ALFRED E. WALLACE,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Eio Negro. London, Eeeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.
TUNGHASE.
Indians of the south-eastern part of Prince of Wales's Archi-
pelago. Their language is closely related to that of Sitka.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary by Dr. JOHN SCOTJLER, in: Journal of the Eoyal Geographical
Society of London, Vol. XI (London, 1841, 8vo), pp. 231, 233235.
Tunghase and Sitka Words, p. 163 of: E. Q. LATHAM, The Languages of the
Oregon Territory (pp. 154166 of: Journal of the Ethnological Society of
London, Vol. I. Edinburgh, 1848, 8vo).
TUSCAHOBA.
Indians formerly of North Carolina. They joined afterwards
(A.D. 1714) the Five Nations, or Iroquois, and are now in the west
of the State of New York.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A small Dictionary of Tuskerura, Pampticough, Woccon, pp. 225 230 of:
JOHN LAWSON, Survey or- General of North Carolina, A New Voyage to Carolina ;
TZEN DALES. 193
containing the Exact Description and Natural History of that Country, together
with the Present State thereof; and a Journal of a Thousand Miles travelled through
several Nations of Indians, giving a particular account of their Customs, Manners,
etc. London, 1709, 4to. Keprinted, ibid., 1714, 4to, and 1718, 4to (only ne\v
title-pages).
First printed as part of : A New Collection of Voyages and Travels ....
by Captain John Stevens .... London, December, 170S, 4to ; to be con-
tinued monthly (in Vol. I). German translation, Hamburg, 1772, 8vo. And
in the plagiarism upon Lawson's Voyage : John Brickell, M.D., The Natural
History of North Carolina, with an Account of the Trades, Manners, and
Customs of the Christian and Indian Inhabitants. Dublin, 1737, 8vo ; and,
with new title-page, 1743, 8vo.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 113, 114.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies, and Appendix,
p. 20.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 318, 334, 335.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 800.
No. V, 31, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 307 367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Archaeologia Americana, Vol. II) ; and under E, V, 5, p. 115, of
the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II
(from MS. Notes of PARISH).
Tuscarora Vocabulary, Vol. II, Appendix B, pp. 262265, of: GEO. CATLIN'S
Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs, and Condition of the North
American Indians. London and New York, Wiley and Putnam, 1841, 2 vols.
8vo.
Vocabulary of the Tuscarora, from WILLIAM CHEW, written out by the Kev. Gil-
bert Rockwood, Appendix H, pp. 251258, to : Henry R. Schoolcraft's Notes on
the Iroquois. New York, Bartlett and Welford, 1846, 8vo. (New York State
Document, 1846, Senate No. 24.) And in the Comparative Vocabulary of the
Iroquois, pp. 393 400 of the same Report, published as a separate book. Albany,
Pease and Co., 1847, 8vo.
Comparison of Tuscarora (from LAWSON), Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 552
556 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. V.
TZEN DALES, CELDALES.
Indians of Chiapas, speaking a dialect of the Maya. Abbe
BRASSEUR considers the Celdal the parent language, and the
Maya a dialect.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
C. S. RAFIKESQUE, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, 8vo ; pp. 196198.
C C
19 i UAINAMBEU UGALENZI.
A short MS. Vocabulary of the Tzendal Language, brought from Chiapas by
John L. Stephens, is mentioned by A. Gallatin, in his Notes on the Semi-civilized
Nations of Mexico, etc. (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. I, p. 5).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Fr. DE CEPEDA, Arte de las Lenguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales y Cinancateca.
Mexico, 1560, 4to.
UAINAMBEU.
Brazilian Indians of the province of Rio Negro.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary (of Ninety-eight Words), pp. 521541 of: ALFRED R. WALLACE,
A Narrative of Travels on the Amazon and Rio Negro. London, Reeve and Co.,
1853, 8vo.
UCHEE.
Creek Indians, east of the rivers Coosa and Chatahoochee.
Their language is very harsh and guttural. They are now
partly in Florida, partly in the west.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
No. XI, 46, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 35367) to A. Qallatin's
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II ; from WABE, and MS. Notes of
RIDGE).
And No. D. XI, pp. 94, 96, of: American Ethnological Society's Transactions,
Vol. II.
UGALENZI.
Indians of Russian America, west of Cape St. Elias, and near
the Island of Kadjak. Their language seems to be a dialect of
the Koloschian.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
V. WKANGEL, Some (Eleven) Words compared vdth Atna and Kolusch, p. 99
of: K. F. VON BAEE und Gr. v. HELMEKSEN, Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Rus-
sischen Reichs und der angranzenden Lander Asiens, Band I. St. Petersburg,
1839, 8vo.
Comparative Vocabulary of the Athapascan and Kinai (among them the
Ugalenze) Languages, pp. 269-318 of: BUSCHM ANN'S Athapaskischer Sprach-
stamm. Berlin, 1856, 4to.
UMPQUA -UNALASCHKA. 195
UMPQUA.
Indians of Oregon, of the Athapascan stock, family of Tahkali-
Umpkwa.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Umpqua Vocabulary, by Dr. JOHN SCOTTLEK,, in : Journal of the Royal Geogra-
graphical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8vo, pp. 237239, 241.
Umpkwa Vocabulary, 1, C, of the Vocabularies of North-western America,
pp. 569629 of : HOBATIO HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United States
Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.
And M, III, p. 105, of the Vocabularies of North-western America (Transac-
tions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.)
Professor W. W. Turner (from HALE), Comparative Vocabulary of Twenty-
five Words of Umpkwa, Hudson's Bay, Chepewyan, Tacully, Hoopah, Apache,
and Navajo, pp. 84, 85 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieutenant
A. W. Whipple's Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington,
1856, 4to).
Umpqua compared with the other Athapascan languages, viz., Chepewyan,
Tahkali, Kutchin, Dogrib, Sussee, and Tlatskanai, pp. 174 222; and compared
with the same, the Kinai languages Koloschian, Navajo, and Ticorilla, pp. 269
318 of: BTISCHMANN, Athapaskischer Sprachstarom. Berlin., 1856, 4to.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A Grammatical Notice, see pp. 534, 535 of : HOKATIO HALE, Ethnography and
Philology, United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard,
1846, folio.
UNALASCHKA.
The largest of the Fox Islands, inhabited by Eskimos. The
language of Unalaschka is spoken over all the Fox Islands, and
also on the peninsula of Aljaska.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
WILLIAM COXE, Account of Russian Discoveries between Asia and America,
etc. London, 1780, 4to (reprinted, ibid., 1784 and 1804), p. 303.
French translation Paris, 1781, 4to. Neufchatel, 1781, 8vo, p. 172.
German translation Frankfurt and Leipzig, Fleischer, 178i, 8vo.
A Table to show the Affinity batween the Languages spoken at Oonalashka and
Norton Sound and those of the Greenlanders and Esquimaux, Appendix VI
to Vol. Ill of: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, performed under the direction
196 UTAHS VILELA.
of Captains Cook, Clark, and Gore, 17761780. London, 1784, 3 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, Appendix VI, p. 554. Edit. Dublin, 1784, 8 vols. 8vo ; Yol. Ill, pp.
554, 555.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, pp. 458, 459 (from RESANOFF).
Yocabulary of the Languages .... of the Islands .... Oonalaschka
Appendix No. Ill, pp. 329337, of: UEET LISIANSKY'S Yoyage round the
World. London, John Booth, 1814, 4to.
BALBT, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 858.
FEED. LTTTKE, Yoyage autour du Monde execute sur la Corvette le Seniavine, etc.,
1826 et 1829. Traduit du Russe par E. Boye. Paris, Eirmin Didot, 1835, 1836,
3 vols, 8vo, and Atlas ; Yol. I, pp. 236247. The Russian original Tedor Litke,
Puteschestvie vokrug svj eta appeared at St. Petersburg, 1834 1836, 3 vols. 8vo.
Some Words (31 and numerals 1 5) of the Unalachka compared with Eskimo
and Kadjak, p. 123 of: YON BAER und YON HELMERSEN, Beitrage zur Kentniss
des Russischen Reiches, Band I. St. Petersburg, 1839, 8vo.
Oonalashca Yocabulary, sub lit. X, p. 130, of the Yocabularies of North
America, in : Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Yol. II.
(Q-allatin says, concerning this language, p. 77, " not in America.")
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, part 3, p. 460.
UTAHS.
Wild Indians on the borders of New Mexico.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Utah Yocabulary .... No. 9 of Appendix B, pp. 140 143, of: JAMES H.
SIMPSON'S Journal of a Military Reconnaissance from Santa Fe, New Mexico, to
the JSavajo Country (Reports of the Secretary of War, with Reconnaissances of
Routes from San Antonio to El Paso .... also .... the Report of Lieutenant
J. H. Simpson. Washington, Union Office, 1850 ; 8vo, pp. 65168).
VILELA.
Indians of the Argentine province, Cordova, on the banks of the
Salado River. They are divided into Ontoampas, Yeconoampas,
Ipas, and Pasaines. There are also some wandering tribes of
the Yilela in the forests on the banks of the Rio Bermejo ;
among them are the Chunupies, Ocoles, Atalalas. The Yilela
VIRGINIA VUTA. 197
language is related to the Lule, and has several dialects, among
which the Vilela proper and the Ontoampa are the most promi-
nent.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
F. S. GILIT, Saggio di Storia Americana, Vol. Ill, pp. 364366.
HERVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
HERVAS, Origine, pp. 27, 29, 37, 41, 44, 45, 48, Tabb. XLIX, L, LI et seq.
HERVAS, Aritmetica, pp. 98, 99.
HERVAS, Saggio, pp. 103105.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 508, 516, 517 (from HERVAS and GILII).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 455.
VIRGINIA.
The words which we find mentioned under this name belong to
the Mohegan.
AVORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
The " Few Words " given by Captain John Smith are to be found in
1, Vol. IV of: D. SAMUEL PTIRCHAS, Hakluytus Postumus (London, 1625, V, folio),
p. 1667. 2, p. 40 of his General History of Virginia. London, 1627 (ibid.,
1630, 1632), and Vol. I, pp. 147, 148, of the edition published in 3819 at Rich-
mond, Virginia, Franklin Press, William "W. Gray, printer, 2 vols. 8vo.
Vocabularium Barbaro-Virgineorum, pp. 133 154 of: Lutheri Catechismus
ofversatt pa American Virginiske Spraket. Stockholm, Burchard,1696, small 8vo.
H. KELANDTJS, Dissertationes Miscellanese. Trajecti ad Rhenum, 17061708,
3 vols. 8vo; Vol. Ill, pp. 208-211.
HERVAS, Saggio, p. 126.
HERVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
SMITH BARTON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies ; and (from him,
as well as from the Virginia Catechism) in :
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 387389.
Langue des Virginiens : COURT DE GEBELIN, Monde Primitif, Vol. VIII,
pp. 515 520. Paris, 1772, 4to. Eeprinted, pp. 328 331 of : J. B. Scherer,
Kecherches Historiques et G e'ographiques sur le Nouveau Monde. Paris, Brunet,
1777, 12mo.
VUTA, HUILLICHE.
Indians, west of the Patagonians, and south of the Araucanians,
198 WACOES WAIKUR.
They are divided into the Chanos, Chunos, or Chonos, on and
next to the island of Chiloe ; Poyus, or Poyes, on the islands
of Wellington and Hanover, and the coast opposite ; Keyus, or
Keyes, south of the above, and down to the Straits of Magal-
haens. Their language is a mixture of Araucan and Tehuelhet.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
TH. FALKNER, Description of Patagonia. Hereford, 1774, 4to, p.
German translation Gotha, 1775, 8vo, p. 124.
WACOES, NUECOS.
Indians of the Great Prairies, belonging to the Pawnee stock,
residing between the Washita and lied rivers, in about 98 20'
W. long. They are closely related to their neighbours, the
Witchitas.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Nueco Vocabulary, pp. 65 68, and Fifteen Nueco Words compared with
Pawnee, Klccaree, Kichai, and Witchita, pp. 68, 69, of the Report upon the Indian
Tribes, by Lieutenant A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, and Professor W. W.
Turner, added to Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE'S Report on the Route near the 35th
Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Washington, 1856, 4to).
WAI KITE, GUAICUR, MONQT7I,
Indians of Lower California. The Cora and the Aripe speak
dialects of their language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
J. BEGERT, E S. J., Nachriehten von der Amerikanischen Halbinsel Californien,
mit einem zwiefachen Anhang falscher Nachrichten. Geschrieben von einem
Priester der Gesellschaft Jesu, welcher lang darinn diese letztere Jahr gelebt hat.
Mannheim, 1772, 8vo.
Langue de la Californie (Waikur, from BEGEET), pp. 553555 of: COURT
DE GEBELIN, Monde Primitif. Paris, 1772, 4to.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 198, 199. Cora Vocabulary, ibid., pp. 87,
88, 153, 154.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 188192 (from P. BEGERT).
WAIILATPU WARROWS. 199
WAIILATPU, MOLELE.
Indians of western Oregon,, south of Columbia River. The
Waiilatpu proper are called, also,, Willetpoos, Caijuse. Their
languages bear some affinity to the Sahaptin or Nez-perce
language.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
T. Waiilatpu ; O. Waiilatpu (Willepoos, Cayuse), from Dr. WHITMAN ; P.
Molele (see Vocabularies of North-western America, pp. 569 629 of: Hon. HALE,
Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Phila-
delphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio).
And U, XXV, p. 120, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A Short Notice, p. 561 of: HOB. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the
United States Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1846, folio) ; and, reprinted,
p. 56, Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
WABJROWS.
Indians in the interior of British Guyana.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. II (London,
1832, 8vo), pp. 247 et seq. Reprinted in R. Montgomery Martin's British
Colonial Library, Vol. V (West Indies, II), pp. 155, 156. London, Bohn, 1844,
12mo.
Warrow Words, pp. 140, 141, of: JOHN DTJNMORE LANG, J).D., View of the
Origin and Migrations of the Polynesian Nations. London, Cochrane, 1834,
12mo.
Vocabulary of Eighteen Words compared with Arowak, Accaway, and Caribisi,
pp. 297, 298 of: W. H. BRETT, Indian Tribes of Guyana. New York, Carter
Brothers, 1852, 12mo.
Sir ROBERT H. SCHOMBURGK, Comparative Vocabulary of Eighteen Warauan
Words, in his ; Vocabularies of Eighteen Languages and Dialects of Indian
Tribes inhabiting Guiana, pp. 97, 98 of: British Association Report, Swansea
Meeting, 1848. London, 1849, 8vo.
200 WEE-YOT WINNEBAGOS.
WEE-YOT.
Indian band on the mouth of Eel River and near Humboldt Bay,
in north-western California. (Eel River is called "Wee-yot by
the Indians residing on it.)
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 434
440.
WEITS-PEK.
Indians of north-western California, on the Klamath, at the
junction of the Trinity.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GEORGE GIBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, Vol. Ill, pp. 440
445.
WINNEBAGOS, NIPPEGON.
Called, by the French, Puans, or Otchagras ; by the Oma-
haws, Horoje ; and by themselves, Hochungorah. Indians of
the Sioux stock on Fox and Rock rivers, Wisconsin.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Professor SAT, Comparative Vocabularies of Various Dialects of the Lenape (or
Delaware) Stock of North American Indians, together with a Specimen of the
Winnebago (or Nippegon) Language, Note 15, pp. 135 145, to John Picker-
ing's edition of Dr. Edwards's Observations on the Mohegan Language (Collec-
tions of the Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X of the Second Series. Boston,
Phelps and Farnham, 1823, 8vo ; reprinted, ibid., Little and Brown, 1843, 8vo ;
pp. 81160).
Note 16, pp. 149 151, relates to the Winnebago dialect, which is considered
as being of Mexican origin.
Professor SAT, Vocabulary, pp. Ixxxvi Ixxxviii, added to : Astronomical and
Meteorological Records and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken in the
Expedition for Exploring the Mississippi, under the command of Major J. H. Long.
Philadelphia, 1822, 4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 775.
WISH-OSK WOKKONS. 201
No. VI, 33, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367) to A. GALLATIH'S
Synopsis, etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
And under S, VI, 2, p. 116, of the Vocabularies in : American Ethnological
Society's Transactions, Vol. II.
(From SAY, and MS. notices of BOILOIN CASS and in the War Depart-
ment.)
Winnebago .Numerals (1 billion), by Miss ELIZABETH LOWEY, pp. 214 216
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. II.
WISH-OSK.
Indians of north-western. California, on Humboldt Bay and
Mad River.
WORDS AtfD VOCABULARIES.
GEOEGE GIBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. Ill, pp. 434440.
WITCHITAS.
Indians of northern Texas, near the Red River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Captain R. B. MAECY, Vocabularies of Words in the Languages of the Comanches
and Witchitas, Appendix H, pp. 273 276, of; RANDOLPH B. MAECY and
GEOEGE B. M'CLELLAN, Exploration of the Red River of Louisiana, in the year
1852. Washington, Nicholson, public printer, 1854, 8vo (33rd Congr. 1st Sess.
House Exec. Doc.)
Specimen of the Caddo and Witchita Languages, pp. 709 712 of Vol. V of:
Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States.
Fifteen Witchita Words (from MAECY) compared with Pawnee, Kichai, Ric*
caree, and Hueco, pp. 68, 69 of the Report upon the Indian Tribes ; added to Lieu-
tenant A. W. Whipple's Report (Pacific Railroad Reports, Vol. II. Wash-
ington, 1856, 4to).
WOKKONS, WACCOA.
Indians, formerly of North Carolina, long since extinct. Their
language was related to that of the Catawbas. They were
neighbours of the Tuscaroras in North Carolina.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
A small Dictionary of Tuskerora, Pampticough, Woccon, in : JOHN LAWSON,
D D
202 YAMKALLIE.
New Voyage to Carolina (see Tuscarora). London, 1709, 4to, pp. 225230
et seq.
German translation Hamburg, 1772, 8vo, pp. 341 et seq.
Dr. JOHN BRICKEL, The Natural History of North Carolina. Dublin, 1737,
8vo. New title, Hid., 1743, 8vo.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 114.
SMITH BAETON, New Views, etc. Comparative Vocabularies.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, p. 308 (from LAWSON).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 793.
Comparison of the Languages of the ancient Pampticos of North Carolina with
the Algonquin Language, and of the ancient Waccoa of that State and the Catawba
of South Carolina, pp. 552558 of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United
States, Vol. V. (Tuskarora and Waccoa, both from LAWSON, pp. 552 555 ;
Tuskarora, Pampticough, and Waccoa, pp. 555, 556; Waccoa and Catawba,
pp. 557, 558.)
P. 87, and No. XIX, 54, p. 372, of the Vocabularies to A. G-ALLATIN'S Synopsis,
etc. (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II).
YAMKALLIE, KALLAPUIAH.
Oregon Indians of the plains of the Wallamette, speaking a
language related to that of the Cathlascons and Haeeltzuk.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Kalapooah and Yamkallie Vocabularies, by Dr. JOHN SCOTJLEE, in : Journal
of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. XI. London, 1841, 8?o ;
pp. 237, 239, 241.
Vocabulary of the Calapooa Nation, pp. 333336 of: Rev. SAMUEL PAEKEE,
Journal of an Exploring Tour beyond the Rocky Mountains. Ithaca, New
York, printed by Mack, Andrus, and Woodruff, 1838, 12rno.
No. 7, S, 9 (Kalapuya), and r. (Tuhivalati, Follaties), of the Vocabularies of
North-western America (pp. 569629), in : HOEATIO HALE, Ethnography and
Philology of the United States Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and
Blanchard, 1846, folio.
And E, XXVII (Kalapuya, Willamef), pp. 97, 99, of the North American
Vocabularies (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II).
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Pp. 564566 of: HOEATIO HALE, Ethnography and Philology, United States
Exploring Expedition. Philadelphia, Lea and Blanchard, 1846, folio.
And pp. 5861, Vol. II, of: Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
YAGUAS YAQUI. 203
YAGUAS.
Brazilian Indians on the Amazon.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Langue des Yaguas, Vocabulary, No. XXIII, pp. 297, 298, of: CASTELNATT,
Vol. V, Appendice.
YAMEOS.
Indians on the Upper Maranon, east from the junction of the
Tigre River.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. XL VIII, L et seq.
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 107, 108 ; and (from him)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 589, 595597.
YANKTONS, YANKTONANS, OE
YANKTOANANS.
Sioux tribe, between the Red River and the Missouri.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
P. Ixxxiv of SAY'S Vocabularies in : Astronomical and Meteorological Ke-
cords, and Vocabularies of Indian Languages, taken on the Expedition for Ex-
ploring the Mississippi .... under .... Major J. H. Long. Philadelphia, 1822,
4to.
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 774.
No. VI, 35, of the Comparative Vocabulary (pp. 305367) to A. Gallatin's
Synopsis, etc. : Avcha3ojogia Americana, Vol. II (from SAY).
Keprinted under S, VI, 1, p. 116, of the Vocabularies in : Transactions of the
American Ethnological Society, Vol. II.
Keise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED. Coblenz, 18391841, 2 vols. 4to ;
Vol. II, pp. 491498.
YAQUI, HIAQUI.
Christian Indians of Sonora, Mexico. (See also under Cinaloa.)
It may be stated, on the authority of HEIIVAS and ANDR. PEIIEZ
204 YARURA.
DE RIBAS (Historia de los Triumfos de nuestra Santa Fe,
Madrid, 1645, folio), that the Hiaqui is the principal language
of Sinaloa ; and, on the authority of DE SOUZA, that P. Luis
BONIFAZ has written an "Arte de la Lengua Principal de
Cinaloa/' which probably exists only in MS.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. XLLX, L et seq.
HEKYAS, Saggio, pp. 121, 122 ; and (from him)
Mithridates, Yol, III, part 3, pp. 156158.
A Vocabulary of their Language has been taken by JOHN R. BAETLETT, the
United States Boundary Commissioner.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Arte de la Lengua Principal de Cinaloa, por P. Luis BONIFAZ. (MS., according
to De Souza.)
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 3, pp. 156158 (Lord's Prayer, with Grammatical
Notes).
YAftUBA.
Indians of New Granada, in the plains of the Meta and Casanare,
tributaries of the Orinoco. They call themselves Japurin.
Their language bears affinity to the languages of the Betoi,
Ele, and Otomaques.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
GILII, Saggio di Storia Americana, Yol. Ill, p. 212.
HERVAS, Yocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq.
From P. Giov. MAEIA FOENEEI, a missionary among the Yaruras, who
had composed a Grammar and a Yocabulary of their language, the MS. of
both of which he left at the Mission. Returned to Europe, he gave to
Hervas MS, Notices concerning the Yarura language, which were after-
wards also used by Adelung and Yater for the Mithridates.
HEEYAS, Origine, Tabb. XLYIII, L et seq.
HEEYAS, Aritmetica, pp. 105, 106.
HEEYAS, Saggio, pp. 109, 110.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, p. 650 (from HEEYAS and GILII).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 646.
C. S. RAFINESQUE, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 118.
YUKAI YUMAS. 205
Reprinted, pp. 349 351 of: JOSIAH PRIEST, American Antiquities and Dis-
coveries in the West. Third Edition, Albany, printed by Hoffman and White,
1833, 8vo.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 635-640 (from FORKEBI).
A MS. G-rammar of the Yarura Language was in the library of W. von Hum-
boldt, and is now in the Royal Library at Berlin.
YUKAI,
Indians on Russian River, in north-western California.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
G-EORGE G-IBBS, Vocabulary : Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. Ill, pp. 428434.
YULE.
Indians of the Isthmus of Darien.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of the Language of the Yule Indians, inhabiting the rivers and
the coast of Darien, from the mouth of the Atrato to the coast of San Bias, by
Dr. EDWARD CULLEN, pp. 241, 242 of Vol. XXI of : Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society. London, John Murray, 1851, 8vo.
YUMAS.
Indians of the south-western part of California, on the Rio
Colorado, down to its entrance in the Gulf of California. They
are divided into five tribes, of which the Cuchans are the most
important. The others are the Ma-ha-os, Hah-wal-coes, Yam-
pai-o, and Co-co-palis. The Camoyes, or Puemaja, are a tribe
of the Cuchans.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Vocabulary of about 250 Words in the Yuma (rather Cuchan) Language, pp.
23 28 of Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE'S Extract from a Journal of an Expedition
from San Diego, California, to the Rio Colorado, from September llth to Decem-
ber llth, 1849 (Congress. Docutn., 31 Congr., 2nd Sess., Senate Exec. Doc., No.
19, pp. 28). Reprinted, pp. 118121 of the : Physical Data respecting that part
of Southern California lying on the line of boundary between San Diego and the
mouth of the river Gila ; with incidental descriptions of the Diegunos and Yumas
Indian Tribes ; pp. 99121 of Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
Vol. II.
206 YUNGA YURACARES.
Keprinted as : Yuma Vocabulary, with Notices of the Comoyes dialect, taken
from Pablo Coelum, a Yuma chief, by Lieutenant A. W. WHIPPLE, pp. 95101
of: Eeport upon the Indian Tribes, added to Lieutenant Whipple's Report on
the Route near the 35th Parallel (Pacific Railroad Reports. Washington, 1855,
Vol. II, 4to).
The United States Boundary Commissioner, JOHN R. BAETLETT, has also
taken a Yocabulary of the Yuma Language.
YUNGA.
Peruvian Indians of the departments Truxillo, Zaiia, Piura, and
Catamarca. The Yncas had forced them to leave their old
abodes, and placed them in different villages; but they kept
their language, which is totally different from the Quichua. In
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, p. 548, the language is called Yunka-
Mochika; by HERVAS, Mochika di Yuncas. RIVERO and
TSCHUDI call it a dialect of the Quichua.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEEVAS, Saggio, p. 93, and (from him)
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 549551.
HEEVAS, Origine, Tabb. L et seq.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
FEENANDO DE LA CAEEEEA (cura y vicario de S. Martin de Reque en el corre-
gimiento de Chiclayo), Arte de la Lengua Yunga de los valles del obispado de
Trujillo, con un confessionario y todas las oraciones cristianas y otras cosas.
Lima, Juan de Contreras, 1644, 16mo.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, p. 551.
(The above Grammar was unknown to the authors of the Mithridates.)
YURACAEES.
Indians of Bolivia, on the eastern slope of the Andes, on the
rivers Ibabo, Mamore, Aimore, and Seacri. The Tacana,
Maropa, and Apolista are tribes related to them.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Yocabulary of Twenty-three Words, p. 164 of Yol. I of : A. D'OEBIGNY,
L'Homme Americain.
Diccionario Yuracare, by P. LA CTJEVA, 4to, in two parts : Espanol-Yuracare,
complete j Yuracare-Espanol, incomplete. (MS. in possession of Alcide D'Orbigny.)
ZAMUCA ZAPOTECA. 207
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. I, p. 359, and p. 376 (Tacana tribe),
p. 380 (Maropa tribe), p. 382 (Apolista tribe).
ZAMUCA, SAMUCA.
Indians of the South American province Chiquitos. The three
dialects of their language are the Zamuca, Caipotorade. and
Morotoco.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
HEKVAS, Vocabolario Poliglotto, pp. 161 et seq., 223 (Zamuca Chiquita).
HEEVAS, Saggio, pp. 101, 102, 229, 230.
HEEVAS, Aritmetica, p. 97.
HEBYAS, Origine, pp. 37, 41, 45, Tabb. XL1X, L et seq.
Mithridates, Yol. Ill, pp. 554570 (from HEETAS).
BALBI, Atlas Ethnographique, Tab. XLI, No. 462.
Vocabulary of Twenty-three Samuca Words, Vol. I, pp. 163, 164 j Vol. II,
p. 136 (Xanmca), of: A. D'ORBIGNY, L'Homme Americain.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, pp. 553557.
A. D'OEBIGNY, L'Homme Americain, Vol. II, p. 147.
ZAPAEI.
Indians of Upper Peru and Equador, between the rivers Mara-
rion, Pastaza, and Napo.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Brevi cenni sull' idioma Zaparo, corredati d'un saggio di diccionario, di alguni
dialogi piu necessarii pel viaggiatore, pp. 281 297 of: GAETANO OSCULATI,
Explorazione delle regioni equatoriali lungo il Napo, etc. Hilano, Bernardoni,
1850, 8vo.
ZAPOTECA.
Indian language of Oajaca, Mexico.
208 ZEONA.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIKS.
JUAN DE COBDOYA, Yocabulario de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico,. 1578, 4to.
Vocabulario de la Lengua Zapoteca, 6 Diccionario Hispauo-Zapoteco. Mexico ,
1571, 4to.
Yocabulario de la Lengua Zapoteca, by Bishop PEDRO FERIA.
Feria was born 1524, went to Mexico, joined the Dominicans, became a
missionary amongst the Zapotecas, and, after filling many posts of dignity in
the Church, was made Bishop of Chiapas, in 1575. Died about the year
1586. He wrote besides : Confessionario en la Lengua Zapoteca ; and: Doc-
trina Christiana en la misrna Lengua.
Diccionario de la Lengua Zapoteca. Also : Los Evangelios Quadragesimales en
Lengua Zapoteca, by Fray CHRISTOBAL AGUERO.
Fray Christobal Aguero was born in 1600, in San Luis de la Paz,in Michoacan,
became a Dominican monk in Oaxaca, in. 1618, and, according to De Souza,
was so perfect in the language of the Zapotecas, that he taught it publicly to
his ecclesiastical brothers. He gave his Diccionario to the Bishop of Mon-
terroso for publication ; the translation of the Evangelists remained in the
Convent of Antequera. He wrote also : Miscellaneo E spiritual en idioma
Zapoteca, which was published in 4to, in the city of Mexico, by Bernardo
Calderon, 1666.
C. S. BAFINESQUE, Atlantic Journal, and Friend of Knowledge. Philadelphia,
1832, 1833, 8vo, p. 52.
Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV. Pans, 1841, 8vo ; pp. 260286.
The MS. Vocabulary of CHRISTOBAL AGUERO is also mentioned by Clavigero.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
J. DE CORDOVA, Arte de la Lengua Capoteca. Mexico, 1564, 12mo. (De Souza
gives the date of 1578.)
Arte de la Gramatica de la Lengua Zapoteca, conforme al que de la Gramatica
Latina escribio Antonio de Nebrija, por Fr. PEDRO CUEVA. Megico, 1607, 8vo.
Arte de la Leiigua Zapoteca, por Fr. ANTONIO Pozo. MS. (According to De
Souza, Pozo died in the Convent of Santa Ana Zecahe, in the year 1623. His
MS. was preserved in Tentitlan, Valley of Oaxaca.
Tratado curioso de los raices y formacion de los Verbos de la Lengua Zapoteca,
por Fr. GERONIMO MORENO.
Moreno was a native of Andalusia, went to America in 1597, was a mis-
sionary in Oaxaca, and died, in 1631, in the Convent of San Domingo of
Antequera.
ZEONA.
Language of the inhabitants of the north-westerly corner of
ZOQUE. 209
the empire of Brazil, province of Para, on the left bank of the
Amazon, between the rivers Putumajo and Caqueta. It may
be a dialect of the Omagua, and, like that language, related to
the "Lingoa geral" of Brazil.
WORDS AND VOCABULARIES.
Diccionario y Doctrina en Lengua Zeona. MS. of pp. 416, in 12mo, in the
possession of Colonel Joaquin Acosta of Nueva Granada. The Appendix con-
tains a List of Words of the " Lengua general del Brasil."
ZOQUE.
Indian language of Chiapas, Mexico.
GRAMMARS AND GRAMMATICAL NOTICES.
Fr. DE CEPEDA, Arte de las Lcnguas Chiapa, Zoque, Celdales, y Cinacanteca.
Mexico, 1560, 4to.
E E
ADDENDA.
( The Contributions furnished by Professor WM. W. TURNER, of Washington, are
enclosed in brackets, thus [ 1, and bear the initials W. W. T.)
ABENAKI.
[The Comparative Vocabulary appended to Edwards 1 s Mohegan Grammar was
compiled, not by " Professor F. SAY," but by Dr. JOHN PICKERING, from various
sources, the Winnebago alone having been taken from Say. Of the Abenaki two
Vocabularies are given, one from Father Kasle's MS. Dictionary, and the other (St.
Francis Indians) from Rev. Messrs. Holmes and Noyes.
The numerals, from Father Basic's MS. Dictionary, are printed in Collections
of Massachusetts Historical Society, Vol. X, first series. Boston, 1809, pp. 137,
138. W.W.T.]
ABIPONES.
ALONZO DE BARCENA, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua delos Indios Abipones y
Quiraaguis. Printed, according to Locuno, Descripcion Chorographica del gran
Chaco ; and Barcia, in his edition of Leon Pinelo.
[A, F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode bei Volkern aller
Welttheile. Halle, 1847, 8vo. On the numerals, pp. 4 7. W. W. T.]
ALGONKIN.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
6466 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, note. W. W. T.]
ALLENTIAC.
Grrammatica y Vocabulario en las Lenguas Allentiac y Milcocayac, por TORRALVA.
fjima, 1608, 8vo.
APACHES ATNAS.
APACHES.
[For Vocabulary of the Jicarilla Apaches, see " Ticorillas," p. 186.
W. W. T.]
APPIACAS (BRAZILIAN INDIANS).
Vocabulary of 113 words on page 315 of: Memoria sobre os usos, Costumes e
Lmguagem dos Appiacas ; e descobrimento de Novas Minas na provincia de Mato
Grosso. Pelo Conego Jose da Silva Guimarez, natural de Cuiaba. Pp. 297 317
of: Eevista Trirnensal do Institute do Rio de Janeiro, Tomo VI. Rio de Janeiro,
1844, 8vo.
ARAUCANS.
P. GABRIEL DE LA VEGA, Arte, Gramatica, Vocabulario i retas a la Lengua de
Chile. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
ARRAPAHOES.
[There is no evidence that Dr. Latham " collated" Mackenzie's Vocabulary. In
"Varieties of Man," p. 344, he only copies Prichard (Vol. V, p. 414) in calling
the tribe Ahnenin ; whereas Gallatin (American Ethnological Society's Transac-
tions, Vol. II, cvi) calls it Atsina. Which is right ?
Keise des Prinzen MAXIMILIAN zu WIED, Vol. II, pp. 499, 500. W. W. T.]
ARRAWAKS,
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 71. W. W. T.]
ATHAPASCANS.
[BUSCHMANN'S Athapaskischer Sprachstamm contains also an exhibition of the
pronominal prefixes, pp. 168170. W. W. T.]
Ueber die Volker und Sprachen Neu- Mexico's und der Westseite des Britischeii
Nord Amerika's. Mit einer systematischen Worttafel des Athapaskischen Sprach-
stammes. (Paper by J. C. E. Buschmann, read before the Berlin Academy,
January 22, 1857.)
ATNAS.
[Reference is erroneously omitted to the larger Vocabulary in BAB TJKD
MELMERSEN (97 words, by Von Wrangell), in the Table to p. 259. W. W. T.]
212 ATNAHS BODEGA.
ATNAHS, OR CHIN INDIANS.
[The term "Kinn," retained from Jiilg, is simply a German translation of the
English word chin. These people are called by Mackenzie "Chin Indians,"
apparently on account of the projection of the lower part of the face, caused by
flattening the forehead.
H. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion, Vocab. E. pp. 570629. (Words.)
H. HALE, Ethnography, etc., p. 536. (Grammar.) W. W. T.]
Numerals 1 to 10 in " Tableau comparatif des Nonas de Nombre," Vol. II, p.
401, of : DTJFLOT DE MOFRAS, Exploration duTerritoire de 1'Oregon des Californies et
de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris, 1844, 8vo.
AYMABA.
DIEGO DE GTJALDO, Arte de la Lengua Aymara, con una silva de sus frases i su
declaracion. Chicuiiu, 1612, 8vo. (Printed, according to Barcia-Pinelo.)
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlniethode. On the numerals, pp.
73, 74. W.W.T,]
BATEMDAKAIEE.
[The Batemdakaiee, ChoweshaTc, Kulanapo, and YuTcai of Gibbs are identical
with the " SevernovsJcia" or Chvachamayw, of the Russians, as appears from a com-
parison of the Vocabularies. These are all but different names for the same tribe,
or of subdivisions of the same tribe. W. W. T.]
BLACKEEET.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 68.
W. W. T.]
Blackfoot Vocabulary, pp. 348 352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die
wahrend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften enghschen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser nach
der Natur entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Sriissel, Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.
BODEGA.
[The Bodegan or Olamentke Indians of the Russians (p. 20) are the same as the
TchoJcoyem of Gibbs (p. 184] and the Scm Eafael Indians of Hale. The Talatui
1111AZIL1AN.
of Hale (p. 180) and the Twolwmne tribes of Johnson (see " Califomians," p. 27)
are allied to them, at least in language.
H. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expe-
dition. San Raphael Yocab. No. 15, pp. 570-629. W. W. T.]
BRAZILIAN.
Dictionarium Linguae Brasilica?, auctore Emm. Veiga, Lusitan. Cum Gram-
matica et Catechismo. 4to. (Communicated by L. Leon de R,osny.)
Memoria sobre a necessidades do Estudo e Ensino das Linguas indigenas do
Brasil, por Francisco Adolfo de Yarnhagen. Pp. 5363 of: Revista Trimensal do
Kio de Janeiro, Tomo III, 1841, 8vo.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
3, 4, 710, 73 ; on names of the fingers, pp. 302 -304. W. W. T.]
Diccionario da Lingua geral dos Indios do Brasil, reimpresso e augmentado com
diversos vocabularies, e offerecido a Sua Magestade Imperial por Joao Joaquim da
Silva Gkumaraes, Natural da Bahia, EaMa, Typ. de Camillo de Lellis Masson & Ca.,
Eua de Santa Barbara, n. 2, 1854, 8vo, pp. vi, 60, ii, 36.
The contents of this volume are :
Diccionario anonymo da Lingua de Na$ao Guarani, pp. 1 - 60.
Addenda, pp. i, ii.
Yocabulario da Lingua principal dos Indios do Para, do qual usao differentes
tribus da mesma provincia, pp. 1 7.
Yocabulario da Nacao Botocuda, pp. 8 12.
Yocabulario da Na9ao Camacam Civilisada, pp. 12 14.
Yocabulario da Na9ao Camacam Mongoyos, pp. 1416.
Yocabulario da Na^ao Maconi, pp. 16 18.
Yocabulario da Na^ao Malali, pp. 18 20.
Yocabulario da Nacao Patacho, pp. 20, 21.
Yocabulario da Nacao Tupinamba, pp. 22. 23.
Yocabulario da Nacao dos Tamoyos, p. 23.
Yocabulario da Na^ao Tupiniquins, p. 23.
Yocabulario da Tribu Jupuroca, pp. 24, 25.
Yocabulario da Tribu Quat6, p. 25.
Yocabulario da Tribu Machakalis, pp. 26, 27.
Yocabulario da Tribu Mandacaru', p. 27.
Yocabulario da Tribu Mucury, p. 28.
Yocabularios de differentes Tribus, p. 29.
Itapucuru', Puris,
Macamecrom, Tabayara,
Molopaque, Timbira,
Nheengaibas, Xumanas.
214 CAHITA CALIFORNIAN LANGUAGES.
Vocabulario dos Indies das Aldeas de S. Pedro e Almeida, pp. 30, 31.
Dialectos de Sao Pedro, pp. 31, 32.
Dialectos de Almeida, p. 33.
Notas para esclarecimentos, pp. 34, 35.
Index, p. 36.
On page 34 the following curious note occurs : " Os idiomas das tribus Banebas,
e Uruquenas tern alguns nomes Hebreos, como por exemplo Joa Jacob Jacobi
Tome Tomequi I>avidii Joanau Marianu. O que indica que os seus povos
na antiguidade tiverao communica9ao com os Hebreos." Credat Judeeus !
CAHITA
[Manual para administrar a los Indios del idioma Cahita los santos Sacramentos.
.... Compuesto por un Sacerdote de la Compaiiia de JESVS, Missionero en las de
la Provincia de Zynaloa. Mexico, 1741, 16mo, pp. 168. (A portion is in Spanish
and Cahita, very useful for studying the construction of the language.) W. W. T.]
Die Lautveranderung aztekischer Worter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von JOH. CARL ED. BUSCHMANN. Aus den
Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem Jahre
1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.
CAIRNOS.
FRANC. BE LA PUENTE, Catechismo de la Doctrina Christiana en el Idioma de los
Indios Cairnos, Publ. por el Fr. Mateo Anguiano, Capuch., 1703, 4to. Mentioned
in Barcia's edition of Pinelo.
CALIFORNIA^ LANGUAGES.
Philologie ; Diversite des Langues (in California and Oregon). Chap. XIII,
pp. 386402 of: DITFLOT DE MOFRAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Californies et de la Mer vermeille. Paris, Bertrand, 1844.
M. DE MOFEAS gives, on pp. 391 396 of Vol. II, translations of the Lord's
Prayer in the following languages, viz. : Gruiluco, Mission S. Francisco Solano ;
Choconyen, Bay del Sacramento ; Jonkiousme, Mission S. Rafael ; Vallee de
Tulares ; Mission S. Clara ; Tatche or Telami, Mission S. Antonio de Padua ;
Mission S. Ines ; Mission S. Fernando ; Mission S. Julien ; Mission S. Juan
Capistrano ; Mission S. Luys Bey de Francia ; Mission S. Diego ; Mission S.
Francisco de Borgia ; Mission S. Gertrudis ; Mission S. Ignacio de Loyola.
Numerals 1 10 (Missions del Carmelo, La Soledad, San Luiz, San Juan,
Pima, San Gabriel, Indiens Azteques), in the Tableau comparatif des Nonas de
CAMACANS CHEPEWYAN. 215
Nombre. Vol. II, p. 401, of : DFFLOT DE MOFRAS, Exploration du Territoire de
1' Oregon des Californies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees
1840-42. 2 vols. Paris, 8vo.
CAMACANS.
[A. F. POTT, Die qninare nnd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 72.
W. W. T.]
CANADA.
The correct title of Ledesme's work is : Doctrine Chrestienne du P. Ledesma,
de la Comp. de Jesus ; traduite en langue Canadienne par un Pere de la meme
Compagnie (le Pere Breboeuf). Rouen, Richard, 1630, pp. 28, 8vo. Reprinted in
Chaplain's Voyage in 1632.
[The numerals 110 are given in RUDIGEK, GTrundriss einer Geschichte der
menschlichen Sprache. Thl. I, p. 123 (Leipzig, 1782) ; and in A. F. POTT, Die
quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode, p. 65. W. W. T.]
CAKEBS.
[The numerals of Essequibo (from VAN HETJVEL) are given by M. Gallatin, in
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, Table to p. 114.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
69-71. W. W. T.]
CAYUBABAS.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 74. W. W. T.]
CHEPEWYAN.
[The first two sentences of what is said under this head apply, not to the
Chepewyans, but to the Chippeways. The former, so far from being a courtly
language, is one of the rudest and most uncouth that is spoken on the continent.
The blunder was probably introduced by Jiilg (see Carver, Chap. XVII), as Vater
well knew the difference between the two languages (Mithridates, Vol. Ill,
part 3, p. 419).
The last sentence also is not quite correct. It was not a " theory" of Gallatin's
that the Chepewyan belongs to the Athapascan family of languages. He gave the
name of Aihapascas to the tribes who speak the class of languages at the head of
which stands the Chepewyan, from Athapasca Lake, which stands in the middle
of their territory (Archseologia Americana, Vol. II, p. 17).
216 CHEHALIS CHJAPANECAS.
I would therefore propose to substitute the following heading :
"The Chepewyans belong to the stock to which M. Gallatin has given the
common name of Athapascans. They call themselves Sah-issah-dinne (Rising-
sun People), and extend from Hudson's Bay on the east, between the Eskimos
on the north and the Algonkins on the south, to Lake Athapasca on the west."
W. W. T.]
CHEHALIS, SELISH.
Vocabulary of, in : The North-west Coast ; or, Three Years at Shoal- Water Bay.
Containing Personal Adventures, a Description of the Coast from Columbia River to
the Straits of Fuca, and an Account of Indian Customs, Superstitions, Music, etc.,
and of the Vocabularies of the Chehalis and Chinook Languages, and of the
" Jargon" of the North-west. With a general Description of Washington Ter-
ritory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and Illustrations, 12mo. New York, 1857.
CHEROKEE.
\Tsa-la-gi Tsu-le-hi-sa-u-hi, Cherokee Phoenix. Edited by ELIAS BOUDINOT.
Printed weekly by Isaac H. Harris, for the Cherokee Nation. New Echota, Vol. I,
No. 1, Feb. 21, 1828, to Vol. V, No. 52, May 31, 1834 ; folio. (Stopped then, to
collect funds ; perhaps not resumed.)
Besides a great number of public documents, passages from Scripture, hymns, and
other pieces in the Cherokee language and character, it contains the following :
On the Cherokee Alphabet, Vol. I, No. 1.
On the Cherokee Numerals, Vol. I, No. 2.
Questions on the Language, by C. S. Rafinesqus, Vol. I, No. 22.
Answers to Prof. Rafinesque's Questions, by W. [Rev. S. A. Worcester], Vol. I,
Nos. 23, 25, 27.
Long Words. By the same. Vol. II, No. 1.
Inflections of Cherokee verbs : tsi-ne-ga, I speak, by Gawolihoski, Vol. II,
Nos. 33, 34, 35 ; ga-lu-i-Jia, I am tying, by the Rev. S. A. Worcester, Vol. II,
Nos. 37, 41.
Cherokee Advocate. Published [weekly] at Tahlequah, Cherokee Nation. Vol. I,
No. 1, Sept. 26, 1844, to Vol. IX, No, 22, Dec. 28, 1853 ; folio. The first editor
was W. P. Ross. (The publication may have continued longer, but No. 22 of
Vol. IX is the last of the copy in Mr. Peter Force's library, Washington.)
This newspaper, like the preceding, contains a great many papers in the
Cherokee language, which would be extremely valuable to the student of the
language. W. W. T.]
CHIAPANECAS.
FE. DOMINGO DE LAVA, Obispo, Vocabulario de la Lengua de Chiapa. Men-
tioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
CH1NUK CHIPPEWAY. 21
CHINUK.
Numerals 1 10 in the Tableau comparatif cles Noms de Nornbre. Vol.. II,
p. 101, of: DUFLOT DE MOFKAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Calif ornies et de la Mer vermeille, exe'cutee pendant les annees 1840-42. Paris,
1844, 2 vols., 8vo.
[Lieut. Gr. F. EMMONS gives a brief Klatsop Vocabulary in : Schoolcraft's Hist.,
etc., of Indian Tribes of the United States, Vol. Ill, pp. 223, 224.
The following items are to be added to those on the " Jargon," which should
have been put by themselves :
Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Language of Oregon [English- French Jargon].
Washington, 1853, 8vo, pp. 22. (Printed by the Smithsonian Institution for private
distribution.)
A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon [English- Chinook and Chinook -
Engh'sh] ; to which is added numerous Conversations, thereby enabling any person
to speak the Chinook correctly. 3rd edit. Portland, O. T., published by S. J.
McCormick, 1856, 24mo, pp. 24. -W. W. T.]
A Vocabulary of, in : The North- west Coast ; or, Three Years at Shoal- Water
Bay. Containing Personal Adventures, a description of the Coast from Columbia
River to the Straits of Fuca, and an account of Indian Customs, Superstitions,
Music, etc., and of the Vocabularies of the Chehalis and Chinook Languages, and
of the " Jargon" of the North-west. With a general Description of Washington
Territory, and Advice to Emigrants. Map and Illustrations, 12mo. Neiv York, 1857.
CHIPPEWAY.
[EVANS, JAMES, The Speller and Interpreter in Indian and English, for the use of
the Mission Schools. In the Odjibwa tongue. New York, 1831, 12mo.
H. R. SCHOOLCEAFT, Summary Narrative of an Exploratory Expedition to the
Sources of the Mississippi River in 1820 ; resumed and completed by the Discovery
of its Origin in Itasca Lake, in 1832, etc. Philadelphia, Lippincott, Grambo, and
Co., 1855, 8vo, pp. 596.
This work contains " Examination of the Elementary Structure of the
Algonquin Language, as it appears in the Chippeway Tongue," pp. 442 447 ;
and also the four Lectures previously published in the " Expedition to Itasca
Lake" and " Oneota," pp. 453515.
The Rev. G-. A. BELCOURT has composed an elaborate " Dictionnaire Fra^ais-
Sauteux," which will probably be published by the Smithsonian Institution.
W. W. T.]
A Vocabulary of Chippeway Words, in H. W. LONGFELLOW'S Song of Hiawatha.
Boston, 1855, 8vo.
F F
218 CHIRIGUANA COMANCHE.
CHIRIGUANA (GUARANI).
P. DIEGO SAMANIEGO, Yocabulario de la Lengua Chiriguana. Mentioned in
Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
CHOCHA.
Dramas allegoricos en Lengua Chocha, by the Fray MAETIN ACEVEEEDO, native
of San Ildefonso, in the province of Oaxaca, Mexico. He left his MSS. in the con-
vent of Oaxaca (De Souza).
CHOCTAW.
[There are some remarks on the language by JAMES HATTGHTON, in the
Massachusetts Historical Collection, Vol. IX, first series, pp. 9597.
The Eev. CYETJS BYINGTON wrote, many years ago, a Grammar of the Choctaw
Language, which he is now engaged in revising for publication. W. W. T.]
COCAMAS.
(? SOUTH AMERICA-GRAN CHACO.)
P. RAYMUNDO DE S A - CEUZ, Yocabulario de la Lengua de los Indies Cocamas.
Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
COCHIMI.
[F. S. CLAVIGEEO, Storia della California. Venizia, 1789, 2 vols., 8vo. Gram-
matical Notices, Vol. I, pp. 110, 264. W. W. T.]
COCO-MABICOPAS.
[That this might be an Apache people was a conjecture of M. Gallatin's, from
their word for " man" (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society, Vol. II,
p. xcii) ; but now that we have Apache vocabularies, the Coco-Maricopa language
is seen to belong to an entirely different stock. W. W. T.I
COMANCHE.
Names of Comanche Chiefs and Numerals (120), pp. 273, 274 of "Wai.
BOLLAEET'S Observations on the Indian Tribes in Texas," in Vol. II of: The
Journal of the London Ethnological Society. London, 1850, 8vo.
CORA DAKOTA. 219
CORA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
89, 90.-W.W. T.]
Die Lautverauderung aztekischer Worter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von JOH. GAEL ED. BUSCHMANN. Aus
den Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.
CREOLE, NEGRO-ENGLISH.
[R. SOUTHEY gives a sketch of the language in an article on the Negro-English
New Testament : Quarterly Review, Yol. XLIII. London, 1830, pp. 553564.
W. W. T.]
CUMANAS.
The correct title of Yangues' work is : Principios y Reglas de la Lengua Cum-
nianagota general en varias iiaciones que habitan en la provincia de Cummana en las
Indias Occidentals, con un Diccionario. By Man. de Yangues. Burgos, 1683, 4to.
CUNACUNA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. Numerals 1 10, from
BALBI, p. 72, W. W. T.]
DAKOTA.
[P. Du PONCEAU, Comparative Table of the Sioux or Nadowessie Stock, com-
pi-ehending the "Winnebago. In Note 16 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar. (Mass.
Hist. Collections, Yol. X, second series, p. 151.)
H. C, GABELENTZ, Grammatik der Dakota Sprache. Leipzig, 1852, 8vo, pp. 64.
P. HUNFALVI, A Dakota nyelv. Kiilon lenyomat a m. acad. ertesitobol. (The
Dakota Language, extracted from the Bulletins of the Hungarian Academy.) Pesth,
1856, 8vo, pp. 55.
Dakota TawaxitJcu Kin, or The Dakota Friend, published [monthly] by the
Dakota Mission. G. H. POND, editor. St. Paul, Minnesota. Yol. I, Nos. 112,
Nov. 1850 to Oct. 1851, 4to. Yol. II, Nos. 18, Jan. 1852 to Aug. 1852, fol.
(The publication was suspended at this point, on account of Indian troubles.)
The Dakota Friend contains many articles in the Dakota language, besides
specimens of the language in short sentences, with interlinear English transla-
tions, etc.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
67, 68. W. W. T.]
DA1UEN ESKIMOS.
DARIEN.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 72.
W. W. T.]
DELAWARE.
Ad Losskiel, p. 64. The German original was published at Barby, 1789, 8vo.
Delaware and Iroquois words, pp. 29, 30.
Six Delaware words, on page 125 of " General Parsons' Discoveries made in the
Western Country." Article XI (pp. 119127) of: Memoirs of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, Part 1. Boston, 1793, 4to.
DIEGENOS.
[This name means the Indians of San Diego, so that there is no such name as
Deguinos. Their language belongs to what I have termed the Yuma tongue,
dialects of which are spoken by various tribes on the Rio Colorado and Gila, e. g.,
the Mohave, Cuchan, and Coco-Maricopa. All the vocabularies (except the Diego
itself) here enumerated by Dr. Ludewig belong to different other stocks.
Dr. BUSCHMANN'S paper on the Kizh and Netela has been published separately
under the following title : Die Sprachen Kizh und Netela von Neu Californicn,
dargestellt von Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann (aus den Abhandl. d. Konigl. Akad. d.
Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1855). Berlin, 185G, pp. 31, 4to. W. W. T.]
ESKELEN.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
63, 64. W. W. T.]
ESKIMOS.
Schediasma hocce etymologico-philologicum prodromum Americano Grronlandicum
in patronis appropriatum insinnat Twarns Abel. Havnice, 1783, 4to.
Vocabulary of the English, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 61 89 of:
Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North-West Passage,
aad of a Residence in the Arctic Regions during the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832,
1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., etc., Captain in the Royal Navy.
Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. London,
Webster, 1835, 4to, pp. xii, 120, cxliv-, cii. 20 plates.
Dialogues in the English, Danish, and Esquimaux Languages. Pp. 91 104 of:
Appendix to the Narrative of a Second Voyage in Search of a North- West Passage,
ETCHEMINS GORGOTOQUIENSES. 221
and of a Residence in the Arctic Regions during the Years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832,
1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., etc., Captain in the Royal Navy.
Including the Reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N.,
F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. ; and the Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. London,
Webster, 1835, 4to, pp. xii, 120, cxliv, cii. 20 plates.
Remarks on the Eskimo Language, in the article " Eskimo," by HOSSLER, Ersch
und Gruber's Encyclopaedic, 1 Sect,, Band 38, pp. 108 132.
Verzeichniss der in Labrador befindlichen Landsaugethiere, Wasservogel, etc., in :
Miinchner Grelehrte Anzeigen, 1844, Nos. 52, 53 (with the names in the Eskimo
language) .
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 2, 3.-W. W. T.]
Greenland Numerals (I 10, 1630), pp. 208, 209, of P. C. SOTJTHERLAND, on
the Esquimaux, in Vol. IV of the Journal of the London Ethnological Society.
London, 1854, 8vo.
" Die Sprache der Eskimos auf Grronland," article by W. SCHOTT, in : Magazin
fur die Literatur des Auslands. Berlin, 1856, Nos. 38, 39.
ETCHEMINS.
[FRED. KIDDER, Vocabulary of the Openango or Passamaquoddy Language, in :
Schoolcraft's History, Condition, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. V, p. 690. W. W. T.]
FLATHEADS.
[J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages, in : Proceedings
of Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850, pp. 199 206. W. W. T.]
EOX ISLANDS.
[Here, too, should be inserted the title of Sauer's work (see under " Aleutans,"
p. 4), as Billings's vocabulary was taken in Sithanak, and corrected in TJnalashka,
both of which belong to the Fox Islands. W. W. T.]
GE, GEIKO.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 73.
-W. W. T.]
GORGOTOQUIENSES.
P. GTASPAR Ruiz, Aleman, Gramatica de la Lengua Gforgotoquiense en el Peru.
Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
222 GUARANI HUASTECA.
GTJARANI.
P. ANT. Ruiz DE MONTOYA, L'Arte, Bocabulario, Catecismo y Tesoro de la
Lengua Guarani de la Provincia del Paraguay y Eio de la Plata. Madrid, 1639.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp. 6,
7, 60, 61, 301 ; on the pronouns, p. 109, note.W. W. T.]
GUARAPUAVA.
A district in Brazil, inhabited by the Games, Votoroes, Dorins,
and Xocrens. The idiom used by these Indians is probably
Guarani.
Words and Grammatical Notices, pp. 53, 54 of : Mcmoria sobre o Descobriniento
e Colonia de Guarapuava. Escripta pelo Padre FRANCISCO DOS CHAGAS LIMA. Pp.
4364 of: Kevista Trimensal, etc., Tomo IV. Eio de Janeiro, 1842.
GUATUSOS.
" Les Indiens Guatusos du Nicaragua, par E. G. SQUIEE," in : Athenaeum Fran-
vais, 22 Dec., 1855 ; and also in : Nouvelles Annales des Voyages.
GUAYCUUU.
A few words on p. 31 of : Ilistoria dos Indios Cavalleiros, ou da Na<jao Guaycui-u.
Escripta no real presidio de Coimbra, por FBANCISCO RODEIGTTES DO PEADE. Pp.
21 47 of: Revista Trimensal do Institute do Rio de Janeiro, Tomo I. Eio de
Janeiro, 1839.
GUYANA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahhnethode. On the numerals, pp.
09 VI. W. W. T.]
HAIDAH.
Numerals 1 to 10, in the Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre. Vol. II, p.
401, of: DUFLOT DE MOFEAS, Exploration duTerritoire de 1' Oregon, des Californies
et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42. Paris, 2 vols., 1844,
8vo.
HUASTECA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
92 ; 011 the names of the fingers, p. 301. W. W. T.]
223
HUDSON'S BAY.
[The term " Hudson's Bay Indians " is, properly, only another name for Chepe-
wyans. The vocabulary of Chappell therefore, which is Cree, or Knisteneaux, does
not be'long here. W. W. T.]
HUEONS, WYANDOTS.
Six Wyandot Words, on p. 125 of " General Parsons' Discoveries made in the
Western Country." Art. XI (pp. 119 127) of: Memoirs of the American Academy
of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, Part 1. Boston, 1793.
[A MS. Wyandot Grammar of 213 pages, small 4to, is in the possession of Prof.
J. W. G-ibbs, of Yale College. W. W. T.]
A community of Indians of the Huron-Iroquois family (the same with the " Five
Nations" and " Six Nations"), living at Caughiiawaga on the St. Lawrence, nearly
opposite Lachine, and a few miles above Montreal.
The settlement dates back to the year 1680, when Louis XV made a grant of it
to these Indians. They are advanced in civilization, and, from their staunch
loyalty and good services in the troublous year 1837, are in good favour with the
British power.
A Vocabulary, consisting of the numerals to above 100, and upwards of forty
of the commonest words and brief sentences, is in the possession of THOMAS H.
GLADSTONE, Stockwell, near London, collected by him in July, 1856.
INKTJLTJCHLTJATS.
[These belong not to the "Eskimo," but to the Kenai stock, as is correctly stated
by Jiilg. Dele the heading " Kangjulit" the dialects of which class (spoken by the
Tshnagmjuts and by the Kwichpaks and Kuskokwimjuts, see p. 98) are of the
Eskimo family.
Lieutenant ZAGOSKIN'S Inkilik and Inkalit-jugehmt Vocabularies are printed in
the following works :
I. Zapiski Kusskago Geographitsheskago Obshtshestva (Memoirs of the
Eussian Geographical Society), Vol. II. St. Petersburg ; 1847, 8vo (I cannot
give the page of the 1st edition) ; 2nd edition, St. Petersburg, 1849, pp. 246
249.
II. Denkschriften der Russischen Geographischen Gesellschaft zu St. Peters-
burg, Vol. I (German translation of the above, containing Vols. I and II of
the original). Weimar, 1849, 8vo, pp. 354358.
III. A. Erman, Archiv fur Wissenschaftliche Kunde von Russland, Vol.
VII. Berlin, 1849, 8vo (from the Russian, by W. SCHOTT), pp. 481487.
IV. J. C. E. Buschmann, Der Athapaskische Sprachstamin. Berlin, 1856,
4to, pp. 269 312. W. W. T.]
224 IROQUOIS KADJAK.
IROQTTOIS.
Ad Losskiel, p. 87. The German original was published at Barly, 1789, 8vo.
Delaware and Iroquois words, pp. 29, 30.
IOWAY.
[W. HAMILTON and S. M. IRVIN, An Elementary Book of the loway Language,
with an English translation. loivay and Sac Mission Press, Indian Territory, 1843.
The title of the Grammar by these gentlemen should read as follows :
W. HAMILTON and S. M. IEYIN, An loway Grammar, illustrating the Principles
of the Language used by the loway, Otoe, and Missouri Indians. loivay and Sac
Mission Press, 1848, IGmo, pp. 152. W. W. T.]
KACHIQUEL.
The following three are mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known
to be printed :
FR. DoMiNao DE Yico, Dominicano, Vocabularios i Arte de la Lengua Cachiquel
i de la Vera Paz i de otras seis.
FR. BENITO DE YILLACANAS, Dominicano, Arte i Yocabulario de la Lengua Cachi-
quel (mentioned likewise by Clavigero) .
FR. ALONSO DE BETANCUR, Arte i Vocabulario del Idioma de Guatemala
(Quiche?).
PHILIPPUS Ruiz DEL CORRAL, Arte y Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Indios de
Guatemala, llamada Cachiquel (communicated by L. Leon de Rosny).
Numerals, in : Nouvelles Annales des Voyages, Vol. IV (1840), pp. 836.
KADJAK.
[The reference should not have been omitted to the longer Vocabulary in Bar and
Helmersen's Beitrage (97 words, by Von Wrangell), in the table to p. 259 of Vol. I.
The title of Venjaminov's work should read :
IVAN VENJAMINOV, Zamjetshania o Koloshenskom u Kadjakskom Jazykakh.
St. Petersburg, 1846, 8vo.
Zagoskin's Kadjak Vocabulary (made up from those of Billings and Lisiansky)
is printed also in the Memoirs of the Eussian Geographical Society (Russian), 2nd
edition, Vol. II, pp. 250266; and in the German translation, Vol. I, pp. 359
374.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 61.
W. W. T.]
KAUITIS KONKA. 225
KA11ITIS.
PR. BERNARDO MANETENSE, Capuch., Catecliismo para los Karitis, Indies de
Brasil ; en Portugues i Indio. 1709, 8vo. Printed, according to Barcia-Pinelo.
KINAI.
That Zagoskin speaks of four dialects of this language is probably a mistake.
At all events, he gives Vocabularies only of two, the InJcilik and Inkalit-jugelnut,
These were first printed in the Memoirs of the Eussian Geographical Society, Vol.
II. St. Petersburg, 1847 (2nd edition, pp. 246 -249). W. W. T.]
Ueber die Verwandschaft der Kinai Idiome des Russischen Nordamerika's mit
clem grossen athapaskischen Sprachstamme. Paper by J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, read
before the Berlin Academy on May 18, 1854 (extract in the Monatsbericht der
K. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mai, 1854, pp. 231236).
KIRIRI.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
72.W. W. T.]
KNISTENOS.
[EDW. CHAPPELL, Narrative of a Voyage to Hudson's Bay in H.M.S. " Rosa-
mond ;" containing some Account of the North-eastern Coast of America, and of
the Tribes inhabiting that remote Region. London, J. Mawman, 1817, 8vo, pp.
256279.
Say's Vocabularies, appended to Long's Expedition, do not comprise the Knis-
teno. The Vocabulary appended by Pickering to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar is
made up from Harmon and Mackenzie. W. W. T.]
KOLOSHES.
[J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, Die Pima Sprache und die Sprachen der Koloschen (from
Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1856, pp. 321
432). Berlin, 1857, 4to. Contains a variety of observations on the language and
its affinities, pp. 380389, and a comparative table of alphabets, with an index to
the same, pp. 398427.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
62, 63.-W. W. T.]
KONZA.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
67. W. W. T.]
G G
226 KUSKOKWIMJUTS MAYA.
KTJSKOKWIMJUTS.
[Zagoskin's TsTinagmjut and Kwikhpak-KiisJcoJcwimjut Vocabularies are printed
also in the Memoirs of the Russian Geographical Society (Russian), Yol. II, 2nd
edition, pp. 250266, and in the German translation, Vol. I, pp. 359374.
W. W. T.]
KUTCHIN.
[J. A. ISBESTEE, A short Vocabulary of the Loucheux Language, in : Proceed-
ings of the Philological Society, Vol. IV. London, 1850, p. 185.
Also in : R. G-. LATHAM'S Natural History of the Varieties of Man. London,
1850, 8vo, pp. 297, 298. "W. W. T.]
LIPANS, LAPANAS.
Indians of Texas, belonging to the Apache stock. They hunt
over the country between the Guadalupe and the Rio Grande.
A few Lipan Words, p. 278 of: WM. BOLLAERT'S Observations on the Indian
Tribes in Texas, in Vol. II of the Journal of the London Ethnological Society.
London, 1850, 8vo.
MAHA, OMAHA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare imd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p.
67. -W. W. T.]
MAIPUKES.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
14, 15. W.W. T.]
MAYA.
FE. ALONSO DE LA SOLAN A Franciscano, Vocabulario muy copioso de la Lengua
de Jucatan o Maia i Epaiiola. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo.
FR. Luis DE VILLALPAISTDO, Franciscano, Arte i Vocabulario de la Lengua de
Yucatan. This work and the following are mentioned by both Barcia-Pinelo and
Clavigero, but not known to be printed.
FR. BERNARDINO DE VALLADOLID, Orbis Pictus, in Latin, Spanish, and Maia.
" Un Tomo como al que esta pintado, los ponia su nombre Latino, Castellano i el
que le correspondia en esta lengua de los Indios."
MAME. 22 7
FR. JUAN DE ACEBEDO, Franciscano, Arte breve le la Lengua Jucatheca. Men-
tioned by Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
FE. ANTONIO DE CIUDAD REAL, Vocabulario Castellan-Jucateco i Jucateco-
Castellan, i un Calepino en 6 Tomos cada uno de 200 pliegos. According to
Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero, but not known to be printed.
GASPAE ANTONIO, Yocabulario de la Lengua de Jucatan.
FE. JUAN COEONEL, Franciscano, redujo el Arte antiguo de la Lengua Jucateca a
mas brevedad i clardad. This and the preceding are mentioned by Barcia-Piuelo,
but not known to be printed.
[The American Bible Society, in New York, possesses a MS. Dictionary Maya-
Spanish-English and English-Spanish-Maya, compiled by the Rev. JOHN KINGKDON,
who died in Monrovia, on the coast of Africa, in the year 1855 ; also a MS. trans-
lation of Beltran's Grammar, by the same.
Ruz, in his Preface, speaks of a Grammar by J. NAECISO, of Herranz and Quiros,
printed at Madrid in the year 1838.
A. GALLATIN treats of the numerals in : Transactions of the American Ethno-
logical Society, Yol. I, pp. 5155, and Table to p. 114.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode, pp. 9396 ; names of the
fingers, p. 301.
C. B. HELLEE, Reisen in Mexiko. Leipzig, 1853, 8vo. Grammatical Remarks,
pp. 381385 ; Numerals and a few other words, pp. 386388 W. W. T.]
MAME.
DON FELIPE Ruiz COEEAL, Arte i Vocabulario de la Lengua de Guatemala.
Printed according to Nic. Antonio and Barcia-Pinelo, and called in the Mithridates
III, 2, p. 10, " Yocabularium Pocornamum." L. Leon de Rosny communicates the
same title, but designates the language as Kacchiquel. (See under.)
Lavicos is called Larios by Barcia, and his " Arte" stated to be printed in 1607.
An "Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Mam" is said to have been written by a
" PADEE REINOSO," which was printed at Mexico in 1644. No copies known in
European libraries. De Souza quotes a few words from it, viz. :
Chi, soft.
A, water ; ha or haa, in the Maya, Kachiqucl, etc.
Mama, old.
Man, father.
Yuiih, woman.
Kol, evil.
Kih, sun ; Maya, kin ; Quiche, kir ; Kachiquel, keile.
228 MAN DANS MEXICAN.
MANDANS.
" Details sur la Nation des Indiens Mandans, extraits du Voyage dans 1'interieur
de 1'Amerique du Nord, execute pendant les annees 1832, 1833, 1834, par le Prince
MAX. DE NETJWIED," in : Annales des Voyages, 1841, Vol. IV, pp. 5 47.
Mandan Vocabulary, pp. 348352 of: Die Indianer Nord America's und die
wahrend eines achtjahrigen Auf'enthalts unter den wildesten Hirer Stamme erlebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser nach
der Natur entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissel, Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.
MARAMOMISIOS.
P. MANUEL DE VEGA, Catecismo, Diccionario i Gramatica de la Lengua de los
Maramomisios, Indies del Brasil. According to Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to
be printed.
MASSACHUSETTS.
[The Comparative Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar was
compiled not by " T. Say," but by the editor, Dr. J. Pickering, who derived the
Massachusetts vocabulary from Eliot. W. W. T.]
MATLAZINGA.
FE. ANDRES DE CASTEO, Franciscano, Vocabulario, doctrina Christiana i Sermones
en Lengua Matlazinga. Arte de aprender las Lenguas Mexicana i Matlazinga. Ac-
cording to Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero, but not known to be printed.
MESSISSAUGAS.
[Here, too, the preceding (Massachusetts) remark applies. The few words of this
language are taken from Smith Barton. W. W. T.]
MEXICAN.
Ad p. 112, line 8, MOLINA : reprinted in 1606, 4to, according to Barcia's edition
of Leon Pinelo, where it is also stated that HEENANDO DE UIBAS, an Indian, assisted
M olina in compiling his dictionary.
Ad p. 113, line 16, SQTJIEE, : and pp. 216, 217 of the German translation by
Karl Andree. Leipzig, Lorck, 1856, 8vo.
MEXICAN. 229
Ad p. 113, line 37, MOLINA : reprinted ibid. 1578, 8vo, according to Barcia-
Pinelo.
Ad p. 115, line 8, KANGEL : mentioned as printed in Barcia-Pinelo.
The work of Paredes (p. 114) is, properly speaking, only an extract, not a new
edition of the " Arte" by Carochi.
TTJPIN, CHAEL. DE, Arte Novissima de Lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1753, 4to.
Numerals (121, 30, 800, 8000), Tabla arimetica comparada de los Mejicanos y
Tarascos. P. 68 of : D. BENITO MAEIA DE Moxos, cartas Mejicanas, 2 da edicion.
Geneva, PUlas, s.a. (1839), 8vo.
Numerals 1 10 in the Tableau cornparatif des Noms de Nombre, Vol. II,
p. 401, of: DUFLOT DE MOFEAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des Cali-
fornies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris,
1844, 8vo.
An article by Mr. AUBIN, of Paris, " Langue Americaine ; Langue, Litterature et
Ecriture Mexicaines," in : Encyclopedic du XIX me Siecle, Tome XXVI, Supple-
ment, pp. 500507.
An article on Aztec Picture-writing by E. O. SQTTIEK, in : New York Tribune,
Nov. 24, 1852.
Die Spuren der Aztekischen Sprache im noerdlichen Mexico, l te Abtheilung.
Paper by J. C. E. BTTSCHMANN, read before the Berlin Academy of Sciences,
Feb. 9. 1854.
The same. 2 te Abtheilung. Kead April 27, 1854.
These papers are now printing, and will form a supplementary volume to the
Transactions of the Berlin Academy of 1854.
G-rammatische Darstellung von vier Sprachen des nord-westhchen Mexico's.
Paper by J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, read before the Berlin Academy, May 22, 1854.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
97, 98 ; on the names of the fingers, p. 301.
C. B. HELLER, Reisen in Mexiko. The numerals and a few other words, pp.
385 388. W. W. T.]
M. L. LEON DE ROSNY, of Paris, announces a new edition of the Dictionary of
Molina, preceded by a Grammar of the Mexican language, which will be published
in 4to, under the following title : Vocabulario de la Lengua Mejicana por el P. Fr.
Alonzo de Molina ; nueva edicion publicada segun el original impreso en Mejico,
con una version francesa, i precedido de un cornpendio de la grama'tica Mejicana i
de observaciones sobre los diferentes idiomas de Mejico, por L. Lon de Eosny.
(Esta nueva edicion se publicara en cuarto a dos columnas, con magnificos typos y
en papel solido.)
The following works are mentioned hi Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but are not
known to be printed :
FE. ANTONIO DAVILA, Dominicano, Arte para saber la Lengua Mexicana, reduciendo
sur elegancias a metodo.
230 MICMAC MIXTECA.
FK. JUAN BAPTISTA, Franciscano, Vocabulario ecclesiastico en Lengua Mexicans.
FE. ANTONIO DE LOS EEYES, Dominicano, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana, con
algunas curiosidades importantes (chronologicas).
FE. JTJAN FUCHEE, Franciscano, Arte de la Lengua Mexicana.
D. EUGENIC ROMEEO, Canonico de Huaxaga, Arte para aprender las Lenguas
Mexicana i Totonaca.
FE. ALONSO DE HEEEEEA, Franciscano, Diccionario Mexicano.
CLAVIGEEO, in his Catalogue of Grammars and Dictionaries of the Languages of
New Spain, mentions :
FEANC. XIMENES, Grammar and Dictionary.
BEEN. DE SAHAGUN, Gl-rammar and Dictionary. (Contradicted by Barcia, who
designates it as being a Latin grammar.)
BEEN. MEECADO, Grrammar.
ANT. DAVILA PADILLA, Grrammar.
BAENABA PAEZ, Grrammar.
ANT. DE TOYAE MONTEZUMA, Grammar.
Jos. PEEEZ, Grrammar, printed.
G-AETANO DE CABEEEA, Grammar.
ANTON. COETES CANAL, Grammar, printed.
MICMAC.
[For " Terre Neuve Island," read Newfoundland.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Indian Languages, in : Pro-
ceedings of Philological Society of London, Vol. IV, pp. 104 112. W. W. T.]
MILCOCAYAC.
\Mi~kokayak is an error of Jiilg's, which is corrected in his errata. W. W. T.]
MINSI.
[The Comparative Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards' s Mohegan Grrammar (as
observed before) is not by Say, but by Pickering, who obtained the few words of
this dialect from Smith Barton and Heckewelder. W. W. T.]
MIXE.
AG. QUINTAN A, Gramatica y Diccionario (Clavigero).
MIXTECA.
FE. DOMINGO DE SANTA MAEIA o DE HINOJOSA, Dominicano, Arte i Ensenanza
de la Lengua Misteca. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known
to be printed.
MOCOROSI MOHEGAN. 231
Autos Sacramentales en Lengiia Mixteca, by the Fray MARTIN ACEVEDO, native
of San Ildefonso, in the province of Oaxaca, Mexico. He left his MSS. in the
Convent of Oaxaca (De Souza).
MOCOROSI.
The title, as given by Barcia, is : Arte y Yocabulario de la Lengua Mocorosi.
Mexico, 1599, 4to.
MOHAWK.
[Many additional words are given by M. G-allatin, from E. S. D wight, in the
" Supplementary Vocabulary," Archseologia Americana, II, pp. 383 397.
Rev. A. ELLIOT'S Vocabulary is also reprinted (omitting the numerals) in
Schoolcraft's Hist., etc., of Indian Tribes, Yol. II, pp. 482493.
Rev. Mr. Hawley, Mohawk Numbers, from Pres. Stiles' s MSS. ; in Collections of
Massachusetts Historical Society, Yol. IX, first series, p. 137. W. W. T.]
MOHEGAN.
[The Vocabulary of 45 words in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar is
extracted by the editor, Dr. Pickering, from the Grammar itself. He also gives
another (of 11 words) from Rev. "W. Jenks.
For " T. Say's," in the last paragraph of p. 124, substitute " the Editor's."
The full title of the "American Museum," mentioned on p. 125, is "The
American Museum ; or, Repository of Ancient and Modern Fugitive Pieces, etc.,
Prose and Poetical, Vol. V. Philadelphia : Printed by Mathew Carey, 1789." 8vo.
It was in this volume (pp. 22 25, 141 144) that the edition of Edwards's
Grammar, printed at Philadelphia, in 1789, as stated by Dr. Ludewig on p. 124,
appeared. The words " Columbus, May, 1787, pp. 672," should be erased. They
are derived from the Mithridates (III, 3, p. 391), where they stand thus : " Columb.
May 1787. S. 672." My friend Peter Force, Esq., of Washington, whom I con-
sulted as to what this could mean, has solved the riddle thus. The Columbian
Magazine, of the year 1787, contains on page 672 a notice of the death, on the 12th
September, of "old Zachariah, regent of the Mohegan tribe of Indians, in the
100th year of his age." Among the memoranda of one of the authors of the
Mithridates relating to the Mohegans was a reference to this passage, which
accidentally got inserted in the place where we find it in their work, with the
typographical error of "May" for Mag. Ludewig, in attempting to make it more
intelligible, rendered it still worse.
The " Specimen of the Moheagan Language" in the Massachusetts Historical
Society's Collections, Vol. IX, first series, is simply a vocabulary. W. W. T.]
232 MUNDHUCUS NANTICOHE.
MUNDRUCUS.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 73. W. W. T.]
MUSKOGHEE.
[The Vocabularies in Q-allatin's Synopsis are found on pp. 307367, 382396,
405, 406. W. W. T.]
MUTSUNS.
[A tribe of Indians living in the country around the Mission of
San Juan Bautista, in Monterey Co., California. Their lan-
guage appears to be identical with that of the Mission of La
Soledad, on the Salinas River (see under " Diegenos/' p. 63),
and with that of the Rumsens or Achastlians of the Mission of
San Carlos, near the city of Monterey.
P. FELIPE DE ARROYO, Alfabetico Arroyuelo do espresiones de estos Indios
Mutsunes de San Juan Bautista. Afio de 1815, fol., pp. 94. A MS. collection of
words and phrases ; to which are appended catechetical exercises, forms of prayer,
and specimens of native music, belonging to the library of the Bishop of Monterey.
The Smithsonian Institution is having a copy made of it. W. W. T.]
MUYSCA.
Ad p. 129, line 25, CHARLES DE PARAVEY. The title is " Memoire sur 1'Origine
Japonnaise, Arabe et Basque des Peuples du Plateau de Bogota ;" not " Memoria
sobre el origen Japones," etc.
MEDRANO, Arte de la Lengua del Nuevo Eejno de Granada. Mentioned in
Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode, On the numerals, pp.
88, 89. W. W. T.]
NAGRANDANS.
[E. G-. SQUIER'S Vocabulary is reprinted in the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Yol. Ill, pp. 101, 106-110, 112, 113 ; and the grammatical
rules and forms in pp. 101-105. W. W. T.]
NANTICOKE.
[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards' s Mohegan Grammar was derived by the
editor, Dr. Pickering, from Murray and Heckewelder. "W. W. T.]
NARKAGANSETT ONEIDA.
NARRAGANSETT.
[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar was derived by the
editor, Dr. Pickering, from that of E. A. Williams. W. W. T.]
NAVAJO
Vocabulary of upwards of sixty words in Nabajo and English, pp. 419, 420, of :
El Gringo ; or, New Mexico and her People. By W. W. H. DAVIS. New York,
Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.
NEW BRUNSWICK.
[The expression " all these," copied from Howse, refers to the words and phrases
of his New Brunswick Vocabulary, or Micmac, under which head this Vocabulary
should have been entered. W. W. T.]
NEW GRANADA.
Glossary of Words in use in New Granada, pp. 569573 of: New Granada :
Twenty Months in the Andes. By ISAAC F. HOLTON, M.A., Professor of Chemistry
and Natural History in Middlebury College. With Maps and Illustrations. New
York, 1856, royal 8vo, pp. 606.
The above Glossary does not, strictly speaking, fall within the range of our
inquiries ; but as the words occurring in it are of Indian origin, or else, being
Spanish, are used in a different sense from that given in dictionaries, or applied to
objects unknown in the temperate zone, we felt some hesitation to exclude it.
NUTKA.
Numerals 110 in the Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre. Vol. II,
p. 401, of: DUFLOT DE MOFBAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des
Californies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42. Paris,
1844, 2 vols., 8vo.
ONEIDA.
. [The Vocabulary in Schoolcraft's " Indian Tribes" is the same (omitting the
numerals) as in the " Notes on the Iroquois." As, however, they are ascribed to
different sources, I have applied to Mr. Schoolcraft, who thus explains the apparent
discrepancy : " The Oneida, taken by myself and by my nephew, R. U. Sherman,
H H
234 ON ON DAG A OTOMI.
was obtained from young Skenando, the grandson of the noted chief of that name,
and Johnson. Both are Oneidas, and the authority is equal. Mr. Sherman quoted
one person, I another. They were both present while I took my part of the
vocabulary, sometimes one giving an explanation, and sometimes the other"
W. W. T.]
ONONDAGA.
[The Vocabulary in the " Indian Tribes" is the same (omitting the numerals) as
in the " Notes on the Iroquois." These also are ascribed to different sources,
which Mr. Schoolcraft thus explains : "I spent several days at Onondaga Keserva-
tion (having a census to take, and Indian prejudices to overcome), conferring with
the two leading chiefs, Captain Frost and Abraham Le Fort. The latter gave me
the words of my form for a vocabulary, which form coincided very nearly with M.
Gallatin's, but did not finish it. When I published these vocabularies in the
' Notes on the Iroquois,' in 1847, I preferred to give, until I could complete mine,
M. GaUatin's list. When, in 1852, I went to Philadelphia to print Yol. II of my
' History,' etc., it is my impression I accidentally left the MS. of this vocabulary
behind. From the insertion of Le Fort's name where you find it, it appears that I
expected it to be forwarded to me in season for the press, and forgot to strike out
my authority when thus disappointed." W. W. T.]
OSAGE.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 67.-W. W. T.]
OTO.
[The reference to Pickering's Note 16 to Edwards' s Mohegan Grammar should
have been inserted, if at all, under the head of " Words and Vocabularies," as it
contains nothing about the Oto but eight words in M. Duponceau's Comparative
Table, p. 151. W. W. T.]
OTOMI.
Barcia-Pinelo also mentions the Otomi works of Kangel and Palacios ; so does
Clavigero, who, in addition, gives the title of the Vocabulary of P. Juan de Dios
Castro, and speaks of an Otomi Dictionary by N. Sanchez.
" Demonstration y Explicacion del Alfabeto del Idioma Othomi, con sus propios
caracteres," pp. 1-17 of : Breve Compendio de todo lo que debe saber, y entender
el Cristiano, para poder lograr, ver, conocer, y gozar a Dios Nuestro Sefior en el
Cielo eternamente. Dispuesto en Lengua Othomi, y construido literalmente en la
PAWNEE PI MA. *>o5
Lengua Castellana por el P. Fr. Antonio de Guadalupe Eamirez, Predicador
Apostolico, y ex-Guardian del Apost61ico Colegio de Propaganda Fide de N. S. P. S.
Francisco de Pachucha. Villa de Guadalupe, 1784, 4to, pp. xvi, 80.
A Grammatical Outline of the Otomi Language, by E. RODIGER, on pp. 358 261,
Vol. Til, third section, of: Ersch und Gruber's Encyclopaedic. Leipzig, 1836, 4to.
EMAN. NAXERA'S " Dissertatio de Lingua Othomitorum" is also separately printed.
Philadelphia, 1838, 4to, pp. 48.
N.B. For Notices of the same, see: Gottinger Gelehrte Anzeigen, 1836,
pp. 321-343 ; and : Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, Yol. V,
pp. 355361.
[The numerals are given by M. GALLATIN in the Transactions of the American
Ethnological Society, Yol. I, Table to p. 114.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
90, 91 ; on the names of the fingers, p. 301. W. W. T.]
PAWNEE.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zalilmethode. On the numerals,
p. 68. W. W. T.]
PENNSYLVANIA^.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 64. W. W. T.]
PENOBSCOT.
[The Vocabulary in Note 15 to Edwards's Mohegan Grammar is derived by the
editor, Dr. Pickering, from a MS. of the French Missionaries who had resided with
the tribe. W. W. T.]
PIMA.
Numerals 110 in the "Tableau comparatif des Nonas de Nombre," Vol. II,
p. 401, of: DUFLOT DE MOFEAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon des Cali-
fornies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les annees 1840-42, 2 vols.
Paris, 1844, 8vo.
[The Vocabulary in the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
Vol. II, is copied by M. Gallatin from Dr. Coulter's, in the Royal Geographical
Society's Journal.
J. C. E. BUSCHMANN, Die Pima-Sprache und die Sprache der Koloschen.
-(From Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin,
PINA QUICHE.
aus dem Jahre 1856, pp. 321 432.) Berlin, 1857, 4to. Contains the Pirna Texts
and Grammatical Observations from Pfefferkorn, in the Mithridates, corrected and
greatly extended, pp. 353365 ; and a Vocabulary, collected from printed sources,
with remarks on the same, pp. 367 375. W. W. T.]
PINA.
Vocabulario de la Lengua Pina, por P. SANTIAGO SEDELMAIE, Missionario de los
Pinas, en la Nueva Viscaya. 1764. MS., according to De Souza.
PIRO.
The pueblos that still speak the Piro language are Taos, Tezuque, Sandia, Isleta,
and Isleta of the South. (See W. W. H. Davis, El Gringo j or, New Mexico and
her People. New York, Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.)
POPOLUCA.
FE. FEANCISCO DE JOVAL, Arte, Vocabulario, Doctrina Christiana i Sennones en
Lengua Popoluca. Both Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero mention this work as printed.
PUEBLO INDIANS.
A Complete Vocabulary of Words in the Languages of the Pueblo or Civilized
Indians of New Mexico. In the language of Pueblo Indians of
1. Santo Domingo, San Felipe, Santa Ana, Silla, Laguna, Acoma, Cochiti.
2. San Juan, Santa Clara, San Ildefonso, Pojuaque, Nambe, Tezuque.
3. Taos, Picoris, Sandia, Isleta.
4. Jemez and Old Pecos.
5. Zuni.
6. Moqui.
Pp. 157159 of: El Gringo ; or, New Mexico and her People. By W. W. H.
DAVIS Neto York, Harpers, 1857, 8vo, pp. 432.
QUICHE.
[A brief Vocabulary, extracted from the Lord's Prayer as given by STEPHENS, and
the numerals (also from STEPHENS), are given by M. Gallatin, in : Transactions of
the American Ethnological Society, Vol. I, pp. 9, 10, 275, and Table to p. 114.
A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
92, 93. W. W. T.]
QUICHUA SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. 237
QUICHUA.
Barcia-Pinelo mentions "JuAN DE VEOA, Arte e Kudimentos de Gramatica
Quichua. Impreso en Lima;" and states that "Fit. MABTIN DE VICTOBIA, del
Orden de la Merced, fue el primero que redujo a arte la lengua del Inca."
RICCAREES.
Kiccaree Vocabulary, pp. 348 352 of : Die Indianer Nord America's und die
wahrend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebteu
Abentheuer und Scbicksale, von Of. Catlin. Nach der funften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Yerfasser nach
der Natur entworfenen Gremalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Srilssel, Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.
RUMSEN.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare void vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 63.
W. W. T.]
SAHAPTIN.
[Dr. SCOTTLER'S Vocabularies are printed also in the Edinburgh New Philosophical
Journal, Vol. XLI, pp. 190-192.
J. HOWSE, Vocabularies of certain North American Languages, in : Proceedings
of the Philological Society of London, Vol. IV. Okanagan Vocabulary, pp.
199 204. W. W. T.]
SAN GABRIEL, KIZH.
Californian Indians, mentioned already under " Diegefios," pp. 62, 63, to
which add
JOH. GAEL ED. BUSCHMANN, Die Sprachen Kizh und Netela von Neu CaHfornien.
Abhandlung gelesen in der BerKner Akademie der Wissenschaften, October 25,
1855, pp. 501 531 of the " Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-historischen Klasse"
of said Academy for 1855, and with separate title. Berlin, Diimmler, 1856, 4to.
SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, ACAGCHEMEM,
NETELA.
Californian Indians, for which see the article " Diegeiios," pp. 62, 63, adding
JOH. CAEL ED. BTTSCHMANN, Die Sprachen Kizh uud Netela von Neu CaHfornien.
Abhandlung gelesen in der Berliner Akademie der Wissenschaften, October 25,
1855, pp. 501531 of the " Abhandlungen der Philosophisch-historischen Klasse"
of said Academy, 1855, and with separate title. Berlin, Diimmler, 1856, 4to.
238
SAINT JOHN'S INDIANS.
Vocabulary of the Passamaquoddi, by FEEDEBICK KIDDEE, pp. 689, 690, Vol. V,
of: Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes of the United States,
SANTA BARBARA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare imd vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 63.
W. W. T.]
SAPIBOKONI.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zalilmethode. Numerals 1 10, from
Balbi, p. 74. W. W. T.]
SEMINOLES.
[A letter addressed to the Indian Bureau by Frederic Kidder, of Boston, states
that he is in possession of a MS. Vocabulary of the language. He says : " It
contains at least four or five hundred words, and was got up with much care, partly
by Lieut. Casey and other persons, one of them an old Indian trader." (School-
craft's History, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. V, p. 689.) W. W. T.]
SENECA.
[MOEGAN'S League of the Iroquois contains also words and grammatical remarks,
pp. 395 410. W. W. T.]
SHAWANEES.
Six Shawanese words on page 125 of " General Parsons' Discoveries made in the
Western Country," Article XI, pp. 119 127, of: Memoirs of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. II, Part 1. Boston, 1793, 4to.
[The two imperfect Shawanee lists of words in Note 15 to Edwards' s Mohegan
Grammar were collected by the editor, Dr. Pickering, from Edwards' s Grammar
and from Johnston W. W. T.]
SHOSHONEES.
[N. J. WYETH, Indian Tribes of the South Pass of the Eocky Mountains, etc.,
in : Schoolcraft's History, etc., of Indian Tribes, Vol. I, pp. 216, 218. W. W. T.]
SIOUX SQUALLYAMISH. 239
SIOUX.
Sioux Vocabulary, pp. 348352 of: Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die
walirend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der funften englischen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser, nach
der Natur entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissel, Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.
SITKA.
Numerals 1 10 (Sitka and King George's Island) in the " Tableau comparatif
des Noms de Nombre," Vol. II, p. 401, of: DUFLOT DE MOFBAS, Exploration du
Territoire de 1' Oregon des Californies et de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les
annees 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris, 1844, 8vo.
SJEVERNOVTSI.
[The Russian word " Severnovskia" is not the name of a people or language, but
a plural adjective agreeing with slova (words). " Severnovzer " has a German
termination. The proper title for this language would have been the native name,
Kvakhamaju. The SatemdaJcaiee, CUoweshak, Kulanapo, and YuTcai, are the same,
or dialects of the same language. W. W. T.]
SONORA
(LANGUAGES OF).
Dos Libros de los diferentes Idiomas que se usan en la Provincia de Sonora, by
FEANCISCO LOAIZA, Mexican Jesuit, and Missionary in Sonora, in 1736. The MS.
exists in the Mission of Yecora (De Souza).
Parallelen Sonorischer und Mexicanischer Worter. Paper by JOH. GAEL ED.
BUSCHMANN, read before the Berlin Academy, Nov. 22, 1855.
Die Lautveranderung aztekischer Worter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von Jon. CAEL ED. BUSCHMANN. Aus den
Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.
SQUALLYAMISH.
[These are the Skwale, or Nasqually, of Hale. See under " Flatheads," p. 73.
-W. W. T.]
240 STONE INDIANS TAHAHUMARA.
STONE INDIANS, ASSINEBOINS.
[The Vocabulary mentioned under this head should hare been placed along with
the others of the same dialect under the general head of " Dakota." It gives no
support to the exploded notion of Heckewelder and other early writers, that the
Assineboins belong to the Iroquois stock. W. W. T.]
TABALOSA.
P. Luis TEEFEL, Gramatica de la Lengua Tabalosa del Peru. Mentioned by
Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
TACULLIES.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 66.
W. W. T.]
TAMANAKI.
Ad YANGTJES (written by Barcia, languas). Barcia states that FE. MAETIN
Suiz BLANCO published, in 1663, an abbreviated and corrected edition of the
Principios, etc., of Yangues ; adding thereto a " Diccionario de las Lenguas de los
Indies Cumanagotes i Palenques ;" and that in 1683 he published another, " Arte i
Vocabulario, con Catecismo i Directorio para confesar los Indies."
Ad TATJSTE. Barcia-Pinelo states that Tauste is only the editor of the " Arte i
Vocabulario de la Lengua de los Caribes de Nueva Andalusia" of FE. JOSEPH DE
CAEABANTES.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 13, 14 ; on the pronouns, p. 108 note ; on names of the fingers, p. 302.
W. W. T.]
TARAHUMARA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
pp. 10 13. W. W. T.]
Die Lautveranderung aztekischer Worter in den sonorischen Sprachen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargestellt von JOH. CAEL ED. BTTSCHMANN. Aus den
Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.
TARASCA TIMBIRAS. 241
TARASCA.
Numerals (121, 30800, 8000), Tabla Aritmetica comparada de los Mejicanos
y Tarascos. P. 68 of: D. BENITO MAEIA DE Moxos, Cartas Mejicanas. 2 da edic.
Genoa, typ. L. Pellas, s.a. (1839), 8vo.
Note. The Grammars by Gilbert! and Lagunas are also mentioned in
Barcia's edition of Pinelo.
TCHINKITANE.
(RUSS. SITKA SOUND.)
Yocabulaire des Tchinkitaneens. Pp. 587 591 of: ETIENNE MARCHAND,
Voyage autour du Monde, pendant les anne'es 1790, 1791 et 1792. T. I. Paris, VI.
(1798), 4to. (From the Collections of Captain Chanal and Surgeon Roblet.)
TEHUELHET.
[H. HALE, Ethnography and Philology of the United States Exploring Expedi-
tion, p. 656. W. W. T.]
TEPEGUANA.
Die Lautveranderung aztekischer Worter in den sonorischen Spracnen und die
sonorische Endung A M E dargesteUt von JOH. CARL ED. BUSCHMANN. Aus den
Abhandlungen der Koniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, aus dem
Jahre 1856. Berlin, 1857, 4to, pp. 118.
TEXAS.
[The numerals of " certain Indian tribes between the Rio Norte and San Antonio
of Texas," are given by M. GALLATIN, in the Transactions of the American Ethno-
logical Society, Vol. I, p. 53, and Table to p. 114. Also by A. F. POTT, in Die
quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode, p. 69. W. W. T.]
JICARILLAS.
[" Ticorillas" is a misprint in Simpson's Eeport for Jicarillas, which has been
copied by Buschmann. W. W. T,]
TIMBIRAS.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
72, 73. W. W. T.]
I I
242 TIMUACA TSHUKTSHI.
TIMUACA, TIMUQUANA.
P. ANDRES VITO, (Ingles), Gramatica, Diccionario i Catecismo en Lengua de
Mariland en la Florida. 1642. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not
known to be printed.
The complete titles of Pareja's books are :
Confessionario en Lengua Castellana y Timuquana. Con algunos consejos para
animar al penitente. Y assi mismo van declarados algunos effectos y prerrogativas
deste sancto sacramento de la Confession. Todo muy vtil y provechoso, assi para
que los padres confessores sepan instruyr al penitente como para que ellos aprendan
a saberse confessar. Ordenado por el Padre Fr. Francisco Pareja, Padre de la
Custodia de Santa Elena de la Florida. Keligioso de la Orden de nuestro Seraphico
Padre San Francisco. Impresso con licencia en Mexico, en la Emprenta de la
Viuda de Diego Lopez Daualos. Afio de 1613, 12mo, 238 leaves.
Cathecismo y Examen para los que comulgan en Lengua Castellana y Timuquana.
Por el Fr. Francisco Pareja. Mexico, en la imprenta de Juan Ruyz, 1627, 8vo.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 66. W. W. T.]
TLASCALTECAS.
Hundertachtzig Wurzelworter aus der Sprache der Tlaskalteken im Dorfe Isalco
im Staate San Salvador (Nahual of the Balsam Coast), aufgezeichnet und zusam-
mengestellt nach Grallatin's Systeme zum Grebrauche fiir vergleichende Wort-
forschung. Pp. 505 507 of: Wanderungen durch die mittel-amerikanischen
Freistaaten Nicaragua, Honduras und San Salvador. Mit Hinblick auf deutsche
Emigration und deutschen Handel, von Dr. Carl Scherzer. Mit 2 Karten.
Braunschweig, Gr. Westermann, 1856, 8vo, pp. xx, 516.
TOTONACA.
ANDEEAS DE OLMOZ, Grammatica et Lexicon Linguae Mexican, Totonaquse et
Huasteca?. Mexico, 1560, 2 vols. 4to.
Both Barcia-Pinelo and Clavigero mention this book as printed.
D. EUGENIO EOMEEO, Canonigo de Huaxaga, Arte para aprender las Lenguas
Mexicana y Totonaca. Mentioned by Barcia-Pinelo.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals,
p. 89. W. W. T.]
TSHUKTSHI.
{The article under this heading may be corrected as follows : They occupy the
north-eastern corner of Asia and the opposite shores of Russian America. Those in
TUBAR UGALENTSI. 243
Asia consist of two different races, the sedentary or fishing^ and the nomad or
reindeer Tshuktshi. The name Tshuktshi belongs properly only to the latter, who
are allied by lineage and speech to the Koriaks. The former call themselves
Nammols, and belong, like those in America, to the Eskimo stock. It is, of course,
with these only that we have here to do.
Lieut. ZAGOSKIN, Short Comparative Dictionary of the Dialects of the Nammols
and Kadjaks with those of the Inhabitants of the Coasts of Bchring's Sea. (The
Nammol words from Dr. Eobeck.) Printed in Zapiski Russkago Geograph.
Obshtshestva, Yol. II, 2nd edition, pp. 250 266. Also in the German transla-
tion, Denkschriften der Euss. Geogr. Gesellsch., Vol. I, pp. 359374. And in
Erman's Archiv fur wissensch. Kunde von Russland, Vol. VII, pp. 488 511,
J. KLAPEOTH, Asia Polyglotta, pp. 323325 ; Atlas, fol. xUxlvi. (In Julg,
but omitted by Ludewig.)
A. F. POTT, Die quiiiare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, pp.
5860. W.W.T.]
TUBAR.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 139141. Lord's Prayer, with some gram-
matical annotations.
TUCUMAN.
P. PEDEO DE ANASCO, Vocabularies, Catecismos, Confesionarios i Gramaticas en
diversas Lenguas del Tucuman. Mentioned in Barcia's edition of Pinelo, but not
known to be printed.
TULARENA.
Gramatica del la Lengua Tulareiia, por el P. AEEOYO, de la Mission de S. Ines.
MS. mentioned by M. Duflot de Mofras, Note 1 to p. 388, Vol. II.
TUSCARORA.
Tuscarora Vocabulary, pp. 348 352 of : Die Indianer Nord Amerika's und die
wahrend eines achtjahrigen Aufenthalts unter den wildesten ihrer Stamme erlebten
Abentheuer und Schicksale, von G. Catlin. Nach der fiinften enghschen Ausgabe
deutsch herausgegeben von Dr. Heinrich Berghaus. Mit 24 vom Verfasser nach
cler Natur entworfenen Gemalden. Zweite Ausgabe. Briissel, Muquardt, 1851,
8vo, pp. 382.
UGALENTSI.
[This is the tribe called by some writers Ugaljakhmjuts or UgaljaJchmutsi.
They speak a dialect of the Kinai^ under which general head the other vocabularies
of their language are referred to.
244 UTLATECA VIRGINIAN.
Here, as in some other instances, reference to the Comparative Vocabulary (of
97 words) in the Table to p. 259 of Baer und Helmersen's Beitrage, Vol. I, is
erroneously omitted. W. W..T.J
UTLATECA.
Hervas (and after him Vater) classes this language with Quiche* and Kachiquel,
as spoken 011 the Pacific side of Guatemala, north of Nicaragua. Squier supposes
it to be identical with the Quiche".
Arte de la Lengua TJtlateca, muy bien ordinada, por el Fray MAEIA MAKTINEZ,
Doruinicano. Mentioned by Barcia-Pinelo, but not known to be printed.
Doctrina Christiana en Lengua tltlateca por FKANC. MABEOQFIN. Mexico,
apud Joannem Paulum, 1556, 4to.
UMPQUA.
Numerals 1 to 10, in " Tableau comparatif des Noms de Nombre," Vol. II, p.
401, of : DUFI OT DE MOFBAS, Exploration du Territoire de 1' Oregon, des Californies et
de la Mer vermeille, executee pendant les anne"es 1840-42, 2 vols. Paris, 1844, 8vo.
UNALASHKA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numeral^, pp.
61, 62. W. W. T.]
TJTAHS.
[EDWIN BKYANT, What I saw in California : being the Journal of a Tour, by
the Emigrant Koute and South Pass of the Rocky Mountains, across the Continent
of North America, the Great Desert Basin, and through California, in the years
1846, 1847. New YorTc, D. Appleton and Co., 1848, 12mo. Contains a Vocabulary
of 29 words on p. 165. W. W.- T.]
VIRGINIAN.
A Dictionarie of the Indian Language, for the better enabling of such who shal
be thither ymployed. Pp. 183196 (two columns) of: The Historie of Travaille
into Virginia Brittania ; expressing the Cosmographie and Comodities of the
Country, together with the Manners and Customes of the People, gathered and
observed as well by those who went first thither as collected by William Strachey,
Gent., the first Secretary of the Colony. N^w first edited from the original
Manuscript in the British Museum, by E. II. Major, Esq. London, printed by
the Hakluyt Society, 1849, 8vo, pp. viii, xxxvi, two not numbered, altogether
204 pp.
HUECOS YARURA. 245
HUECOS.
[The name " Wacoes" has no right to an existence, it being but an English
transcription of the Spanish appellation Huecos (erroneously printed Nuecos on
page 198) applied to these Indians. According to Lieut. Whipple, they call them-
selves Tallewitsiis. W. W. T.]
WAICUEI.
[Father Begert's very curious account of the language is contained on pp.
177 194 of the " Nachrichten." It comprises, besides the general remarks on the
characteristic features of the language, the Lord's Prayer and the Creed, both with
literal and free translations, and the conjugation of a verb. W. W. T.]
WEAS.
[A small Algonkin tribe, located, with the Piankeshaws, on the Osage Biver.
The Wea Primer, Weu Mus-nu-M-ne, to teach the Wea Language. Cherokee
Nation, Mission Press, 1837, 16mo, pp. 16. W. W. T.]
WITCHITAS.
[The first edition of Capt. Marcy's Eeport is, " Washington, Kobert Armstrong,
public printer, 1853, 8vo (32nd Congress, 2nd Sess., Senate Ex. Doc. No. 54)," in
wliich the vocabularies are on pp. 307 310. W. W. T.]
WOCCON.
[A. B. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethode. On the numerals, p. 68.
W. W. T.]
YAQUI, HIAQUI.
Mithridates, Vol. Ill, part 2, pp. 157, 158, " Lord's Prayer, with grammatical
notes."
YARTJEA.
[A. E. POTT, Die quiuare und vigesimale Zahlrncthode. On the numerals,
pp. 15, 16. W. W. T.]
246 ZACATECAS ZAPOTECA.
ZACATECAS.
Arte y Vocabulario del Idioma de los Zacatecas, por Fr. PEDRO ESFINAREDA.
Written about the year 1565, and mentioned by De Souza as having existed in the
archives of the Convent of the Villa del Nombre de Dios.
ZAMUCA.
[A. F. POTT, Die quinare und vigesimale Zahlmethodc. On the numerals, p. 74.
W. W. T.]
ZAPOTECA, ZACAPULA.
FEEIA'S Vocabulary is also mentioned by Barcia-Pinelo, and Pozo's Grammar
by Clavigero.
Barcia-Pinelo mentions moreover that Fr. SALVADOR DE S. CIPEIANO, Domini-
cano, wrote " De los Indios de la Provincia de Zacapula, en la Lengua de ella."
INDEX.
A
ABBITIBBE (Knistenaux), 94.
Abenaki, or Wapanachki, 1, 210.
Abipones, 2, 210.
Acadians, or Souriquois, 177.
Acagchemem (Diegeiios), 62.
Accaway, 2, 79.
Achaguas, 3.
Achastlians (Rumsen), 163.
Acherekotti (Tamanaque), 180.
Acherigotes (Caribs), 28.
Acoma, or Keres (Pueblo Indians), 92.
Adaize, 3.
Aglegmutes, Agolegmiites, 8.
Agoneaseah (Iroquois), 87.
Agua (Omagua), 137.
Ahnahaways, Ahwahaways (Crows), 58.
Ahnenin (Arrapahoe), 12.
Ah-wash-tes (Costanos), 53.
Aimbores, or Engerekmung, 67.
Airiko (Betoi), 18.
Alasapas (Texas Indians), 186.
Alasar (Minetares;, 119.
Aleutans, 4.
Algonquin, 5, 210.
Allakaweah (Crows), 58.
Allentiac, Guarpes, Milcocayac, 7, 210.
Almeida (Brazilian), 214.
Al-tah-mos (Costanos), 53.
Ameriscoggins (Abenaki), 1.
Amores, or Engerekmung, 67.
Andaquies, 7.
Antis, 8.
Ao-ges (Gej, 75.
Apaches, 8, 211.
Apaches de Nabojoa (Navajos), 18&
Apiacas, 8, 211.
Apinages, 8.
Apolista (Yuracare), 206.
Araucans, 9, 211.
Arda, 12.
Arecuma (Guyana), 79.
Aricaras, or Biccarees, 163.
Aripe (Waikur), 198.
Ark (Sitka), 176.
Arrapahoes, 12, 211.
Aroaquis (Oregones), 189.
Arrawaks, Arrowaks, 13, 211.
Assineboins, or Stone Indians, 177.
Assinibules, or Stone Indians, 177.
Assinipoils, or Stone Indians, 177.
Atalalas (Vilela), 196.
Athapasca, 14, 211.
Atna, 14, 211.
Atnah, Chin, or Kinn Indians, 15, 212.
Atnah (Flathead), 72.
Atorays (Guyana), 79.
Atsina (Arrapahoes), 12.
Attakapas, 15.
Attikameg* (Knistenaux), 94.
Ature, 16 ; (Saliva), 166.
Auca, or Araucans, 9.
Avanes (Maipures), 104.
Avarigotes (Caribs), 28, 180.
Aymara, 16, 212.
Aymores, or Engerekmung, 67.
Ayrate (Cherokee), 37.
Aztek, or Mexican, 111.
B
Bakra (Creole), 54.
Baniba, Baniwa, 17, 214.
Barre, 17.
Batem-da-kai-ee, 17, 212.
Baure (Moxa), 126.
Bayano, 18.
Beaver Indians, 18.
Bethuck, 18.
Betoi, 18.
Bigbellies (Minetares), 119.
BiUechoola (Haeeltzuk), 80 ; (Naass In-
dians), 130.
Blackfeet, 19, 212.
Blackshoes (Crows), 58.
Blancos (Costa Rica), 54.
Blood Indians, or Kahna (Blackfeet), 19.
Bodega, 20, 212.
Borrados_ (Texas Indians), 186.
Botocudo's, or Engerekmung, 67, 213.
Boutomoras (Botocudos), 67.
Brazilians, or Tupis, 20, 213.
Bugre, 25.
248
INDEX.
Cabaros, 25.
Caddoes, 25.
Cadodaquious, or Caddoes, 25.
Cahita, 26, 214.
Cahuillos, 26.
Caipotorade (Zamuca), 207.
Cairnos, 214
Californians, 26, 214.
Callilehet (Tehuelhet), 184.
Camacans, 27, 213, 215.
Camoyes (Yum a), 205.
Canada, 27, 215.
Canacata-ges (Ges), 75.
Caniba (Quicliua), 162.
Canishana, 28.
Carajas, 28.
Caribs, 28, 215.
Caribi-Tamanacan (Guyana), 79.
Caribisi (Guyana), 79.'
Cariri, or Sabuja, 164.
Carriers, or Tacullies, 178.
Casarnee (Haidah), 80.
Catawba, 32.
Cathlascons, 82.
Cavalleros (Guaykuru), 78.
Caveres (Maipures), 104.
Ca-wi-os, or Cahuillos, 26.
Cayapos, 32.
Cayowas (Guarani), 76.
Cayubabas, 33, 215.
Cayuga, 33.
Cayuse (Wailatpu), 199.
Celdales, or Tzendales, 193.
Ceris, 34.
Cerros (Mamas), 108.
Chacahuaxti (Totonaka), 190.
Chahtah, or Choctaw, 46.
Chamers (Osages), 139.
Chanos (Vuta), 198.
Chapacura, 34,.
Chapopines (Texas Indians), 186.
Charcas (Aymara), 16.
Charruas (Puelches), 155.
Chavantes, or Cherentes, 36.
Chayma, 34.
Checalish, Chehalish, or Selish, 72, 216.
Chechehet (Puelches), 155.
Chemehuevi, 35.
Chepewyan, 35, 215.
Cherentes, 36.
Cherohakah, or Nottoways, 135.
Cherokee, 37, 216.
Chetimachas, 38.
Cheyennes, or Shyennes, 175.
Chiapanecas, 30, 216.
Chibcha, or Muysca, 128.
Chicachas, or Chickasaw, 39.
Chichimecs (Mexicans), 111.
Chickailis, or Tsihailish (Flatheads), 73.
Chickasaw, 39.
Chikkasas, or Chicachas, 89.
Chilake, or Cherokee, 87.
Chilcart (Sitka), 176.
Chilicothe (Shawanoes), 172.
Chilidugu, or Araucans, 9.
Chilts, or Tsihailish (Flathead), 7JI.
Chimano, 39.
Chimmesyans,40; (Haeeltzuk),80; (Naass
Indians), 130.
Chin Indians, or Atnah, 1 5 ; or Nagailer, ] 78.
Chinanteka, Cinacantequa, 40.
Chinchaisuyu (Quichua), 159.
Chinuk, 40, 217.
Chippeways, 41, 217.
Chiquitos, 45.
Chiriguana (Guarani), 75, 162, 218.
Chirupa (Maipure), 104.
Chocha, 218.
Choco, Cholo, 47.
Choctaw, 46, 218.
Cholo, 47.
Cholona (Peru), 162.
Chondal, Woolwa, 48.
Chonos (Vuta), 198.
Chopunish, or Sahaptin, 170.
Chorotega, 48.
Chorti, 48.
Chow-e-shak, 48, 212.
Chuchu (Moxa), 126.
Chunos (Vuta), 198.
Chunupies (Vilela), 196.
Chuntaquiros, 49.
Chwachamaja, or Severnovskia, 170.
Cinakantequa, or Chinanteka, 40.
Cinaloa, 49.
Clamets, or Lutuami, 100.
Clatsop (Chinuk), 41.
Cobeu, 49.
Cocanas, Cocamas, Cocuannas, 49, 218.
Cochimi, 49, 218.
Chochitemi (Keres), 92.
Cochiti (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Cochnewagoes (Mohawk), 122.
Cocknawaga, or Cochnewagoes (Mohawk),
122.
Coco-maricopas, 50, 218.
Coconoons (California), 27.
Coconucos, 50.
Cocopas, 51 ; (Yuma), 205.
Coeurs d'Aleine, or Skitsuish (Flathead),
72.
Colastukweck, or St. John's Indians, 165.
Coluz (Californiansj, 26.
Comanches, 51, 218.
Coraeya (California, San Diego), 26, 62.
Conchas (Chickasaw), 39.
Concho, 52.
Conibos, 52.
Copeh, 52.
Cora, 52, 219.
Cora (Waikur), 198.
INDEX.
249
Corneilles, or Crows, OS.
Coroados, or Coropos, 03.
Coronado (Mainas), 103.
Coropos, or Coroados, 53.
Correguajes, 03.
Costa Eica, 04.
Costanos, 03.
Coutanies, or Kutanae, 98.
Covareca (Chiquitos), 46.
Cowelits, or Kawelitsk (Flathead), T3.
Craikmouses (Botocudos), 07.
Cran-ges (Ges), 70.
Crans, or Timbiras, 187.
Cree, or Knistenaux, 94.
Creek, or Muskoghee, 127.
Creole, 04, 219.
Crows, 08.
Cuchan, or Yuma, 205.
Cuciquia (Chiquitos), 46.
Culilan Cunny (Tehuelhet), 184.
Cumana, 68, 219.
Cumanagota (Tamanaque), 180.
Cumshawa, or Cumshewar (Queen Char-
lotte's Island), 107; (Haidah), 80.
Cunacuna, 09, 219.
Curaves (Chiquitos), 46.
Curetu, 59.
Curuininaca (Chiquitos), 46.
Cushna, 09.
Cuzco (Quichua), 158.
Dahkotah, or Sioux, 59, 219.
Darien, Dariel, 61, 220.
Dauri (Guyana), 79.
Delaware, or Lenni Lenape, 63, 220.
Deguino (California), 26, 62, 220.
Diegenos, 26, 62, 220.
Diggers (California), 26.
Diggers of Napa Valley (California), 26.
Dirians (Chorotega), 48.
Divihet (Puelches), 105.
Djoe tongo (Creole), 06.
Dogrib, G6.
Dtinne, or Athapascan, 14.
E
Ecolemaches, Eskelen, 68.
Echeloots (Chinuk), 41.
Eelikino (Sitka), 176.
Ehatsar (Minetares), 11!>.
Ehnek, 67.
Eijiguaijegi, or Guaykuru, 78.
Ekklemaches (Eskelen), 68.
Ele, 67.
Enagua (Omagua), 136.
Enakaga (Guaykuru), 78.
Enimaga, or Kochaboth (Guaykuru), 78.
Engerekmung, or Botocudos, 67.
Escopies, or Skoffies, 170.
Eskelen, 68, 220.
Eskimos, 69, 220.
Eslenes, or Eskelen, 68.
Etchemins, or St. John's Indians (Abe-
naki), 160, 22L
Eudeve (Opata, Pima), 139, 149.
Fall Indians, or Alasar (Minetares), 119.
Filijayas (Texas Indians), 186.
Flatbows, or Kutanae, 98.
Flatheads, 72, 221.
Flathead (Atnah), 15.
Florida Indians, or Timuaca, 187.
Follaties, or Tuhwalatis, 202.
Fox Islands, 74,221.
Foxes and Sacs, 1 65.
Friendly Village, Mackenzie's (Haeeltzuk),
80.
Fucu Strait, 74.
Fuegians, or Pescherai, 149.
G
Galibi (Caribs), 28.
Galzanes, or Koltschanes, 96.
Ge, Geiko, Ges, 74, 221.
Geiko, Ge, or Ges, 74, 221.
Gens de Pitie (Shoshones), 174.
Ges, 74, 221.
Gherins (Botocudos), 67.
Gogoyans, or Cayugas, 33.
Gorgotoquienses, 221.
Greenlanders (Eskimo), 69.
Grosventre (Minetares), 119.
Guachire (Caribs), 28.
Guaicur, or Waikur, 198.
Guaiqueries (Caribs), 28.
Guajiquero (Lenca), 100.
Guambias (Coconucos), 00.
Guanas, 75.
Guaques, 75.
Guarani, 75, 213, 222.
Guarapuava, 222.
Guarayi (Guarani), 75.
Guarpes, Allentiac, Milcocayac, 77.
Guasava, 77.
Guatos, 77 ; Quato, 213.
Guatusos, 222.
Guaykuru, 78, 222.
Guenoa, 79.
Guentuse (Guaykuru), 78, 222.
Guinau (Guyana), 79.
Guyana, 79, 222.
Guypunavi (Maipure), 104.
Haeeltzuk, 80.
Hah-wal-coes (Yuma), 200.
KK
250
INDEX.
Haidah, 80, 222.
Hailtsa, or Haeeltzuk, 80.
Haiti, 81.
Hennega (Sitka), 176.
H'hana (California), 26.
Hiaqui, or Yaqui, 203, 245.
Hietans, or Comanches, 51.
Hitchittees, 81.
Hochelaga, 82.
Hochungorah, or Winnebago, 200.
Hoodsunhoo (Sitka), 176.
Hoo-pah, 82.
Horoje, or Winnebago, 200.
Huachi, or Chapacura, 34.
Huasteca, 82, 222.
Hudson's Bay Indians, 83, 223.
Huecos (Wacoes), 198.
Huilliche-Vuta (Araucans), 9, 197.
Humurano Mainas, 103.
Hurons, 84, 223.
Huzzaws, or Osages, 139.
laakema, or Wallawalla (Sahaptin), 170.
Jaconaiga (Abipones), 2.
lahycos, or Ges, 74.
Fakons, 85.
Japurin, or Yarura, 204.
Idibae (Darien), 61.
lemez (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Jetans, or Comanches, 51.
Illinois, 86.
Indiens ventrus (Crows), 58.
Indiens du Saijg, or Kabna (Blackfeet), 19.
Inganos, 86.
Inies (Caddoes), 25.
Inkalit-Yugelnut (Kinai), 02.
Inkilik (Kinai), 92.
Inkiiliichluats, 86, 223. .
Intibucas (Lenca), 100.
loways, 86, 224.
Ipas (Vilela), 196.
Iquitos, 87.
Iroquois, 87, 224.
Isistine (Lule), 100.
Isleta (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Issati (Sioux), 59.
Isty-semole, or Seminoles, 169.
Itapucuru (Brazilian), 213.
Ite, Itenes, 88.
Itonama, 88.
luiadge (Guaykuru), 78.
Juporocas (Botocudos), 67, 213.
luris, 89.
K
Kaccbi, or Kachiquel, 89, 224.
Kndjak, 90, 224.
Kaheten (Brazil), 20.
Kahna (Blackfeet), 19.
Kake (Sitka), 176.
Kallapuiah, or Yamkallie, 302.
Kalchaqui (Quichua), 159.
Kalina, Kalinago (Caribs), 28.
Kalisteno, or Knistenaux, 94.
Kamakan (Menieng), 110.
Kanas (Aymara), 16.
Kanchis (Aymara), 16.
Kangulit, or Inkiiliichliiat, 86.
Kanzas, Kansas, 97.
Kanze, or Konza, 97.
Karaikas (Pescberai), 149.
Karalits, or Greenlanders (Eskimo), 69.
Karankas (Aymara) ,16.
Karina (Caribs), 28.
Karitis, 225.
Kasnas (Aymara), 16.
Katahba, Catawba, 32.
Kattanahaws (Minetare), 119.
Kaveres (Maipure), 104.
Kavasumsenk (Narraganset), 131.
Kawelttsk (Flathead), 73.
Kawitches, 91.
Kechi (California), 26 ; (Diegeiios), 63.
Kechua, or Quichua, 158.
Keechies, or Kichais, 92.
Keesarn (Queen Charlotte's Island), 15T.
Kemenetes (Pescherai), 149.
Kenai, or Kinai, 92.
Kenaize, or Kinai , 92.
Kennekas (Pescherai), 149.
Keres, 92, 154.
Kettlefalls, or Soaiatlpi, 73.
Keyes, Keyus, or Kichais, 92, 198.
Kichais, 92.
Kiche, or Quiche, 157.
Kigarnee (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157.
Kikatsa (Crows), 58.
Kikkapu, 92.
Killamuks, or Nsietshawus (Flathead), 73.
Killamuks (Lower), or lakons, 85.
Killisteno, or Knistenaux, 94.
Kinai, 92, 225.
King's Kiver Indians (California), 26, 62.
Kinn Indians, Chinn, or Atnahs, 15.
Kioways, 94.
Kiriri, or Sabuja, 164, 225.
Kiskapocoke (Shawanoes), 172.
Kitunaha, or Kutanae, 98.
Kiwomi, or Tihuex (Keres), 92, 187.
Kizh (Kish), or San-Gabriel (Diegenos),
62, 237.
Kliketats (Sahaptin), 170.
Knistenaux, 94, 225.
Kochaboth (Guaykuru), 78.
Kokama (Omagua), 137.
Kollaguas (Aymara), 16.
Koltshanes, 96.
Koluches, 96, 225.
Konages, or Kadjak, 00.
INDEX.
251
Konza, 97, 225.
Kooyou (Sitka), 176.
Kristenaux, or Knistenaux, 94.
Kula-napo, 97, 212.
Kulino, or Chimano, 39.
Kullespelm (Flathead), 73.
Kunaguara (Caribs), 28.
Kupeno (Moxa), 126.
Kuskokwims, or Kushkukchwakmutes, 98.
Kutahba, or Catawba, 32.
Kuskokwimjuts, 226.
Kutanae, Kutneha, Kutani, 98.
Kutchin, 99, 226.
Kwaiantl (Flathead), 73.
Kwalhioqua, or Tlatskanai (Tahkali), 179,
189.
Kwenaiwitl (Flathead), 73.
Kwigpak (Inkuluchliiat), 86.
Kyganies, or Kigarnies (Haidah), 80.
La Soledad (Diegenos), 63; see also Mut-
suns, 232.
Laguna (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Lamano (Quichua), 159.
Laraissa, or Lamano, 159.
Lapanas, or Lipans, 226.
Laymon, 99.
Lenni Lenape, or Delaware, 63.
fenca, 99.
Lipans, Lapanas, 226.
Loucheux, or Kutchin, 99.
Lupakas (Aymara), 16.
Lule, 100.
Lutuami, 100.
Macamecrom (Brazilian),*l3.
Machakalis (Brazilian), 213.
Mackenzies (lUinois), 86.
Maconis, 101, 213.
Macos (Saliva), 106.
Macoussies (Guyana"), 79.
Mag Headings, Indians at (California), 27.
Malia, 101,226.
Ma-ha-os (Youmas), 205.
Mahikan, or Mohegan, 123.
Maia, or Maya, 102.
Mamas, 103.
Maiongkong (Guyana), 79..
Maipures, 104, 226.
Makaw (Upper California), 26.
Makoby, 105.
Malalis, 105, 213.
Mame, Pokomam, 105, 227.
Manaos, 105.
Mandacaru (Brazilian), 213.
Mandans, 106, 228.
Manibas, or Baniwas, 17, 214.
Manoas, or Manaos, 105.
Manos de Perro (Texas Indians), 186.
Maopityan (Guyana), 79.
Mapoje (Saliva), 166.
Maqua, 106.
Marabe (Pueblo Indians;, 155.
Maradi9os (Shoshonees), 174.
Maramomisios, 228.
Maropa (Yuracare), 206.
Maschacaris, 107.
Massachussetts Indians, 107, 228.
Massit (Queen Charlotte's Island), 157.
Mataguaya, 109.
Mataras (Lule), 100.
Matlazinga, 109.
Mauvais Monde (Dogrib), 66.
Mawakwa (Guyana), 79.
Maya, Maia, 102, 226.
Mayorunas, 110.
Mbaya, or Guaykuru, 78.
Mechchaooh (Mohegans), .123.
Mekos (Mexicans), 111.
Menieng, 110.
Menomonies, 111.
Mequachake (Shawanoes), 172.
Mescalos (Texas Indians), 186.
Messisaugas, 111, 228.
Mexicans, 111, 228.
Miami, 116.
Micmac, Mikmak, 117, 230. j
Mije, 117.
Milcocayac, Allentiac, Guarpes, 118, 230.
Milicite, 119.
Minetares, 119.
Mins*, Ministi (Delaware), 63, 130, 230.
Miramichi (Micmac), 117.
Miskito, or Mosquito, 195.
Misteco, or Mixteka, 120.
Mitlantongo (Mixteka), 120.
Mixe, or Mige, 117, 230.
Mixteka, 120, 230.
Mobilians (Chickasaw^, 89.
Mobimi, 121.]
Mochica (Yunga), 206.
Mochono (Moxa), 126.
Mocoby, 121.
Mocorosi, 122, 231.
Mohavi, 122.
Mohawks, 122, 231.
Mohegans, 123, 231.
Molele, or Waiilatpu, 190.
Molopaque (Brazilian), 213.
Moluches, or Araucans, 9.
Mongoyoz, or Camacans, 27, 213.
Monoas, or Manaos, 105.
Monqui, or Waikur, 198.
Monsonik (Knistenaux), 94.
Montagnards, Mountaineers, 107.
Montauks, 173.
Morotoco (Zamuca), 207.
Mosotie (Moxa), 126.
252
INDEX.
Mosquito, 125.
Mountaineers, or Sheshatapoosh, 170.
Moxa, Mossa, 120.
Moyave, or Mohavi, 122.
Mozka, or Muyska, 12S.
Muchquanh (Mohegans), 123.
Muchojeones (Mossa), 120.
Mucury (Brazilian), 213.
Muhliekanew Indians (Algonquin Mohe-
gan), 6, 123.
Munseyi, or Minsi (Delaware), 63, 230.
Mundrucus, 127, 232.
Muras, 127.
Muskoghee, 127, 232.
Mutsuns, 232.
Muturicus, or. Mundrucus, 137, 232.
Muysca, 128, 232.
Myncquesar, Mynckussar, 129.
N
Naass, 130.
Nabadaches (Caddoes), 25.
Nadowessies, Sioux, Dahkotahs, 59.
Nagailer, or Tacullies, 1 78.
Nagrandans (Chorotega), 48, 130, 232.
Naguegtgaguehee (Abipones^), 2.
Nak-nanouks (Botocudos),^07.
Nahuatl, or Mexican, 111.
Namollo (Tshuktshi), 191.
Nandakoes (Caddoes), 25.
Nanticohe, Nanticoke, 130, 232.
Narragansett, 131, 233.
Nasqually, 73.
Natches, 132.
Natik, Nadik (or Massachusetts Indians),
107.
Nangatuck Indians (Pequot), 149.
Navajos, 132, 233.
Negro-Dutch (Creole), 56.
Negro-English (Creole), 54.
Negro-French (Creole), 57.
Negro-Portuguese (Creole), 66.
Negro-Spanish (Creole), 57.
Nehethawa (Knistenaux), 94.
Nenawehk (Knistenaux), 94.
Netela, or San Juan Capistrano (Diegefio)
63, 237.
Newfoundland, 133.
New Brunswick (Mikmak), 117, 133, 233.
New Granada, 233.
Nez-Perces, or Sahaptin, 170.
Nheengaibas (Brazilian), 213.
Nihaloitih (Qhinuk), 41.
Ningre (Creole), 54.
Nipissing (Algonquin), 134.
Nippegon, or Winnebagos, 200.
Niquirans, 134.
Noana (California), 26.
Norton Sound, 134.
Nottoways, 135.
S T ova Scotia (Mikmak), 117.
Souros (Brazilians), 20.
Sfsietshawus (Flathead), 73.
Nuecos (misprint for "Huecos"), or Wa-
coes, 198; see also page 245.
Nusdalum, 135.
Nutka, 135, 233.
Ocoles (Vilela), 196.
Oje (Tamanaques), 180.
Ojibois (ChippewayJ, 41.
Ojibways, or Chippeways, 41.
Okanagan (Salmptin), 170.
Ok an a gan (Atnah), 15.
Oktolaktcs, or Otoes, 140.
Olamentke, or Bodega, 20, 212.
Ol-hones (Costanos), 53.
Omagua, 136.
Omaha, or Maha, 101, 220.
Oneida, 137, 233.
Onondaga, 138, 234.
Ontoampas (Vilela), 196.
Opata, or Tequima, 139, 185.
Opatoro (Lenca), 100.
Oregones, 139.
Orejones (Texas Indians), 186.
Orelhudos (Oregones), 139.
Oristine (Lule), 100.
Orotinans (Chorotegans), 48.
Osages, 139, 234.
Osawses, or Osages, 139, 234.
Otchagras, or Winnebagos, 200.
Othouez, or Otoes, 140.
Otakapu, or Attakapas, 15.
Oto, Otoes, 140, 234 ; (loways), 87.
Otomi, 141, 234.
Ottare fCherokees), 37.
Ottawas, 143. ^
Ottogami, Onthagamies, or Sacs, 165.
Ottomacque, or Ottomaku, 143.
Ottomaku, 143.
Otuquis, 144.
Ous, or Osages, 139.
Oyampis, 144.
Pacahuches (Texas Indians), 186.
Pacaos, Pacoas (Texas Indians,), 186.
Pacasas (Aymara), 16.
Pacaguara, 144.
Paduca, or Comanche, 01.
Paegans, or Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.
Pahoja (Otoes), 140.
Pah- utah, or Chemehnevis, 85.
Pajalates (Texas Indians), 186.
Paiconeca, 145.
Paiure (Tamanaque), 180.
Pakasas (Aymara), 16.
Palaihni, Palaiks, 145.
INDEX.
253
Palencas (Tamanaque), 180.
Pamanes (Texas Indians), 186.
Pamaques (Texas Indians), 180.
Pampas (Puelches), 155.
Pampa del Sacramento (Peru),
Pampopas (Texas Indians), 186.
Pampticough, 145.
Pani, or Pawnee, 147.
Panos, 146.
Papoloka, Popoluka, 152.
Para (Brazilian), 213.
Parechi (Tamanaques), 180.
Pareni Parenes (Maipure), 104, 140.
Pariagotos (Tamanaqaie), 180.
Parias, (Tamanaque), 180.
Pasaines (Vilela), 196.
Passa (Peru), 162.
Passamaquoddi (St. John's Indians), 105.
Patachos, 146, 213.
Patagonians, or Tehuelhet, 184.
Paunaca (Paiconeca), 145.
Paunch Indians (Crows), 58.
Pawnees, 147, 235.
Payaguas (Guaykuru), 78.
Paycob-ges (Ges), 75.
Pebas, 147.
Pecos, or Yemes (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Pehuenche (Araucans), 9.
Pelus, or Wallawallas (Sahaptin), 170.
Pend d'Oreilles, or Kullespelm (Flathead),
73.
Penobscot, 147, 235.
Pennsylvaniaris, 148, 235.
Pequod (Narraganset), 131.
Pequot, 149.
Pescherai, 149.
Petiguaren (Brazil), 20.
Pianoghotto (Guyana), 79.
Piaroas (Saliva), 166.
Piankashaws, 149.
Picaneux, or Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.
Picori (Pueblos Indians), 154.
Pieds noirs, or Blackfeet, 19.
Piekans (Blackfeet), 19.
Pihniques (Texas Indians), 186.
Pikunche, or Puelche (Araucans), 9.
Pima, Pimo, 149, 235.
Pina, 236.
Pinalenos (Apaches), 150.
Pinols, or Pinalenos, 150.
Piquas (Shawanoes), 173.
Pirinda, 151.
Piro, 151,236.
Piros (Chuntaquiros), 49.
Piscous, or Piskwans (Flnthead), 73.
Pojuaque (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Pojuate (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Poko-mam (Mame), 105.
Pokonchi, Poko-man, 151.
Polindaras (Coconucos), 50.
Ponchas, Poncars (Maha), 101.
Ponderays, or Kullespelm (Flathead), 72.
Ponkata-ges (Ges), 75.
Popoluca, Papoloka, 152, 236.
Pottawatome, 153.
Pouteotamis, or Pottawatome, 158.
Powhattans, 153.
Poyes, Poyus (Vuta-Huilliche), 198.
Prince William's Sound, 154.
Puans, or Winnebagos, 200.
Puctunc (Maia), 102.
Pueblo Indians, Keres, 154, 236.
Puelche, or Pikunche (Araucans), 9.
Puelches, 155..
Puemaja (Yum a), 205.
Puncaws, or Ponchas (Maha), 101.
Puquini, 156.
Pujunis (Sacramento Indians), 165.
Purugotos (Caribs), 28.
Purys, Puris, 106, 213.
Quadus, 156.
Quappas, 156.
Quaquare (Ele), 67.
Quaquas (Saliva,), J 06.
Quato (Brazilian), 213; Guato, 77.
Queen Charlotte's Island, 157.
Quemaja, or Camoyes (Yusma, Cuchan),
205.
Quengues, or Cayuga, 33.
Queres, or Keres, 92, 154.
Quiche, 157, 236. .
Quichua, 158, 236.
Quime, or Cochitemi (Keres), 02.
Quintikuk (Narraganset), 181.
Quito (Quichua), 158.
Quoddi, or Passamaquoddi (St. John's In-
dians), 166.
Radigeurs (Shoshonees), 174.
Ricaras, Riccarees, 163.
Riccarees, or Ricaras, 163, 237.
Roamaino (Mainas), 103.
Ro-mo-nans (Costanos), 63.
Root-diggers (Shoshones), 174.
Rucahee (Abipones), 2.
Rumsen, "Runsienes, 163, 237; (see also
under " Mutsuns," 232).
s
San Aldefonso (Pueblo Indians), K>5.
Santa Anna (Pueblo Indians), 155.
San Antonio (Diegenos), 62.
Santa Barbafa, 167, 23S.
Santa Clara (Pueblo Indians), 155.
San Diego (Diegenos), 62.
San Domingo (Pueblo Indians), 155.
254
INDEX,
San Felipe (Pueblo Indians), If; 5.
San Gabriel (Diegenos), 02, 237.
Saint John's Indians, 105, 288.
San Juan (Pueblo Indians) 155.
San Juan Capistrano (Diegenos), 02, 237.
San Luis Obispo, California (Diegenos),
62.
"San Miguel (Diegenos), 62.
San Raphael ( Diegenos) , 62, 212.
Sabuja, or Kiriri, 164.
Sao Pedro (Brazilian), 214.
Sacramento Indians, 164.
Upper Sacramento Indians (California and
Sacramento), 27, 164.
Sacs, Saki, Sakewi, 165.
Sahaptin, or Shahaptan, 170, 237.
Saki, 165.
Saliva, 166.
Samipaos (Texas Indians), 186.
Samuca, or Zamuca, 207.
Sankikani, 166.
Sapibokoni, 168, 238.
Sarabeca, 168.
Saramacca (Creole), 56.
Saste, or Shasties, 168.
Satrahe, or Riccarees, 163.
Satsikaa (Blackfeet), 19.
Sauks, Sawkis, or Saki, 165.
Sauteux (Chippeway), 41.
Savaneric, 168.
Sehuak Cunny (Tehuelhet, 184.
Sekumne (Sacramento Indians), 105.
Selish, or Flatheads, 72.
Seminoles, 169, 238.
Seneca, 169, 238.
Seris, or Ceris (Pima), 34, 150.
Serpens, or Shoshones, 174.
Serranos (Tehuelhet), 184.
Setaba, or Passa (Quichua), 162.
Severnovskia, 170, 212, 239.
Shahaptan, 170.
Shai-a, or Cheyennes, 175.
Shasties, 168.
Shawhays, or Cheyennes, 175.
Shawanoe, 172, 238.
Shebayi, 173.
Sheshatapoosh, 176.
Shushwapumsh (Tsihaili-Selish), Flat-
heads, 73.
Shinicooks, 173.
Shoshonees, 174, 238.
Shushwap (Flathead), 73.
Shyennes, or Cheyennes, 175.
Sicaunes (Tacullies), 178.
Sjevernovtsi, Severnovskia, 239.
Silla (Pueblo Indians ), 155.
Similaton (Lenca), 100.
Sinaloa, or (,'inaloa, 49.
Sioux, or Dahkotah, 59, 239.
Sirionos (Guarani), 75.
Sitka, Sitcha, 175, 239.
Situga (Betoi), 18.
Sketapushoish, or Skoffies, 176.
Skitsuish (Flathead), 73.
Skittageets (Queen Charlotte's Island),
157.
Skoffies, 176.
Skwale (Flathead), 73.
Slave Indians (Dogrib), 66.
Smallrobes (Blackfeet), 19.
Snake Indians, or Shoshnees, 174.
Soaiatlpi (Flathead), 73.
Soerigong (Guyana), 79.
Sonora, 239.
Souliers noirs (Crowa), 58.
Souriquois, 177.
Spokein (Flathead), 72.
Squallyamish, 177, 239.
Stickeen (Sitka), 176.
Stone Indians, 177, 240.
Sussee, Sursee, 178.
Tabalosa, 240.
Tabayara (Brazilian), 213.
Tacames (Texas Indians), 186.
Tacana (Yuracare), 206.
Tachies, or Inies (Caddoes), 25.
Tacullies, or Tahkali, 178, 240.
Tacunas, or Ticunas, 187.
Tahkali, or Tacullies, 179.
Tah-le-wah, 179.
Talamanca (Costa Rica), 54.
Talatui, 180.
Taluhet (Puelches), 155.
Tamanaque, Tamanaki, 180, 240.
Tamoiae, Tamoyos (Brazil), 21, 213.
Taos (Pueblo Indians), 155.
Taparita (Ottomaku), 143.
Tapiguae (Brazil), 21.
Tapiis (Chiquitbs), 46.
Tappen (Brazil), 20.
Tarahumara, 181, 240.
Tarasca, 182, 241.
Tariana, 183.
Tarurua (Guyana), 79.
Tatimolo (Totonaka), 190.
Tatiquilhati (Totonaka), 190.
Taurai (Guyana), 79.
Tchekto (Tschuktchi),191.
Tchinkitane, 241.
Tchnagmjutes, or Kuskokwims, 9S.
Tcho-ko-yem, 184, 212.
Tchuktchi (Aglegmutes), 3, 191.
Tecunas, or Ticunas, 187.
Teguas, or Tiluex (Keres), 187.
Tehama (California), 26.
Tehuetches f Puelches), 155.
Tehuelhet, 184, 241.
Tehuel Cunny (Tehuelhet), 18-1.
Tepeguana, 185, 241.
INDEX.
255
Tepozkolula (Mixteka), 120.
Tequima, or Opata, 139, 185.
Terre neuve Island (Mikmak), 117.
Tesuque (Pueblo Indians), 155.
Tetons, 186.
Texas Indians, 186, 241.
Thing-e-ha-dtinne, or Dogrib, 66.
Tiberacotti (Guyana), 79.
Ticorillas, erroneously for " Jicarillas,"
186, 241.
Ticonas, or Ticunas, 187.
Tihuex, 92, 187.
Tikomeri (Moxa), 126.
Tikuna, or Chimano, 39.
Timbiras, 187,213,241.
Timuaca, 187, 242.
Timuicana, or Timuaca, 187, 242.
Tinne, or Athapasca, 14.
Tinqua, 188.
Tiverighotto (Guyana), 79.
Tlahiako (Mixteka), 120.
Tlakatat, or Kliketat (Sahaptin), 170.
Tlamatl, or Lutuami, 100.
Tlaoquatch, Tloquatch, 188.
Tlapaneka, 189.
Tlascaltecas, 189, 242.
Tlatsap (Chinuk\ 41.
Tlatskanai (Tahkali), 179, 189.
Tnaina, or Kinai, 93.
Toba, or Mocoby, 121.
Tokantin (Omagua), 137.
Tokistine (Lule), 100.
Tolteks (Mexican), 111.
Tonocote (Lule), 100.
Toon-paooh (Mohegans), 123.
Totonaca, 190, 242.
Tsakaitsitlin (Spokein, Flathead), 73.
Tsamak (Sacramento Indians), 165.
Tschinkitans (Kolusches), 96.
Tshinuk (Chinuk), 41.
Tshnagmjutes, or Kuskokwims, 98.
Tshugatsni, 191. "
Tshuktshi, 191, 242.
Tsihaili-Selish (Flathead), 73.
Ttynai, or Kinai, 92.
Tuapoka (Caribs), 28.
Tubar, 192, 243.
Tucano, 192.
Tucuman, 243.
Tucunas, or Ticunua, 187.
Tuhwalati (Yamkallie), 202.
Tulare Lake Indians (Californians, 26.
Tularena, 243.
Tu-lo-mos (Costanos), 53.
Tumgarsee (Sitka), 176.
Tummimioi (Brazil), 21.
Tunghase, 192.
Tuolumne (Californians), 27, 213.
Tupis, or Brazilians, 20.
Tupinaba, Tubinamba (Brazil), 20, 213.
Tupininquins (Brazil), 21, 213.
Tuscarora, 192, 243.
Tzendales, 193.
Uainambeu, 194.
Uara-Mukuru (Tamanaque), 180.
Uaraca-Paccili (Tamanaque), 180.
Uchee, 194.
Ugalentsi, Ugalenzi, 194, 243.
Ugaljachmutzi (Kinai), 93 ; see also un-
der "Ugalentsi," 243.
Ukahipu, or Kikkapu, 92.
Umpqua, or Tahkali, 179, 195, 244.
Unalashka, 195, 244.
Unalachtgo (Delaware), 63.
Unami (Delaware), 63.
Unchagog (Shinicooks), 173.
Upsaroka (Crows), 58.
Urabae (Darien), 61.
Uruquenas (Brazilian), 214.
Utah, 196, 244.
Utagami, or Sacs and Foxes, 165.
Utlateca, 244.
Valientes (Costa Rica), 54.
Venados (Texas Indians), 186.
Vilela, 196.
Virginians, 197, 244.
Vuta-Huilliche, 197.
Waccoa, or Wokkons, 201.
Wacaway, or Accaway, 2.
Wacoes, 198 (ought to be "Huecos," see
244).
Wahtani, or Mandans, 106.
Wahtohtana, or Otoes, 140.
Wahtoktak, or Otoes, 140.
Waicuri, Waikur, 198, 245.
Waiilatpu, 199.
Waiyamara (Guyana), 79.
Wakaikams (Chinuk), 41.
Wakash, or Nutka, 135.
Wallawalla (Sahaptins), 170.
Wanami (Delaware), 63.
Wapanachki, or Abenaki, 1.
Wapisiana (Guyana), 79.
Wapisian-Parauana (Guyana), 79.
Warau (Guyana), 79.
Warrows, 199.
Washas, or Osages, 139.
Watlala (Chinuk), 41.
Wawah, 6r Osages, 139.
Weas, 245.
Wee-yot, 200.
Weits-pek, 200.
Willamet (YamkaUie), 202.
256
INDEX.
Willetpoos (Waiilatpu), 199.
Winnebagos, 200.
Wish-osk, 201.
Witchitas, 201, 245.
Woccons, Wokkons, 201, 245.
Woolwa, Chondal. 48.
Woyawai (Guyana), 79.
Wyandots, or Hurons, 84, 223.
Xumanas (Brazilian), 213.
Yacana-Cunny (Tehuelhet), 184.
Yaguas, 203.
Yakanaku, or Pescherai, 149.
Yakema, or loakema (Sahaptin), 171.
Yameos, 203.
Yamkallie, 202.
Yam-pai-o (Yuma), 205.
Yankitlan (Mixteka), 120.
Yanktons, Yanktonans, 203.
Yaoi(Caribs),28.
Yaqui, 49, 203, 245.
Yarura, 204, 245.
Yeconoampas (Vilela), 90.
Yete (Omagua), 137.
Ypapana (Totonaka), 190.
Yucuatl, orNutka, 135.
Yugelnut (Kinai), instead of Ingelmut,
Yukai, 205, 212.
Yule, 205.
Yumas, 205.
Yunga, 206.
Yunka-Mochika (Yunga), 206.
Yuracares, 206.
Yuris, or luris, 89.
Yurimagua (Omagua), 136.
Zacapula, Zapotcca, 246.
Zacatecas, 246.
Zamuca, 207, 246.
Zapari, 207.
Zapoteca, 207, 246.
Zeona, 208.
Zoe (Cinaloa), 49.
Zoque, 209.
Zufii (Pueblo Indians), 154.
Zutugil (Kachiquel), 89.
THE END.
London: Printed by Thomas Harrild, 11, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street.
EEEATA.
PAGE LINE
add to ACCAWAT, "Wacawoyo."
5 40 for Daves read Davies.
6 10 for Langue read Tongue.
7 14 for Guarpos read Guarpes.
8 8 for puellos read pueblos.
8 10 for Atnapascan read Athapascan .
8 11 for Tinalenos read Pinalenos.
10 32 after 6 vols. insert Folio.
11 3 after pp. 330 insert This edition
is without the " Vocabulario
aque se anada la Doctrina
Christiana."
11 19 after 6 vols. insert Folio.
12 22- Arda, after Doctrina Christiana,
etc., insert This language being
entirely unknown, the Lord's
Prayer is given from the above
book.
12 5 from the bottom, for Vol. II
read Vol. III.
14 18 for Ticorillas read Jicarillas.
16 33 disconnect the words " New
edition, enlarged (by D. de
Gualdo?)" from the title to
which they are attached, and
connect them with the subse-
quent title, line 34, to which
they belong.
17 23 for Isanno read Isauna.
28 24 for Purugotos read Purugotes.
32 10 for Kutahba read Katahba.
33 14 for Queugues read Quengues.
35 head-line and lines 4 and 8, for
Chemehnevi read Cheme-
huevi.
36 26 for TicoriUa read Jicarilla.
37 28 for 914 read 415.
45 17 for L'Ance read 1'Anse.
50 29 for Nuevo read Nueva.
52 14 for Putor read Putos.
52 19 for Najarit read Nayarit.
54 10 for Koniglichen read Kaiser-
lichen.
55 23 for Page 117 read Page 88 of
Vol. I.
55 24 for 1 vol. read 2 vols.
57 32 for Dominque read Domingue.
58 2 for en la langue read en langue.
58 3 after Fran9aises insert Par M.
Goux,
59 9 from the botton^ybrNadowessier
read Nadowessies.
61 3 transpose after line 4.
61 last line,/orTJrabao readllrabae.
62 26 & 35, for Boscara read Boscana.
64 32 add " The German original was
published at Barby, 1789, in
8vo."
67 14 for Ququaro read Quaquaro.
67 article Ele, insert after GHlii,
"Balbi Atlas Ethnographique.
Tab. XLI, No. 647."
67 18 for Amores read Aymores.
67 13 from the bottom, for plain read
simple.
68 Last line, for Sutel read Sutil.
69 2 for pays de read paso del.
69 3 for nordeste read noroeste.
69 16 for Karalis read Karality
70 29 for a voyage read a second voy-
age.
70 30 for 1821 read 1824.
70 30 after 4to add pp. 559569.
70 42 for Schubert read Schubart.
70 43 for Index read Register.
71 18 for Helmesen read Helmersen.
74 9 for Aleutan read Aleutian.
75 30 for Guararo read Guarano.
75 31 for Chiviguana read Chiriguana.
76 34 for Fullah read Foulah.
79 16/orTamanaken read Tamanacan.
80 34 for Camshava read Cumshawa.
81 24 for Chatahsochee read Chata-
hoochee.
-86 20 for Inkuluchluate read Inku-
luchliiat, and omit Kangjulit.
86 22 for Eskimo read Kenai.
86 27 & 28, dele from Kwigpak to 512,
and read Vocabulary of theln-
kiliks proper and of the Inka-
lits-Yugelnut, pp. 481 487.
87 5 for Iowa read loway.
87 6 for Otae read Otoe.
87 7 for Iowa Mission read loway
and Sac Mission Press.
89 after luris insert Jicarillas. (See
under " Ticorillas " in the
Addenda.)
90 14 for du read de.
90 29 for Eobeck read Eobek,
258
ERRATA.
91 11 for d'lle read de 1'ile.
91 31 for Kawitschen read Kawitches.
92 3 for Tiguex read Tihuex.
93 2 for distinguishes four read fur-
nishes vocabularies of two.
93 3 dele among which are, and for
Ink ah' t, and Ingelmut read
Inkalit-Yugelnut.
93 27 for Inkilik, Inkalit, and Ingel-
mut read Inkilit and Inkalit-
Yugelnut.
94 24 for Moon read Moons.
95 40 for Caultere read Carlton.
96 11 for and read or.
98 4 & 18 for Tchwagmjutes read
Tshnagmjutes.
98 7 for Kuskokwina read Kuskok-
wim.
100 15 for Isiftine read Isistine.
100 24 for IV read III.
103 5 from the bottom, for Kingdom
read Kingdon.
104 4 for Maranou read Maranon.
104 17 for Avanoe, Kavere, read Avane,
Cavere.
104 18/brGuypunavoereacZ Guipunave.
106 26 for Upsasoke read Upsaroka.
113 35 for 1855 read 1555.
114 11 for propiedad read propriedad.
114 12 for Biblioteca read Bibliotheca.
114 16 for Catredratico read Cathe-
dratico.
114 17 for Sacalo read Sacado.
117 9 from the bottom,^/* Terre neuve
Island read Newfoundland.
118 29 dele Mikokayak (an error of
Jiilg's, corrected in his errata) .
122 6 for the read a.
125 8 dele Columbus, May, 1787, pp.
672.
136 2 from the bottom, for Murray
Vans read Vans Murray.
136 7 for anno read ano.
136 9 for nordeste read noroeste.
138 16 for Forst read Fort.
140 5 from the bottom, for "Winnepago
andOtoe Dialects read Wiiine-
bago Dialect.
140 6 for Eovet read Eoret.
141 2 after Indians insert to.
143 13 for Ottowwaws read Ottawwaws.
148 29 for 198 read 19, 7.
149 11 for Kamenetes read Kemenetes.
150 14 for 161, 162 read 461, 462.
PAGE LIME
152 12 for T. read J.
152 15 for Hues read Hues.
153 12 & 26, for Pottawatame read Pot-
tawatome.
158 3 after Antigua dele the comma.
158 38 for Manle read Maule.
159 3 for Tucaman read Tucuman.
160 27 & 28, for exploracioni read ex-
plorazioni.
163 15 for Nueco read Hueco.
163 20 for Achastliers read Achastlians.
163 26 for anno read aiio.
164 6 for Achastliers read Achastlians.
170 21 for you read yon.
170 26 & 29, for Chwachamaja read
Chwachamaju.
171 21 for Clicatat read Klikatat.
175 2 from the bottom, for Archipel
read Archipelago.
176 6 for Eclikino read Eelikino.
176 7 for Kooyen read Kooyou.
176 25 for Massachmett read Massa-
chusetts.
178 11 for Saskatchewaine read Sas-
katchewan.
180 13 after Acherekotti insert Avari-
kotti.
180 30 after Paria insert a semicolon.
182 24 for Gjrolamo read Jeronimo.
185 24 for Girolamo read Jeronimo.
186 16 &29,/or Ticorillas read Jicarillas.
187 8 for Tiluex read Tihuex.
190 9 for Caja read Baja,
191 2 for Kadjah Islands read Kadjak
Island.
191 11 for Tschuktchi read Tchuktchi.
191 12 for western read eastern.
191 15 for Wild read Nomade.
191 16 for Tchouktschee read Tchoukt-
chee.
191 24 for 407, 408 read 467, 468.
192 7 for 3 read 2.
193 29 for Document read Documents.
195 19 for Ticorilla read Jicarilla.
197 34 for Vuta, Huilliche read Vuta-
HuiUiche.
198 9 & 15, for ISTueco read Hueco.
199 7 for T. read S.
201 5 for Boiloin read Boilvin ; and
insert commas after Boilvin
and after Cass.
202 18 for Kallapuiah read Kalapuiah.
202 28 for 9 read q.
204 9 for 3 read 2.
London : Printed by Thomas Harrild, 11, Salisbury Square, Fleet Street.
d
H
to
*-* 33
I Cv
CT^ O
O H
tO H
H Q
rH CO
s o;
UD cu tbO
jH ^ OJ
< 5
"S
J H
s
University of Toronto
Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
LOWE-MARTIN CO. LIMITED
( S^
33
KSTUYSJl
